H Series Data Sheet 70 Watt AC-DC Converters · PDF fileH Series Data Sheet 70 Watt AC-DC Converters BCD20019 Rev AB Page 1 of 21 Description The H Series of AC-DC converters represents

®

H Series Data Sheet70 Watt AC-DC Converters

BCD20019 Rev AB Page 1 of 21 www.power-one.com

DescriptionThe H Series of AC-DC converters represents a flexible rangeof power supplies for use in advanced industrial electronicsystems. Features include high efficiency, reliability, and lowoutput voltage noise.

The converter inputs are protected against surges andtransients occuring at the source lines. An input over- andundervoltage lockout circuit disables the outputs, if the inputvoltage is outside the specified range. An inrush currentlimitation prevents circuit breakers and fuses from tripping atswitch-on.

All outputs are open- and short-circuit proof, and are protectedagainst overvoltages by means of built-in suppressor diodes.The outputs can be inhibited by a logic signal applied to theconnector (pin 2). If the inhibit function is not used, pin 2 shouldbe connected to pin 23 to enable the outputs.

LED indicators display the status of the converter and allowvisual monitoring of the system at any time.

Full input to output, input to case, output to case, and output to

output isolation is provided. The converters are designed andbuilt according to the international safety standardsIEC/EN 60950-1 and UL/CSA 60950-1, and they are approvedby the safety agencies TÜV and UL.

The case design allows operation at nominal load up to 50 °Cin a free-air ambient temperature. If forced cooling is provided,the ambient temperature may exceed 50 °C but the casetemperature should remain below 80 °C under all conditions.

A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal, whichdisables the outputs, when the case temperature TC exceedsthe limit. The outputs automatically recover, when thetemperature drops below the limit.

Two options are available to adapt the converters to individualapplications (D, V).

The converters may either be plugged into 19" rack systemaccording to IEC 60927-3 or be mounted onto a chassis or aplate.

Features• Universal operating input voltage range 85 to 255 VAC• RoHS lead-solder exemption compliant• Class I equipment• 1, 2, or 3 isolated outputs up to 64 V• Input over- and undervoltage lockout• Outputs: SELV, no load, overload, short-circuit proof,

rectangular current limiting characteristic• Adjustable output voltages with remote on/off• Immunity according to IEC/EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6• Emissions according to EN 55011/55022• PCBs protected by lacquer• Battery charger models available

Table of Contents Page Page

1686.6"39

1.54" 8TE

1114.37"3U

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1, UL/CSA 60950-1

Description ............................................................................ 1Model Selection .................................................................... 2Functional Description .......................................................... 3Electrical Input Data .............................................................. 4Electrical Output Data ........................................................... 5Auxiliary Functions ................................................................ 9Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ................................. 11

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ............................... 12Mechanical Data ................................................................. 13Safety and Installation Instructions ..................................... 14Description of Options ........................................................ 15Accessories ......................................................................... 20EC Declaration of Conformity ............................................. 21

Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com

®



Model SelectionNon-standard input/output configurations or special customadaptions are available on request. Table 1 provides anoverview of the basic input and output configurations. More

Table 1a: Standard models

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Operating input voltage range and efficiency 1 Options 2

Vo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom V nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 85 – 255 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz [%]

5.1 11 - - - - LH1001-2R 74 D1 – D8, V2, V312 6 - - - - LH1301-2R 81 D1 – D815 4.5 - - - - LH1501-2R 83 D1 – D824 3 - - - - LH1601-2R 83 D1 – D848 1.5 - - - - LH1901-2R 83 D1 – D8

12 2 12 2 - - LH2320-2 81 D1 – D815 1.7 15 1.7 - - LH2540-2 81 D1 – D8

5.1 5 12 0.7 12 0.7 LH3020-2 78 D1 – D8, V2, V35.1 5 15 0.6 15 0.6 LH3040-2 78 D1 – D8, V2, V3

than 1000 different types have been manufactured withdifferent input /output configurations and customizedspecialities. Please consult Power-One for additionalinformation.

Table 1b: Battey charger models

Output Operating input voltage range and efficiency 1 Options 2

VBat V o safe 3 Vo max Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin[VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [A] 85 – 255 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz [%]

12 12.84 14.15 – 14.6 5.0 LH1781-2R 81.5 D1 – D824 25.68 28.3 – 29.15 2.5 LH1782-2R 81.536 38.52 42.45 – 43.72 1.67 LH1783-2R 83.548 51.36 56.6 – 58.3 1.25 LH1784-2R 83.560 64.2 70.75 – 72.87 1.0 LH1785-2R 83.5

1 Min. efficiency at Vi nom and Io nom. Typical values are approx. 2% better.2 Ask Power-One for availability!3 Setting voltage with open R-input (battery chargers)


®



Part Number Description L H 1 5 01 -2 R D3

Operating input range Vi:85 – 255 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz ................... L

Series ................................................................................... HNumber of outputs ........................................................ 1, 2, 3Output 1, Vo1 nom: 5.1 V ............ 0, 1, 2

12 V .................... 315 V ................ 4, 524 V .................... 6

other voltages ................ 7, 848 V .................... 9

Single-output models (different specs.) ..............01 – 99Outputs 2, 3: Vo2 nom, Vo3 nom:

5.1 V ....................................................................01 – 1912 V .....................................................................20 – 3915 V .....................................................................40 – 5924 V .....................................................................60 – 69other voltages for multiple-output models ...........70 – 99

Ambient temperature range TA:–10 to 50 °C .................. -2

customer-specific .................. -0Auxiliary functions and options:

Output voltage control input (single-output models) .... RSave data signal (D1 – D8, to be specified) ................ D 1

ACFAIL signal (V2, V3, to be specified) ....................... V 1

1 Option D excludes option V and vice versa

Example: LH1501-2D3: AC-DC converter,operating input voltage range 85 – 255 VAC, providing one output with 15 V /4.5 A, equipped with an output voltage adjust input (R), and undervoltage monitor D3.

Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input fuse, an input filter, and aninrush current limiter to the input capacitor. This capacitorsources a single-transistor forward converter. Each output ispowered by a separate secondary winding of the maintransformer. The resultant voltages are rectified and theirripples smoothed by a power choke and an output capacitor.The main control circuit senses the main output voltage Vo1and generates, with respect to the maximum admissible outputcurrents, the control signal for the primary switching transistor.This signal is transferred to the primary side by a couplingtransformer.

The auxiliary output voltages Vo2 and Vo3 are tracking. Eachauxiliary output's current is sensed using a currenttransformer. If one of the outputs is driven into current limit, theother outputs will reduce their output voltages as well, becauseall output currents are controlled by the same main controlcircuit.


®



Fig. 1

Block diagram of a triple-output model.

Inpu

t filt

er

Current limitationoutput 3

Main control circuit

Currentlimitationoutput 2

29

11

8

23

5

26

32

17

14

20

2

For

war

d co

nver

ter

appr

ox. 7

0 kH

z

4

4

CY

CY

14

17

i

D, V

R

G

N

L

2

3

03084a

1

1 Input fuse2 Transient suppressor3 Inrush current limiter (NTC)4 Adjust input for single-output models with feature R.

Electrical Input DataGeneral conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Connector pins 2 and 23 interconnected, R input not connected; with option P: Vo = Vo nom

Table 2: Input data

Input LM Unit

Characteristics Conditions min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io nom 85 255 VAC1

Vi nom Nominal input voltage TC min – TC max 230

I i Input current Vi nom, Io = Io nom 2 0.44 A

Pi 0 No-load input power: Vi nomSingle-output model Io1,2,3 = 0 1 2.5 WDouble-output model 7 9Triple-output model 7 9

Pi inh Idle input power inhibit mode 2.5

Iinr p 5 Peak inrush current Vi = Vi max 42 4 A

t inr r Rise time RS = 0 Ω 3300 µs

t inr h Time to half-valueTC = 25 °C

1600

R i Input resistance TC = 25 °C 800 mΩ

RNTC NTC resistance 8000 4

Ci Input capacitance 140 270 µF

Vi abs Input voltage limits 0 284 VACwithout any damage

1 Frequency 47 – 63 Hz2 With multiple-output models, the same

condition for each output applies.3 RS = source resistance.4 Value for initial switch-on cycle.5 I inr p = Vi / (Rs + R i + RNTC ); see Inrush

Current.


®



Input FuseA slow-blow fuse (Schurter SPT 2.5 A, 250 V, size 5 × 20 mm)mounted inside of the converter protects against severedefects. The fuse is not accessible by the user.

The fuse and a VDR form together with the input filter aneffective protection against high input transients.

Input Under-/Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage is below approx. 60 VAC or exceedsapprox. 280 VAC, an internally generated inhibit signaldisables the output(s). When checking this function theabsolute maximum input voltage rating Vi abs must be carefullyconsidered (see table Input data).

Note: When Vi is between Vi min and the undervoltage lockoutlevel, the output voltage may be below the value defined in tableOutput data.

Inrush CurrentThe converters incorporate an NTC resistor in the input line,which at initial switch-on cycle limits the peak inrush current, in

Rs Ri RNTCIinr p

Vi rms Ci

04001a

order to prevent the connectors and switching devices fromdamage. Subsequent switch-on cycles within a short intervalwill cause an increase of the peak inrush current due to thewarming-up of the NTC resistor.

The inrush current at switch-on can be calculated as follows:

Iinr p = √

–2 • Vi rms / (Rs + R i + RNTC)

Fig. 2Equivalent circuit diagram for input impedance

Electrical Output DataGeneral conditions– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Connector pins 2 and 23 interconnected, R input not connected.

Table 3a: Output data of single-output models

Output Vo nom 5.1 V 12 V 15 V 24 V 48 V Unit

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 5.0 5.20 11.76 12.24 14.70 15.30 23.52 24.48 47.04 48.96 V

Vo p Output overvoltage 7.5 21 25 41 85protection 1

Io nom Output current Vi min – Vi max 0 11 0 6 0 4.5 0 3 0 1.5 A

Io L Output current TC min – TC max 11.44 6.24 4.68 3.12 1.56limit

vo Output Switch. freq. V i nom, Io nom 30 50 60 100 50 80 50 80 50 100 mVppvoltage Total IEC/EN 61204 60 120 40 80 40 80 40 80 -noise BW = 20 MHz

∆Vo V Static line regulation Vi min – Vi nom ±50 ±100 ±100 ±150 ±150 mVVi nom – Vi maxIo nom

∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom, Io nom – 0 50 150 150 150 150

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±220 ±400 ±200 ±200 ±150load deviation Io nom ↔ 1/3 Io nom

tdregulation2

Recovery IEC/EN 61204 100 80 80 80 120 µstime

αVo Temperature Vi min – Vi max ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kcoefficient 0 – Io nom ±1.0 ±2.4 ±3.0 ±4.8 ±9.6 mV/K∆Vo /∆TC

1 By suppressor diode2 See fig. 4 Dynamic load regulation.


®



Table 3b: Output data of double-output models. Same general conditions as per table 3a

Output Vo nom 2 × 12 V 2 × 15 V Unit

Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 11.76 12.24 11.4 12.6 14.7 15.3 14.25 15.75 V

Vi nom, Io2 = 0 13.8 17.25

Vo p Output overvoltage 21 25 25 31protection

Io nom Output current Vi min – Vi max 0 2 0 2 0 1.7 0 1.7 A

Io L Output current limit TC min – TC max 2.08 2.08 1.77 1.77

vo Output Switch. freq. V i nom, Io nom 15 30 20 40 15 30 20 40 mVppvoltage IEC/EN 61204 50 150 50 150 40 150 40 150noise 1 Total BW = 20 MHz

∆Vo V Static line regulation Vi min – Vi nom ±50 ±80 ±60 ±180 mVVi nom – Vi maxIo nom


αVo Temperature Vi min – Vi max ±2.4 ±3.0 mV/Kcoefficient ∆Vo /∆TC 0 – Io nom

Table 3c: Output data of triple-output models. Same general conditions as per table 3a

Output Vo nom 5.1 V, 2 × 12 V 5.1 V, 2 × 15 V Unit

Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max


Vi nom, Io2 = Io3 = 0 13.8 17.25

Vo p Output overvoltage 7.5 25 7.5 31protection

Io nom Output current Vi min – Vi max 0 5 0 0.7 0 5 0 0.6 A

Io L Output current limit TC min – TC max 5.2 0.73 5.2 0.62

vo Output Switch. freq. V i nom, Io nom 15 30 10 20 15 30 10 20 mVppvoltage IEC/EN 61204 30 150 50 150 40 150 40 150noise 1 Total BW = 20 MHz

∆Vo V Static line regulation Vi min – Vi nom ±30 ±150 ±30 ±150 mVVi nom – Vi maxIo nom


αVo Temperature Vi min – Vi max ±1.0 ±1.0 mV/Kcoefficient ∆Vo /∆TC 0 – Io nom

1 Measured with a clamp according to IEC 612042 See Voltage regulation of tracking outputs3 Condition for the specified output; other outputs loaded with Io nom


®



Io1/Io1 nom

1

Vo1d

td td

∆Vo1 I ∆Vo1 I

t

Vo1

0 t≥10 µs≥10 µs

05131a

0.5

Vo1d

13

14

15

16

17

0.2 0.4 0.60

05134aVo2, Vo3 [V]

Io2 = Io3 [A]0.8

Io1 = 5 A Io1 = 2.5 A Io1 = 0.25 A

14.0

14.5

15.0

16.0

16.5

0.4 0.8 1.60

Io1 = 1.7 A Io1 = 0.85 A

Vo2 [V]

Io2 [A]

05135a

Io1 = 0.08 A

1.2 2.0

15.5

11.0

11.5

12.0

12.5

13.0

13.5

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 0

Io1 = 5 A Io1 = 2.5 A Io1 = 0.25 A

Vo2, Vo3 [V]05132a

Io2 = Io3 [A]

Io1 = 0.1 A

11.0

11.5

12.0

12.5

13.0

13.5

0.2 0.6 1.0 1.4

Io1 = 2 A Io1 = 1 A

Vo2 [V]

Io2 [A]1.8 2.2

05133a

Fig. 3Typical main output voltage Vo1 versus current Io1

Fig.4Dynamic load regulation of Vo1 versus load change.

1.0

0

0.5

Vo

0.5

Vo nom

IoIo nom1.0 1.2

Io nom

Io1

Io2,Io3

IoL1

IoL2, IoL3

0.95

05022a

Output Characteristic and ProtectionEach output is protected by a suppressor diode, which under aworst case condition may become a short circuit. Thesuppressor diodes are not designed to withstand externallyapplied overvoltages. Overload at any of the outputs will causea shutdown of all outputs. A red LED indicates the overloadcondition of the respective output.

Regulation of Multiple-Output ModelsOutput 1 is under normal conditions regulated to Vo1 nom,

Fig. 5Static load regulation Vo2 versus Io1 (LH2320-2)

regardless of the output current. The voltage of the trackingoutputs 2 and 3 depends upon their load and the load onoutput 1; see fig. 5 to 8.

Fig. 6Static load regulation Vo2 versus Io1 (LH2540-2)

Fig. 7Static load regulation Vo2 and Vo3 versus Io1 (LH3020-2,Io2 = Io3)

Fig. 8Static load regulation Vo2 and Vo3 versus Io1 (LH3040-2,Io2 = Io3)


®



0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

40 60 70 80

Io/Io nom

TA [°C]

1.0Forced cooling

05142a

TC max

50

Convection cooling

LH2000LH3000

LH1000

Fig. 9Output current derating versus temperature

Thermal Considerations and ProtectionIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air (convectioncooling) at the indicated maximum ambient temperature TA max(see table Temperature specifications) and is operated at itsnominal input voltage and output power, the temperaturemeasured at the measuring point of case temperature TC (seeMechanical Data) will approach the indicated value TC max afterthe warm-up phase. However, the relationship between TA andTC depends heavily on the conditions of operation andintegration into a system. The thermal conditions areinfluenced by input voltage, output current, airflow, andtemperature of surrounding components and surfaces. TA maxis therefore, contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under all operatingconditions TC remains within the limits stated in the tableTemperature specifications.

Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sink allow TAto pass over 50 °C, if TC max is not exceeded.

At an ambient temperature TA of 65 °C with only convectioncooling, the maximum permissible current for each output isapprox. 50% of its nominal value; see fig. 9 .

A temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signaldisabling the outputs, when the case temperature exceedsTC max. The outputs automatically recover, when thetemperature drops below this limit.

Parallel and Series ConnectionMain outputs of equal nominal voltage can be connected inparallel. It is important to assure that the main output of amultiple-output converter is forced to supply a minimumcurrent of 10% of Io nom to enable correct operation of its ownauxiliary outputs.

In parallel operation, one or more of the main outputs mayoperate continuously in current limitation, causing an increase

of the case temperature TC. Consequently, a reduction of themax. ambient temperature by 10 K is recommended.

Both outputs of a double-output converter may be connectedin parallel without any restriction.

Note: If output 2 of a double-output converter is not used, werecommend to connect it in parallel with the main output.

Output 2 and output 3 of a triple-output converter may beconnected in parallel without any restriction.

Note: If the output 2 or 3 of a triple-output converter is not used, werecommend to connect it in parallel with the other auxiliary output.

Main or auxiliary outputs can be connected in series with anyother output of the same or another converter. In seriesconnection, the maximum output current is limited by thelowest current limit. Output ripple and regulation values areadded. Connection wiring should be kept as short as possible.

If output terminals are connected together in order to establishmulti-voltage configurations, e.g., +5.1 V, ±12 V etc., thecommon-ground connecting point should be as close aspossible to the connector of the converter in order to avoidexcessive output ripple voltages.

Auxiliary outputs of different converters should not beconnected in parallel!


®



1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032a

Vo–

i

Vo+Iinh

Vinh

06115a

N

L

Table 5: Output response time tr and tf (see fig. 4). Values not applicable for models equipped with option E.

Type of converter t r at Po = 0 and t f at Po = Po nom tr and t f at Po = 3/4 Po nom t r at Po = Po nom Unittyp max typ max typ max

LH1001-2R 3 17 3 17 5 25 msLH1301-2R 5 25 8 30 10 40LH1501-2R 3 17 5 25 15 50LH1601-2R 8 30 15 45 20 70LH1901-2R 35 100 50 150 85 230

LH2320-9 10 40 15 50 25 80LH2540-9 8 30 20 40 20 60

LH3020-9 30 85 45 130 75 210LH3040-9 20 70 30 90 50 150

Auxiliary Functions

i InhibitThe outputs of the converters may be enabled or disabled bymeans of a logic signal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied between theinhibit input i and the negative pin of output 1 (Vo1–). Insystems with several converters, this feature can be used, forexample, to control the activation sequence of the converters.If the inhibit function is not required, connect the inhibit pin 2 topin 23 to enable the outputs (active low logic, fail safe). Theresponse times are specified in fig. 12.

Fig. 11Definition of Vinh and Iinh.

Fig. 10Typical inhibit current I inh versus inhibit voltage Vinh

Table 4: Inhibit data

Characteristics Conditions min typ max Unit

Vinh Inhibit input voltage to keep Vo = on Vi min – V i max –50 0.8 Voutput voltage Vo = off TC min – TC max 2.4 50

I inh Inhibit current Vinh = 0 –60 –100 –220 µA

0 tr tft

t0

Inhibit

1

Vo/Vo nom

0.1

t0

1

0.95

thVi

05025a

Fig. 12Output response as a function of Vi or inhibit control

Conditions:R input not connected. For multiple-output models the figures indicated in the table relate to the output, which reacts slowest. Alloutputs are resistively loaded. Variation of the input voltage within Vi min – Vi max does not influence the values considerably.


®



Table 6a: Rext1 for Vo < Vo nom (conditions: Vi nom, Io nom, rounded up to resistor values E 96, Rext2 is not fitted )

Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 V Vo nom = 48 VVo [V] Rext1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] Rext1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] Rext1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] Rext1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] Rext1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

0.5 0.432 2.0 0.806 2.0 0.619 4.0 0.806 8.0 0.8061.0 0.976 3.0 1.33 4.0 1.47 6.0 1.33 12.0 1.331.5 1.65 4.0 2.0 6.0 2.67 8.0 2.0 16.0 2.02.0 2.61 5.0 2.87 8.0 4.53 10.0 2.87 20.0 2.872.5 3.83 6.0 4.02 9.0 6.04 12.0 4.02 24.0 4.023.0 5.76 7.0 5.62 10.0 8.06 14.0 5.62 28.0 5.623.5 8.66 8.0 8.06 11.0 11.0 16.0 8.06 32.0 8.064.0 14.7 9.0 12.1 12.0 16.2 18.0 12.1 36.0 12.14.5 30.1 10.0 20.0 13.0 26.1 20.0 20.0 40.0 20.05.0 200.0 11.0 44.2 14.0 56.2 22.0 44.2 44.0 44.2

Table 6b: R2 for Vo > Vo nom (conditions: Vi nom, Io nom, rounded up to resistor values E 96, Rext1 is not fitted )


5.15 464 12.1 1780 15.2 1470 24.25 3160 48.5 68105.20 215 12.2 909 15.4 750 24.50 1620 49.0 34805.25 147 12.3 619 15.6 511 24.75 1100 49.5 23705.30 110 12.4 464 15.8 383 25.00 825 50.0 17805.35 90.9 12.5 383 16.0 332 25.25 715 50.5 14705.40 78.7 12.6 316 16.2 274 25.50 590 51.0 12705.45 68.1 12.7 274 16.4 237 25.75 511 51.5 11005.50 61.9 12.8 249 16.5 226 26.00 453 52.0 953

13.0 200 26.25 402 52.5 84513.2 169 26.40 383 52.8 806

R Output Voltage AdjustmentAs a standard feature, single-output models offer anadjustable output voltage identified by letter R in the typedesignation.

Note: With open R input, Vo = Vo nom.

The output voltage Vo can either be adjusted by an externalvoltage (Vext) or by an external resistor (Rext1 or Rext2). Theadjustment range is approximative 0 – 110% of Vo nom. Foroutput voltages Vo > Vo nom, the minimum input voltage Vi minspecified in Electrical Input Data increases proportionally toVo/Vo nom.

Fig. 13Output voltage adjustment

a) Adjustment by means of an external resistor Rext:Depending upon the value of the required output voltage,the resistor shall be connected:either: Between the R and G pin to achieve an outputvoltage adjustment range of Vo ≈ 0 to 100% of Vo nom.

VoRext1 ≈ 4 kΩ • ––––––––– Vo nom – Vo

or: Between the R pin and Vo+ to achieve an outputvoltage range of Vo ≈ 100 to 110% of Vo nom.

(Vo – 2.5 V)Rext2 ≈ 4 kΩ • –––––––––––––––––– 2.5 V • (Vo/Vo nom – 1)

Caution: To prevent damage, Rext2 should never be less than47 kΩ.

Note: R inputs of n converters with paralleled outputs may beparalleled too, but if only one external resistor is used, itsvalue should be Rext1 /n or Rext2 /n respectively.

b) Adjustment by means of an external control voltage Vextbetween G and R pin:The control voltage range is 0 to 2.75 V and allows foradjustment in the range of Vo ≈ 0 to 110% of Vo nom.

Vo • 2.5 VVext ≈ –––––––– Vo nom

Caution: The external control voltage should be in the range0 to +3 V to prevent the converter from damage.

R

Vo+

G

+

Vext

-

4 kΩVref = 2.5 V

Controllogic Rext1

Rext2

06087a

Vi–

Vi+

17

14

+

8


®



Display Status of LEDs

LEDs "OK" and "i" status versus input voltage Vi

Conditions: Io ≤ Io nom , TC ≤ TC max , Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "OK" and "Io L" status versus output current Io

Conditions: Vi min – Vi max , TC ≤ TC max , Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i" versus case temperature

Conditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i" versus Vinh

Conditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max

Fig. 14Status of LEDs.Vi uv = undervoltage lockout, Vi ov = overvoltage lockout

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 adj

Vi max Vi ovVi minVi uv

Vi

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OK

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 adj

TC

i

TC max TPTC threshold

Vi inh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

LED off LED onLED status undefined

06090a

Electromagnetic ImmunityTable 7: Immunity type tests

Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Per-mode 2 applied imped. procedure oper. form. 3

Electrostatic IEC/EN 2 contact discharge 4000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 10 negative(to case) discharges

Electromagnetic IEC/EN x antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 26 to 1000 MHz yes A 1field 61000-4-3 1 kHz

Electrical fast IEC/EN 1 direct, i /c, +i/–i 500 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yestransient/burst 61000-4-4 2.5/5 kHz over 60 s negative

15 ms; burst transients perperiod: 300 ms coupling mode

Surge IEC/EN 1 i/c 500 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 1 +i/–i 500 Vp 2 Ω surges per

1 For converters with 3 output voltages, temporary deviation from specs possible2 i = input, o = output, c = case3 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary deviation from specs possible

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A metal oxide VDR (depending upon converter model)together with an input fuse and an input filter form an effective

protection against high input transient voltages, which typicallyoccur in most installations, but especially in battery-drivenmobile applications. The H series has been successfully testedto the following specifications:


®



Electromagnetic Emissions

Table 8: Emissions at Vi nom and Io nom

Series IEC/EN 55022

≤ 30 MHz ≥30 MHz

LH <A <B

Table 10: Temperature specifications, values given are for an air pressure of 800 – 1200 hPa (800 – 1200 mbar)

Temperature Standard -2

Characteristics Conditions min max Unit

TA Ambient temperature Operational –10 50 1 °C

TC Case temperature –10 80

TS Storage temperature Not operational –25 100

1 Single output models up to 71 °C with derating.

Immunity to Environmental ConditionsTable 9: Mechanical and climatic stress

Test method Standard Test conditions Status

Cab Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Convertersteady state MIL-STD-810D section 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not

Duration: 21 days operating

Ea Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Acceleration amplitude: 15 gn = 147 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating

Number of bumps: 18 (3 each direction)

Eb Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 10 gn = 98 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 516.3 Bump duration: 16 ms operating


Fc Vibration IEC/EN/DIN EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 514.3 2 gn = 20 m/s2 (60 – 150 Hz) operating

Frequency (1 Oct/min): 10 – 150 HzTest duration: 3.75 h (1.25 h each axis)

Table 11: MTBF

Values at specified Model Ground benign UnitCase Temperature 40 °C

MTBF 1 LH1000 384 000 hLH2000 306 000LH3000 270 000

1 Calculated in accordance with MIL-HDBK-217E

Temperatures

Reliability


®



111.2 ±0.8 (3 HE )

88(11.6)

168.

5

127

173.

7 ±0

.5

20

100 ±0.6 1.6

6TE

2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32

Male connector H 11 according to DIN 41612

38.7

95 ±0.5

Measurement point for case temperatureTC

M 3; depth = 4 mm (chassis mount)

22

68

159.

4

Mounting plane of connector H11

25.4

030

.48

2TE

7.09

17.25

Mounting holes for retention clips

12.17

103

3.27

20.5

12.1

±0.

5

94.5 ±0.1

0

31.5

±0.

1

ø 3

.5

ø 4

.0

OK (LED green)Inhibit i (LED red)

Potentiometer(option D or V)

Front plate

Main faceRearface

Back plate

09100a

Mechanical DataDimensions in mm. European

Projection

Fig. 15Case H02, weight approx. 770 g,Aluminium, black finish


®



Safety and Installation Instructions

Connector Pin AllocationPin no. 26 (protective earth) is leading, ensuring that it makescontact with the female connector first.

Table 12: Pin allocationFig. 16View of male H11 connector.

Installation InstructionsThe H Series converters are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by professional installers.Installation must strictly follow the national safety regulationsin compliance with the enclosure, mounting, creepage,clearance, casualty, markings and segregation requirementsof the end-use application.

Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H11. Other installation methods may not meet thesafety requirements.

The converters are provided with pin no. 26 ( ), which isreliably connected with the case. For safety reasons, it isessential to connect this pin with the protective earth of thesupply system.

A non-accessible input fuse is connected in the line to pin 32(L ). Since this fuse is designed to protect the converter incase of an overcurrent and does not necessarily cover allcustomer needs, an external fuse suitable for the applicationand in compliance with the local requirements may benecessary in the wiring to one or both input pins (no. 29 and/orno. 32), particularily if the phase or neutral line cannot beassigned to the corresponding terminals.

Important: If the inhibit function is not in use, pin 2 (i) should beconnected with pin 23 (Vo–) to enable the output(s).

Caution: Do not open the converters, or warranty will beinvalidated.

Make sure that there is sufficient air flow possiblefor convection cooling. This should be verified bymeasuring the case temperature TC, when theconverter is installed and operated in the end-useapplication. The maximum specified casetemperature TC max shall not be exceeded. See alsoThermal Considerations.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetrationof liquids (e.g., cleaning fluids) has to be prevented,since the power supplies are not hermeticallysealed.

Note: All boards are coated with a protection lacquer.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the converter.

• IP 40: All models, except those with options D or V with apotentiometer.

• IP 20: All models other models.

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters correspond to class I equipment and havebeen approved according to the standards IEC/EN 60950-1and UL/CSA 60950-1.

The converters have been evaluated for:• Class I equipment• Building in• Basic insulation between input and case and double or

reinforced insulation between input and output, based onthe input voltage of 250 VAC or 400 VDC

• Functional insulation between output(s) and case• Functional insulation between the outputs• Pollution degree 2 environment• Overvoltage catagory II• Altitude up to 2000 m

The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillance inaccordance with the above mentioned standards and with ISO9001:2000.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory as routinetest in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950, andshould not be repeated in the field. Power-One will not honorany warranty claims resulting from electric strength field tests.

1 Not connected, if option neither option D or V is fitted.2 Leading pin

32 29 26 23 20 17 14 11 8 5 2

10028

Electrical determination LH1000 LH2000 LH3000Pin Ident Pin Ident Pin Ident

Inhibit 2 i 2 i 2 iSafe Data or ACFAIL 5 D or V 1 5 D or V 1 5 D or V 1

Output voltage (positive) 8 Vo+ 8 n.c. 8 Vo3+Output voltage (negative) 11 Vo– 11 n.c. 11 Vo3–

Voltage adjust 14 RAdjust return 17 G

Output voltage (positive) 14 Vo2+ 14 Vo2+Output voltage (negative) 17 Vo2– 17 Vo2–

Output voltage (positive) 20 Vo+ 20 Vo1+ 20 Vo1+Output voltage (negative) 23 Vo– 23 Vo1– 23 Vo1–

Protective earthing PE 2 26 26 26

AC neutral input 29 N 29 N 29 NAC line input 32 L 32 L 32 L


®



Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operator-accessible, it shall be an SELV circuit according to the safetystandard IEC/EN 60950.

The table below shows a possible configuration, compliancewith which causes the output to be an SELV circuit up to aconfigured output voltage of 36 V (sum of the nominal voltagesconnected in series).

Fig. 17Schematic safety concept.

Table 12: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output(s) to Output to Unitand output(s) case output

Electric Factory test >1 s 2.8 1 1.4 0.3 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 2.0 1.0 0.2 kVACtest to factory testInsulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >100 2 MΩ1 According to EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950, subassemblies connecting input to output are pre-tested with 5.6 kVDC or 4 kVAC.2 Tested at 300 VDC

AC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~~

10021a

Fuse

Fuse

Table 13: Safety concept leading to an SELV output circuit

Conditions AC-DC converter Installation Result

Nominal Supply Grade of insulation between Measures to achieve the resulting Safety statuts of the AC-DCvoltage input and output, provided safety statuts of the output circuit converter output circuit

by the AC-DC converter

Mains ≤250 V AC Double or reinforced Earthed case 1 and installation SELV circuitaccording to the applicable standards

1 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards, e.g. IEC/EN 60950

Description of Options

D Undervoltage MonitorThe input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitoperates independently of the built-in input undervoltagelockout circuit. A logic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal(NPN output) is generated at pin 5, as soon as one of themonitored voltages drops below the preselected threshold

Table 14: Survey of options

Option Function of Option Characteristic

D Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (D1 – D8)

V 1 Input and output undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specifications ( V2, V3)

1 Option V is only available for models with 5.1 V main output; it excludes option D.

level V t. The return for this signal is Vo1– (pin 23). The D outputrecovers, when the monitored voltages exceeds Vt + Vh. Thethreshold level Vt is adjustable by a potentiometer, accessiblethrough a hole in the front cover.

Option D exists in various versions D1 – D8 as shown in table15.

Table 15: Undervoltage monitor functions

Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt]JFET NPN Vi Vo1 of threshold level Vt for Vt min – Vt max

Vti Vto Vhi Vho

D1 D5 no yes – 3.5 V – 48 V 1 – 2.3 – 1

D2 D6 yes no Vi min – Vi max 1 – 3.0 – 0.5 –

D3 D7 yes yes Vi min – Vi max 1 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 3.0 – 0.5 "0"

D4 D8 no yes – 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 – "0"1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer (not recommended for mobile applications)2 Fixed value between 95% and 98% of Vo1 (tracking)


®



JFET output (D1 – D4):

Connector pin D is internally connected via the drain-sourcepath of a JFET (self-conducting type) to the negative potentialof output 1. VD – 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitoredvoltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) < Vt. The current I D through theJFET should not exceed 2.5 mA. The JFET is protected by a0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 V against external overvoltages.

Vi, Vo1 status D output, VD

Vi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD – 0.4 V at I D = 2.5 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID – 25 µA at VD = 5.25 V

NPN output (D5 – D8):

Connector pin D is internally connected via the collector-emitter path of a NPN transistor to the negative potential ofoutput 1. VD – 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitoredvoltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) > Vt + Vh. The current ID through


Vi or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID – 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh low, L, VD – 0.4 V at ID = 20 mA

Fig. 18Options D1 – D4, JFET output

Fig. 19Options D5 – D8, NPN output

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007a

Threshold tolerances and hysteresis:

If V i is monitored, the internal input voltage after the input filterand rectifier is measured. Consequently, this voltage differsfrom the voltage at the connector pins by the voltage drop ∆Vtiacross input filter and rectifier. The threshold level of the D1and D8 options is adjusted in the factory at nominal outputcurrent Io nom and TA = 25 °C.

Fig. 20Definition of Vti, ∆Vti, and Vhi (JFET output)

∆Vti Vhi

VD low

VD

VD high

Vi

Po

= P

o no

m

Po

= 0

Po

= 0

Vti

Po

= P

o no

m

11021a


®



0

10.95

0

Vi [V DC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min4 tlow min

4 thigh min

th1

Vti + Vhi

Vti

Input voltage failure Switch-on cycle Input voltage sag Switch-on cycle and subsequentinput voltage failure

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th

1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto

3

Output voltage failure

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

3

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho

Input voltage monitoring

Output voltage monitoring

11008a

Fig. 21Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VD, ID, and Vo1/Vo nomversus time.

1 th = hold-up time.2 With output voltage monitoring the hold-up time t h = 03 The D signal remains high, if the D output is connected

to an external source.4 t low min = 40 – 200 ms, typically 80 ms

V ACFAIL Signal (VME)Available for converters with Vo1 = 5.1 V. This option defines anundervoltage monitoring circuit for the input or the input andmain output voltage equivalent to option D and generates theACFAIL signal (V signal), which conforms to the VMEstandard. The low state level of the ACFAIL signal is specifiedat a sink current of IV = 48 mA to VV – 0.6 V (open-collector

output). The pull-up resistor feeding the open-collector outputshould be placed on the VME backplane.

After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time th of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops to 4.875 V, when the 5.1 V output is fully loaded.This hold-up time t h is provided by the internal input


®



V output (V2, V3):

Connector pin V is internally connected to the open collector ofa NPN transistor. The emitter is connected to the negativepotential of output 1. VV – 0.6 V (logic low) corresponds to amonitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) < U t. The current IVthrough the open collector should not exceed 50 mA. The NPNoutput is not protected against external overvoltages. VVshould not exceed 60 V.


V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt ](VME compatible) of threshold level Vt for Vt min – Vt max

V i Vo1 V t i V to Vhi Vho

V2 yes no V i min – V i max 1 – 3.0 – 0.5 -

V3 yes yes V i min – V i max 1 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 3.0 – 0.5 "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer (not recommended for mobile applications).2 Fixed value between 95% and 98% of Vo1 (tracking), output undervoltage monitoring is not a requirement of VME standard.

Fig. 22Output configuration of options V2 and V3

capacitance. Consequently, the working input voltage and thethreshold level Vt i should be adequately above the minimuminput voltage Vi min of the converter, so that enough energy isremaining in the input capacitance.

Formula for threshold level for desired value of t h:

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Vti = ––––––––––––––––––––– + Vi min2

C i min • η

where as:Ci min = minimum internal input capacitance [mF],

according to the table belowCi ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]η = efficiency [%]t h = hold-up time [ms]Vi min = minimum input voltage [V]Vt i = threshold level [V]

Note: The threshold level V t i of option V2 and V3 is adjusted inthe factory to a value according to table 17.

Vi , Vo1 status V output, VV

V i or Vo1 < V t low, L, VV - 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

V i and Vo1 > V t + Vh high, H, IV - 25 µA at VV = 5.1 V

Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009a

Option V operates independently of the built-in input under-voltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal is generated at pin 5as soon as one of the monitored voltages drops below the pre-selected threshold level V t. The return for this signal is Vo1–(pin 23). The V output recovers, when the monitored voltageexceeds Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vt is either adjustable by apotentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover, oradjusted in the factory to a determined customer-specificvalue.Versions V2 and V3 are available as shown below.

Table 16: Available internal input capacitance and factorypotentiometer setting of Vt i with resulting hold-up time

Type LH Unit

Ci min 0.14 mF

Vt i 85 VDC

th 5 ms

Fig. 23Definition of Vt i, ∆Vt i and Vhi

∆Vti Vhi

VV low

VV

VV high

Vi

Po

= P

o no

m

Po

= 0

Po

= 0

Vti

Po

= P

o no

m

11023a


Vi is monitored after the input filter and rectifier. Consequently,this voltage differs from the voltage at the connector pins by thevoltage drop ∆Vt i across input filter and rectifier. The thresholdlevel of option V0 is factory-adjusted at Io nom and TA = 25 °C.


®



3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vi [VDC]

0

t

t

Vti + Vhi

Vi


UV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo1

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo1

2.0 V



11010a

t

t

t

t

Fig. 24Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VV, IV, and Vo1/Vo nomversus time.

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms2 t low min = 40 – 200 ms, typically 80 ms3 VV level not defined at Vo1 < 2.0 V4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output voltage, if

the pull-up resistor RP is connected to Vo1+. The V signalremains high, if RP is connected to an external source.


®



AccessoriesA great variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable including:

– Various mating H11 connectors STV-H11-xxx includingscrew, solder, fast-on, or press-fit terminals

– Connector retention clips RETENTIONCLIP(2X)[HZZ01209]

– Code key system for connector coding CODIERKEIL(5X)– Various front panels for 19" rack mounting, width 8 TE,

heigth 3U and 6U, Schroff or Intermas system.– Flexible H11 PCB for mounting the converter onto a PCB– Universal mounting bracket UMB-LHMQ [HZZ00610] for

chassis mounting or DIN-rail mounting in upright position.– DIN-rail mounting brackets DMB-MHQ (horizontal posi tion)– Mounting plate M (black finish) MOUNTINGPLATEM for

mounting the converter to a chassis or a wall, where onlyfrontal access is given

– Battery sensor [S-KSMH...] for using the converter asbattery charger. Different cell characteristics can beselected.

For additional accessory product information, see theaccessory data sheets listed with each product series orindividual model listing at www.power-one.com.

H11 female connector withscrew terminals and codekey system

Flexible H11 PCB

Mounting plate M (for wall-mounting),connector with fast-on terminals(STV-H11-F/CO), secured withconnector retention clips

Universal mounting bracketUMB-LHMQ for DIN-rail mounting.

Connectorretention clip

EuropeanProjection

Different frontpanels

Battery temperature sensor

65l

l: 2 m standard length other cable lengths on request

adhesive tape

30

15

09125

DIN-rail mounting bracketsDMB-MHQ


®



Rolf Baldauf Johann MilavecVice President, Engineering Director Projects and IP

EC Declaration of Conformity

We

Power-One AGAckerstrasse 56, CH-8610 Uster

declare under our sole responsibility that all M and H Series AC-DC and DC-DCconverters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.

Conformity with the directive is presumed by conformity with the following har-monized standards:

· EN 61204:1995 ( = IEC 61204:1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements

· IEC 60950-1:2005 (1st Edition) and/or EN60950-1:2003Safety of information technology equipment.

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe correctinstallation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with theLVD. All M and H Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operationor by professional installers. They must not be operated as stand alone products.

Hence conformity with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC(EMC Directive) needs not to be declared. Nevertheless, guidance is provided inmost product application notes on how conformity of the end product with theindicated EMC standards under the responsibility of the installer can be achieved,from which conformity with the EMC directive can be presumed.

Uster, 24 August 2006 Power-One AG


®

AccessoriesTemperature Sensors

BCD20024 Rev. AA, 03-Sep-2008 Page 1 of 3 www.power-one.com


DescriptionPower-One offers a wide range of battery charger systemsconsisting of adapted power supplies and appropriatetemperature sensors. The (lead-acid) batteries arecharged according to the battery temperature and theproperties of the battery cells. When the battery is fullycharged, it is maintained at the float charge voltage, whichrepresents the optimum point for maximum availableenergy and optimum life expectancy of the battery. It isessential to place the sensor as close to the battery aspossible thus sensing the battery temperature.

The most suited sensor model is defined mainly by threeparameters: The nominal battery voltage (e.g., 24 V or 48V), the temperature coefficient of the cells (e.g., –3.0 mV/K), and the nominal floating charge voltage per cell at20 °C (e.g., 2.27 V/cell). The latter two are specified in thedata sheet of the battery.

The temperature sensors K can be used with all Power-One converters with the standard R input. This inputallows the control of the output voltage, see fig. 1. Theopen R input exhibits a source voltage of 2.5 V with asource resistor of 4 kΩ.

The sensor can directly be connected to the R input and ispowered from the battery voltage, as shown in fig. 2. Thesensor supersedes the internal voltage control circuit ofthe converter and adjusts the output voltage exactly to whatis needed for the battery.

Note: Some converters exhibit a current droop characteristicto ease the operation in parallel connection. If the temperaturesensor K is connected to the R-input, it cancels the droopcharacteristic and impedes current sharing. We recommendthe use of converters with true current sharing (option T).

Different models of battery sensors are availabledepending on the battery specifications. Table 1 gives anoverview of available sensors.

Note: Other types for different cell voltages, temperaturecoefficients, and cable lengths are available on request.

For example, if the application uses a 48 V batteryconsisting of 24 cells of 2.27 V, a temperature coefficientof –3.0 mV/K, and 2 m cable length, the sensor typeS-KSMH48-2.27-30-2 should be selected.

Fig. 3 shows the charge voltage depending on thetemperature and the battery type. If the sensor is

Description ..................................................................... 1Fail Safe Operation ......................................................... 2Converters with DC Input ............................................... 3

Mechanical Dimensions ................................................ 3Temperature Sensors for the T Series .......................... 3


®



R

Vo+

Vo-

4 kΩVref = 2.5 V

Controlcircuit

L

N

Sensor002

Rsafe

Powersupply

Load

–+

Input Vo–

R

Temperature sensor

ϑ

03099d

Battery

Vo+

+

R

Vo+

Vo-

4 kΩVref = 2.5 V

Controlcircuit

L

N

Sensor002

Rsafe

2.10

2.15

2.20

2.25

2.30

2.35

2.40

2.45Cell voltage [V]

–20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C

06123b

VC = 2.27 V, –3 mV/K VC = 2.27 V, –3.5 mV/KVC = 2.23 V, –3 mV/K VC = 2.23 V, –3.5 mV/K

Vo safe

Vo max

Fig. 1Block diagram of Power-One converters suited tobe controled by a battery sensor.

Fig. 3Float charge voltage versus temperature for differenttemperature coefficients.

Fig. 2Block diagram of the sensor.

Table 1: Sensors for converters with standard R input

Battery Sensor Cell Cell temp. Cablevoltage type voltage coefficient lengthnom. [V] [V] [mV/K] [m]

12 S-KSMH12-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.27-35-2 2.27 –3.5 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.31-35-0 2.31 –3.5 4.5

24 S-KSMH24-2.35-35-2 2.35 –3.5 2

48 S-KSMH48-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

48 S-KSMH48-2-27-35-2 2.27 –3.5 2

Fail Safe OperationTo prevent batteries from overcharging but still maintain aminimum charging in case of interruption of the sensorsignal cable to the power supply, Power-One offersconverters with a special nominal output voltage setting;see table 2. These converters differ from the respectivestandard models in the nominal output voltage and outputcurrent settings. Without the sensor connected to the Rpin, the output voltage is set to Vo safe, which is higher thanthe nominal battery voltage such avoiding discharging thebattery, but still lower than the theoretically needed float

Fig. 5Connection of Rsafe, if standard converter models areused.

Fig. 4Connection of a sensor to the standard R input

+ –

Battery

Vo+

R

Vo–

Temperaturesensor

Sensorcable

Sensorwires

+

05174agreen

brown

white

Fuse

–

disconnected, the converter output voltage is regulated toVo safe. This voltage prevents the battery from beingovercharged even at high temperature. Overcharging abattery is dangerous and can cause the battery to explode.


®



56 (2.2")L

L = 2 m (standard length) other cable lengths on request

adhesive tape

26 (1.02")

9.8

(0.4

")09125a

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized foruse as critical components in life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear controlsystems without the express written consent of the respective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, maychange depending on the date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fig. 6S-KSMH temperature sensor.

EuropeanProjection

Table 2: Special models for battery charging

Vnom Vsafe Po = 50 W Po = 70 W Po = 100 W Po = 150 W Po = 250 W Po = 280 W Po = 375 W[V] [V] Po = 125 W Po = 500 W

12 12.84 LM1781-7R LH1781-2R LS4740-7R2 LK4740-7R LWN1140-6EM1LOK4140-2RLD LWR1140-6EM1 CK17403

24 25.68 LM1782-7R LH1782-2R LS5740-7R2 LK5740-7R LKP5740-6R LKP5741-5R LXR1240-6M1LOK4240-2RLD LWR1240-6EM1 CK27403 LWN1240-6EM1 LXN1240-6M1

36 38.52 LM1783-7R LH1783-2R LWR1840-6EM1 LWN1840-6EM1 LXR1840-6EM1LXN1840-6EM1

48 51.36 LM1784-7R LH1784-2R LS5740-7R1 2 LK5740-7R1 LKP5740-6R1 LKP5741-5R1 LXR1740-6M1LOK4740-2RLD LWR1740-6EM1 CK27401 3 LWN1740-6EM1 LXN1740-6M1

60 64.2 LM1785-7R LH1785-2R

1 Both outputs connected in series.2 Similar models with DC input (DS/LS1740, DS/LS2740) are available as well.3 DC input; DK/LK1740, and DK/LK2740 are available as well.

charge voltage. As soon as the sensor is connected to theR pin, the output voltage will be set to the correct value.This is essential for best energy and battery life time.

Other Power-One converters may also be used for batterycharging controled by the temperature sensor. However,the output voltage at low temperature might not bereached. If the sensor is used only for decreasing theoutput voltage, for instance, if using a 15 V power supply tocharge a 12 V battery, then disconecting the sensorresults in a dangerous situation. We recommend to add aresistor between the R input and its reference, whichadjusts the output voltage with disconnected sensor toVo safe. This is shown in fig. 5.

Converters with DC InputMost of the models listed in table 2 have an AC input.However, there are applications requiring battery chargingfrom a DC source – sometimes even without electricalisolation.

For this purpous, DC-DC converters of Q, P, M, S, or KSeries may be used, such as all switching regulators,provided that they exhibit the standard R input.

For safe operation, we recommend to provide a resistorRsafe with the correct value (see fig. 5).

Mechanical DimensionsAll dimensions in mm.

Temperature Sensors for the T SeriesT Series battery chargers exhibit a cell voltage selectorswitch to set the required floating charge voltage directly at

the converter. A special temperature sensor T matches tothe T Series. All details are provided in the T Series datasheet at Power-One's web site; see www.power-one.com.


AccessoriesMounting Support for Chassis, DIN-Rail, and PCB Mounting

MCD10028 Rev. 1.0 Page 1 of 12 www.power-one.com

Table of Contents Page

Description ....................................................................... 1Chassis Mounting Plates ................................................. 2DIN- and Chassis Mounting Brackets .............................. 4Universal Mounting Bracket ............................................. 9

DescriptionSpecial mounting supports have been designed for theintegration of power supplies into switchboards, controlpanels, printed circuit boards, etc., using adapters forChassis-, DIN-Rail, or PCB mounting.

The 19-inch cassette type DC-DC and AC-DC converterscan also be chassis mounted with frontal access by meansof a special Chassis Mounting Plate, attached to theconverters.

The Universal Mounting Bracket also fits to most of thesecassette type converters, allowing for either verticalchassis- or DIN-Rail mounting.

A Bracket Kit, consisting of a PCB with screw terminalconnectors and a bracket suitable for either Chassis- orDIN-Rail mounting, is available either for PCB mountablePSR and PSA Switching Regulators with option "Y" pins orfor small DC-DC converters 1 - 15 Watt.

For isolation of the PCB-mountable converters from adouble-sided PCB, the use of Isolation Pads isrecommended, as described below.

A Flexible H11 PCB allows for connection of casette typeconverters with H11 connector mounted on a printed circuitboard to this board.

Note: All dimensions are in mm, with tolerances of ±0.2 mmunless otherwise specified.

Page

Isolation Pads for PCB Mounting ................................... 11PCB-Tags for PCB Mounting .......................................... 12Flexible H11 PCB ........................................................... 12




Chassis Mounting PlatesFor chassis mounting of 19" cassette-type converterswhere only frontal access to the mounting screws is given,special chassis mounting plate adapters are availableaccording to the following table and figures 1 to 3.

Table 1: Mounting Plate survey

Case Converter Type Delivery contentsize series Part no.

K02 K 1 Mounting plate K02 Mounting plate

S02 S 1 and 4 countersunk

Q01 Q Mounting plate Qscrews

Q03 PC

Q04 P

Q01 Q Mounting plate M Mounting plate,

Q03 PC 4 countersunk

Q04 Pscrews and

M02 M

4 washers

H02 H

1 Option B1 necessary

6.5

11.2

140

16.3133

166

128

6

115 25.5

19.5

103.

518

.5

127

4.5

M3 × 6Washer

3

∅ 4.5/9 × 90

1202

0

Fig. 1Mounting plate MAluminium, black finish

EuropeanProjection




115

127±01

115

2620

16.8

168

4.5

140

104±

0.1

128

143

M3 × 6∅ 3.6/7.5 × 90

4.5

186

1202

2

Fig. 3Mounting plate Q with integrated connector retention facilityAluminium, black finish

Note: Details on Connector Retention Clip V are given in section: Mating Connectors.

6.5

11.2

13

140

17.3 133.4 30 168

125

7.5

5

Option B1 necessaryfor K and S family

M4 x 10

1202

1

Fig. 2Mounting plate K02Aluminium, black finish




A1

44

60 83

11.5

3.2

13.3

12

12024

Fig. 4"CMB" chassis mounting bracket dimensionsBracket: Aluminium, black finish

DIN- and Chassis Mounting BracketsPCB-mounting as well as cassette-type converters can bechassis- and/or DIN-Rail mounted by means of MountingBracket adapters. For selection and part numbers refer totable below.

Note: Customized adapters for other case sizes areavailable upon request.

Each part number gives a direct indication of the kind ofmounting, the type of converter, i.e. the case size or theoutput power as well as the possible pinnings and optionsaccording to the relevant converter data. The adaptors aredivided into two mechanical types: CMB and DMB.

Table 2: Mounting Bracket survey

A1 A2 Converter Converter Chassis-mounting DIN-mounting Delivery[mm] [mm] case size series Part no. Part no. content

95.0 90.0 A01 PSR, PSA CMBA01-iRY/80 DMBA01-iRY/80 PCB, screw teminal blocks,(Vi max 40, 60, 80 V) 4 diodes, capacitor C1 and

PSA CMBA01-iRY/144 DMBA01-iRY/144 C- or D-bracket with screws

(Vi max 144 V)

72.5 67.5 2"×2" IMR6, IMR15 CMB2×2-BCFG DMB2×2-BCFG PCB, screw teminal blocks,IMP6, IMP12 and C- or D-bracket

50.0 45.0 DIL 24 IMP1, IMP3, IXP3 CMB3W-123 DMB3W-123IMX4 Option K

72.5 67.5 1"×2" IMX7 CMBIMS/X7 DMBIMS/X7 See Basic Kit C/DMBIMS/X7IMS7

A2

8538

12023

Fig. 5"DMB" DIN-rail mounting bracket dimensionsBracket: Polycarbonate, black




Fig. 6aC/DMBA01- .. circuit diagram

MB

A01

-iRY

D1 D2D3 D4 C1 C2++

R1X1 X2

Inpu

t

Out

put

Vi Gi i RG Go Vo

1 1

12026

Fig. 6bC/DMBA01- .. print layout

PSR/PSAA01-iRY

X2 - 3X2 - 2

X1 - 4

X2 - 1X1 - 3

X1 - 1

X1 - 2

D1

D2

D3

D4 C2 C1

R1

Gi

Vi

Vo

Ri

Go

+ +

12025

CMB: Chassis Mounting BracketThe kit consists of a PCB for the converter, a set of screwterminals allowing for easy electrical connection and twoaluminium profiles, attached to the PCB by means of fourscrews, which serve as the chassis mounting bracket. Fourdifferent versions according to table 2 are available.

Details on the layout of the PCB's and diagrams are given inthe description below.

DMB: DIN-Rail Mounting BracketThe DMB kit differs from the "CMB" version by a bracketsuited for DIN-rail mounting (according to EN 50022). Theblack plastic body of the bracket holds the PCB by means ofa snap-in device. Four different versions according to table2 are available.

Details on the layout of the PCB's and diagrams are given inthe description below.

C/DMBA01-.. Electrical DescriptionThis bracket is designed for non-isolated SwitchingRegulators of the PSR and PSA series in the A01 casesize, equipped with "Option Y". Technical details, i.e. max.input voltage etc. are described in the relevant PSR andPSA data and further information is given in the applicationnotes. The use of the optional inhibit- and R-functions(external output voltage adjustment with R1) is possibleand the device can be driven either from a DC-source orfrom a transformer secondary voltage.

– DC-input: Consider the forward voltage drop across therectifier diodes (also providing reverse polarityprotection). Capacitor C1 compensates the negativeconverter input impedance in case of long connectionwires to the module.

– AC-input: The recommended transformer secondary vol-tage is 48 Vrms for PSR and 72 Vrms for PSA (Vi max 144 V)

Exception: Input voltage for PSR 54 (PSA 55) is 20 Vrms.PSR 54 (PSA 55) and PSR 362 require anadditional capacitor (C2) of at least 470 μF.

C/DMB2×××××2-BCFG Electrical Description

This bracket allows the mounting of isolated DC-DC con-verters of series IMR6, IMR15, IMP6 and IMP12 in 2" by 2"cases with either one or two output voltages of 5, 12 or 15 V.The technical details are given in the relevant IMR6, IMR15,IMP6, IMP12.

Depending on the application input transient protectionmay be incorporated (e.g., an appropriately dimensionedTranszorb diode D1).




MB 2×2 BCFGInput

Output

Gi

SD

Vi

D1

X1

X2

4

3

2

1

2

12029

Fig. 7bC/DMB2×2-BCFG print layout

Vo(Vo+)

(Go)

Go(Vo–)

X2 - 1

X2 - 2

X2 - 4

X2 - 3

Vi

Gi

SD

X1 - 2

X1 - 4

X1 - 1

X1 - 3

IMR 6IMR 15IMP 6

IMP 12

D1

12027

Fig. 7aC/DMB2×2-BCFG circuit diagram

Basic Kit CMBIMX/S7

For use with 1"×2" DC-DC converter types:IML10, IMS7 and IMX7

The basic kit contains the following:– Two mounting rails, 83 mm– Four screws M 2.5 x 6– Four nuts M 2.5– PCB ZGN 09601 A– Three 2-pole terminal blocks

(2× for X1 terminal, 1× for X3 terminal)– One 3-pole terminal block for X2 terminal– Three wire jumpers 5.08 mm (positions B1, B4, B5)– One wire jumper 10.16 mm (position D1)– Six wire jumpers 6.8 mm (positions L2, L4, L6)– Circuit diagram no. YSK 25300 S3 01

Basic Kit DMBIMX/S7

For use with 1"×2" DC-DC converter types:IML10, IMS7 and IMX7

The basic kit contains the following:– DIN-mounting support for 35 mm DIN-rail systems– PCB ZGN 09601 A– Three 2-pole terminal blocks

(2× for X1 terminal, 1× for X3 terminal)– One 3-pole terminal block for X2 terminal– Three wire jumpers 5.08 mm (positions B1, B4, B5)– One wire jumper 10.16 mm (position D1)– Six wire jumpers 6.8 mm (positions L2, L4, L6)– Circuit diagram no. YSK 25300 S3 01

C/DMB3W-123 Electrical Description

This bracket is designed for galvanically isolated DC-DCconverters of the IMP1, IMP3 and IXP3, IMX4 (option K) se-ries in DIL 24 cases with one or two output voltages. The pinconfiguration of the converter groups single, double, anddual and all technical converter details are described in therelevant data sheet.

Depending on the application input transient protectionmay be incorporated (e.g. an appropriately dimensionedTranszorb diode D1) .

IMP 1IMP 3IXP 3

SDVi+Vi+

Vi-Vi-

X1 - 2X1 - 4

D1

X1 - 1

Vo+Vo-Vo2 X2 - 4

Vo+ X2 - 3

Vo1/Vo- X2 - 1

Go2

X2 - 2comcomGo+

2012

2324

13

1516

11109

12

12028

C1

C2

C3

Fig. 8aC/DMB3W-123 circuit diagram for all pin configurations

Fig. 8bC/DMB3W-123 print layout

MB 3W-123Input Output

X1

X2D1

1

1

2

3

4

4

3

2

1

12030

C2 C1 C3




Mounting Instructions for Basic Kit

Single output units IML10, IMS7 and IMX7

– Solder the wire jumpers into positions as below:1. D1 (10.16mm)2. B1 (5.08 mm) , inhibit.

Note: This jumper should be fitted if the inhibit is notactively used. An open inhibit disables the converter.

3. L2-A and L2-B, L6-A and L6-B (6.8mm)4. L4-A and L4-B (6.8mm), only necessary if remote

R-input is used.

– Solder terminal blocks5. X1: Position Vi+/ Vi–, 2-pole terminal block6. X1: Position i/n.c., 2-pole terminal block

(only necessary in the case of remote inhibit)7. X3: Position Vo+/ Vo–, 2-pole terminal block8. X2: Position n.c, R, Vo–, 3-pole terminal block

(only necessary in the case of remote Vo adjust-ment by e.g. an external voltage source)

– Solder the selected DC-DC converter

– Mount PCB onto rails by using the 4 screws and nuts orsnap PCB onto the DIN mounting support.

– Perform function test

Double output units IML10, IMS7 and IMX7

– Solder the wire jumpers into positions as below:1. D1 (10.16mm)2. B1 (5.08 mm), inhibit

Note: This jumper should be fitted if the inhibit is notactively used. An open inhibit disables the converter.

3. L2-A and L2-B, L6-A and L6-B, L4-A and L4-B(all 6.8mm)

– For applications with the 2 outputs in parallel:4. Place/solder jumpers B4 and B5, (5.08mm)

– Solder terminal blocks5. X1: Position Vi+/ Vi–, 2-pole terminal block6. X1: Position i/R (Trim), 2-pole terminal block

(only necessary in the case of remote inhibit oroutput voltage trimming by an external voltagesource)

7. X3: Position Vo1+/ Vo1–, 2-pole terminal block 8.X2: Position n.c/Vo2+/Vo2–, 3-pole terminal block

– Solder the selected DC-DC converter

– Mount PCB onto rails by using the 4 screws and nuts orsnap PCB onto the DIN mounting support.

– Perform function test

Application specific circuitry

The assembly C/DMBIMX/S7 offers a variety of additionalexternal circuitries which may be implemented onto thePCB ZGN 09601 A. See circuit diagram YSK 25300 S3 /01.Please also consult the IMS/X7 data sheet.

Depending upon the application the following pheripheraladditions can be made:

– Reverse polarity protection by a series diode D1.

– Improved input transient protection according to IEC/EN61000-4-5, level 2, by chokes L1 or L2-A, L2-B (EMC ver-sion) and capacitor C1.

– Remote inhibit.Note: If the inhibit is not actively used the inhibit has tobe connected to Vi– by jumper B1.

– External output voltage trimming/adjustment

Single output units:

a) Vo – adjustment in the range of 70/75 - 100% of Vo nom

by resistors RX3 or RX4 or combinations of RX3/RX4.

b) Vo – adjustment in the range of 100 - 105% of Vo nom byresistors RX1 or RX2 or combinations of RX1/RX2.

Double output units:

a) Vo – trimming by resistor R2 in the range of 100 -105% of Vo nom

b) Vo – trimming in the range of 70/75 - 100% of Vo nom bya current diode together with a Zener diode D2 appli-cable for 24/48 IMS7 and 20/40 IMX7 types.

– Reduced output ripple (by approx. factor 5) by usingchokes L3/L5 together with electrolytic capacitorsC8/C9.

– Improved electromagnetic emission EN 55022, level B,lead length to load 1 m. (Level A for 110 IMX7 types)

This requires all capacitors and output chokes as percircuit diagram YSK 25300 S3 /01 whereby the couplingcapacitor C10 connected to Vi– via jumper B2 isforeseen for 24/48IMS/L types and 20/40/70 IMX 7 types.

For 110IMX7 types the coupling capacitor C11 or C12should be used connected to Vo+ via jumper B3.

Note:– For single output units or double output units with the 2

outputs in parallel one filter set (L5 or L6-A/L6-B)together with C7 and C9 is sufficient.

– Wire jumpers B2 and B3 should not be mountedtogether onto the PCB as this would cause a shortcircuit.

– The coupling capacitors C10 or C11/12 should be Y2ceramic types to maintain the outputs SELV

Application specific assemblies are available on request.




+C11

100 μ100 V

B1

L1

L2 - A

L2 - B+

C3470n63V

D3

E - 2025N

R1

C2150n250V

X1

X1

X1

X1

+

-

i

R

D1BYV27-200

B2 B3

R2D2ZPD 16V

Vi

B4

B5

RX

1

RX

2

RX

3

RX

4L3

L4 - A

L4 - B

L5

L6 - A

L6 - B

14

13

12

11

10

nc

Vo2+[R]

Vi +

Vi -

i

R[nc]

Vo2+[Vo-]

Vo1+[Vo+]

Vo1-[Vo-]

IMX 7IMS 7

[ ] = Single Output Version

C10Ker Y2

4n7250V

C11Y2

47n250V

C12Y2

60n250V

1

2

3

4

C41u63V

C5470n63V

C61u63V

C7470n63V

X2

X2

X3

+

-

+

-

C8180u50V

C9180u50V

+

+

X2

X3

Vo2

Vo1

12036

Fig. 9aC/DMBIMX/S 7 circuit diagram

Fig. 9bC/DMBIMX/S 7 arrangement of the terminals on the PCB

Note: Where the pin/terminal designations for single outputunits deviate from double output units they are shown inbrakets.

1 Valid for 24/48 IMS/IML and 20/40 IMXfor 70 IMX use 150 V typefor 110 IMX use 200 V type

12037

IMS/X 7

X1

X3

X2

R (n.c.)

i

Vi–

Vi+

Vo1– (Vo–)

Vo1+ (Vo+)

Vo2– (Vo–)

Vo2+ (R)

n.c.

C7

C6 C4

C5

L5L6

L3L4

L2 L1 C2C2 C8 x

x RX4RX3RX2

RX1

B5

C9

xC10B4B2

C12C11

B1

B3

C3

R2

R1D2 D3

OutputInput




Universal Mounting Bracket(DIN- and Chassis Mounting)

UMB-LHMQ

A special Universal Mounting Bracket has been designedfor vertical or upright chassis- and DIN-Rail mounting of the19" cassette type converters shown in table below.


Converter Converter Chassis-mounting Deliverycase size series Part no. content

L04 PSL UMB-LHMQ Alu-profile, two screws andH02, M02 H, M a DIN-rail clamp with screwQ01, Q03, Q04 Q, PC, P

Fig. 10DIN-rail clampSteel, galvanized

49

14

47.5

M4

12031




3

20.55

84

168

127158

20.55

204

2914

5

4.5

5.5

10

M4 (3×)

1203

2

Fig. 11"VMB" universal mounting bracket dimensionsAluminium, untreated

UMB-W - (Shock resistant Wall Mounting)

For the DIN-rail snap-fit "Convert Select" Front End Line,mounting bracket sets for shock resistant wall mounting areavailable.


Converter Converter Wall-mounting Deliverycase series Part No. content

W01 W, X UMB-W Two clamps, four countersunk screws M4, washers and spring washers

4933 ±0.5

4.2

8 18

3

1205

5

Fig. 12




DMB-K/S, DMB-MHQ

By means of these DMB mounting kits, the S, K, PSS, PSK(DMB-K/S) and the M, H, Q, PC, P (DMB-MHQ) converterscan be adapted to the DIN rail. The kit consists of twoaluminium brakets to be mounted on each side of theconverter, including a clamp. The DMB-K/S kit contains twodifferent sets of screws for the adaption of the bracketseither to S/PSS or K/PSK converter types. The design of thekit is made such that the fixture is very tight and as a resultthe assembly can also be used for mobile applications.

Table 5: Mounting bracket survey

Case Converter Typesize series Part no.

S01 PSS DMB-K/SS02 SK01 PSKK02 K

M02 M DMB-MHQH02 HQ01 QQ03 PCQ04 P

CMB-SThis mounting kit allows for chassis mounting of the S andPSS converters, if access is only possible from the front ofthe chassis. (If space conditions are very tight, option B1 orB can be used in place of the heat sink. Please refer to thedescription of the respective converter.)

This kit uses parts of the DMB-K/S kit since it consists ofthe same two brackets but without the clamps and fitted theother way around on the heat sink.

Table 6: Mounting bracket survey

Case Converter Typesize series Part no.

S01 PSS CMB-SS02 S

Isolation Pads for PCB MountingIn applications where PCB mounting converters are placedon top of double sided boards, the use of Isolation Pads isrecommended. These fibre pads avoid short circuits andprovide excellent protection against possible damage totracks. For selection and part numbers refer to table below.

Table 7 : Isolation Pad survey

Case Converter Isolation pad Dimensions Partsize series [mm] no.

A01 PSR, PSA Isolation A 70 × 50 × 0.3 ISOLATIONA,A01

B02 PSB Isolation B 107 × 71 × 0.3 ISLOATIONB,B02

C03 PSC Isolation C 152 × 86 × 0.3 ISOLATIONC,C03

2"×2" IMR 6/15 Isolation 2"×2" 53 × 53 × 0.3 ISOLATION2"×2"




Flexible H11 PCBIf cassette type converters with male H11 connectors (usedfor example in H or M series) are mounted on wiring boards,the connection between the wiring board and the maleconverter connector may be made using the special H11Flexi-PCB together with the female STV-H11-FB/COconnector (see also: Mating connectors).Part number: H11FLEXI-PCB

3.81 7.62

83.82

5.08 21

.3

24,5

12034

PCB-Tags for PCB MountingSwitching Regulators in B02 or C03 cases may also bemounted directly onto PCB’s. The connection between theconverters' fast-on pins and the PCB can be easily made bymeans of PCB-Tags.

Delivery content: 10 piecesPart number: LOETGABEL(10x)

1

1

5.08

17 55

7

12035

Fig. 13PCB-Tag

Fig. 14H11 Flexi-PCB

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized for use as criticalcomponents in life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systems without the express writtenconsent of the respective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change dependingon the date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.


H Series Data Sheet50 Watt DC-DC Cassette Converters

REV. MAR 27, 2006 Page 1 of 19 www.power-one.com

• Wide input voltage range suitable for battery operation

• Efficient input filter and built-in surge and transientsuppression circuitry

• Outputs individually isolated

• Outputs fully protected against overload

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950

DescriptionThe H series of DC-DC converters represents a broad andflexible range of cassette power supplies for use inadvanced electronic systems. Features include highefficiency, reliability, and reasonable output voltage noise.

The converter inputs are protected against surges andtransients occuring at the source lines. Input over- andundervoltage cut-out circuitry disables the outputs if theinput voltage is outside the specified range.

All outputs are open- and short-circuit proof and areprotected against overvoltages by means of built-insuppressor diodes. The outputs can be inhibited by a logicsignal applied to the connector pin 2 (i). If the inhibitfunction is not used, pin 2 should be connected to pin 23 toenable the outputs.


Full input-to-output, input-to-case, output-to-case, andoutput-to-output isolation is provided. The converters aredesigned and built according to the international safetystandard IEC/EN 60950 and have been approved by the

safety agencies TÜV and UL (USA and Canada).

The case design allows operation at nominal load up to50 °C in a free air ambient temperature. If forced cooling isprovided, the ambient temperature may exceed 50 °C, butthe case temperature should remain below 80 °C under allconditions.

A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal whichdisables the outputs if the case temperature TC exceeds thelimit. The outputs are automatically re-enabled when thetemperature drops below the limit.

Various options are available to adapt the converters toindividual applications.

The converters may either be plugged into 19-inch racksystems according to DIN 41494, or be chassis mounted.

1686.6"

391.54" 8TE

1114.37" 3U


Description ....................................................................... 1Model Selection ............................................................... 2Part Number Description and Product Marking ............... 2Functional Description ..................................................... 3Electrical Input Data ......................................................... 4Electrical Output Data ...................................................... 5Auxiliary Functions ........................................................... 8

Page

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................ 10Mechanical Data ............................................................ 11Immunity to Environmental Conditions ........................... 12Safety and Installation Instructions ................................ 12Description of Options .................................................... 15Accessories .................................................................... 19

Wide input voltage ranges up to 60 VDC1, 2, or 3 outputs up to 48 VDCClass I equipment

Features




Model Selection

Table 1: Model types

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Input Voltage Range and Efficiency 1 Option

Vo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min to V max ηmin Vi min to Vi max ηmin Vi min to Vi max ηmin

[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 8 to 15 VDC 2 [%] 14 to 30 VDC 2 [%] 28 to 60VDC 2 [%]

5.1 8.0 - - - - 12H1001-2R 73 24H1001-2R 75 48H1001-2R 76 V2, V312.0 4.0 - - - - 12H1301-2R 79 24H1301-2R 82 48H1301-2R 82 D1 to D815.0 3.4 - - - - 12H1501-2R 80 24H1501-2R 82 48H1501-2R 83 -724.0 2.0 - - - - 12H1601-2R 81 24H1601-2R 83 48H1601-2R 8548.0 1.0 - - - - 12H1901-2R 2 83 24H1901-2R 2 85 48H1901-2R 2 86

12.0 2.0 12.0 2.0 - - 12H2320-2 79 24H2320-2 80 48H2320-2 8215.0 1.7 15.0 1.7 - - 12H2540-2 80 24H2540-2 81 48H2540-2 83

5.1 5.0 12.0 0.7 12.0 0.7 12H3020-2 77 24H3020-2 78 48H3020-2 795.1 5.0 15.0 0.6 15.0 0.6 12H3040-2 77 24H3040-2 79 48H3040-2 80

1 Efficiency measured at Vi nom and Io nom2 Input voltage range 12H1901-2R: 9 to 15 VDC, 24H1901-2R: 18 to 30 VDC, 48H1901-2R: 36 to 60 VDC

Part Number Description and Product Marking

Type Key 48 H 2 5 40 -2 R D V

Input voltage range Vi: 8 to 15 VDC ............. 1214 to 30 VDC ............. 2428 to 60 VDC ............. 48

Series ...............................................................................H

Number of outputs .................................................... 1 to 3

Output 1, Vo1 nom: 5.1 V ............... 012 V ............... 315 V ............... 524 V ............... 648 V ............... 9

Single output modules ................................................... 01Output 2 and 3, Vo2 nom, Vo3 nom: 12 V ............. 20

15 V ............. 40

Options and features:Ambient temperature range TA –10 to 50 °C .................. -2Extended temperature range TA –25 to 71 °C ................. -7Output voltage control input (single output modules only)RSave data signal (D1 to D8, to be specified) ....................D 1

ACFAIL signal (V2, V3, to be specified) ........................... V 1

1 Option D excludes option V and vice versa

Example: 48H1501-2RD3: DC-DC converter, input voltage range 28 to 60 V, providing output with 15 V/3.4 A;equipped with an output voltage control input and undervoltage monitoring.

Model numbers highlighted in yellow or shaded are not recommended for new designs.




Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input filter to the inputcapacitor. This capacitor sources a single-transistor forwardconverter. Each output is powered by a separate secondarywinding of the main transformer. The resultant voltages arerectified and their ripples smoothed by a power choke. Thecontrol logic senses the main output voltage Vo1 andgenerates, with respect to the maximum admissible outputcurrents, the control signal for the primary switching

transistor. This signal is fed back via a coupling transformer.

The auxiliary outputs Vo2 and Vo3 are unregulated. Eachauxiliary output's current is sensed and transferred to themain control circuit using a current transformer. If one of theoutputs is driven into current limit, the other outputs willreduce their output voltages as well because all outputcurrents are controlled by the same control circuit.

Fig. 1DC-DC converter block diagram

1 Single output modules H1000 (R input)

Inpu

t filt

er

Current limitationoutput 3


Currentlimitationoutput 2

29

11

8

23

5

26

32

17

14

20

For

war

d co

nver

ter

appr

ox. 7

0 kH

z

Y

1

1

Y

Y

Y Y

17

14

2

Vi+

Vi–

i

D/V

R

G

CMKT

CMKT

03067




Electrical Input DataGeneral conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Connector pins 2 and 23 interconnected, R input not connected.

Table 2: Input data

Input 12H 24H 48H

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max Unit

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 to Io nom 8 15 14 30 28 60 VDC

..H1901-2R TC min to TC max 9 15 18 30 36 60

Vi nom Nominal input voltage 12 24 48

Ii Input current Vi nom, Io nom 1 5.0 2.5 1.3 A

Pi 0 No-load input power: Vi nom

Single output I o1,2,3 = 0 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 WDouble output 4 6 4 6 4 6Triple output 4 6 4 6 4 6

Pi inh Idle input power inhibit mode 2 2 2

Iinr p 3 Peak inrush current Vi = Vi max 380 380 350 A

tinr r Rise time RS = 0 Ω 260 50 20 μs

tinr h Time to half valueTC = 25°C

110 75 40

Ri Input resistance TC = 25 °C 40 80 175 mΩ

Ci Input capacitance 2200 3300 750 1200 190 300 μF

Ui abs Input voltage limits 0 20 0 40 0 80 VDCwithout any damage

1 With multiple output modules, the same condition for each output applies.2 RS = source resistance3 I inr p = Vi/(Rs + Ri)

Input Under-/Overvoltage Lockout

If the input voltage remains below 0.8 Vi min or exceeds1.1 Vi max (approx. values), an internally generated inhibitsignal disables the output(s). When checking this functionthe absolute maximum input voltage rating Vi abs must becarefully considered (see table: Electrical Input Data).Between Vi min and the undervoltage lockout level the outputvoltage may be below the value defined in table: Outputdata (see: Technical Information: Measuring and Testing).

Reverse Polarity

The converter is not protected against reverse polarity atthe input. (Reverse polarity will cause the external fuse toblow.)

Input Fuse

The converters do not incorporate any fuse. External fusesinstalled in the wiring to the inputs are essential.

Table 3: Recommended fuse types

Series Schurter type Part number

12H SPT 10 A 250 V 0001.2514

24H SPT 8 A 250 V 0001.2513

48H SPT 3.15 A 250 V 0001.2509




Electrical Output DataGeneral conditions– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Connector pins 2 and 23 interconnected, R input not connected.

Table 4a: Output data

Output 5.1 V 12 V 15 V


Vo1 Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 1 5.00 5.20 11.76 12.24 14.70 15.30 V

Vo2/3 - 11.10 12.90 13.90 16.10

Vo2/3 0 Vi min to Vi max - 13.80 17.25Io2/3 = 0

Vo1 P Output overvoltage 7.5 21 25

Vo2/3 Pprotection - 25 31

Io nom Output current Vi min to Vi max see: Type Survey and Key Data

Io L Output current TC min to TC max see fig.: Typical output voltage Vo1 versus output currents Iolimitation response

Vo1/2/3 Output Switch. freq. Vi nom, Io nom 1 30 50 60 100 50 80 mVpp

voltage Total IEC/EN 61204 60 200 70 200 75 200noise BW = 20 MHz

ΔVo1 U Static line regulation Vi min to Vi nom ±50 ±100 ±100 mVΔVo2/3 U

Vi nom to Vi max - ±150 ±150Io nom

1

ΔVo1 I Static load regulation Vi nom 50 150 150

ΔVo2/3 IIo = Io nom to 0 2

- see: H2320/H3020 see: H2540/H3040= ΔVo 2/3 vers. Io 2/3 = ΔVo 2/3 vers. Io 2/3

ΔVo1 Ic Static cross load Vi nom ±5 ±15 ±10 ±30 ±15 ±45

ΔVo2/3 Icregulation 3 Io = Io nom to 0 4

- see: H2320/H3020 see: H2540/H3040= ΔVo 2/3 vers. Io 2/3 = ΔVo 2/3 vers. Io 2/3

Table 4b: Output data

Output 24 V 48 V

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max Unit

Vo1 Output voltage Vi nom, Io1 nom 23.52 24.48 47.04 48.96 V

Vo P Overvoltage prot. 41 85

Io1 nom Output current Vi min to Vi max see: Type Survey and Key Data

Io1 L Output current TC min to TC max see: Typical output voltage Vo1

limitation response versus output currents Io

Vo1/2/3 Output Switch. freq. Vi nom, Io nom 1 30 50 20 40 mVpp

voltage Total IEC/EN 61204 75 200 35 150noise BW = 20 MHz

ΔVo1 U Static line regulation Vi min to Vi nom ±150 ±150 mVVi nomto Vi max

Io1 nom

ΔVo1 I Static load regulation Vi nom 150 150Io1 = Io1 nom to 0

1 With multiple-output models, the same condition for each output applies.2 Condition for specified output. With multiple output models, other output(s) loaded with constant current Io = Io nom.3 Condition for non-specified output, individually tested, other output(s) loaded with constant current Io = Io nom.4 Multiple-output models.




Output ProtectionEach output is protected against overvoltages which couldoccur due to a failure of the internal control circuit. Voltagesuppressor diodes (which under worst case condition maybecome a short circuit) provide the required protection. Thesuppressor diodes are not designed to withstand externallyapplied overvoltages. Overload at any of the outputs willcause a shut-down of all outputs.

Fig. 2Typical output voltage Vo1 versus output currents Io

Fig. 3H2320/H3020: ΔVo2/3 (typ.) versus Io2/3 with different Io1

Fig. 4H2540/H3040: ΔVo2/3 (typ.) versus Io2/3 with different Io1

Parallel and Series ConnectionMain outputs of equal nominal voltage can be connected inparallel. It is important to assure that the main output of amultiple-output converter is forced to supply a minimumcurrent of 0.1 A to enable correct operation of its ownauxiliary outputs.Outputs one and two of a double-output model may beconnected in parallel without a minimum currentrequirement at the main output. Outputs two and three of atriple-output model can be connected in parallel.In parallel operation, one or more of the main outputs mayoperate continuously in current limitation which will causean increase in case temperature. Consequently, areduction of the maximum ambient temperature by 10 K isrecommended.Main or auxiliary outputs can be connected in series withany other output of the same or another converter. In seriesconnection, the maximum output current is limited by thelowest current limit. Output ripple and regulation values areadded. Connection wiring should be kept as short aspossible.

If output terminals are connected together in order toestablish multi-voltage configurations, e.g. +5.1 V, ±12 Vetc. the common ground connecting point should be asclose as possible to the connector of the converter to avoidexcessive output ripple voltages.

Vo2/3 [V]

13

12

11

0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0

Vo2/3 0

Io2/3

Io2/3 nom

Io1 nom

0.5 • Io1 nomIo1 = 0 A

05119

Vo2/3 [V]

16

15

14

0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0

Vo2/3 0

Io2/3

Io2/3 nom

Io1 nom

0.5 • Io1 nomIo1 = 0 A

05120

1.0

0

0.5

Vo1

0.5

Vo1 nom

IoIo nom1.0 1.2

Io nom

Io1

Io2,Io3

IoL1

IoL2,IoL3

.95

05022




Thermal ProtectionA temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signalwhich disables the outputs if the case temperature exceedsTC max. The outputs are automatically re-enabled if thetemperature drops below this limit.

Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air(convection cooling) at the indicated maximum ambienttemperature TA max (see table: Temperature specifications)and is operated at its nominal input voltage and outputpower, the temperature measured at the Measuring point ofcase temperature TC (see: Mechanical Data) will approachthe indicated value TC max after the warm-up phase.However, the relationship between TA and TC dependsheavily on the conditions of operation and integration into asystem. The thermal conditions are influenced by inputvoltage, output current, airflow and temperature ofsurrounding components and surfaces. TA max is therefore,contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under alloperating conditions TC remains within the limits statedin the table: Temperature specifications.

Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sinkallows TA to be higher than 50 °C (e.g. 65 °C) if TC max is notexceeded.For -2 units at an ambient temperature TA of 65 °C with onlyconvection cooling, the maximum permissible current foreach output is approx. 50% of its nominal value as perfigure.

Output ResponseThe reaction of the outputs is similar whether the inputvoltage is applied or the inhibit is switched low.An output voltage overshoot will not occur when theconverter is turned on or off.

Fig. 5Output current derating versus temperature for -2 units.

Table 5: Output response time tr and tf

Type of Converter tr at Po = 0 and tf at Po = Po nom tr and tf at Po = 3/4 Po nom tr at Po = Po nom Unittyp max typ max typ max

H1001-2R 3 7 3 7 5 15 msH1301-2R 5 15 8 20 10 30H1501-2R 3 7 5 15 15 40H1601-2R 8 20 15 35 20 60H1901-2R 35 90 50 140 85 220

H2320-2 10 30 15 40 25 70H2540-2 8 20 10 30 20 50

H3020-2 30 75 45 120 75 200H3040-2 20 60 30 80 50 140

Conditions: R input not used. For multiple output modules the figures indicated in the table above relate to the outputwhich reacts slowest. All outputs are resistively loaded. Variation of the input voltage within Vi min to Vi max does not influencethe values.

Fig. 6Output response as a function of input voltage (on/offswitching) or inhibit control

00.10.20.3

0.40.50.6

0.70.8

40 60 70 80

Io/Io nom

TA [ C]

0.9

1.0Forced cooling

05032

TC max

50

Convection cooling

TA min

0 t r t ft

t0

Inhibit

1

Output

0.1

Vo nom

t0

1

0.95Vo nom

thVi

05025




Vinh Inhibit input voltage to keep Vo = on Vi min to Vi max –50 0.8 VDCoutput voltage Vo = off TC min to TC max 2.4 50


Auxiliary Functions

i Inhibit for Remote On and OffNote: With open i input: Output is disabled (Vo = off).

The outputs of the module may be enabled or disabled bymeans of a logic signal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied betweenthe inhibit input i and the negative pin of output 1 (Vo1–). Insystems with several units, this feature can be used, forexample, to control the activation sequence of theconverters. If the inhibit function is not required, connectthe inhibit pin 2 to pin 23 to enable the outputs (active lowlogic, fail safe). For output response refer to: OutputResponse.



R-Control for Output Voltage Adjustment

Note: With open R input, Vo ³ Vo nom.

As a standard feature, single-output models offer anadjustable output voltage identified by letter R in the typedesignation.

The output voltage Vo1 can either be adjusted with anexternal voltage (Vext) or with an external resistor (R1 or R2).The adjustment range is approximative 0 to 110% ofVo nom. For output voltages Vo > Vo nom, the minimum inputvoltage according to Electrical Input Data increasesproportionally to Vo/Vo nom.

Fig. 9Voltage adjustment with external voltage Vext

a) Vo ≅ 0 to 110% Vo nom, using Vext between R (14) andG (17):

Vo VextVext ≅ 2.5 V • ––––– Vo ≅ Vo nom • –––––

Vo nom 2.5 V

Fig. 10Voltage adjustment with external resistor R1 or R2

b) Vo ≅ 0 to 100% Vo nom, using R1 between R (14) andG (17):

R1 4000 Ω • VoVo ≅ Vo nom • ––––––––––– R1 ≅ ––––––––––

R1 + 4000 Ω Vo nom - Vo

c) Vo ≅ Vo nom to Vo max, using R2 between R (14) and

Vo1+ (20):

Vo max = Vo nom + 10%

4000 Ω • Vo • (Vo nom – 2.5 V)R2 ≅ ––––––––––––––––––––––––

2.5 V • (Vo – Vo nom)

Vo nom • 2.5 V • R2Vo ≅ ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

2.5 V • (R2 + 4000 Ω) – Vo nom • 4000 Ω

Caution: To prevent damage, Vext should not exceed8 V, nor be negative.

Caution: To prevent damage, R2 should never be lessthan 47 kΩ.

Note: R inputs of n models with paralleled outputs may beparalleled, too, but if only one external resistor is to beused, its value should be R1/n, or R2/n respectively.


Vi+

Vi– Vo–

i

Vo+I inh

Vinh

06031

1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032

Vo1+

R–+

G

4000 ΩVref

R1

R2

06088

Vo1+

R+

4000 Ω

G

Vref

Vext

–+

06087




Table 7b: R 2 for Vo > Vo nom (conditions: Vi nom, Io nom, rounded up to resistor values E 96); R1 =

Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 V Vo nom = 48 VVo [V] R2 [kΩ] Vo [V] R2 [kΩ] Vo [V] R2 [kΩ] Vo [V] R2 [kΩ] Vo [V] R2 [kΩ]

5.15 464 12.1 1780 15.2 1470 24.25 3160 48.5 68105.20 215 12.2 909 15.4 750 24.50 1620 49.0 34805.25 147 12.3 619 15.6 511 24.75 1100 49.5 23705.30 110 12.4 464 15.8 383 25.00 825 50.0 17805.35 90.9 12.5 383 16.0 332 25.25 715 50.5 14705.40 78.7 12.6 316 16.2 274 25.50 590 51.0 12705.45 68.1 12.7 274 16.4 237 25.75 511 51.5 11005.50 61.9 12.8 249 16.5 226 26.00 453 52.0 953

13.0 200 26.25 402 52.5 84513.2 169 26.40 383 52.8 806

Table 7a: R1 for Vo < Vo nom (conditions: Vi nom, Io nom, rounded up to resistor values E 96); R2 =

Vo nom = 5.1 V Uo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 V Vo nom = 48 VVo [V] R1 [kΩ] Vo [V] R1 [kΩ] Vo [V] R1 [kΩ] Vo [V] R1 [kΩ] Vo [V] R1 [kΩ]

0.5 0.432 2.0 0.806 2.0 0.619 4.0 0.806 8.0 0.8061.0 0.976 3.0 1.33 4.0 1.47 6.0 1.33 12.0 1.331.5 1.65 4.0 2.0 6.0 2.67 8.0 2.0 16.0 2.02.0 2.61 5.0 2.87 8.0 4.53 10.0 2.87 20.0 2.872.5 3.83 6.0 4.02 9.0 6.04 12.0 4.02 24.0 4.023.0 5.76 7.0 5.62 10.0 8.06 14.0 5.62 28.0 5.623.5 8.66 8.0 8.06 11.0 11.0 16.0 8.06 32.0 8.064.0 14.7 9.0 12.1 12.0 16.2 18.0 12.1 36.0 12.14.5 30.1 10.0 20.0 13.0 26.1 20.0 20.0 40.0 20.05.0 200.0 11.0 44.2 14.0 56.2 22.0 44.2 44.0 44.2


Fig. 11LEDs "OK" and "i" status versus input voltageConditions: Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 VVi uv = undervoltage lockout, Vi ov = overvoltage lockout

LED "OK" status versus output currentConditions: Vi min to Vi max, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i"versus case temperatureConditions: Vi min to Vi max, Io ≤ Io nom, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i"versus Vinh

Conditions: Vi min to Vi max, Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj


Ui

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OK

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

TC

i


Vi inh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

LED off LED onLED Status undefined

06090




battery-driven mobile applications. The H series has beensuccessfully tested to the following specifications:

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A suppressor diode together with an input filter form aneffective protection against input transient voltages whichtypically occur in most installations, but especially in

Electromagnetic Immunity

Table 8: Immunity type tests

Phenomenon Standard 1 Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Per-mode 2 applied imped. procedure oper. form. 3

Electrostatic IEC/EN 2 contact discharge 4000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 10 negative(to case) discharges

Electromagnetic IEC/EN x antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 26 to 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

Electrical fast IEC/EN 1 direct, i /c, +i/–i 500 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 1 min positive yestransient/burst 61000-4-4 2.5 / 5 kHz over 1 min negative


Surge IEC/EN 1 i/c 500 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 +i/–i 2 Ω surges per

1 Related and previous standards are referenced in: Technical Information: Standards.2 i = input, o = output, c = case.3 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation,temporary deviation from specs possible.



Series StandardCISPR 11/EN 55011, 1991CISPR 22/EN 55022, 1987

-30 MHz •30 MHz

12H <A <B

24H <B <B

48H <B <B


Mechanical DataDimensions in mm. Tolerances ±0.3 mm unless otherwise indicated. European

Projection

Fig. 12DC-DC converter in case H02, weight 770 g (approx.)Case aluminium, black finish and self-cooling.


111.2 ±0.8 3U88(11.6)

168.

5 ±

0.5

127

173.

7 ±

0.5

20

100 ±0.6

1.6

6TE

2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32

Male connector H 11 according to DIN 41 612

38.7

95 ±0.5

Measurement point for case temperatureTC


22

68

159.

4


25.4

030

.48

2TE

7.09

17.25

Mounting holes for retaining clips V

12.17

103

3.27

20.5

12.1

94.5 ±0.1

0

31.5

±0.

1

0

ø 3.5

ø 4.0

OK (LED green)

Inhibit i (LED red)

Potentiometer

(option D or V)

Front plate

Main faceRear face

Back plate

09050


Table 11: Temperature specifications, values given are for an air pressure of 800 to 1200 hPa (800 to 1200 mbar)

Temperature Standard -2 Option -7

Characteristics Conditions min max min max Unit

TA Ambient temperature 1 Operational 2 –10 50 –25 71 °C

TC Case temperature 3 –10 80 –25 95

TS Storage temperature 1 Not operational –25 100 –40 100

1 MIL STD 810D section 501.2 and 502.2. 2 See: Thermal considerations. 3 Overtemperature lockout at TC >95 °C (PTC).

Table 12: MTBF

Values at specified Model Types Ground Benign UnitCase Temperature 40 °C

MTBF 1 H1000 384'000 h

H2000 306'000H3000 270'000

Immunity to Environmental Conditions

Table 10: Mechanical stress


Ca Damp heat IEC/DIN IEC 60068-2-3 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Convertersteady state MIL-STD-810D section 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not


Ea Shock IEC/EN/DIN EN 60068-2-27 Acceleration amplitude: 15 gn = 147 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 516.3 Bump duration: 11 ms operating


Eb Bump IEC/EN/DIN EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 10 gn = 98 m/s2

(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 516.3 Bump duration: 16 msNumber of bumps: 6000 (1000 each direction)

Fc Vibration IEC/EN/DIN EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 to 60 Hz)(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 514.3 2 gn = 20 m/s2 (60 to 150 Hz)

Frequency (1 Oct/min): 10 to 150 HzTest duration: 3.75 h (1.25 h each axis)


Connector pin Allocation

The connector pin allocation table defines the electricalpotentials and the physical pin positions on the H11connector. Pin no. 26, the protective earth pin present on all12H to 48H DC-DC converters is leading, ensuring that itmakes contact with the female connector first.

Fig. 13View of male H11 connector.

Table 13: H11 connector pin allocation and designation

Electrical Determination H1000 H2000 H3000Pin Ident Pin Ident Pin Ident

Inhibit control input 2 i 2 i 2 iSafe Data or ACFAIL 5 D or V 5 D or V 5 D or V

Output voltage (positive) 8 Vo1+ 8 8 Vo3+Output voltage (negative) 11 Vo1– 11 11 Vo3–

Control input + 14 RControl input – 17 G


Output voltage (positive) 20 Vo1+ 20 Vo1+ 20 Vo1+Output voltage (negative) 23 Vo1– 23 Vo1– 23 Vo1–

Protective earthing 1 26 26 26

DC input voltage 29 Vi+ 29 Vi+ 29 Vi+DC input voltage 32 Vi– 32 Vi– 32 Vi–

1 Leading pin (pregrounding)

1 Calculated in accordance with MIL-HDBK-217E (calculationaccording to edition F would show even better results)


32 29 26 23 20 17 14 11 8 5 2

10028




Table 14: Isolation

Characteristic Input to Input to Output Output Unitcase output to case to output

Electric Required according to 1.5 3.0 1 0.5 - kVrms

strength IEC/EN 60950 2.1 4.2 1 0.7 - kVDCtest voltage

Actual factory test 1 s 2.8 5.6 1 1.4 0.3

AC test voltage equivalent 2.0 4.0 1 1.0 0.2 kVrms

to actual factory test

Insulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >300 >100 2 MΩ1 In accordance with IEC/EN 60950 only subassemblies are tested in factory with this voltage.2 Tested at 300 VDC.

For creepage distances and clearances refer to: Technical Information: Safety.

Cleaning Agents

In order to avoid possible damage, any penetration ofliquids (e.g. cleaning fluids) is to be prevented, since thepower supplies are not hermetically sealed.

Standards and Approvals

12H to 48H DC-DC converters correspond to class Iequipment. All types are UL recognized according to UL1950, UL recognized for Canada to CAN/CSA C22.2 No.950-95 and TÜV approved to IEC/EN 60950 standards.

The units have been evaluated for:• Building in• Supplementary insulation between input and case and

double or reinforced insulation between input andoutput, based on 250 VAC and 400 VDC

• Operational insulation between output(s) and case• Operational insulation between the outputs• The use in a pollution degree 2 environment• Connecting the input to a primary or secondary circuit

with a maximum transient rating of 2500 V.

The DC-DC converters are subject to manufacturingsurveillance in accordance with the above mentioned UL,CSA, EN and with ISO 9001 standards.

Protection Degree

Condition: Female connector fitted to the unit.

IP 40: All units, except those with option D or V withpotentiometer.

IP 20: All units fitted with option D or V withpotentiometer.

Isolation

The electric strength test is performed as a factory test inaccordance with IEC/EN 60950 and UL 1950 and shouldnot be repeated in the field. Power-One will not honor anyguarantee/warranty claims resulting from electric strengthfield tests.

Installation Instructions

The H series DC-DC converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by anindustrial assembly operation or by professional installers.Installation must strictly follow the national safetyregulations in compliance with the enclosure, mounting,creepage, clearance, casualty, markings, and segregationrequirements of the end-use application. See also:Technical Information: Installation and Application.

Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H11 (see: Accessories). Other installationmethods may not meet the safety requirements.

All DC-DC converters are provided with pin no. 26 ( ),which is reliably connected with their case. For safetyreasons it is essential to connect this pin with the protectiveearth of the supply system if required in: Safety of operatoraccessible output circuit.

Ensure that a cassette failure (e.g. by an internal short-circuit) does not result in a hazardous condition. See also:Safety of operator accessible output circuit.

To prevent excessive current flowing into the cassette (e.g.by an internal short-circuit), an external fuse suitable for theapplication and in compliance with the local requirementsshould be installed in the wiring to one or both input pins(no. 29 and/or no. 32). See also: Input Fuse.

Important: Whenever the inhibit function is not in use,pin no. 2 (i) should be connected to pin no. 23 (Vo1–) toenable the output(s).

Do not open the modules, or guarantee will beinvalidated.

Make sure that there is sufficient airflow possible forconvection cooling. This should be verified by measuringthe case temperature when the unit is installed andoperated in the end-use application. The maximumspecified case temperature TC max shall not be exceeded.See also: Thermal Considerations.

If the end-product is to be UL certified, the temperature ofthe main isolation transformer should be evaluated as partof the end-product investigation.




Table 15: Safety concept leading to a SELV output circuit

Conditions Front end DC-DC converter Result

Nominal Minimum required grade Nominal DC output Minimum required Measures to achieve the Safety statussupply of isolation, to be provided voltage from the safety status of the specified safety status of of the DC-DCvoltage by the AC-DC front end, front end front end output the output circuit converter

including mains supplied circuit output circuitbattery charger

Mains Operational (i.e. there is -400 V 1 (The Primary circuit Double or reinforced insulation, SELV circuit-250 VAC no need for electrical rated voltage based on 250 VAC and 400 VDC

isolation between the between any input (provided by the DC-DC converter)mains supply voltage and pin and earth can and earthed case 2

the DC-DC converter be up to 250 VACinput voltage) or 400 VDC)

-400 V Unearthed Supplementary insulation, basedhazardous voltage on 250 VAC and 400 VDC, andsecondary circuit double or reinforced insulation

based on the maximum nominaloutput voltage from the front end(both provided by the DC-DC con-verter) and earthed case 3

1 The front end output voltage should match the specified operating input voltage range of the DC-DC converter.2 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standard, e.g. IEC/EN 60950.3 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standard, e.g. IEC/EN 60950. If the converter

case shall not be connected with earth, the front end output circuit has to be insulated from earth according to the relevant safetystandard by at least basic insulation, based on the maximum nominal output voltage from the front end, and insulated from theconverter case by at least supplementary insulation, based on the maximum nominal mains voltage. The converter case is thenconsidered to be a double-insulated accessible part.

Fig. 14Schematic safety concept.Use earth connection as per table: Safety concept leadingto a SELV output circuit. Use fuse according to: InstallationInstructions.

Safety of operator accessible output circuit

If the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operatoraccessible, it shall be a SELV circuit according to the IEC/EN 60950 related safety standards.

Since the H series DC-DC converters provide double orreinforced insulation between input and output, based on arated primary input voltage of 250 VAC and 400 VDC onlyoperational insulation is needed between the AC mains andthe input of the DC-DC converter. This means that there isno need for an electrical isolation between the AC mainscircuit and the DC-DC converter input circuit to cause theoutput of an H series DC-DC converter to be a SELV circuit.

Only voltage adaptation and rectification to the specifiedinput voltage range of the DC-DC converter is needed.

The following table shows some possible installationconfigurations, compliance with which causes the outputcircuit of the DC-DC converter to be a SELV circuitaccording to IEC/EN 60950 up to a configured outputvoltage (sum of nominal voltages if in series or +/–configuration) of 36 V.

However, it is the sole responsibility of the installer toassure the compliance with the relevant and applicablesafety regulations. More information is given in: TechnicalInformation: Safety.

AC-DCfrontend

DC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earthconnection

+

–

~

~

10024

Battery

Max. 250 VACor ±400 VDC

Max. 250 VAC or ±400 VDC

Fuse

Fuse



Table 16: Survey of options

Option Function of Option Characteristic

-7 Extended operational ambient temperature range TA = –25 to 71°C

D 1 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (D1 to D8)

V 1 2 Input and output undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specifications ( V2, V3)

1 Option D excludes option V and vice versa2 Only available with main output voltage Vo1 = 5.1 V

-7 Extended Temperature Range

Option -7 extends the operational ambient temperaturerange from –10 to 50 °C (standard) to –25 to 71 °C. Thepower supplies provide full nominal output power withconvection cooling.

D Undervoltage Monitor

The input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitoperates independently of the built-in input undervoltagelockout circuit. A logic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal(NPN output) is generated at pin 5 as soon as one of themonitored voltages drops below the preselected threshold

level Vt. The return for this signal is Vo1– (pin 23). The Doutput recovers when the monitored voltage(s) exceed(s)Vt+Vh. The threshold level Vt is adjustable by apotentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover.

Option D exists in various versions D1 to D8 as shown inthe following table.


Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt]JFET NPN Vi Vo1 of threshold level Vt for Vt min to Vt max

Vti Vto Vhi Vho

D1 D5 no yes – 3.5 V to 48 V 1 – 2.3 to 1

D2 D6 yes no Vi min to Vi max 1 – 3.0 to 0.5 –

D3 D7 yes yes Vi min to Vi max 1 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1

2 3.0 to 0.5 "0"

D4 D8 no yes – 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 2 – "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer (not recommended for mobile applications)2 Fixed value between 95% and 98% of Vo1 (tracking)

JFET output (D1 to D4):

Connector pin D is internally connected via the drain-source path of a JFET (self-conducting type) to thenegative potential of output 1. VD ≤ 0.4 V (logic low)corresponds to a monitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo1)<Vt. The current ID through the JFET should not exceed 2.5mA. The JFET is protected by a 0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 Vagainst external overvoltages.


Vi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 2.5 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 5.25 VFig. 15Options D1 to D4, JFET output

NPN output (D5 to D8):

Connector pin D is internally connected via the collector-emitter path of an NPN transistor to the negative potentialof output 1. VD - 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to amonitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) >Vt + Vh. The currentID through the open collector should not exceed 20 mA. TheNPN output is not protected against external overvoltages.VD should not exceed 40 V.


Vi or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vi and Vo1 > Vt +Vh low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 20 mAFig. 16Options D5 to D8, NPN output


Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007


0

10.95

0

Vi [V DC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min4 tlow min

4 thigh min

th1

Vti +Vhi

Vti


VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto

3


0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

3

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho



11008


If Vi is monitored, the internal input voltage after the inputfilter is measured. Consequently this voltage differs fromthe voltage at the connector pins by the voltage drop ΔVt i

across the input filter. The value of ΔVti depends upon theinput voltage range, threshold level Vt, temperature, andinput current. The input current is a function of the inputvoltage and the output power.

Fig. 18Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VD, ID and Vo1/Vo nom versus time.

Fig. 17Definition of Vti, ΔVti and Vhi (JFET output)

1 n.a.2 With output voltage monitoring the hold-up time th = 03 The D signal remains high if the D output is connected to

an external source.4 t low min = 40 to 200 ms, typically 80 ms


ΔVti Vhi

VD low

VD

VD high

Vi

P o =

Po

nom

P o =

0

P o =

0

Vti

P o =

Po

nom

11021




Formula for additional external input capacitor

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Ci ext = ––––––––––––––––––––– - Ci minη • (Vti

2 – Vi min2)

where as:Ci min = minimum internal capacitance [mF], according to

the table belowCi ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]η = efficiency [%]th = hold-up time [ms]Vi min = minimum input voltage [V]Vti = threshold level [V]

Remarks: The threshold level Vti of option V2 and V3 isadjusted during manufacture to a value according to tableUndervoltage monitor functions, section Option D.

A decoupling diode should be connected in series with theinput to avoid the input capacitance discharging throughother loads connected to the same source voltage.

V ACFAIL signal (VME)

Available for units with Vo1 = 5.1 V.

This option defines an undervoltage monitoring circuitfor the input or the input and main output voltage equivalentto option D, and generates the ACFAIL signal (V signal)which conforms to the VME standard. The low state level ofthe ACFAIL signal is specified at a sink current of IV = 48mA to VV -0.6 V (open-collector output of a NPN transistor).The pull-up resistor feeding the open-collector outputshould be placed on the VME backplane.

After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time th of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops to 4.875 V when the 5.1 V output is fullyloaded. This hold-up time th should be provided by anexternal input capacitance. Consequently the working inputvoltage and the threshold level Vt i should be adequatelyabove the minimum input voltage Vi min of the converter sothat enough energy is remaining in this capacitance.

If the input voltage is below the required level, an externalhold-up capacitor (C i ext) should be added.

the monitored voltage(s) exceed(s) Vt + Vh. The thresholdlevel Vt is adjustable by a potentiometer accessible througha hole in the front cover.Versions V2 and V3 are available as shown below.

Option V operates independently of the built-in inputundervoltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal isgenerated at pin 5 as soon as one of the monitored voltagesdrops below the preselected threshold level Vt. The returnfor this signal is Vo1– (pin 23). The V output recovers when

Table 18: Available internal input capacitance and factorypotentiometer setting of Vti with resulting hold-up time.

Types 12H 24H 48H Unit

Ci min 2.2 0.75 0.19 mF

Vt i 9.5 19.5 39 VDC

th 0.19 0.87 0.89 ms


V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt](VME compatible) of threshold level Vt for Vt min to Vt max

Vi Vo1 Vti Vto Vhi Vho

V2 yes no Vi min to Vi max 1 – 3.0 to 0.5 –

V3 yes yes Vi min to Vi max 1 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1

2 3.0 to 0.5 "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer (not recommended for mobile applications)2 Fixed value between 95% and 98% of Vo1 (tracking), output undervoltage monitoring is not a requirement of VME standard

V output (V2, V3):

Connector pin V is internally connected to the opencollector of an NPN transistor. The emitter is connected tothe negative potential of output 1. VV ≤ 0.6 V (logic low)corresponds to a monitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) <Vt. The current IV through the open collector should notexceed 50 mA. The NPN output is not protected againstexternal overvoltages. VV should not exceed 80 V.

Vi, Vo1 status V output, UV

Vi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VV ≤ 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, IV ≤ 25 µA at VV = 5.1 VFig. 19Output configuration of options V2 and V3

Formula for threshold level for desired value of th:

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100V ti = –––––––––––––––––––––– + Vi min

2

Ci min • η

Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009


3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vi [VDC]

0

t

t

Vti + Vhi

Vti


VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo1

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo1

2.0 V



11010

t

t

t

t

Fig. 21Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VV, IV and Vo1/Vo nom versus time.

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms2 tlow min = 40 to 200 ms, typically 80 ms3 VV level not defined at Vo1 < 2.0 V4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output voltage, if the

pull-up resistor RP is connected to Vo1+. The V signal remainshigh if RP is connected to an external source.

Fig. 20Definition of Vti, ΔVti and Vhi


If Vi is monitored, the internal input voltage is measuredafter the input filter. Consequently this voltage differs fromthe voltage at the connector pins by the voltage drop ΔVti

across input filter and rectifier. The value of ΔVti dependsupon the input voltage range, threshold level Vt,temperature, and input current. The input current is afunction of input voltage and output power.


ΔVti Vhi

VV low

VV

VV high

Vi

P o =

Po

nom

P o =

0

P o =

0

Vti

P o =

Po

nom

11023




AccessoriesA variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable including:

– Front panels for 19" rack mounting, Schroff and Intermassystems.

– Mating H11 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on orpress-fit terminals.

– Connector retention facilities.

– Code key system for connector coding.

– Flexible H11 PCB for mounting of the unit onto a PCB.

– Chassis mounting plates for mounting the 19" cassette toa chassis/wall where only frontal access is given.

– Universal mounting bracket for DIN-rail or chassismounting.

For more detailed information please refer to AccessoryProducts.

H11 female connector,Code key system

Front panels

Flexible H11 PCB

Mounting plate,Connector retention clips

Universal mounting bracket for DIN-rail mounting.

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized foruse as critical components in life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systemswithout the express written consent of the respective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.



K Series Data Sheet150 Watt DC-DC and AC-DC Converters

APR 26, 2006 revised to MAY 15, 2006 Page 1 of 34 www.power-one.com

• Extremely-wide input voltage range• Input over- and undervoltage lockout• Efficient input filter and built-in surge and transient

suppression circuitry• Outputs open- and short-circuit proof• No derating over entire operating temperature range


Description ................................................................................1Model Selection ........................................................................2Part Number Description and Product Marking ........................3Functional Description ..............................................................4Electrical Input Data ..................................................................5Electrical Output Data ..............................................................8Auxiliary Functions ..................................................................12

1686.6"

803.2"16 TE

1114.4"3 U


Page

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ....................................15Immunity to Environmental Conditions ..................................17Mechanical Data ....................................................................18Safety and Installation Instructions ........................................20Description of Options ............................................................24Accessories ............................................................................33EC-Declaration of conformity ..................................................34

Input voltage ranges from 8 to 385 VDC and 85 to 264 VAC, 47-440 Hz1or 2 isolated outputs up to 48 VDCClass I equipment

DescriptionThe K Series of DC-DC and AC-DC converters represents abroad and flexible range of power supplies for use in advancedelectronic systems. Features include high efficiency, highreliability, low output voltage noise and excellent dynamicresponse to load/line changes. LK models can be powered byDC or AC with a wide-input frequency range (without PFC).The converter inputs are protected against surges andtransients. An input over- and undervoltage lockout circuitrydisables the outputs if the input voltage is outside of thespecified range. Certain types include an inrush current limiterpreventing circuit breakers and fuses from tripping at switch-on.All outputs are open- and short-circuit proof and are protectedagainst overvoltages by means of built-in suppressor diodes.The outputs can be inhibited by a logic signal applied to pin 18(i). If the inhibit function is not used, pin 18 must be connectedwith pin 14 to enable the outputs.LED indicators display the status of the converter and allow forvisual monitoring of the system at any time.Full input-to-output, input-to-case, output-to-case and output-to-output isolation is provided. The converters are designed andbuilt according to the international safety standards IEC/EN60950 and EN50155. They have been approved by the safetyagencies TÜV and UL (for USA and Canada).

The case design allows operation at nominal load up to 71 °C in afree-air ambient temperature. If forced cooling is provided, theambient temperature may exceed 71 °C, but the case temperaturemust remain below 95 °C under all conditions.A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal, which disablesthe outputs if the case temperature Tc exceeds the limit. Theoutputs are automatically re-enabled when the temperature dropsbelow the limit.Various options are available to adapt the converters to individualapplications.The converters may either be plugged into a 19" rack systemaccording to IEC 60297-3, or be chassis mounted. They are ideallysuited for Railway applications.

Features

Important: For applications requiring compliance with IEC/EN 61000-3-2(harmonic distortion), please use our LK4000 and LK5000 Series withincorporated power factor correction (PFC).




Output 1 Output 2 Input Voltage Efficiency 1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min - Vi max η[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 8 to 35 VDC [%]

5.1 20.0 - - AK1001-7R 78 -9

12.0 10.0 - - AK1301-7R 80 D

15.0 8.0 - - AK1501-7R 82 V 2

24.0 5.0 - - AK1601-7R 84 P

12.0 5.0 12.0 3 5.0 AK2320-7R 78 T

15.0 4.0 12.0 3 4.0 AK2540-7R 80 B1

24.0 2.5 24.0 3 2.5 AK2660-7R 79 B2

Output 1 Output 2 Input Voltage Eff. 1 Input Voltage Eff. 1 Input Voltage Eff. 1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min - Vi max η Vi min - Vi max η Vi min - Vi max η[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 14 to 70 VDC [%] 28 to 140 VDC [%] 20 to 100 VDC [%]

5.1 25.0 - - BK1001-7R 80 CK1001-7R 80 FK1001-7R 80 -9

12.0 12.0 - - BK1301-7R 82 CK1301-7R 82 FK1301-7R 82 E 4, -9E 4

15.0 10.0 - - BK1501-7R 84 CK1501-7R 85 FK1501-7R 85 V 2

24.0 6.0 - - BK1601-7R 85 CK1601-7R 86 FK1601-7R 86 P

12.0 6.0 12.0 3 6.0 BK2320-7R 80 CK2320-7R 81 FK2320-7R 81 T

15.0 5.0 15.0 3 5.0 BK2540-7R 80 CK2540-7R 84 FK2540-7R 83 B1

24.0 3.0 24.0 3 3.0 BK2660-7R 80 CK2660-7R 84 FK2660-7R 84 B2

Model SelectionNon-standard input configurations or special custom adaptions are available on request.

Table 1a: Model type AK

Table 1b: Model types BK, CK, and FK

Table 1c: Model types DK, EK, and LK

1 Min. efficiency η at Vi nom, Io nom, and TA = 25 °C. (DC input for LK models). Typical values are approx. 2% higher than listed, but tend to be upto 2% less efficient, if option E is incoporated..2 Option V for K1001 models only.3 Second output semi-regulated.4 Option E only for CK, DK, EK, and LK models; mandatory for all -9 models.


85 to 264 VAC5.1 25.0 - - DK1001-7R 80 ---- -- LK1001-7R 79 -9E 4

12.0 12.0 - - DK1301-7R 83 EK1301-7R 83 LK1301-7R 83 E 4

15.0 10.0 - - DK1501-7R 85 EK1501-7R 84 LK1501-7R 84 D

24.0 6.0 - - DK1601-7R 86 EK1601-7R 86 LK1601-7R 85 V 2

12.0 6.0 12.0 3 6.0 DK2320-7R 81 EK2320-7R 82 LK2320-7R 81 P

15.0 5.0 15.0 3 5.0 DK2540-7R 83 EK2540-7R 84 LK2540-7R 83 T

24.0 3.0 24.0 3 3.0 DK2660-7R 84 EK2660-7R 84 LK2660-7R 82 B1

B2




Part Number Description and Product MarkingC K 2 5 40 -9 E R D3 T B1

Input voltage range Vi:

8 - 35 VDC ................A14 - 70 VDC .............. B

20 - 100 VDC .............. F28 - 140 VDC ................C44 - 220 VDC ................D67 - 385 VDC .............. E

85 - 264 VAC or 88 - 372 VDC................ L

Series................................................................................KNumber of outputs ........................................................1, 2Single output models:Nominal voltage output 1 (main output), Vo1 nom

5.1 V ......0, 1, 212 V ................315 V ............4, 524 V ................6

Other voltages1

............7, 8Other specifications for

single output models ......01 - 99Double output models:

Nominal voltage output 1 and 212, 12V ......................................................................2015, 15V ......................................................................4024, 24V ......................................................................60Other specifications and additional features ......70 - 99

Operational ambient temperature range TA:–25 to 71 °C................-7–40 to 71 °C................-9

Other 1 ....-0, -5, -6Auxiliary functions and options:Inrush current limitation ................................................E 3

Output voltage control input ..........................................R 2

Potentiometer (output voltage adjustment) ....................P 2

Save data signal (D0 - DD, to be specified) ..................D 4

ACFAIL signal (V0, V2, V3, to be specified) ..................V 4

Current sharing ................................................................TCooling plate standard case ..........................................B1Cooling plate for long case (220 mm) 1 ..........................B21 Customer-specific models.2 Feature R excludes option P and vice versa.3 Option E available for CK, DK, EK, and LK models; mandatory for all -9 model types.4 Option D excludes option V and vice versa; Option V available for K1001 models only.

Example: CK2540-9PD3: DC-DC converter, input voltage range 28 - 140 V, double output, each providing 15 V/5 A, equipped withpotentiometer and undervoltage monitoring option. Ambient temperature –40 to 71 °C.

Product MarkingBasic type designation, applicable approval marks, CE mark, warnings, pin allocation, Power-One patents, and company logo.Identification of LEDs, test sockets, and potentiometer.Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal output voltages and currents, degree of protection, batch no., serial no., anddata code including production site, modification status, and date of production.




Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input fuse, an input filter, a bridgerectifier (LK), and an inrush current limiter to the input capacitor.This capacitor sources a single transistor forward converter.Each output is powered by a separate secondary winding of themain transformer. The resultant voltages are rectified and theirripple smoothed by a power choke and output filter. The controllogic senses the main output voltage Vo1 and generates, with

respect to the maximum admissible output currents, the controlsignal for the primary switching transistor.The second output of double-output models is controlled by themain output but has independent current limiting. If the main outputis driven into current limitation, the second output voltage will fall aswell and vice versa.

Fig. 2Block diagram of symmetrical double output converters AK - LK2000

1 Transient suppressor (VDR) in CK, DK, EK, FK, LK models2 Suppressor diode in AK, BK, CK, FK models

Con

trol

circ

uit

1

2

P

3

For

war

d co

nver

ter

(app

rox.

110

kH

z)

16

18

20

22

12

14

4

6

8

10

Out

put 2

filte

rO

utpu

t 1fil

ter

26

28

3032

24

4

– +

Y

Y Y

Y

Y

Y

R

i

D

T

Vi+

Vi–

03058-082605

Vo1+

Vo1–

Vo2+

Vo2–

Inpu

t filt

er 4

5N

5P

3 Inrush current limiter in CK, DK, EK, LK (NTC resistor or option E circuit)4 Bridge rectifier (LK only)5 LK models

Inpu

t filt

er

Con

trol

circ

uit

2

4

P

3

For

war

d co

nver

ter

(app

rox.

120

kH

z)

Y

16

18

20

22

12

4

6

8

10

14

Y

Out

put

filte

r

1

26

28

3032

24

4

– +

Y

YVi+

Vi–

R

i

D/V

T

03057-082605

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

Fus

e

5N

5P

Fig. 1Block diagram of single output converters AK - LK1000




Table 2b: Input data

Input CK DK EK LK

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max Unit

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 - Io nom 28 140 44 220 67 385 88 372 VDCTC min - TC max 85 4 264 4 VAC

Vi nom Nominal input voltage 60 110 220 310 VDC

Ii Input current Vi nom, Io nom 1 3.0 1.6 0.8 0.4 A

Pi0 No-load input power Vi min - Vi max 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 W

Pi inh Idle input power model inhibited 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.5

Ri Input resistance 150 170 180 480 mΩ

RNTC NTC resistance 2 1 2 4 4 Ω

Ci Input capacitance 830 330 270 270 μF

Vi RFIConducted input RFI EN 55022 B B B B

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom B B B B

Vi abs Input voltage limits 0 154 0 400 3 0 400 -400 400 VDCwithout damage

1 For double output models both outputs loaded with Io nom.2 Valid for -7 versions without option E. This is the nominal value at 25 °C and applies to cold models at initial switch-on cycle. Subsequent

switch-on/off cycles increase the inrush current peak value.3 For 1 s max.4 AC operating frequency range is 47 to 440 Hz (440 Hz for 115 V mains). For frequencies ≥ 63 Hz refer to Safety and Installation Instructions.

Input Transient ProtectionA suppressor diode and/or a VDR (depending on input voltagerange) together with the input fuse and a symmetrical input filterform an effective protection against high input transient voltageswhich typically occur in most installations, but especially inbattery-driven mobile applications.Nominal battery voltages in use are: 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 110,and 220 V. In most cases each nominal value is specified in a

tolerance of –30% to 25%.In certain applications, surges according to RIA 12 arespecified in addition to those defined in IEC 60571-1. Thepower supply must not switch off during these surges andsince their energy can practically not be absorbed anextremely wide input range is required. The EK input rangefor 110 V batteries has been designed and tested to meetthis requirement.

Electrical Input DataGeneral Conditions– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Pin 18 connected to pin 14, R input not connected, Vo adjusted to Vo nom (option P)– Sense line pins S+ and S– connected to Vo+ and Vo–, respectively.

Table 2a: Input data

Input AK BK FK


Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 - Io nom 8 35 14 70 20 100 VDC

Vi nom Nominal input voltage TC min - TC max 15 30 50


Pi0 No-load input power Vi min - Vi max 2.5 2.5 2.5 W

Pi inh Idle input power model inhibited 1.5 1.5 1.5

Ri Input resistance 65 100 70 mΩ

Ci Input capacitance 1040 370 1500 μF

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55022 A B B

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom A A B

Vi abs Input voltage limits 0 40 0 80 0 100 VDCwithout damage




Table 3: Fuse Specification

Model Fuse type Reference Rating

AK 1 fast-blow Little fuse 314 30.0 A, 125 VBK 1 fast-blow Little fuse 314 25.0 A, 125 VCK 2 slow-blow SPT 12.5 A, 250 VDK 2 slow-blow SPT 8 A, 250 VEK 2 slow-blow SPT 4 A, 250 VFK 2 slow-blow SPT 16 A, 250 VLK 2 slow-blow SPT 4 A, 250 V1 Fuse size 6.3 x 32 mm 2 Fuse size 5 x 20 mm

Input FuseA fuse mounted inside the converter protects the converteragainst severe defects. This fuse may not fully protect theconverter when the input voltage exceeds 200 VDC! Inapplications where the converters operate at source voltagesabove 200 VDC an external fuse or a circuit breaker at systemlevel should be installed!

The inrush current peak value (initial switch-on cycle) can bedetermined by following calculation:

Vi sourceIinr p = ––––––––––––––––(Rs ext + Ri + RNTC)

Rs ext Ri RNTCIinr p

Vi source

+Ci int

05109_060805

Reverse PolarityThe converters (except LK) are not protected against reversepolarity at the input, but in general, only the input fuse will trip. LKmodels are fully protected due to the built-in bridge rectifier.

Static Input Current Characteristic

Fig. 5Typical input current versus relative input voltage

2 3 4 510.4

1

10

Vi____Vi min

Ii (A)

2004044_051106

FK

CK

EK

DK

BK

AK

LK (DC input)

Input Under-/Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage remains below approx. 0.8 Vi min or exceedsapprox. 1.1 Vi max, an internally generated inhibit signal disablesthe output(s). When checking this function the absolute maximuminput voltage rating Vi abs should be considered! Between Vi minand the undervoltage lockout level the output voltage may bebelow the value defined in table: Electrical Output Data.

Fig. 3Typical inrush current versus time at Vi max, Rext = 0.For AK, BK, and FK as well as for application-related valuesuse the formula given in this section to get realistic results.

Inrush CurrentThe CK, DK, EK, and LK models (not -9, not Option E)incorporate an NTC resistor in the input circuitry, which - at initialturn on - reduces the peak inrush current value by a factor of 5to 10. Subsequent switch-on cycles within short periodsincrease the inrush current due to the hotter NTC resistor.

1 2 3 t [ms]0

50

100

Ii inr [A]

150

CKEK, LKDK

05108_082605

Fig. 4Equivalent circuit for input impedance




2 3 4 5 610.1

1

Vi ____Vi min

th (ms)

10

100

DKCK/FK

EK

AK BK

04045_082605

2 3 4 5 612

Vi AC_______Vi min AC

th (ms)

10

100 04049_082605

Fig. 6aTypical hold-up time th versus relative input voltage Vi/Vi min. The DC-DC converters require an externalseries diode in the input path if other loads are connectedto the same input supply lines.

Fig. 6bTypical hold-up time th versus relative AC input voltage (LKmodels)

Hold-up Time Versus Relative Input Voltage




Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.

– Pin 18 (i) connected to pin 14 (S–/Vo1–), Vo adjusted to Vo nom (option P), R input not connected.

– Sense line pins 12 (S+) and 14 (S–) connected to Vo1+ and Vo1–, respectively.

Table 4a: Output data: single-output models

Output AK-LK1001 AK-LK1301 AK-LK1501 AK-LK1601Vo nom 5.1 V 12.0 V 15.0 V 24.0 V



Vo P Overvoltage protection 7.6 21 26.5 43.5(suppressor diode)

Io nom Output current nom 1 Vi min - Vi max 20 6/25 10 6/12 8 6/10 5 6/6 ATC min - TC max

Io L Output current limit 2 Vi min - Vi max 21 6/26 10.2 6/12.2 8.2 6/10.2 5.2 6/6.2

vo Output Switching freq. Vi nom, Io nom 10 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 mVppnoise 5

Total incl. BW = 20 MHz 80 50 70 100spikes

ΔVo u Static line regulation Vi min - Vi max ±15 ±20 ±25 ±30 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io nom

ΔVo I Static load regulation Vi nom, Io nom = -20 -30 -40 -50(0.1 - 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, Io = ±150 ±130 ±130 ±150load deviation 3 Io nom ↔ 0.5Io nom

td regulation 5

Recovery 0.4 0.5 0.5 1 mstime 3

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min - TC max, ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 4 Io nom

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrent should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is not exceeded.

2 See: Output Voltage Regulation.3 See: Dynamic Load Regulation. 4 For battery chargers a defined negative temperature coefficient can be provided, see Accessories.5 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204.6 Values for AK.7 LK models have an additional low-frequency ripple at twice the input frequency (< 5mVpp).




Table 4c: Output data: double-output models

Output AK-LK2660Vo nom 24 V/24 V

Characteristics Conditions Output 1 Output 2

min typ max min typ max Unit

Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom1 23.76 24.24 23.52 24.48 V

Vo P Overvoltage protection 37 37(suppressor diode)

Io nomOutput current nom 2 Vi min - Vi max 2.5 8/3.0 2.5 8/3.0 ATC min - TC max

Io L Output current limit Vi min - Vi max 2.7 8/3.2 2.7 8/3.2

vo Output Switching freq. Vi nom, Io nom 5 7 5 7 mVppnoise 3

Total including BW = 20 MHz 80 80spikes

ΔVo u Static line regulation Vi min - Vi max ±30 6 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io1 nom, Io2 nom

ΔVo I Static load regulation Vi nom, Io2 nom, -60 6

(0.1 - 1) Io1 nom

Vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom↔ 0.5Io1 nom,

tdregulation3

Recovery 0.5Io2 nom 0.2 mstime 4

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min - TC max ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 5 Io1 nom, Io2 nom

1 Same conditions for both outputs.2 If the output voltages are increased above

Vo nom via R-input control, option P setting,

remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrents should be reduced accordingly sothat Po nom is not exceeded.

3 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204.4 See: Dynamic Load Regulation.5 For battery chargers a defined negative

temperature coefficient can be provided, seeAccessories.

6 See: Output Voltage Regulation of DoubleOutput Models.

7 LK models have an additional low-frequencyripple at twice the input frequency (< 5 mVpp).

8 Values for AK.

Table 4b: Output data: double-output models

Output AK-LK2320 AK-LK2540Vo nom 12 V/12 V 15 V/15 V

Characteristics Conditions Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2

min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max Unit

Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 1 11.88 12.12 11.76 12.24 14.85 15.15 14.70 15.30 V

Vo P Overvoltage protection 19 19 24 24(suppressor diode)

Io nomOutput current nom 2 Vi min - Vi max 5.0 8/6.0 5.0 8/6.0 4.0 8/5.0 4.0 8/5.0 ATC min - TC max

Io L Output current limit Vi min - Vi max 5.2 8/6.2 5.2 8/6.2 4.2 8/5.2 4.2 8/5.2


Total including BW = 20 MHz 40 40 50 50spikes

ΔVo u Static line regulation Vi min - Vi max ±20 6 ±25 6 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io1 nom, Io2 nom

ΔVo I Static load regulation Vi nom, Io2 nom, -40 6 -50 6

(0.1 - 1) Io1 nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, ±100 ±150 ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom↔ 0.5Io1 nom,

tdregulation 3

Recovery 0.5Io2 nom 0.2 0.2 mstime 4

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min - TC max ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 5 Io1 nom, Io2 nom




Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air (convectioncooling) at the indicated maximum ambient temperature TA max(see table: Temperature specifications) and is operated at itsnominal input voltage and output power, the temperaturemeasured at the Measuring point of case temperature TC (see:Mechanical Data) will approach the indicated value TC max afterthe warm-up phase. However, the relationship between TA andTC depends heavily on the conditions of operation andintegration into a system. The thermal conditions are influencedby input voltage, output current, airflow and temperature ofsurrounding components and surfaces. TA max is therefore,contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under all operatingconditions TC remains within the limits stated in the tableTemperature Specifications.

Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sink allowsTA to be higher than 71 °C (e.g., 85 °C) if TC max is not exceeded.

For -7 or -9 models at ambient temperature TA = 85 °C with onlyconvection cooling; the maximum permissible current for eachoutput is approx. 40% of its nominal value as per the figure below.

Output Protection

Each output is protected against overvoltages which could occurdue to a failure of the internal control circuit. Voltage suppressordiodes (which under worst case condition may become a shortcircuit) provide the required protection. The suppressor diodes arenot designed to withstand externally applied overvoltages.Overload at any of the outputs will cause a shut-down of alloutputs. A red LED indicates the overload condition.

Parallel or Series Connection Single or double-output models with equal nominal output voltagecan be connected in parallel without any precautions using Option T (current sharing).Single output models and/or main and second outputs of double-output models can be connected in series with any other (similar)output.

Notes:– Parallel connection of double output models should include both,

main and second output to maintain good regulation of both outputs.

– Not more than 5 models should be connected in parallel.– Series connection of second outputs without involving their main

outputs should be avoided as regulation may be poor.– Rated output voltages above 36 V need additional measures in

order to comply with the safety requirements for SELV (Safe Extra Low Voltage)

– The maximum output current is limited by the output with the lowestcurrent limitation if several outputs are connected in series.

00.10.20.3

0.40.50.6

0.70.8

50 60 70 80 90 100

Io/Io nom

TA [˚C]

0.9

1.0Forced cooling

05089_052305

TA min

TC max

Convection cooling

Fig. 7Output current derating versus temperature for -7 and -9models.

Thermal Protection

A temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signal whichdisables the outputs if the case temperature exceeds TC max.The outputs are automatically re-enabled when the temperaturedrops below this limit.Continuous operation under simultaneous worst-case conditionsof the following three parameters should be avoided: minimuminput voltage, maximum output power, and maximumtemperature.

Output Voltage Regulation

Fig. 8Output Characteristic Vo1 vs. Io1 (typ.)

VoVo nom

0.98

0.5

00.5 1.0

Io1

IoL

IoIo nom

05098_050605

The figure below applies to single-output or double-outputmodels with parallel-connected outputs.




Output 1 is under normal conditions regulated to Vo1 nom.

Vo2 depends upon the load distribution. If both outputs areloaded with more than 10% of Io nom, the deviation of Vo2remains within ±5% of the value of Vo1. The following 3 figuresshow the regulation with varying load distribution.Two outputs of a K2000 model connected in parallel will behavelike the output of a K1000 model.

Fig. 10AK - LK2320: ΔVo2 (typ.) vs. Io2 with different I01

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Io2[A]

11.2

11.4

11.6

11.8

12.0

12.2

12.4

12.6

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 6.0 AIo1 = 4.5 AIo1 = 3.0 AIo1 = 1.5 AIo1 = 0.6 A

05105_060805

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Io2[A]

14.00

14.25

14.50

14.75

15.00

15.25

15.50

15.75

[V] Vo2


05106_070805


[V] Vo2

Io2[A]0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

23.0

23.5

24.0

24.5

25.0

25.5

26.0Io1 = 3.0 AIo1 = 2.0 AIo1 = 1.0 AIo1 = 0.5 AIo1 = 0.3 A

05107_060805


Output Voltage Regulation of Double Output Models

Note: If output 2 is not used, we recommend connecting it in parallelwith output 1. This ensures good regulation and efficiency.

Vod

Vod

td td

Vo ±1% Vo ±1%

t

t ≥ 10 μs ≥ 10 μs

Vo

0

0.5

1

Io/Io max

05102

Fig. 9Typical dynamic load regulation of Vo

Dynamic Load Regulation




Fig. 15Typical output response as a function of inhibit control

Table 5: Inhibit characteristics

Characteristic Conditions min typ max Unit

Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min - Vi max –50 0.8 Vvoltage Vo = off 2.4 50

Iinh Inhibit current Vinh = 0 –400 µA

tr Rise time 30 ms

tf Fall time depending on Io

0 t

t0

Inhibit

1

0.1

1Vo/Vo nom

tr tf

06001

Sense Lines(Only single output models)Important: Sense lines must always be connected! Incorrectly connectedsense lines may activate the overvoltage protection, resulting in apermanent short-circuit of the output.This feature allows for compensation of voltage drops across theconnector contacts and if necessary, across the load lines. If thesense lines are connected at the load rather than directly at theconnector, the user should ensure that the voltage differencesspecified in the table below are not exceeded. We recommendconnecting the sense lines directly at the female connector.To ensure correct operation, both sense lines (S+ and S–) shouldbe connected to their respective power outputs (Vo1+ and Vo1–)and the voltage difference between any sense line and itsrespective power output pin (as measured on the connector)should not exceed the following values:

Table 6: Maximum voltage compensation allowed usingsense lines

Output Total voltage difference Voltage differencevoltage between sense lines and between

their respective outputs Vo– and S–

5.1 V < 0.5 V < 0.25 V

12, 15, 24 V < 1.0 V < 0.25 V

If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via the R-inputcontrol, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrents must be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is notexceeded.

Auxiliary Functions

i Inhibit for Remote On and Off

Note: With open i input the output is disabled.

The outputs may be enabled or disabled by means of a logicsignal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied between the inhibit input i andthe negative pin of output 1 (Vo1–). In systems with severalmodels, this feature can be used to control the activationsequence of the converters. If the inhibit function is not required,connect the inhibit pin 18 to pin 14 to enable the outputs (activelow logic, fail safe).

Vi+

Vi– Vo–

i

Vo+I inh

Vinh

06031

1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032


Fig. 14Typical inhibit current Iinh versus inhibit voltage Vinh




Programmable Output Voltage (R-Function)As a standard feature, the converters offer an adjustable outputvoltage, identified by letter R in the type designation. The controlinput R (pin 16) accepts either a control voltage Vext or aresistor Rext to adjust the desired output voltage. When notconnected, the control input automatically sets the outputvoltage to Vo nom.

a) Adjustment by means of an external control voltage Vextbetween pin 16 (R) and pin 14:

The control voltage range is 0 - 2.75 VDC and allows anoutput voltage adjustment in the range of approximately 0 - 110% Vo nom.

VoVext = –––––– • 2.5 V (approximate formula)Vo nom

b) Adjustment by means of an external resistor:Depending upon the value of the required output voltage theresistor shall be connectedEither: Between pin 16 and pin 14 (Vo < Vo nom) to achievean output voltage adjustment range of approximately 0 - 100% Vo nom

or: Between pin 16 and pin 12 (Vo > Vo nom) to achieve anoutput voltage adjustment range of approximately 100 - 110%Vo nom.

Warning:– Vext shall never exceed 2.75 VDC.– The value of R'ext shall never be less than the lowest value as

indicated in table R'ext for (Vo > Vo nom)

Notes:– The R-Function excludes option P (output voltage adjustment by

potentiometer).– If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R-input

control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrent(s) should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is notexceeded.

– With double-output models the second output follows the value ofthe controlled main output.

– In case of parallel connection the output voltages should beindividually set within a tolerance of 1 - 2%.

Fig. 16Output voltage control for single-output models AK - LK1000 by means of the R input

R

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–Vext

Vi+

Vi–

Rext

R'ext

14

16

16

14

+

S+

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–

Vi+

Vi–

R12

05074_050905

Table 7a: Rext for Vo < Vo nom; approximative values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R'ext = not fitted

Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 V

Vo [V] Rext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩ]

0.5 0.432 2 4 0.806 2 4 0.619 4 8 0.8061.0 0.976 3 6 1.33 4 8 1.47 6 12 1.331.5 1.65 4 8 2 6 12 2.67 8 16 22.0 2.61 5 10 2.87 8 16 4.53 10 20 2.872.5 3.83 6 12 4.02 9 18 6.04 12 24 4.023.0 5.76 7 14 5.62 10 20 8.06 14 28 5.623.5 8.66 8 16 8.06 11 22 11 16 32 8.064.0 14.7 9 18 12.1 12 24 16.2 18 36 12.14.5 30.1 10 20 20 13 26 26.1 20 40 205.0 200 11 22 42.2 14 28 56.2 22 44 44.2

1 First column: single-output models or double-output models with separated outputs, second column: outputs in series connection




Table 7b: R’ext for Vo > Vo nom; approximative values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); Rext = not fitted


Vo [V] R'ext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩ]

5.15 432 12.1 24.2 1820 15.2 30.4 1500 24.25 48.5 33205.2 215 12.2 24.4 931 15.4 30.8 768 24.5 49.0 16905.25 147 12.3 24.6 619 15.6 31.2 523 24.75 49.5 11305.3 110 12.4 24.8 475 15.8 31.6 392 25.0 50.0 8455.35 88.7 12.5 25.0 383 16.0 32.0 316 25.25 50.5 6985.4 75 12.6 25.2 316 16.2 32.4 267 25.5 51.0 5905.45 64.9 12.7 25.4 274 16.4 32.8 232 25.75 51.5 5115.5 57.6 12.8 25.6 243 16.5 33.0 221 26.0 52.0 442

13.0 26.0 196 26.25 52.5 40213.2 26.4 169 26.4 52.8 383

1 First column: single-output models or double-output models with separated outputs, second column: outputs in series connection


Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj


Vi

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OKIo L

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

TC

i


Vi inh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

Io L


06002_011106

Test JacksTest jacks for measuring the main output voltage Vo1 arelocated at the front of the converter. The positive test jack isprotected by a series resistor (see: Functional Description,block diagrams). The voltage measured at the test jacks isapproximetly 30 mV lower than the value measured at theoutput terminals.

Fig. 17LEDs "OK", "i" and "Io L"status versus input voltage

Conditions: Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

Vi uv = undervoltage lockout, Vi ov = overvoltage lockout

LEDs "OK" and "Io L"status versus output current

Conditions: Vi min - Vi max, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i"versus case temperatureConditions: Vi min - Vi max, Io ≤ Io nom, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i"versus VinhConditions: Vi min - Vi max, Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max




typically occur in most installations; especially in battery-drivenmobile applications.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A suppressor diode and/or a metal oxide VDR (depending upontype) together with an input fuse and an input filter form aneffective protection against high input transient voltages which

RIA 12

(covers also

IEC60571-1 and

EN50155:1995)



Phenomenon Standard Surge/ Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Per-Level mode 1 applied imped. procedure oper. form. 2

Supply related A 3 +i/–i 3.5 Vbatt 2/20/2 ms 0.2 Ω 1 positive yes Asurge B 1.5 Vbatt 0.1/1/0.1 s surge

Direct transient C +i/c, –i/c 960 Vp 10/100 µs 5 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B

D 4 1800 Vp 5/50 µs impulses

E 3600 Vp 0.5/5 µs 100 Ω

F 4800 Vp 0.1/1 µs

G 5 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs

Indirect coupled H +o/c, –o/c, 1800 Vp 5/50 µstransient J 3600 Vp 0.5/5 µs

K 4800 Vp 0.1/1 µs

L 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs

Electrostatic IEC/EN 4 6 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp

10 negative(to case) discharges

Electromagnetic IEC/EN 3 7 antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 - 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

3 antenna 10 V/m 50% duty cycle, n.a. 900 ±5 MHz yes A200 Hz repetition

frequency

Fast IEC/EN 4 8 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransients/burst 61000-4-4 i/c, +i/–i 4000 Vp

2.5/5 kHz over 60 s negative

direct 15 ms; burst transients perperiod: 300 ms coupling mode

Surges IEC/EN 3 i/c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 3 +i/–i 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 2 Ω surges per

coupling mode

RF conducted IEC/EN 3 9 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 - 80 MHz yes Aimmunity 61000-4-6 (140 dBμV) 1 kHz

1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary deviation from specs possible.3 Only met with customer-specific models, CK (48 V battery) and EK (110 V battery) designed for an extended Vi range. Standard DK

models (110 V battery) will not be damaged, but overvoltage lockout will occur during the surge.4 Corresponds to EN50155:2001, waveform A, and EN50121-3-2:2000, table 7.2.5 Corresponds to EN50155:2001, waveform B.6 Corresponds to EN50121-3-2:2000, table 9.2.7 Corresponds to EN50121-3-2:2000, table 9.1.8 Corresponds to EN50121-3-2:2000, table 7.1.9 Corresponds to EN50121-3-2:2000, table 7.4.




Fig. 18aTypical disturbance voltage (peak) at the input according toEN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom (DK1301-7R).

Fig. 18bTypical disturbance voltage (peak) at the input according toEN 55011/22, measured at Vi = 230 VAC and Io nom,(LK1001-7RD9B1).

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBμV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07077

Fig. 18cTypical radiated electromagnetic field strength (quasi-peak)according to EN 55011/22, normalized to a distance of 10 m,measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

Electromagnetic Emission

Note: The Railway Standard, EN50121-3-2:2000 table 3, imposesmuch higher limits, which are by far fulfilled.




Table 9: Temperature specifications, valid for an air pressure of 800 - 1200 hPa (800 - 1200 mbar)



TA Ambient temperature Converter –25 71 –40 71 °C

TC Case temperature1Operating

–25 95 –40 95

TS Storage temperature Non-operational –40 100 –55 100

1 Overtemperature lockout at TC > 95 °C

Table 10: MTBF

Values at specified Model types Ground benign Ground fixed Ground mobile Unitcase temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C

MTBF 1 AK - LK 700 000 160 000 85 000 60 000 h

Device hours 2 500 000

1 Calculated in accordance with MIL-HDBK-217F-N2 (LK2660-7).2 Statistical values, based on an average of 4300 working hours per year and over 3 years in general field use.

1 Covers also EN50155/EN61373 (Category 1, body mounted Class B).

Failure Rates


Table 8: Mechanical and climatic stress


Ca Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Converter steady state MIL-STD-810D sect. 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not


Ea Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 1 Acceleration amplitude: 100 gn = 981 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Eb Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 40 gn = 392 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 - 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 - 2000 Hz) operating

Frequency (1 Oct/min): 10 - 2000 HzTest duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h each axis)

Fn Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converter

broad band Frequency band: 5 - 500 Hz operatingrandom Acceleration magnitude: 4.97 gn rms (digital control) Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter (sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle notNaCl solution) Storage: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity operating

Storage duration: 22 h per cycleNumber of cycles: 3




Mechanical DataDimensions in mm. The converters are designed to be insertedinto a 19” rack, 160 mm long, according to IEC 60297-3.

159 4.5

89

111

(3U

)

168.5

d

80

4.5

19.7

9.5

29.9

6.5 51

.5

30.3

20.3

12.1

10.3

7.0

3.277 TE 9 TE

Test jacks (+/–)Option P (Vo)

Option D (Vti)

LED OK (green)

LED i (red)

LED IoL (red)

Option D (Vto)25

.911

.8

Front plate Main face Back plate

Measuring point ofcase temperature TC

(171.0 .... 171.9)50

09002_051006

= Ø 3.5= Ø 4.1

Fig. 19Case K02 with heat sink, case aluminium, black finish and self-cooling, weight: Approx. 1.55 kg

Note:– d ≥15 mm, recommended clearance to next part in order to ensure

proper air circulation at full power.– Free air location: the converter should be mounted with fins in a vertical

position to achieve maximum airflow through the heat sink.

EuropeanProjection




Fig. 20Case K02 with option B1 (cooling plate),case aluminium, blackfinish and self cooling, weight: Approx. 1.15 kg

111

(3U

)

17.3 133.4

168 ±0.5

101

547.2

1585

M 4

5


50

(171.0 .... 171.9)

3.27

7 TE 4 TE09003_051005

Note: Long case with S-type heat sink or cooling plate B2, elongated by 60mm for 220 mm rack depth, is available on request. (No LEDs and no testjacks.) These models are assigned a customer-specific part number byPower-One.





Connector Pin Allocation

The connector pin allocation table defines the electrical


The K Series converters are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyoperation or by professional installers. Installation must strictlyfollow the national safety regulations in compliance with theenclosure, mounting, creepage, clearance, casualty, markingsand segregation requirements of the end-use application.

Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H15/H15 S4 (see: Accessories). Other installationmethods may not meet the safety requirements.

The converters are provided with pin 24 ( ), which is reliably

Fig. 21View of converter’s male connectors

connected with the case. For safety reasons it is essential toconnect this pin to protective earth. See: Safety of Operator-Accessible Output Circuit.

Input pins 30 and 32 are internally fused. Since this fuse isdesigned to protect the converter in case of an overcurrent anddoes not necessarily cover all customer needs, an external fusesuitable for the application and in compliance with the localrequirements might be necessary in the wiring to one or both inputpotentials, pins 26 and 28, and/or 30 and 32.

potentials and the physical pin positions on the H15/H15 S4connector. Pin no. 24 (protective earth) is a leading pin, ensuringthat it makes contact first.

4/630/32Type H15 S4

10010_091905

Fixtures for connectorretention clips

(see Accessories)

432

Type H15


(see Accessories)

10090

Table 11: H15 and H15 S4 connector pin allocation

Pin Connector type H15 S4 Connector type H 15

No. AK1000 (all), BK - LK1001 AK2000 BK - LK1301/1501/1601 BK - LK2000

4Vo+ Pos. output Vo2+ Pos. output 2

Vo+ Pos. output

Vo2+Pos. output 2

6 Vo+ Vo2+

8Vo– Neg. output Vo2– Neg. output 2

Vo–Neg. output

Vo2–Neg. output 2

10 Vo– Vo2–

12 S+ Sense Vo1+ Pos. output 1 S+ Sense Vo1+ Pos. output 1

14 S– Sense Vo1– Neg. output 1 S– Sense Vo1– Neg. output 1

16 R 1 Control of Vo R 1 Control of Vo1 R 1 Control of Vo R 1 Control of Vo1

18 i Inhibit i Inhibit i Inhibit i Inhibit

20 D 3, 5 Save data D 5 Safe data D 5 Save data D 5 Save data

V 3, 5 ACFAIL

22 T 5 Current share T 5 Current share T 5 Current share T 5 Current share

24 2 Protective earth Protective earth Protective earth Protective earth

26 Vi+ Pos. inputVi+ Pos. input

Vi+ N 4 Pos. input Vi+ N 4 Pos. input

28 N 4 Neutral line 4 Vi+ N 4 Neutral line 4 Vi+ N 4 Neutral line 4

30 Vi– Neg. inputVi– Neg. input

Vi– L 4 Neg. input Vi– L 4 Neg. input

32 L 4 Phase 4 Vi– L 4 Phase 4 Vi– L 4 Phase 4

1 Not connected, if option P is fitted.2 Leading pin.3 Option D excludes option V and vice versa.4 LK models.5 Not connected, if none of the options D, T, or V are fitted.




Table 13: Isolation

Characteristic Input to Output to Output to Unit case + output(s) case output

Electric Factory test 1 s 2.8 1 1.4 0.14 kVDC

strength AC test voltage equivalent to factory test 2.0 1.0 0.1 kVACtest voltage

Insulation resistance at 500 VDC 300 2 300 2 100 MΩ1 In accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950 subassemblies are pretested with 5.6 kVDC.2 Tested at 500 VDC.

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters are UL recognized according to UL 1950, forCanada to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 950-95, and TÜV approved toIEC/EN 60950 standards.The converters correspond to Class I equipment and have beenevaluated for:• Building in,• Basic insulation between input and case based on 250 V and

double or reinforced insulation or an earthed part between inputand output.

• The use in a pollution degree 2 environment,• Connecting the input to a primary or secondary circuit which is

subject to a maximum transient rating of 2500 V.The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillance inaccordance with the above mentioned UL and ISO 9001:2000standards.

Railway ApplicationsThe K Series converters have been designed according to theRailway Standards EN50155 and EN50121. All boards andcomponents are coated with a protective lacquer.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetration of cleaningfluids must be prevented, since the power supplies are nothermetically sealed.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the converter.IP 30: All models except those with option P and option D,

or V with potentiometer.IP 20: All models exhibiting a potentiometer.

Important: When the inhibit function is not in use, pin no. 18 (i) shouldbe connected to pin no. 14 (S–/Vo1–) to enable the output(s). Do notopen the converters, or guarantee will be invalidated.

Due to high current values, some models provide two internallyparallel connected contacts for certain paths (pins 4/6, 8/10,26/28 and 30/32). It is recommended to connect load andsupply to both female connector pins of each path in order tokeep the voltage drop across the connector pins at an absoluteminimum and to avoid overstress of the connector contacts withcurrents higher than 8 A.Make sure that there is sufficient air flow possible for convectioncooling. This should be verified by measuring the casetemperature when the converter is installed and operated in theend-use application. The maximum specified case temperatureTCmax shall not be exceeded. See also Thermal Consid-erations.If the end-product is to be UL certified, the temperature of themain isolation transformer should be evaluated as part of theend-product investigation.Check for hazardous voltages before altering any connections.Ensure that a converter failure (e.g., by an internal short-circuit)does not result in a hazardous condition. See also: Safety ofOperator Accessible Output Circuits.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory as routinetest in accordance with EN 50116, IEC/EN 60950 and UL 1950and should not be repeated in the field. Power-One will nothonor any guarantee claims resulting from electric strength fieldtests.

LK-models Operated at Greater than 63 HzAbove 63 Hz the earth leakage current may exceed 3.5 mA, themaximum specified in IEC/EN 60950. The built-in Y-caps areonly approved for ≤ 100 Hz. Frequencies greater than 350 Hzare only permitted for Vi ≤ 200 VAC.

Characteristic Class I UnitLK1000, LK2000

Maximum earth Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 3.5 mAleakage current

Specified value at 264 V, 50 Hz 1.43

Table 12: Leakage Currents for LK-models




AC-DCfrontend

DC-DCcon-

verter

Mains Battery SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10044_082605Max. 150 VAC or VDC for AK, BKMax. 250 VAC or VDC for CK, DK, EK, FK, LK

Fuse

Fuse

Max. 150 VAC or VDC for AK, BKMax. 250 VAC or VDC for CK, DK, EK, FK, LK


Conditions Front end Result DC-DC converter Result

Nominal Minimum required grade DC output voltage Minimum required Types Measures to achieve the Safety status supply of insulation, to be pro- from the front end safety status of the specified safety status of of the DC-DCvoltage vided by the AC-DC front front end output the output circuit converter

end, including mains circuit output circuitsupplied battery charger

Mains Functional ≤100 V. The Primary circuit AK a) Double or reinforced SELV circuit≤150 VAC (no electrical insulation nominal voltage BK insulation based on

between the mains between any the mains voltagesupply voltage and the output pin and (provided by the DC-DCDC-DC converter input) earth is ≤150 V converter) AND

(AC or DC) b) earthed case 3

Mains ≤250 V The CK≤250 VAC nominal voltage DK

between any EKoutput pin and FKearth is ≤250 V(AC or DC)

Basic ≤250 V Unearthed AK a) Supplementary insulation,hazardous voltage BK based on 250 VAC ANDsecondary circuit CK b) double or reinforced

DK insulation 2 (provided byEK DC-DC converter) ANDFK c) earthed case 3

Earthed a) Double or reinforcedhazardous voltage insulation 2 (provided by secondary circuit the DC-DC converter) AND

b) earthed case 3

Double or reinforced ≤60 V SELV circuit4

≤120 V TNV-3 circuit Basic insulation (providedby the DC-DC converter) 4

1 The front end output voltage should match the specified input voltage range of the DC-DC converter.2 Based on the maximum nominal output voltage from the front end.3 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards, e.g. IEC/EN 60950.4 Earthing of the case is recommended, but not mandatory.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output Circuits

If the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operator-accessible,it shall be a SELV circuit according to safety standard IEC/EN 60950.

The following table shows some possible installationconfigurations, compliance with which causes the output circuit

of a DC-DC converter to be a SELV circuit according to IEC/EN60950 up to a configured output voltage (sum of nominal voltagesif in series or +/– configuration) of 36 V.

Fig. 22Schematic safety concept.Use earth connection as per the table below.






Nominal voltage Grade of insulation Measures to achieve the resulting Safety status of the AC-DCbetween input and output safety status of the output circuit converter output circuitprovided by the AC-DC converter

Mains Double or reinforced Earthed case 1 and installation SELV circuit≤250 VAC according to the applicable standards

1 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards, e.g. IEC/EN 60950.

If the output circuit of a AC-DC converter is operator-accessible,it shall be a SELV circuit according to the related IEC/EN 60950safety standards.The following table shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit of an LK SeriesAC-DC converter to be a SELV circuit according to IEC/EN

60950 up to a configured output voltage (sum of nominal voltagesif in series or +/– configuration) of 36 V.If the LK converters are used as DC-DC converters, please refer tothe previous section.

AC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10021

Fuse

Fuse

Fig. 23Schematic safety concept. Use fuses and earthconnection as per: Installation Instructions and table:Safety concept leading to a SELV output circuit.




Table 17: Inrush current characteristics with option E(DC-DC converters)

Characteristics CK DK EK Unit

Vi nom, Io nom Input voltage 60 110 220 V

Iinr p Peak inrush 6.8 7.4 14.6 Acurrent

tinr Inrush current 18 14 16 msduration

Vi max, Io nom Input voltage 140 220 380 V

Iinr p Peak inrush 9.3 14.5 25.3 Acurrent

tinr Inrush current 20 14 12 msduration

Option -9: Extended Temperature RangeOption -9 extends the operational ambient temperature rangefrom –25 to 71 °C to –40 to 71 °C. The power supplies providefull nominal output power with convection cooling. Option -9excludes inrush current limitation by NTC.

Option E: Inrush Current LimiterCK/DK/EK/LK models may be supplemented by an electroniccircuit (option E, replacing the standard built-in NTC) to achievean enhanced inrush current limiting function. Option E ismandatory for -9 models.CK models fitted with option E and option D6 (input voltagemonitoring) meet the standard ETS 300132-2 for 48 VDC supplyvoltage. Option D6 (externally adjustable via potentiometer from36.0 to 40.5 V) is necessary to disable the converter at low inputvoltages, avoiding an excessive input current. Option D6threshold level should be adjusted to 44.0 - 50.0 V for 60 Vnominal supply systems (refer to the description of option D). TheD output can be connected directly to the inhibit input.

Note: Subsequent switch-on cycles at startup are limited to max.10 cycles during the first 20 seconds (cold model) and then tomax. 1 cycle every 8 seconds.

Description of OptionsTable 16: Survey of options

Option Function of Option Characteristics

-9 Extended operational ambient temperature range TA = –40 to 71 °C

E Electronic inrush current limitation circuitry Active inrush current limitation for CK, DK, EK

P Potentiometer for fine adjustment of output voltage Adjustment range +10/–60% of Vo nom (R input not connected)

D 1 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (versions D0 - DD)

V 1, 2 Input (and output) undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specs (versions V0, V2, V3)

T Current sharing Interconnect T-pins if paralleling outputs (5 models max.)

B1/B2 Cooling plate Replaces standard heat sink, allowing direct chassis-mounting1 Option D excludes Option V and vice versa.2 Only available for Vo1 = 5.1 V.

Inpu

t Filt

er

Control

Con

vert

er

FET

CiRIRS

10017_082605

Rectifier (LK)

Fig. 24Option E block diagram

Current limiting resistance = RS + RI = 15 Ω (all models)

I [A]

Vi/RV

<30t [ms]

Capacitor Ci

fully chargedNormal operation(current limitingcircuit is fullyconducting)

00

Ii = Pi/Vi

11039_052605

Fig. 25Inrush current with option E (DC-DC converters)




Table 18: Inrush current characteristics with option E (AC-DC converters)

Characteristics LK UnitV = 230 VAC min typ max

Iinr p Peak inrush current – – 21.7 A

tinr Inrush current duration – 35 50 ms

15

Ii [A]

10

5

0

–5

–10

–15

0 20 40 60 80

t [ms]

tinr

Capacitor Cifully charged

Normal operation(FET fully conducting)

20

10065_102005

Fig. 26Inrush current with option E(LK models, Vi = 230 VAC, fi = 50 Hz, Po = Po nom)




Load

1

1

1

2

2

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

Vi+

Vi–

T

Vi+

Vi–

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

T

1

Max. 5 converters in parallel connection

11036_070805

Fig. 28Paralleling of single-output models using option T with thesense lines connected at the load

1 Leads should have equal length and cross sections and shouldrun in the same cable loom.

2 Diodes for redundant operation.

Vo+

Vo–

Vo+

Vo–

Load

Vo+

Vo–

11003_102005

Fig. 27An example of poor wiring for connections in parallel(unequal length of load lines)

Option T: Current SharingThis option ensures that the output currents areapproximately shared between all paralleled converters,hence increasing system reliability. To use this facility,simply interconnect the T pins of all converters and makesure, that the reference pins for the T-pin (S- for the K1000or Vo1– for K2000) are also connected together. The loadlines should have equal length and cross section to ensureequal voltage drops. Not more than 5 converters should beconnected in parallel. The R-pins should be left in an open-circuit condition. If not, prior to paralleling the Vo1 outputsshould be individually adjusted within 1 to 2%. Parallelconnection of converters with option P is notrecommended.

Option P: PotentiometerThe potentiometer allows for an output voltage adjustmentin the range of +10/–60% of Vo nom. It is accessiblethrough a hole in the front cover. This feature enablescompensation of voltage drops across the connector andwiring. Option P is not recommended if models areconnected in parallel. In double-output models both outputs are influenced by thepotentiometer setting. If option P is fitted, the R-pin 16 isnot connected.Note: If the output voltage is increased above Vo nom via the R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing, or option T, theoutput current(s) should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom isnot exceeded.

Load


+ –Power bus

Module

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

Module

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

11037_052605

Fig. 29Paralleling of double output models with the outputsconnected in series, and using option T in an applicationwith a power bus. Note that the signal at the T-pins isreferenced to Vo1-.




Option D: Undervoltage MonitorThe input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuit operatesindependently of the built-in input undervoltage lockout circuit. Alogic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal (NPN output) isgenerated at pin 20 as soon as one of the monitored voltagesdrops below the preselected threshold level Vt. The return forthis signal is Vo1–. The D output recovers when the monitoredvoltage(s) exceed(s) Vt + Vh. The threshold levels Vti and Vto

are either adjustable by a potentiometer, accessible through a holein the front cover, or factory adjusted to a fixed value specified bythe customer.Option D exists in various versions D0 - DD as shown in thefollowing table.


Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt]of threshold level Vt for Vt min - Vt max

JFET NPN Vi Vo1 Vti Vto Vhi VhoD1 D5 no yes - 3.5 - 40 V 1 - 2.5 - 0.6

D2 D6 yes no Vi min - Vi max1 - 3.4 - 0.4 -

D3 D7 yes yes Vi min - Vi max1 (0.95 - 0.985 Vo1) 2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

D4 D8 no yes - (0.95 - 0.985 Vo1) 2 - "0"

D0 D9 no yes - 3.5 - 40 V 3 - 2.5 - 0.6

yes no Vi min - Vi max3, 4 - 3.4 - 0.4 -

yes yes Vi min - Vi max3, 4 3.5 - 40 V 3 3.4 - 0.4 2.5 - 0.6

yes yes Vi min - Vi max3, 4 (0.95 - 0.985 Vo1) 2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

- DD yes yes Vi min - Vi max1 3.5 - 40 V 1 3.4 - 0.4 2.5 - 0.6

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer 2 Fixed value tracking if Vo1 is adjusted via R-input, option P or sense lines.

3 The threshold level is permanently adjusted according to customer specification ±2% at 25 °C. Any value within thespecified range is possible, but causes a new customer-specific type designation.

4 Adjusted at Io nom




NPN output (D5 - DD):Pin 20 (D) is internally connected via the collector-emitterpath of an NPN transistor to Vo1+ or Vo+. VD < 0.4 V(logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltage level (Viand/or Vo1) > Vt +Vh. The current ID through pin 20should not exceed 20 mA. This output is not protectedagainst external overvoltages. VD should not exceed 40 V.

Vi, Vo1 status D output, VDVi or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 20 mA

JFET output (D0 - D4):Pin 20 (D) is internally connected via the drain-source pathof a JFET (self-conducting type) to Vo1+ or Vo+.VD ≤ 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltagelevel (Vi and/or Vo1) < Vt. The current ID through the JFETshould not exceed 2.5 mA. The JFET is protected by a 0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 V against external overvoltages.

Vi, Vo1 status D output, VDVi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 2.5 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 5.25 VFig. 30Option D1 - D0: JFET output, ID ≤ 2.5 mA

Table 20: D-output logic signals

Version of D Vi << Vt resp. Vo << Vt Vi >> Vt + Vh resp. Vo >> Vt Configuration

D1, D2, D3, D4, D0 low high JFET

D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, DD high low NPN

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Fig. 31Option D5 - DD: NPN output, Vo1 ≤ 40 V, ID ≤ 20 mA

Threshold tolerances and hysteresis:If Vi is monitored, the internal input voltage after the inputfilter is measured. Consequently, this voltage differs fromthe voltage at the connector pins by the voltage drop ΔVtiacross the input filter. The threshold levels of the D0 andD9 options are factory-adjusted at nominal output currentIo nom and at TA = 25 °C. The value of ΔVti depends uponthe input voltage range (CK, DK, ..), threshold level Vt,temperature and input current. The input current is afunction of the input voltage and the output power.

Fig. 32Definition of Vti, ΔVt i and ΔVhi (JFET output)

ΔVti Vhi

VD low

VD

VD high

Vi

P o =

Po

nom

P o =

0

P o =

0

Vti

P o =

Po

nom

11021




D-signal with respect to input and output voltage versus time:

Fig. 33Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VD, Vo1/Vo nom versus time

0

10.95

0

Vi [V DC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min4 tlow min

4 thigh min

th1

Vti +Vhi

Vti


VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto

3


0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

3

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho



11008

1 Hold-up time see Electrical Input Data

2 With output voltage monitoring, hold-up time th = 0.

3 The signal will remain high if the D output is connectedto an external source.

4 tlow min = typically 130 ms.





V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt](VME compatible) of threshold level Vt for Vt min - Vt max

Vi Vo1 Vti Vto Vhi VhoV2 yes no Vi min - Vi max

1 – 3.4 - 0.4 –

V3 yes yes Vi min - Vi max1 0.95 - 0.985 Vo1

2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

V0 yes no Vi min - Vi max3, 4 – 3.4 - 0.4 –

yes yes Vi min - Vi max3, 4 0.95 - 0.985 Vo1

2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer.

2 Fixed value between 95% and 98.5% of Vo1 (tracking).

3 Adjusted at Io nom.

4 Fixed value, resistor-adjusted (±2% at 25 °C) acc. to customer's specifications; individual type number is determined by Power-One.

Table 21: Available internal input capacitance and factory potentiometer setting of Vti with resulting hold-up time

Types AK BK FK CK DK EK LK Unit

Ci min 0.83 0.3 1.2 0.66 0.26 0.21 0.21 mF

Vt i 9.5 19.5 39 39 61 97 120 VDC

th 0.1 0.1 3.4 1.1 1.1 2.7 4.2 ms

Option V: ACFAIL signal (VME)

Available only for models with Vo = 5.1 V.

This option defines an undervoltage monitoring circuit for theinput and main output voltage. It generates an ACFAIL signal (V signal) which conforms to the VME standard.The low state level of the ACFAIL signal is specified at a sinkcurrent of IV ≤ 48 mA to VV ≤ 0.6 V (open-collector output of anNPN transistor). The pull-up resistor feeding the open-collectoroutput should be placed on the VME backplane. After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time (th) of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops to 4.875 V when the output is fully loaded. Thehold-up time is provided by the internal input capacitance.Consequently, the working input voltage and the threshold level(Vti) should be adequately above the minimum input voltage (Vi min) of the converter so that enough energy is remaining inthe input capacitance. If the input voltage is below the requiredlevel, an external hold-up capacitor (Ci ext) should be added.


2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Vti = ––––––––––––––––––––– + Vi min

2Ci min • η

Formula for the external input capacitor:

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Ci ext = –––––––––––––––––––––– – Ci min

η • (Vti 2 – Vi min

2)

where as:Ci min = internal input capacitance [mF]Ci ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]

η = efficiency [%]th = hold-up time [ms]

Vi min = minimum input voltage [V] 1

Vti = threshold level [V]

1 Min. input voltage according to Electrical Input Data. For output voltagesVo > Vo nom, the minimum input voltage increases proportionally to

Vo/Vo nom.

Remarks:

Option V2 and V3 can be adjusted by potentiometer to a thresholdlevel between Vi min and Vi max. A decoupling diode should beconnected in series with the input of AK - FK converters to avoidthe input capacitance discharging through other loads connectedto the same source voltage.

Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vti is either adjustable by

potentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover,or adjusted during manufacture to a determined customerspecified value.

Versions V0, V2, and V3 are available as shown below.

Option V operates independently of the built-in inputundervoltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal is generated atpin 20 as soon as one of the monitored voltages drops below thepreselected threshold level Vt. The return for this signal is Vo1–.The V output recovers when the monitored voltage(s) exceed(s)




V output (V0, V2, V3):

Connector pin V is internally connected to the open collector ofan NPN transistor. The emitter is connected to Vo1- or Vo-. VV ≤ 0.6 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltage level(Vi and/or Vo1) <Vt. The current IV through the open collectorshould not exceed 50 mA. The NPN output is not protectedagainst external overvoltages. VV should not exceed 60 V.

Vi, Vo1 status V output, VVVi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VV ≤ 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, IV ≤ 25 µA at VV = 5.1 V Fig. 34Output configuration of options V0, V2, and V3

Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009

Threshold tolerances and hysteresis:If Vi is monitored, the internal input voltage is measured after theinput filter. Consequently, this voltage differs from the voltage atthe connector pins by the voltage drop DVti across the inputfilter. The threshold level of option V0 is adjusted duringmanufacture at Io nom and TA = 25 °C. The value of ΔVtidepends upon the input voltage range (AK, BK, etc.), thresholdlevel Vt, temperature and input current. The input current is afunction of input voltage and output power.

ΔVti Vhi

VV low

VV

VV high

Vi

P o =

Po

nom

P o =

0

P o =

0

Vti

P o =

Po

nom

11023





3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vi [VDC]

0

t

t

Vti + Vhi

Vti


VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo1

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo1

2.0 V



11010

t

t

t

t

Fig. 36Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VV, IV and Vo1/Vo nomversus time.

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms 2 tlow min = 40 - 200 ms, typically 80 ms

3 VV level not defined at Vo1 < 2.0 V

4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output voltage. Ifthe pull-up resistor RP is connected to Vo1+. The V signal

remains high if RP is connected to an external source.

Options B1/B2: Cooling Plate

Where a cooling surface is available, we recommend the useof a cooling plate (option B1) instead of the standard heat sink.The mounting system should ensure sufficient coolingcapacity to guarantee that the maximum case temperature TC max is not exceeded. The cooling capacity is calculated by:

(100% – η)PLoss = –––––––––– • Vo • IoηEfficiency η see: Model Selection

Elongated case for 220 mm rack depth: Option B2

Dimensions see Mechanical Data




Accessories

A variety of electrical and mechanical accessories are availableincluding:– Front panels for 19" DIN-rack: Schroff 16 TE /3U,

[HZZ00831] and 16 TE /6U [HZZ00832], or Intermas 16 TE /3U [HZZ00731].

– Mating H15/H15 S4 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on orpress-fit terminals.

– Cable connector housing: Screw version [HZZ00141] orretention clip version [HZZ00142].

– Connector retention clips (2x) [HZZ01209].– Connector retention brackets CRB [HZZ01216].– Coding clips for connector coding [HZZ00202].– DIN-rail mounting assembly DMB-K/S [HZZ00615].– Wall-mounting plate K02 [HZZ01213] for models with Option

B1.– Additional external input or output filters.– Battery temperature sensor [S-KSMH...] for use of the

converter as a battery charger. Different battery charact-eristics can be selected. For additional accessory product information, see the accessorydata sheets listed with each product series or individually atwww.power-one.com through the following menus: “SelectProducts”, “Download Data Sheets & Applications Notes”, orwith each model in the product overviews.

H15 female connector,code key system

Front panels

DIN mounting assembly DMB-K/S

Connector retention bracket CRBConnector retention clip

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized for use as critical componentsin life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systems without the express written consent of the respectivedivisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change depending on the datemanufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

20 to 30 Ncm





We


declare under our sole responsibility that K and S Series AC-DC and DC-DCconverters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.

Conformity with the directive is presumed by conformity wih the followingharmonized standards:

• EN 61204:1995 (= IEC 61204:1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Perfomance characteristics and safety requirements

• EN 60950:2000 (= IEC 60950:2000)Safety of information technology equipment

The installation instructions given in the data sheet describe correct installationleading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with the LVD. All Kand S Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyoperation or by professional installers. They must not be operated as stand aloneproducts.


Uster, 24 May 2005 Power-One AG

Rolf Baldauf Johann MilavecVP Product Development Director Projects and IP


BCD20001-G Rev AB Page 1 of 28 www.power-one.com

K Series with PFC Data Sheet150 – 280 Watt AC-DC Converters


DescriptionThe LK 4000/5000 Series of AC-DC converters representsa flexible range of power supplies for use in advancedelectronic systems; the LKP models are an extension withincreased output power, but optimized to 230 VAC.Features include full power factor correction, good hold-uptime, high efficiency and reliability, low output noise, andexcellent dynamic response to load/line changes.The converters are protected against surges andtransients occurring at the source lines. Input over- andundervoltage lockout circuitry disables the outputs, whenthe input voltage is outside of the specified range. Inputinrush current limitation is included for preventing circuitbreakers and fuses from tripping at switch-on.All outputs are overload, open- and short-circuit proof, andprotected by a built-in suppressor diode. The outputs canbe inhibited by a logic signal applied to connector pin 18. Ifthe inhibit function is not used, pin 18 must be connectedwith pin 14 to enable the outputs.

LED indicators display the status of the converter andallow visual monitoring of the system at any time.Full input to output, input to case, output to case andoutput to output isolation is provided. The converters aredesigned and built according to the international safetystandards IEC/EN 60950-1. They have been approved bythe safety agencies TÜV and UL (for USA and Canada).The case design allows operation at nominal load up to71 °C in a free air ambient temperature. If forced cooling isprovided, the ambient temperature may exceed 71 °C, butthe case temperature must remain below 95 °C under allconditions. However, higher output power up to 280 W ispossible depending on environmental conditions andconverter model.An internal temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal,which disables the outputs, when the case temperature TCexceeds the limit. The outputs automatically recover, whenthe temperature drops below the limit.

1686.6"

803.2"16 TE

1114.4"3 U

• RoHS lead-solder exemption compliant• Power factor >0.93, harmonics IEC/EN 61000-3-2• Output power up to 280 W• Immunity according to IEC/EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6• Emissions according to EN 55011/55022• High efficiency• Input over- and undervoltage lockout• Adjustable output voltage with remote on/off• Outputs: SELV, no load, overload, short-circuit proof• Rectangular current limiting characteristic• PCBs protected by lacquer• Very high reliability

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1

FeaturesUniversal AC input range 100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz1 or 2 isolated outputs up to 56.5 VDCClass I equipment

Description ....................................................................... 1Model Selection ............................................................... 2Functional Description ..................................................... 4Electrical Input Data ........................................................ 5Electrical Output Data ..................................................... 8Auxiliary Functions ........................................................ 13Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ........................... 16

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ......................... 17Mechanical Data ............................................................ 18Safety and Installation Instructions ............................... 19Description of Options ................................................... 21Accessories ................................................................... 27EC Declaration of Conformity ....................................... 28




Model SelectionNon-standard input/output configurations or special customer adaptations are available on request.

Table 1: Standard models

Output 1 Output 2 Operating input range Type designation Efficiency1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηη min[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [VAC] [%]

5.1 25 – – 85 – 264 LK4003-6R 78 E, P, D, V 2, P, T, K5, B1, B2 4

12 12 – – 85 – 264 LK4301-7R 84 -9E, P, D, T, B1, B2 4

15 10 – – LK4501-7R 8524 6 – – LK4601-7R 86

12 6 12 3 6 85 – 264 LK5320-7R 82 -9E, P, D, T, B1, B2 4

15 5 15 3 5 LK5540-7R 8324 3 24 3 3 LK5660-7R 83

24 5.2 24 3 5.2 187 – 255 LKP5660-7R 86 -9E, P, D, T, B1, B2 4

24 5.8 24 3 5.8 LKP5661-5R 86 E, P, D, T, B1, B2 4

1 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approximately 2% better.2 Option V for models with 5.1 V outputs; excludes option D3 Second output semi-regulated4 For customer-specific models with 220 mm case length5 For new designs, use only option K.

Table 2: Battery charger models

Nom. output values Output range 5 Operating input range Type designation Efficiency1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo min – Vo max Vi min – Vi max ηηηηη min[VDC] [A] [VDC] [VAC] [%]

12.84 10 12.62 – 14.12 85 – 264 LK4740-7R 84 -9E, D, T, B1, B2 4

25.68 2 5.4 25.25 – 28.25 LK5740-7R 8351.36 3 2.7 25.5 – 56.5 LK5740-7R 83

25.68 2 9 25.25 – 28.25 187 – 255 LKP5740-7R 86 -9E, D, T, B1, B2 4

25.68 2 10 25.25 – 28.25 LKP5741-5R 86 E, D, T, B1, B2 4

51.36 3 4.5 50.5 – 56.5 187 – 255 LKP5740-7R 86 -9E, D, T, B1, B2 4

51.36 3 5 50.5 – 56.5 LKP5741-5R 85 E, D, T, B1, B2 4

1 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approximately 2% better.2 Both outputs connected in parallel3 Both outputs connected in series4 For customer-specific models with 220 mm case length5 Controlled by the battery temperature sensor, see Accessories

Various options are available to adapt the converters toindividual applications. An external temperature sensor isavailable to allow for temperature adapted batterycharging.The converters may either be plugged into 19" racksystems according to IEC 60297-3, or be mounted on achassis or plate.

Important:These products are intended to replace the LK1000 andLK2000 models, in order to comply with IEC/EN 61000-3-2.For applications with DC input or main frequencies other than50/60 Hz, the LK1000 and LK2000 models are still available.




Example: LK5540-9EPD3TB1: Power factor corrected AC-DC converter, operating input voltage range 85 – 264 VAC,2 electrically isolated outputs, each providing 15 V, 5 A, equipped with inrush current limiter, a potentiometer toadjust the output voltages, undervoltage monitor D3, current share feature, and a cooling plate B1.

Product MarkingBasic type designation, applicable approval marks, CE mark, warnings, pin designation, Power-One patents andcompany logo, identification of LEDs, test sockets, and potentiometer.Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal output voltages and currents, degree of protection, batch no.,serial no., and data code including production site, modification status, and date of production.

Part Number Description

Operating input voltage Vi:85 – 264 VAC ............................................................ LK187 – 255 VAC ........................................................LKP

Number of outputs .......................................................... 4, 5Single-output models:Nominal voltage output 1 (main output), Vo1 nom

5.1 V 0, 1, 212 V 315 V 4, 524 V 6Other voltages 1 ....................................................... 7, 8Other specifications (single-output models)1 ....... 01 – 99

Double-output models:Nominal voltage output 1 and 2

12 V, 12 V ............................................................................................... 2015 V, 15 V ............................................................................................... 4024 V, 24 V ...................................................... 60, 61, 62Other specifications or additional features 1 ...... 70 – 99

Operational ambient temperature range TA:–25 to 71 °C................................................................ -7–40 to 71 °C................................................................ -9–25 2 to 60 °C .............................................................. -6–25 2 to 50 °C .............................................................. -5Other 1 ......................................................................... -0

Auxiliary functions and options:Inrush current limitation ............................................. E 2

Output voltage control input ....................................... R 3

Potentiometer (output voltage adjustment) ................ P 3

Undervoltage monitor (D0 – DD, to be specified) ...... D 4

ACFAIL signal (V2, V3, to be specified) .................... V 4

Current share ............................................................... TH15S4 connector ....................................................... K 5

Cooling plate standard case ...................................... B1Cooling plate for long case 220 mm 1 ........................ B2

1 Customer-specific models2 Option E is mandatory for all -9 models. Models with -5E or -6E are functional down to –40 °C.3 Feature R excludes option P and vice versa. Option P is not available for battery charger models.4 Option D excludes option V and vice versa; option V is available for models with 5.1 V output only (LK4003, etc.).5 Option K is available for models with 5.1 V output only (LK4003, etc.) to ensure compatibility with LK1001 models.

LK 5 5 40 -9 E P D3 T K B1




Fig. 2Block diagram of double-output models

1 Transient suppressor (VDR)2 Inrush current limiter (NTC, only models with TA min = –25 °C ), or option E3 Input fuse4 Bulk capacitor (Ci)

Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input fuse, an input filter, arectifier, and an inrush current limiter to a boost converter.This step-up converter provides a sinusoidal input current(IEC/EN 61000-3-2, class D equipment) and charges thebulk capacitor C i to approx. 370 VDC. This capacitorsources a single-transistor forward converter and providesthe power during the hold-up time.Each output is powered by a separate secondary winding

of the main transformer. The resultant voltages are rectifiedand their ripple smoothed by a power choke and an outputfilter. The control logic senses the main output voltage Vo1and generates, with respect to the maximum admissibleoutput currents, the control signal for the switchingtransistor of the forward converter.The second output of double output models is tracking tothe main output, but has its own current limiting circuit. Ifthe main output voltage drops due to current limitation, thesecond output voltage will fall as well and vice versa.

Fig. 1Block diagram of single-output converters

1 Transient suppressor (VDR)2 Inrush current limiter (NTC, only models with TA min = –25 °C ), or option E3 Input fuse4 Bulk capacitor (Ci)

Input fil

ter

Contr

ol c

ircu

it

P

2

CY

161820221246

8

10

14

CY

Outp

ut

filte

r

1

28

3032

24

3

– +

CY

CY

Forw

ard

conve

rter

(appro

x. 8

0 k

Hz)

+

Boost

conve

rter

( PF

C)

370 V

DC

Ci 4

03001b

RiD/VTS+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

26N~

L~

Inpu

t filt

er

Con

trol

circ

uit

1

P

2

16182022

12

1446

810

Out

put 2

filte

rO

utpu

t 1fil

ter

2628

3032

24

3

– +

CY

CYCY

CY

CY

CY

For

war

d co

nver

ter

(app

rox.

80

kHz)

Boo

st c

onve

rter

(P

FC

)

+

370

VD

C Ci4

03002b

N~

L~

RiDT

Vo1+

Vo1–

Vo2+

Vo2–




Electrical Input DataGeneral Conditions:

– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Pin 18 connected to pin 14, R input not connected, Vo adjusted to Vo nom (option P)– Sense line pins S+ and S– connected to Vo+ and Vo–, respectively.

Table 3: Electrical input data

Input LK LKP

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max Unit

Vi Rated input voltage range Io = 0 – Io nom 100 240 200 240 VAC 1

Vi op Operating input voltage range TC min to TC max 85 264 187 255

Vi nom Nominal input voltage 50 – 60 Hz 230 230

Ii Input current Vi nom, Io nom 2 0.8 1.25 A

P i0 No-load input power V i min – Vi max, Io = 0 9 10 9 10 W

P i inh Idle input power converter inhibited 3.5 5 3.5 5

R i Input resistance 480 480 mΩ

RNTC NTC resistance (see fig. 3)3 conv. not operating 3200 4000 3200 4000C i Input capacitance 80 100 120 110 136 165 µF

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55011/55022 B B

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom A B

Vi abs Input voltage limits 283 283 VACwithout damage –400 400 –400 400 VDC 4

1 Rated input frequency: 50 – 60 Hz, operating frequency range: 47 – 63 Hz. For operation at other frequencies, contact Power-One.2 With double-output models, both outputs loaded with Io nom3 Valid for models without option E. This is the NTC resistance value at 25 °C and applies to cold converters for the initial switch-on

cycle. Subsequent switch-on/off cycles increase the inrush current peak value.4 Operation with DC input voltage is not specified and not recommended.

Input Transient ProtectionA VDR together with the input fuse and a symmetrical inputfilter form an effective protection against high inputtransient voltages.

Input FuseA fuse mounted inside the converter in series to the phaseline protects against severe defects. A second fuse in theneutral line may be necessary in certain applications; seeInstallation Instructions.

Table 4: Fuse specification

Model Fuse type Fuse rating

LK4/5000 slow-blow SP T, 4 A, 250 V, 5 × 20 mm

LKP slow-blow SP T, 4 A, 250 V, 5 × 20 mm

Input Under- /Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage remains below approx. 65 VAC (LKP:150 VAC) or exceeds Vi abs, an internally generated inhibitsignal disables the output(s). Do not check the overvoltagelockout function!If Vi is below Vi min, but above the undervoltage lockoutlevel, the output voltage may be below the value specifiedin the tables Electrical Output Data.

Inrush Current LimitationThe models without option E incorporate an NTC resistor inthe input circuitry, which at initial turn-on reduces the peakinrush current value by a factor of 5 to 10 to protectconnectors and switching devices from damage. Sub-sequent switch-on cycles within short periods will cause anincrease of the peak inrush current value due to thewarming-up of the NTC resistor.The inrush current peak value (initial switch-on cycle) canbe determined by following calculation:

Vi • √ 2––

Iinr p = –––––––––––––––– (Rs ext + R i + RNTC)

Fig. 3Equivalent circuit diagram for input impedance.


Vi Ci

04001a




Fig. 4Theoretical worst case input inrush current versustime at Vi = 255 V, Rext = 0 for models withoutfeature E

Fig. 5Input current versus input voltage at Io nom

Power Factor and HarmonicsPower factor correction is achieved by controlling the inputcurrent waveform synchronously with the input voltagewaveform. The power factor control is active under alloperating conditions.

Fig. 6Power factor versus output current (LK4501-7R)

100 150 200 250 300 VAC500

1

2

li [A]04002a

LKP

LK

0.1 1 ms

50

100

Iinr [A]

0

LKP

04054a

0.5

LK

0.8

0.85

0.9

0.95

1.0

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Io /Io nom

Vi = 85 VAC

Vi = 230 VAC

LK4501-pf

The harmonic distortion is well below the limits specified inIEC/EN 61000-3-2, class D, see fig. below:

Fig. 8Harmonic input currents at Vi = 230 V, Io = Io nom forLK4501-7R (left bars) and LKP5660-7R.

Fig. 7Power factor versus output current (LKP5660-7R)

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

3 5 7 9 11 13

LKP-harmmA/W

Harm.

0.8

0.85

0.9

0.95

1.0

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Io /Io nom

Vi = 230 VAC

Vi = 187 VAC

LKP5660-pf




Efficiency

0.6

0.7

0.8

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Io /Io nom

Vi = 187 V

Vi = 230 V0.9 LKP5660-eta

Fig. 11bEfficiency versus output current (LKP5660-7R)

Fig. 11aEfficiency versus output current (LK4501-7R)

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 10

60

0

10

20

30

40

50

kHz

Io/Io nom

70

80

1.2

05008b

Fig. 9Typical inverter switching frequency versus load.The boost converter at the input stage operates with aconstant switching frequency of 100 kHz.

Hold-up Time

Fig. 10aHold-up time versus output power (LK4501-7R), valid forconverters with version V102 or higher.

Switching Frequency

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Io /Io nom

LK4501-eta

Vi = 230 V

Vi = 85 V

0

40

80

120

160

ms

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Io /Io nom

Vi = 230 V

Vi = 85 V

LK4501-hu-a

Fig. 10bHold-up time versus output power (LKP5660-7R)

0

40

80

120

160

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Io/Io nom

LKP5660-hu-a

Vi = 230 V

Vi = 187 V

ms




Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Pin 18 (i) connected to pin 14 (S– or Vo1–), R input not connected, Vo adjusted to Vo nom (option P),– Sense line pins 12 (S+) and 14 (S–) connected to pins 4 (Vo1+) and 8 (Vo1–), respectively.

Table 5: Output data of single-output models

LK4003-6 LK4301 / 47405 LK4501 LK4601Output 5.1 V 12 V 5 15 V 24 V



Vo BR Overvoltage protection 6 15.2/175 19.6 28.5(suppressor diode)6

Io nom Output current nom. 1 Vi min – Vi max 25 12 / 105 10 6 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 2 Vi min – Vi max 26 12.2 10.2 6.2

vo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 2 2 2 2 mVppnoise 3

Switching frequ. BW = 20 MHz 15 5 5 5

Total incl. spikes 25 40 40 40

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max ±5 ±12 ±15 ±24 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io nom

∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom –15 –25 –30 –40(0.1 – 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±100 ±100 ±100 ±100load deviation 2 Io nom ↔ 1/2 Io nom

t dregulat. 2 Recovery time2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 ms

α v o Temperature coefficient TC min – TCmax ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 4 Io nom

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrents should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is not exceeded.

2 See Output Voltage Regulation3 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204 with a probe according to annex A4 For battery charger applications, a defined negative temperature coefficient can be provided by using a temperature sensor (see

Accessories), but we recommend choosing special battery charger models.5 Especially designed for battery charging using the temperature sensor (see Accessories). Vo is set to 12.84 V ±1% (R-input open)6 Breakdown voltage of the incorporated suppressor diode (1 mA; 10 mA for 5 V output). To exceed Vo BR is dangerous for the

suppressor diode.




1 Same conditions for both outputs2 If the output voltages are

increased above Vo nom via R-input control, option P setting,remote sensing or option T, theoutput currents should bereduced accordingly so thatPo nom is not exceeded.

3 Measured according to IEC/EN61204 with a probe annex A

4 See Dynamic Load Regulation5 See Output Voltage Regulation

of Double-Output Models6 For battery charger applications

a defined negative temperaturecoefficient can be provided byusing a temperature sensor;see Accessories.

7 Especially designed for batterycharging using the batterytemperature sensor; seeAccessories.Vo1 is set to 25.68 V ±1% (R-input open).

8 Breakdown voltage of theincorporated suppressordiodes (1 mA). To exceedVo BR is dangerous for thesuppressor diodes.

LK5660 / 5740 7

Output 2 ××××× 24 V / 25.68 V7



Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 1 23.76 7 24.24 7 23.52 7 24.48 7 V

Vo BR8 Overvoltage protection 28.5/347 28.5/347

(suppressor diode)

Io nom Output current nom. 2 Vi min – Vi max 3 / 2.77 3 / 2.7 7 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 5 Vi min – Vi max 3.2 3.2

vo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 3 3 mVppnoise 3

Switching freq. BW = 20 MHz 10 10Total incl. spikes 80 60

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max ±20 5 mVwith respect to Vi nom 3 Io nom

∆Vo I Static load regulation 1 Vi nom –40 5

(0.1 – 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom ↔ 1/2 Io1 nom

t dregulat.3 Recovery time4 1/2 Io2 nom 0.3 ms

α v o Temperature coefficient TC min – TC max ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 6 Io nom

Table 6a: Output data of double-output LK models. General conditions as in table 5.

LK5320 LK5540Output 2 ××××× 12 V 2 ××××× 15 V




Vo BR8 Overvoltage protection 15.2 15.2 19.6 19.6(suppressor diode)

Io nom Output current nom.2 Vi min – Vi max 6 6 5 5 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 5 Vi min – Vi max 6.2 6.2 5.2 5.2vo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 3 3 3 3 mVpp

noise 3Switching freq. BW = 20 MHz 12 12 10 10


∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max ±12 5 ±15 5 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io nom

∆Vo I Static load regulation1 Vi nom –40 5 –50 5

(0.1 – 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, ±100 ±150 ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom ↔ 1/2 Io1 nom

t dregulat.3 Recovery time4 1/2 Io2 nom 0.3 0.4 ms

α v o Temperature coefficient TC min – TC max ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 6 Io nom

Table 6b: Output data of double-output LK models. General conditions as in table 5.




Table 7a: Output data of double-output LKP models. General conditions as in table 5.

LKP5660-7 LKP5740-7 7

Output 2××××× 24 V 2 ××××× 25.68 V




Vo BR8 Overvoltage protection 28.5 28.5 34 34 (suppressor diode)

Io nom Output current nom. 2 Vi min – Vi max 5.2 5.2 4.5 4.5 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 5 Vi min – Vi max 5.3 5.3 4.6 4.6vo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 10 10 10 10 mVpp

noise 3Switching freq. BW = 20 MHz 20 20 20 20



∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom –60 5 –80 5

(0.1 – 1) Io nom


t dregulat.3 Recovery time4 0.3 0.4 ms


1 Same conditions for both outputs2 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the output

currents should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is not exceeded.3 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204 with a probe according to annex A4 See Dynamic Load Regulation5 See Output Voltage Regulation of Double-Output Models6 For battery charger applications, a defined negative temperature coefficient can be provided by using a temperature sensor

(see Accessories), but we recommend choosing special battery charger models.7 Especially designed for battery charging using the battery temperature sensor (see Accessories). Similar models see table 7b.

Vo1 is set to 25.68 V ±1% (R-input open).6 Breakdown voltage of the incorporated suppressor diodes (1 mA). To exceed Vo BR is dangerous for the suppressor diodes.

Table 7b: Other LKP modelsAll data not specified in this table are equal to LKP5740-7. General conditions as in table 5.

LKP5661-57 LKP5741-58

Output 2××××× 24 V 2××××× 25.68 V



Io nom Output current nom. Vi min – Vi max 5.8 5.8 5 5 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 1 Vi min – Vi max 6.0 6.0 5.2 5.2

TA max Max. operating temp. 50 50 °C

7 All other data see LKP5660-78 All other data see LKP5740-7 (battery charger)




Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air(convection cooling) at the indicated maximum ambienttemperature TA max (see table: Temperature specifications)and is operated at its nominal input voltage and outputpower, the temperature measured at the Measuring pointof case temperature TC (see: Mechanical Data) will approachthe indicated value TC max after the warm-up phase.However, the relationship between TA and TC dependsheavily on the conditions of operation and integration into asystem. The thermal conditions are influenced by inputvoltage, output current, airflow, and temperature ofsurrounding components and surfaces. TA max is therefore,contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under all operatingconditions TC remains within the limits stated in the table:Temperature specifications.

Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sink(applied to -7 or -9) models allows TA to be higher than 71 °C(e.g., 85 °C), if TC max is not exceeded. Details are specifiedin fig. 12, including -5 and -6 models.

Fig. 12Output current derating versus temperature for -5, -6, and-7 (equal to -9) models.

Thermal ProtectionA temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signal,which disables the outputs, when the case temperatureexceeds TC max. The outputs automatically recover, whenthe temperature drops below this limit.Continuous operation under simultaneous extreme worst-case conditions of the following three parameters shouldbe avoided: Minimum input voltage, maximum outputpower, and maximum temperature.

Output ProtectionEach output (and the connected equipment) is protected bya suppressor diode against overvoltage, which could occurdue to a failure of the control circuit. In such a case, thesuppressor diode becomes a short circuit. The suppressordiodes may smooth short overvoltages resulting fromdynamic load changes, but they are not designed towithstand externally applied overvoltages.A short circuit at any of the two outputs will cause a shut-down of the other output. A red LED indicates an overloadcondition.

Note: Vo BR is specified in Electrical Output Data. If thisvoltage is exceeded, the suppressor diode generates lossesand may become a short circuit.

Parallel or Series Connection of ConvertersSingle or double-output models with equal output voltagecan be connected in parallel without any precautions usingoption T (current sharing). If the T pins are interconnected,all converters share the output current equally.Single-output models and/or main and second outputs ofdouble-output models can be connected in series with anyother (similar) output.

Notes:– Parallel connection of double-output models should

always include both, main and second output tomaintain good regulation of both outputs.

– Not more than 5 converters should be connected inparallel.

– Series connection of second outputs without involvingtheir main outputs should be avoided as regulationmay be poor.

– Models with a rated output voltage above 36 V needadditional measures to comply with the requirementsof SELV (Safe Extra Low Voltage).

– The maximum output current is limited by the outputwith the lowest current limitation, if several outputs areconnected in series.

00.10.20.30.40.50.60.70.8

50 60 70 80 90 100 °C

Io/Io nom

TA

0.91.00

forced coolingconvection cooling

TC max

-6 -7

-6 -7

0514

3a

-5

-5




0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Io2/Io2 nom

13.5

14

14.5

15

15.5

16

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 100%Io1 = 50%Io1 = 10%

16.5 05084a

Fig. 15Models with 2 outputs 12 V: ∆Vo2 versus Io2 with various Io1 (typ).

Output Voltage RegulationThe following figures apply to single-output or double-out-put models with parallel-connected outputs.

0 1 Io2/Io2 nom

10.5

11

11.5

12.0

12.5

13

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 100%Io1 = 50%Io1 = 10%

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

05083a

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Io2/Io2 nom

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 100%Io1 = 50%Io1 = 10%

05085a



Fig. 13Typical output characteristic Vo versus Io.

Fig. 14Typical dynamic load regulation of Vo.

VoVo nom

0.98

0.5

00.5 1.0

Io

IoL

IoIo nom

05001a

Vod

Vod

td td

Vo ±1% Vo ±1%

t

t

≥ 10 ms ≥ 10 ms

Vo

0

0.5

1

Io/Io nom

05102b

Output Regulation of Double-Output ModelsOutput 1 is under normal conditions regulated to Vo nom,independent of the output currents.Vo2 depends upon the load distribution. If both outputs areloaded with more than 10% of Io nom, the deviation of Vo2remains within ±5% of Vo1. The following 3 figures show theregulation with varying load distribution.Two outputs of a double-output model connected in parallelbehave like the output of a single-output model.

Note: If output 2 is not used, we recommend connecting it inparallel with output 1. This ensures good regulation andefficiency.




Auxiliary Functions

Inhibit for Remote On/OffThe outputs may be enabled or disabled by means of alogic signal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied between the inhibitinput i and pin 18 (S– or Vo1–). In systems with severalconverters, this feature can be used to control theactivation sequence of the converters. If the inhibit functionis not required, connect the inhibit pin 18 to pin 14.

Note: If pin 18 is not connected, the output is disabled.

Vi+

Vi– Vo–

i

Vo+I inh

Vinh

06031




Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min – Vi max – 50 0.8 Vvoltage Vo = off 2.4 50

I inh Inhibit current Vinh = 0 – 400 µA

t r Rise time 30 ms

t f Fall time depending on Io

Fig. 20Output response as a function of inhibit control


1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032

0 t

t0

Inhibit

1

0.1

1Vo/Vo nom

tr tf

06001

Sense Lines (Single-Output Models)Important: Sense lines must always be connected!Incorrectly connected sense lines may activate theovervoltage protection resulting in a permanent short-circuitof the output.

This feature allows for compensation of voltage dropsacross the connector contacts and if necessary, across theload lines. We recommend connecting the sense linesdirectly at the female connector.To ensure correct operation, both sense lines (S+, S–)should be connected to their respective power outputs(Vo1+ and Vo1–), and the voltage difference between anysense line and its respective power output (as measuredon the connector) should not exceed the following values:


Output Total voltage difference Voltage difference voltage between sense lines and between


5.1 V <0.5 V <0.25 V

12 V, 15 V, 24 V <1.0 V <0.25 V

Note: If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom viaR-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T,the output currents must be reduced accordingly, so thatPo nom is not exceeded.

Programmable Output Voltage (R-Function)As a standard feature, the converters offer an adjustableoutput voltage, identified by letter R in the typedesignation. The control input R (pin 16) accepts either acontrol voltage Vext or a resistor Rext to adjust the desiredoutput voltage. When R is not connected, the outputvoltage is set to Vo nom.a) Adjustment by means of an external control voltage Vext

between pin 16 (R) and pin 14:The control voltage range is 0 – 2.75 VDC and allows anoutput voltage adjustment in the range of approximately0 – 110% Vo nom.

VoVext ≈ –––––– • 2.5 VVo nom

b) Adjustment by means of an external resistor:Depending upon the value of the required output voltagethe resistor shall be connectedeither: Between pin 16 and pin 14 (Vo < Vo nom) toachieve an output voltage adjustment range of approxi-mately 0 – 100% Vo nom.or: Between pin 16 and pin 12 (Vo > Vo nom) to achieve anoutput voltage adjustment range of 100 – 110% Vo nom.

Warning:

– Vext shall never exceed 2.75 VDC.– The value of R'ext shall never be less than the lowest

value as indicated in table R'ext (for V0 > V0 nom) toavoid damage to the converter!




R

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–Vext

N~

L~

Rext

R'ext

14

16

16

14

+

S+

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–

N~

L~

R12

06003a

Fig. 21Output voltage control for single-output models

Notes:– The R-Function excludes option P (output voltage

adjustment by potentiometer).If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R-inputcontrol, option P setting, remote sensing, or option T, theoutput currents should be reduced, so that Po nom is notexceeded.

– With double-output models the second output follows thevalue of the controlled main output.

– In case of parallel connection the output voltages should beindividually set within a tolerance of 1 – 2%.

Table 10: Rext for Vo < Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R'ext = not fitted

Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 VVo [V] Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

0.5 0.432 2 4 0.806 2 4 0.619 4 8 0.8061.0 0.976 3 6 1.33 4 8 1.47 6 12 1.331.5 1.65 4 8 2 6 12 2.67 8 16 22.0 2.61 5 10 2.87 8 16 4.53 10 20 2.872.5 3.83 6 12 4.02 9 18 6.04 12 24 4.023.0 5.76 7 14 5.62 10 20 8.06 14 28 5.623.5 8.66 8 16 8.06 11 22 11 16 32 8.064.0 14.7 9 18 12.1 12 24 16.2 18 36 12.14.5 30.1 10 20 20 13 26 26.1 20 40 205.0 200 11 22 42.2 14 28 56.2 22 44 44.2

Table 10b: R’ext for Vo > Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); Rext = not fitted

Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 VVo [V] R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

5.15 432 12.1 24.2 1820 15.2 30.4 1500 24.25 48.5 33205.2 215 12.2 24.4 931 15.4 30.8 768 24.5 49.0 16905.25 147 12.3 24.6 619 15.6 31.2 523 24.75 49.5 11305.3 110 12.4 24.8 475 15.8 31.6 392 25.0 50.0 8455.35 88.7 12.5 25.0 383 16.0 32.0 316 25.25 50.5 6985.4 75 12.6 25.2 316 16.2 32.4 267 25.5 51.0 5905.45 64.9 12.7 25.4 274 16.4 32.8 232 25.75 51.5 5115.5 57.6 12.8 25.6 243 16.5 33.0 221 26.0 52.0 442

13.0 26.0 196 26.25 52.5 40213.2 26.4 169 26.4 52.8 383

1 First column: Vo or Vo1; second column: double-output models with outputs in series connection

R'extRext

14

16

Vo1–

Vo1+

R

Vo2–

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo2+

12

10

8

6

4 +

–

Vo1

24 V30 V48 V

Co

06004a

Fig. 22Double-output models:Wiring of the R-input for output voltages 24 V, 30 V, or48 V with both outputs in series. A ceramic capacitor (Co)across the load reduces ripple and spikes.

Test JacksTest jacks (pin diameter 2 mm) for measuring the mainoutput voltage Vo or Vo1 are located at the front of theconverter. The positive test jack is protected by a seriesresistor (see: Functional Description, block diagrams).The voltage measured at the test jacks is slightly lowerthan the value at the output terminals.





Battery Charging /Temperature SensorAll converters with an R-input are suitable for batterycharger applications, but we recommend to choose themodels especially designed for this application, see ModelSelection, table 2.For optimal battery charging and life expectancy of thebattery an external temperature sensor can be connectedto the R-input. The sensor is mounted as close as possibleto the battery and adjusts the output voltage according tothe battery temperature.Depending upon cell voltage and the temperaturecoefficient of the battery, different sensor types areavailable, see: Accessories.

2.10

2.15

2.20

2.25

2.30

2.35

2.40


–20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 °C

06139a


Vo nom

Fig. 25Trickle charge voltage versus temperature for definedtemperature coefficient. Vo nom is the output voltage withopen R-input.

LEDs "OK ", "i " and "Io L" status versus input voltageConditions: Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 VVi uv = undervoltage lock-out, Vi ov = overvoltage lock-out

LEDs "OK" and "Io L" status versus output currentConditions: Vi min – Vi max, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i " versus case temperatureConditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i " versus VinhConditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj


Vi

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OKIo L

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

TC

i


Vi inh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

Io L


06002_011106

Fig. 23LED indicators

Fig. 24Connection of a temperature sensor

Powersupply

Load

–+

Input Vo–

R

Temperature sensor

ϑ

03099d

Battery

Vo+

+




Table 11: Electromagnetic immunity (type tests)

Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Per-mode 1 applied imped. procedure oper. form.2

Electrostatic IEC / EN 4 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp


Electromagnetic IEC / EN 3 antenna 10 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 – 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

10 V/m 50% duty cycle, n.a. 900 ±5 MHz yes A200 Hz repetition

frequency

Electrical fast IEC / EN 4 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransients/burst 61000-4-4 i/c, +i /–i 4000 Vp



Surges IEC / EN 3 i/c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A3

61000-4-5 4 +i/– i 2000 Vp 2 Ω surges percoupling mode

Conducted IEC / EN 3 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes Adisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBµV) 1 kHz

Voltage dips, IEC / EN 40% +i/– i 230→92 2→1→2 s n.a. yes B4

short interrup- 6100-4-11 →92tions and 0% +i/– i 230→0 B4variations →92

1 i = input, o = output, c = case2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary loss of function or deviation from

specs possible3 For converters with version V102 or higher. Older LKP models meet only B.4 Only LKP models have been tested.


Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A metal oxide VDR together with an input fuse and an inputfilter form an effective protection against high input


transient voltages, which typically occur in mostinstallations. The converters have been successfullytested to the following specifications:

Fig. 26aConducted emissions (peak) at the phase input according toEN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom (LK4301-7R).The neutral line performs quite similar.

10

30

50

70

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

dbµV LKP5660-6, Peak L, conducted, 0.15 - 30 MHz, PMM 8000, 30-May-06

LKP

5660-con-p-a

EN 55022 B

Fig. 26bConducted emissions (peak) at the phase input according toEN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom (LKP5660-7R).The neutral line performs quite similar.

10

30

50

70

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

dbµV LK4301-6, Peak L, conducted, 0.15 - 30 MHz, PMM 8000, 30-May-06

LK4301-con-p

EN 55022 B




50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBmV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07038

Fig. 27Typical radiated emissionsaccording to EN 55011/22, antenna10 m distance, measured at Vi nomand Io nom.


Temperature -5 -6 -7 -9Characteristics Conditions min max min max min max min max UnitTA Ambient temperature Converter –251 50 –251 60 –25 71 –40 71 °CTC Case temperature 1 operating –251 85 –251 90 –25 95 –40 95TS Storage temperature Not operating –402 100 –402 100 –40 100 –55 100

Temperatures

1 Minimum TA and TC for models with option E is –40 °C.2 Minimum TS for models with option E is –55 °C.


Test Method Standard Test Conditions StatusCab Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78:2001 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Converter not

steady state MIL-STD-810D sect. 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % operatingDuration: 56 days

Ea Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27:1987 Acceleration amplitude: 100 gn = 981 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Eb Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29:1987 Acceleration amplitude: 40 gn = 392 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6:1995 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating


Fn Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converterbroad band Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operating(digital control) Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rms

Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52:1996 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter not(sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle operatingNaCl solution) Storage: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity


1 Set of DIN rail mounting brackets; see Accessories




Mechanical DataDimensions in mm. The converters are designed to be inserted intoa 19" rack, 160 mm long, according to IEC 60297-3.

Notes:

– d ≥ 15 mm, recommended minimum distanceto next part in order to ensure proper aircirculation at full output power.

– free air location: the converter should bemounted with fins in a vertical position toachieve maximum airflow through the heatsink.

Fig. 28Aluminium case K02 with heat sink, black finish, and selfcooling; weight ≈1.55 kg

EuropeanProjection

Table 14: MTBF calculated according to MIL-HDBK 217F

Values at specified Model Ground benign Ground fixed Ground mobile Unitcase temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C

MTBF LK4301-7ER 514 000 88 000 38 000 35 000 h

Reliability

159 4.5

89

111

(3U

)

168.5

d

80

4.5

19.7

9.5

29.9

6.5 51

.5

30.3

20.3

12.1

10.3

7.0

3.277 TE 9 TE

Test jacks (+/–)Option P (Vo)

Option D (Vti)

LED OK (green)

LED i (red)

LED IoL (red)

Option D (Vto)

25.9

11.8



(171.0 .... 171.9)50

09002b

42

Gra

vita

tiona

lax

is

= Ø 3.5= Ø 4.1

Mounting slots for chassis or wall mounting




Fig. 30bView of converter's male standard H15connector


Connector Pin AllocationThe connector pin allocation table defines the electrical

Table 15: Pin allocation

Pin Connector H15S2/S45 Connector type H15

no. LK4003 (Vo = 5.1 V) LK4000 (Vo ≥≥≥≥≥ 5.1 V) LK/LKP5000

4Vo+ Positive output Vo+ Positive output Vo2+ Pos. output 2

6

8Vo– Negative output Vo– Negative output Vo2– Neg. output 2

10

12 S+ Sense+ S+ Sense+ Vo1+ Pos. output 1

14 S– Sense– S– Sense– Vo1– Neg. output 1

16 R 1 Control of Vo R 1 Control of Vo R 1 Control of Vo1

18 i Inhibit i Inhibit i Inhibit

20 D 3 Save data D 3 Save data D 3 Save dataV 3 ACFAIL

22 T 4 Current share T 4 Current share T 4 Current share

24 2 Protective earth Protective earth Protective earth

26N∼ Neutral line N∼ Neutral line N∼ Neutral line

28 30

L∼ Phase line L∼ Phase line L∼ Phase line321 Not connected, if option P is fitted.2 Leading pin (pre-connecting)3 Option D excludes option V and vice versa. Pin not connected, unless

option D or V is fitted.4 Not connected, unless option T is fitted.5 Option K stands for the H15S4 connector (compatibility with LK1001)

Note: Long case with option B2, elongated by 60 mm for 220mm rack depth, is available on request. (No LEDs, no testjacks.)

Fig. 29Aluminium case K02 with option B1 (cooling plate), blackfinish and self cooling. Total weight ≈1.15 kg

EuropeanProjection

potentials and the physical pin positions on the H15connector. The protective earth is connected by a leadingpin (no. 24), ensuring that it makes contact with the femaleconnector first.

S10002b

32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

30 26 22 18 14 10 6

Fixtures for retention clips

S10001b

32 28 24 20 16 12 4/6

30 26 22 18 14 8/10


Fig. 30aView of converter's male connector H15S2(not for new designs)Models with option K have a connectorH15S4, where the contacts 26/28 and 30/32are replaced by a high-current contact.

111

(3U

)

17.3 133.4

168

101

547.2

1585

M 4

5


50

(171.0 to 171.9)

3.27

7 TE 4 TE

09003a




Installation InstructionsNote: These converters have a power factor correction (PFC).The LK4000/5000 models are intended to replace the LK1000and LK2000 converters in order to comply with IEC/EN 61000-3-2. LK1000 is replaced by LK4003 with option K.

Switch off the system and check for hazardous voltagesbefore altering any connection!These converters are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by an industrialassembly operation or by professional installers.Installation must strictly follow the national safetyregulations in compliance with the enclosure, mounting,creepage, clearance, casualty, markings, and segregationrequirements of the end-use application.Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H15 (standard) or H15S2; see: Accessories.Other installation methods may not meet the safetyrequirements.Pin no. 24 ( ) is reliably connected with the case. Forsafety reasons it is essential to connect this pin reliably toprotective earth. See: Safety of Operator-AccessibleOutput Circuits.The phase input 30/32 (L~) is connected via a built-in fuse(see: Input Fuse and table 4), which is designed to protectin the case of a converter failure.

An additional external fuse, suitable for the application,might be necessary in the wiring to the other line input 26 /28 (N~) if:

• Local requirements demand an individual fuse in eachsource line

• Phase and neutral of the mains are not defined orcannot be assigned to the corresponding terminals (L~to phase and N~ to neutral).

• Neutral and earth impedance is high or undefinedNotes:– If the inhibit function is not used, pin no. 18 (i) should be

connected to pin no. 14 (S–/Vo1–) to enable the output(s).– Do not open the converters, or warranty will be invalidated.– Due to high current values, the converters provide two

internally parallel contacts for certain paths (pins 4/6, 8/10, 26/28 and 30/32). It is recommended to connect loadand supply to both female connector pins of each path inorder to keep the voltage drop low and to notoverstress the connector contacts with highcurrents.

– If the second output of double-output models is notused, connect it parallel with the main output.

Make sure that there is sufficient airflowavailable for convection cooling. This should beverified by measuring the case temperature,when the converter is installed and operated inthe end-use application. See: Thermal Considerations.Ensure that a converter failure (e.g., an internal short-circuit) does not result in a hazardous condition. See also:Safety of Operator-Accessible Output Circuit.

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters are approved according to UL 60950-1,CSA 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, and EN 60950-1.

The converters correspond to Class I equipment and havebeen evaluated for:

• Building-in • Basic insulation between input and case based on 250

VAC, and double or reinforced insulation between inputand output(s).

• Basic insulation between output(s) and case based on200 VAC.

• Functional insulation between outputs. • Overvoltage category II • Pollution degree 2 environment • Max. altitude: 2000 m. • The converters fulfill the requirements of a fire enclosure.CB-scheme is available: SI-1819 (IEC 60950-1:2001)

All boards and components of the converters are coatedwith a protective lacquer.

The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillancein accordance with the above mentioned UL standards andISO 9001:2000.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetration ofcleaning fluids is to be prevented, since the power suppliesare not hermetically sealed.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the unit. • IP 30: All models except those with option P, and except

those with option D or V including a potentiometer.

• IP 20: All models fitted with option P, or with option D orV with potentiometer.

Leakage CurrentsLeakage currents flow due to internal leakage capacitancesand Y-capacitors. The current values are proportional to thesupply voltage and are specified in the table below.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory asroutine test in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN60950 and should not be repeated in the field. Power-One

Table 16: Leakage currents

Characteristic Class I Unit

Maximum earth Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 3.5 mAleakage current Typ value at 254 V, 50 Hz (LK models) 0.8

Typ value at 254 V, 50 Hz (LKP models) 0.8




Fig. 31Schematic safety concept.

AC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10021a

Fuse

Fuse


Option Function of option Characteristic

-9 Extended operational ambient temperature range TA = – 40 to 71 °C

E Electronic inrush current limitation circuitry Active inrush current limitation

P2 Potentiometer for fine adjustment of output voltage Adjustment range +10/– 60% of Vo nom, excludes R input

D1 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (D0 – DD)

V1 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specifications (V0, V2, V3)

T Current sharing Interconnect T-pins if paralleling outputs (max 5 converters)

K H15S4 connector for 5.1 V output models For new designs; provides compatibility with LK1001 models

B1, B2 Cooling plate (160 or 220 mm long) Replaces standard heat sink, allowing direct chassis-mounting1 Option D excludes option V and vice versa; option V only for 5.1 V outputs.2 Option P is not available for battery charger models.

Table 17: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output(s) to Output 1 to Unitand output(s) case output 2

Electric Factory test >1 s 2.8 1 1.4 0.15 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 2.0 1.0 0.1 kVACtest to factory testInsulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >100 2 MΩCreapage distances ≥ 3.2 3 -- -- mm

1 According to EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950, subassemblies connecting input to output are pre-tested with 5.6 kVDC or 4 kVAC.2 Tested at 150 VDC3 Input to outputs: 6.4 mm

-9 Extended Temperature RangeOption -9 extends the operational ambient temperaturerange from –25 to 71 °C (standard) to – 40 to 71 °C. Thepower supplies provide full nominal output power withconvection cooling. Option -9 excludes inrush currentlimitation by NTC.

E Inrush Current LimitationThe converters may be supplemented by an electroniccircuit replacing the standard built-in NTC to achieve anenhanced inrush current limiting function.

Note: Subsequent switch-on cycles at start-up are limited tomax. 10 cycles during the first 20 seconds (cold converter) andthen to max. 1 cycle every 8 s.

will not honor any warranty claims resulting from electricstrength field tests.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a converter is operator-accessible, itshall be an SELV circuit according to IEC/EN 60950.The table below shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit of a K SeriesAC-DC converter to be a SELV circuit according to IEC/EN60950 up to a configured output voltage of 36 V (sum ofnominal voltages connected in series) .

However, it is the sole responsibility of the installer toensure compliance with the applicable safety regulations.




Mains Double or reinforced Earthed case1 and installation SELV circuit≤ 250 VAC according to the applicable standards





Fig. 35Paralleling of single-output models using option T withthe sense lines connected at the load

1 Lead lines should have equal length and cross section,and should run in the same cable loom.

2 Diodes recommended in redundant operation only

Fig. 36Paralleling of double-output models with the outputsconnected in series, and using option T with power bus.The signal at the T pins is referenced to Vo1–.

Fig. 33Typ. inrush current with option EVi = 230 VAC, f i = 50 Hz, Po = Po nom

Not more than 5 convertersshould be connected in parallel.The R pins should be left open-circuit. If not, the outputvoltages must be individuallyadjusted prior to parallelingwithin 1 to 2% or the R pinsshould be connected together.Parallel connection of con-verters with option P is notrecommended.

Load

1

1

1

2

2

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

N~

L~

T

N~

L~

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

T

1


11036a

Converter

Converter

Table 20: Inrush current characteristics with option E

Characteristics all models UnitVi = 230 VAC typ max

I inr p Peak inrush current – 25.3 A

t inr Inrush current duration 35 50 ms

P PotentiometerA potentiometer provides an output voltage adjustmentrange of +10/–60% of Vo nom. It is accessible through a holein the front cover. Option P is not available for batterycharger models and is not recommended for convertersconnected in parallel.Option P excludes the R-function. With double output unitsboth outputs are influenced by the potentiometer setting(doubling the voltage, if the outputs are in series).If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via Rinput control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T,the output current(s) should be reduced accordingly, sothat Po nom is not exceeded.


Inpu

t Filt

er

Control

Con

vert

er

FET

CiRIRSRectifier

PF

C -

cor

rect

.

1100

1a

+

T Current SharingThis option ensures that the output currents areapproximately shared between all parallel-connectedconverters, hence increasing system reliability. To use thisfacility, simply interconnect the T pins of all converters andmake sure that the reference for the T signal, pin 14 (S– orthe Vo1–), are also connected together. The load linesshould have equal length and cross section to ensureequal voltage drops.

Fig.34Example of poor wiringfor connection in parallel

Vo+

Vo–

Vo+

Vo–

Load

Vo+

Vo–

11003_102005

Load


+ –Power bus

Converter

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

Converter

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

11037a

N~

L~

L~

N~

15

Ii [A]

10

5

0

–5

–10

0 20 40 60 80 ms

t tinr



20

10 50 7030

11002a




D Undervoltage MonitorThe input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitoperates independently of the built-in input undervoltagelockout circuit. A logic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal(NPN output) is generated at the D output (pin 20), whenone of the monitored voltages drops below the preselectedthreshold level Vt. This signal is referenced to Vo– /Vo1–.The D output recovers, when the monitored voltages

Table 21: Undervoltage monitoring functions

Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vho [% of Vt]JFET NPN Vb 4 Vo1 of threshold level Vt for Vt min – Vt max

Vtb 4 Vto Vho

D1 D5 no yes - 3.5 – 40 V 1 2.5 – 0.6

D2 D6 yes no 355 VDC - -

D3 D7 yes yes 355 VDC (0.95 – 0.985 Vo1) 2 "0"

D4 D8 no yes - (0.95 – 0.985 Vo1) 2 "0"

D0 D9 no yes - 3.5 – 40 V 3 2.5 – 0.6

yes yes 355 VDC 3.5 – 40 V 3 2.5 – 0.6

DD yes yes 355 VDC 3.5 – 40 V 1 2.5 – 0.61 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer2 Fixed value. Tracking if Vo1 is adjusted via R-input, option P or sense lines.3 The threshold level permanently adjusted according to customer specification ±2% at 25 °C. Any value within the specified range

is basically possible, but causes a special type designation in addition to the standard option designations (D0/D9).4 Vb is the voltage generated by the boost regulator. When Vb drops below 355 V, the D signal triggers, and the output(s) will

remain powered during nearly the full hold-up time t h.

exceed Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vbi is adjusted in thefactory. The threshold level Vto is either adjusted by apotentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover,or adjusted in the factory to a fixed value specified by thecustomer.Option D exists in various versions D0 – DD, as shown inthe table below.

Fig. 37Option D0 – D4: JFET output, I D ≤ 2.5 mA

NPN output (D5 – DD):Pin D is internally connected via the collector-emitter pathof a NPN transistor to the negative potential of output 1. VD< 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltage level(Vi and/or Vo1) > Vt + Vh. The current ID through the opencollector should not exceed 20 mA. The NPN output is notprotected against external overvoltages. VD should notexceed 40 V.

Vb, Vo1 status D output, VD

Vb or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vb and Vo1 > Vt + Vh low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 20 mA

JFET output (D0 – D4):Pin D is internally connected via the drain-source path of aJFET (self-conducting type) to the negative potential ofoutput 1. VD ≤ 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitoredvoltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) <Vt. The current ID through theJFET should not exceed 2.5 mA. The JFET is protected bya 0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 V against externalovervoltages.


Vb or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 2.5 mA

Vb and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 5.25 V

Fig. 38Option D5 – DD: NPN output, Vo1 ≤ 40 V, ID ≤ 20 mA

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007




0

10.95

0

Vb [VDC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min

4 tlow min4 thigh min

th1

358

355


VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th

1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto


0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho



11044b

1 Hold-up time see: Electrical Input Data.2 With output voltage monitoring, hold-up time t h = 0.3 The signal remains high, if the D output is connected


Fig. 39Relationship between Vb, Vo1, VD, Vo1/Vo1 nom versus time


Version of D Vb <<<<< Vt resp. Vo <<<<< Vt Vb >>>>> Vt + Vh resp. Vo >>>>> Vt Configuration






3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vb [VDC]

0

t

t

358355


VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo

2.0 V



11045a

t

t

t

t

Fig. 40Vcb, Vo, VV, IV, Vo /Vo nom versus time.

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms2 t low min = 40 – 200 ms, typ 80 ms3 VV level not defined at Vo < 2.0 V4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output

voltage, if the pull-up resistor R P is connected to Vo+;the V signal remains high if R P is connected to anexternal source.

V ACFAIL Signal (VME)

Available only for models with Vo = 5.1 V.This option defines an undervoltage monitoring circuit forthe input and main output voltage. It generates the ACFAILsignal (V signal) according to the VME standard.

The low state level of the ACFAIL signal is specified at asink current of IV ≤ 48 mA to VV ≤ 0.6 V (open-collectoroutput of an NPN transistor). The pull-up resistor feedingthe open-collector output should be placed on the VMEbackplane.





Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009

After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time th of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops at full load to 4.875 V. This hold-up time th isprovided by the capacitance supporting the boost voltageVb. See: Hold-up Time.


V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment (VME compatible) Vb Vo1 range of threshold level

Vt b Vto

V2 yes no 355 VDC 1 –

V3 yes yes 355 VDC 1 0.95 – 0.985 Vo1 2

1 Option V monitors the boost regulator output voltage. Thetrigger level is adjusted in the factory to 355 VDC.

2 Fixed value between 95% and 98.5% of Vo1

Option V operates independently of the built-in inputundervoltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal isgenerated at pin 20 as soon as one of the monitoredvoltages drops below the preselected threshold level Vt.The return for this signal is Vo–. The V output recovers,when the monitored voltage(s) exceed(s) Vt + Vh. Thethreshold level Vtb is adjusted in the factory to 355 VDC.The threshold level Vto is adjusted in the factory to acustomer-specified value.V-output (V2, V3):Connector pin V is internally connected to the open collec-tor of an NPN transistor. The emitter is connected to thenegative potential of the main output. VV ≤ 0.6 V (logic low)corresponds to a monitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo) <Vt.The current IV through the open collector should not ex-ceed 50 mA. The NPN output is not protected against ex-ternal overvoltages. VV should not exceed 60 V.

Table 24: Status of V output

Vb, Vo status V output, VV

Vb or Vo < Vt low, L, VV ≤ 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

Vb and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, IV ≤ 25 µA at VV = 5.1 V

K Connector H15S4Models with 5.1 V output are fitted with a connector H15S4(rather than H15S2). This option should be used for newdesigns and provides compatibility to LK1001 models.

B1 Cooling Plate (see: Mechanical Data)Where a cooling surface is available, we recommend theuse of a cooling plate (option B1) instead of the standardheat sink. The mounting system should ensure sufficientcooling capacity to guarantee that the maximum case tem-perature TC max is not exceeded. The cooling capacity iscalculated by:

(100% – η)PLoss = –––––––––– • Vo • Io

η

Efficiency η see: Model Selection

Elongated case for 220 mm rack depth need: Option B2.




65l


adhesive tape

30

15

09125


TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change dependingon the date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AccessoriesA variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable including:– Front panels for 19" rack: Schroff 16 TE /3U

[HZZ00831] and 16 TE /6U [HZZ00832], or Intermas16 TE /3U [HZZ00731]

– Mating H15 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on orpress-fit terminals.

– Cable connector housing: Screw version [HZZ00141]or retention clip version [HZZ00142]

– Connector retention clips (2x) [HZZ01209]– Connector retention brackets CRB [HZZ01216]– Coding clips for connector coding [HZZ00202]– DIN-rail mounting assembly DMB-K/S [HZZ0615]– Wall-mounting plate K02 [HZZ01213] for models with

option B1– Additional external input and output filters– Battery sensor [S-KSMH...] for using the converter as a

battery charger. Different cell characteristics can beselected. See: Battery Charging /Temperature Sensor

For additional accessory product information, see theaccessory data sheets listed with each product seriesor individually at www.power-one.com through thefollowing menus: "Select Products", "Select DataSheets & Application Notes".


Connectorretention clip Different front panelsConnector retention bracket CRB


DIN-rail mountingassembly DMB-K/S

Wall-mounting plateMOUNTINGPLATE-K02

20 to 30 Ncm

EuropeanProjection






We


declare under our sole responsibility that all K and S Series AC-DC and DC-DCconverters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


• EN 61204:1995 ( = IEC 61204:1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements

• EN 60950-1:2003 (IEC 60950-1:2005)Safety of information technology equipment.

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe cor-rect installation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product withthe LVD. All K and S Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters are components,intended exclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assem-bly operation or by professional installers. They must not be operated as standalone products.


Uster, 9 October 2006 Power-One AG


SEP 09, 2005 revised to JUL 17, 2006 Page 1 of 12 www.power-one.com

LOS, LOR, LOK4000 Series Data SheetDIN-Rail Mountable AC-DC (DC-DC) Converters

15, 30, 50 Watt AC-DC (DC-DC) Converters Convert Simply

DescriptionThe Convert Simply front-end converters represent a family of15, 30, and 50 watt DIN-rail mountable AC-DC converters foruse as rectifiers or battery chargers. Plastic casing, compactsize, and high reliability make the LOS, LOR, LOK4000 Seriesan excellent choice for space-critical applications, where aDIN-Rail mountable AC-DC converter is required. Theuniversal input range and a built-in input filter allow flexibleoperation in a wide variety of electronic equipment andenables worldwide connection to the mains.The converters are available as rectifiers with 12 V, 24 V, or 48

V single output and as battery chargers for 12 V, 24 V, or 48 Vbatteries. The output voltage of LOK converters can be adjustedvia the R input.Safety approvals fully comply with worldwide requirements.

ApplicationsTypical applications are: powering building controls, factoryautomation, industrial controls, instrumentation, electromag-netic drives, fans, and other DC loads.

Universal input range 100 - 240 VAC nominalAdditional DC input 90 - 250 VSingle output 5.1, 12, 24, or 48 VDCClass I equipment

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950, UL 1950, and UL 508 2

1 LOK2 LOS/LOR

PRODUCT SERVICE

Production monitoredType tested

1 2

Features

• RoHS lead-solder-exempt compatible• Extremely compact design• Battery charger versions• Operating ambient temperature range –10 to 50 °C

with convection cooling• Short-circuit and no-load proof


Description ....................................................................... 1Model Selection ............................................................... 2Functional Description ..................................................... 3Electrical Input Data ......................................................... 3Electrical Output Data ...................................................... 4Auxiliary Functions ........................................................... 6

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .............................. 7Mechanical Data .............................................................. 8Immunity to Environmental Conditions ............................. 8Safety and Installation Instructions .................................. 9Description of Options .................................................... 11EC Declaration of Conformity LOS/LOR ........................ 12

Page




Part Number Description and Product Marking

Series 15 W .................................................... LOS 4 LOK4 3 0 1 -2 R L D F K30 W .................................................... LOR 450 W .................................................... LOK 4

Output 5.1 V rectifier version ............................... 00112 V rectifier version ................................ 30124 V rectifier version ................................ 60148 V rectifier version ................................ 80112 - 15 V battery charger ......................... 14024 - 30 V battery charger ......................... 24048 - 60 V battery charger ......................... 740other voltages or specs. ..................... 02 - 99

Ambient temperature range TA:–10 to 50°C ................................................ -2 3

Features and options:Output voltage control input ........................ R 2

Rectangular output characteristic ................ L 1

Output voltage OK signal ............................ D 1

Built-in second fuse (option) ........................ F 2

K system connector (option) ........................ K1 Battery chargers and LOK4001-2RLD2 LOK models only3 Up to 70 °C with derating

Examples: LOK4140-2RLD: AC-DC converter, battery charger version, providing 12 - 15 V/3.6 A at the outputLOK4601-2R: AC-DC converter, rectifier version, providing 24 V/2 A, 48 W at the output

Model SelectionTable 1: Type survey

Output Operating Rated power 1 Efficiency 5 Model Options 4

Vo nom Io nom input voltage1 TA = 50 °C[VDC] [A] Po tot [W] ηtyp [%]

5.1 5.2 26 70 LOK4001-2RLD12 1.25 15 74 LOS4301-212 2.5 30 80 LOR4301-212 4 85 - 264 VAC 48 82 LOK4301-2R

12 - 12.8 3 - 15 3.6 47 - 63 Hz 49 82 LOK4140-2RLD F 2, K24 0.65 90 - 250 VDC 15 76 LOS4601-224 1.25 30 82 LOR4601-224 2 48 82 LOK4601-2R

24 - 25.7 3 - 30 1.8 49 82 LOK4240-2RLD48 1 48 82 LOK4801-2R

48 - 51.4 3 - 60 0.9 49 81 LOK4740-2RLD1 Linear derating to 85% of Po nom below Vi = 105 VAC, 110 VDC2 LOK types only3 Setting voltage Vo set for battery chargers with R-input left open-circuit.4 For minimum order quantities and lead times contact Power-One.5 Efficiency at Vi rated and Io nom




Fig. 1Block diagram LOK4301, LOK4601 and 4801 (rectifierversions), all LOR and all LOS.

Functional DescriptionThe Convert Simply 15, 30, and 50 watt front-end modules areflyback converters with a fixed frequency of 100 kHz (LOK) or130 kHz (LOR, LOS). The battery charger modules and the

Fig. 2Block diagram LOK4140, LOK4240 and LOK4740 (batterycharger versions) and LOK4001- 2RLD.

LOK4001-2RLD have a rectangular V/I output characteristic.The rectifier modules have overload protection working in ahiccup mode.

Electrical Input DataGeneral Condition: TA = 25 °C unless otherwise specified

Table 2: Input data

Characteristics LOS LOR LOK Unit

Vi rated Rated input voltage range 100 - 240 100 - 240 100 - 240 VAC


Vi Operating input voltage range 85 - 264 85 - 264 85 - 264

90 - 250 90 - 250 90 - 250 VDC

fi Nominal line frequency 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 Hz

Ii Input current at 115/230 VAC 1 0.3/0.15 0.52/0.26 0.8/0.4 A

l i nl Input current at 230 VAC and no load 0.035

l inr max Peak inrush current at Vi = 230 V 2 18 18 19

1 At Io nom.2 Inrush current limitation by a 16 Ω NTC resistor.

switc

hing

dev

ice

an

d co

ntro

l circ

uit

Line

filte

r an

d re

ctifi

er

L Vo+

Vo–

R

03094

Vo+

Vo–

N

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

NTC

2

opt. F

sw

itchi

ng d

evic

e

and

cont

rol c

ircui

t

Line

filte

r an

d re

ctifi

er

L Vo+

Vo–

R

03095

Vo–

N

2

1

3

5

6

7NTC

8

D

opt. F

4




Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions: TA = 25 °C unless otherwise specified. R input not connected.Table 3a: Output data

Output LOK4001-2RLD LOS/LOR/LOK LOS/LOR/LOK LOK4801-2R4301-2(R) 4601-2(R)


Vo Output voltageVo nom Vi nom, 0.5 Io nom 5.1 12 24 48 V

Vo setting tolerance R-input open-circuit ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 %

Vo adj Adjustable voltage range Units with feature R 4.5 - 5.5 10.8 - 13.2 21.6 - 26.4 43.2 - 52.8 V

Io nom Nominal output current Vi min - Vi max LOS - 1.25 0.65 - ALOR - 2.5 1.25 -LOK 5.2 4.0 2.0 1.0

vo Output voltage noise Vi nom, Io nom, 50 100 150 100 150 200 mVpp(BW = 20 MHz) IEC 61200

Static line/load regulation V i min - V i max, ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 Io = (0.1 - 1) Io nom %

Vo I Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, (0.1 × 0.9) Io nom ±5 ±2 ±1.5 ±1

tr Transient recovery time Io = (0.1 × 0.9) Io nom 4 4 4 4ms

th Hold-up time 115/230 VAC 14/90 14/90 14/90 14/90

αUo Temper. coefficient of Vo V i nom , Io nom ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05 %/K

fs Switching frequency 100 1001 1001 100 kHz

1 LOR and LOS have 130 kHz.

Table 3b: Output data (battery charger models)

Output LOK4140-2RLD LOK4240-2RLD LOK4740-2RLD


Vo Output voltage Vi nom, 0.5 Io nom 12.841 25.681 51.361 VR-input open-circuit

Vo adj Adjustable voltage range 12.0 - 15.0 24.0 - 30.0 48.0 - 60.0

Io nom Nominal output current Vi min - Vi max 3.6 1.8 0.9 A

vo Output voltage noise Vi nom, Io nom 100 150 100 150 200 mVpp(BW = 20 MHz) IEC 61204

Static line/load regulation V i min - V i max ±2 1 ±11 ±11%Io = (0.1 - 1) Io nom

Vo I Dynamic load regulation VI nom, (0.1 × 0.9) Io nom ±2 1 ±1.5 1 ±11

tr Transient recovery time Io = (0.1 × 0.9) Io nom 4 4 4ms

th Hold-up time 115/230 VAC 14/90 14/90 14/90

αUo Temper. coefficient of Vo V i nom, Io nom ±0.05 1 ±0.051 ±0.051 %/Kfs Switching frequency 100 100 100 kHz

1 R input left open-circuit.




Thermal ConsiderationsIf an AC-DC converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air(convection cooling) at the indicated maximum ambienttemperature TA max (see table: Temperature specifications) andis operated at its nominal input voltage and output power, thetemperature measured at the Measuring point of casetemperature TC (see Mechanical Data) will approach theindicated value TC max after the warm-up phase. However, therelationship between TA and TC depends heavily on theconditions of operation and integration into a system. Thethermal conditions are influenced by input voltage, outputcurrent, airflow, temperature of surrounding components andsurfaces. TA max is therefore, contrary to TC max, an indicativevalue only.The relation between the maximum allowed output powerPo allowed and the temperature TA of the surrounding air is givenin the figure below. The rates apply if the AC-DC converter islocated in free, quasi-stationary air (convection cooling).

Note: Sufficient forced cooling allows TA to be higher than thevalue given in the table if TC max according to the table is notexceeded.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under all operatingconditions TC remains within the limits that are stated in the tableTemperature specifications.

Fig. 3Maximum allowed output power versus input voltage atTA 50°C. for LOK models.

50 75 150125100 175 200 300

0.5

1.0

Po allowed/Po nom

0 Vi VAC

0.85

0515

4a

275225 250

Fig. 4Maximum allowed output power versus ambient temperatureat Vi >105 VAC for LOK models.

–10 0 302010 40 50 70

0.5

1.0

Po allowed/Po nom

0 TA°C

0.45

0515

5a

60

Output Power at Low Input VoltageThe output power of LOK models must be derated at low inputvoltage, see figure below.

Output ProtectionBattery charger versions LOK4140-, 4240-, LOK4740-2RLD,and the LOK4001-2RLD have a rectangular current limitationcharacteristic, which limits the output current to within 100 and150% of Io nom. The other models are protected againstoverload by a current limiting circuit, which shuts down theconverter in overload condition. It automatically restarts afterremoval of the overload condition (hiccup mode).All models are short-circuit and no-load proof.

Outputs Connected in SeriesTwo or more converters supplying the same or different outputvoltages may be connected in series. The value of themaximum output current to be taken is defined by that unitproviding the lowest current limiting value. It should be assuredthat the outputs do not feed backwards into each other causedby their different rise/fall times at switch-on/off cycles by addingreverse polarity diodes across each output.

Parallel OperationOnly possible with battery charger versions.The outputs of several battery charger models with equaloutput voltage (e.g. several LOK4240-2RLD) may beconnected in parallel.




2.10

2.15

2.20

2.25

2.30

2.35

2.40


–20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C

06123a


Vo nom

Vo max

Table 4: Output Voltage OK signal

Conditions LOK4001-2RLD LOK4140-2RLD LOK4240-2RLD LOK4740-2RLD Unitmin max min max min max min max

Vo t setting 4.4 4.8 10.5 11.5 21 23 42 46 V

VD Vo - Vo t min 60 60 60 60

Vo > Vo t max 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6I D < 50 mA

Auxiliary Functions

Adjustable Output Voltage (R input)As a standard feature, the LOK units offer adjustable outputvoltage by using the control input R. If the R pin is left open-circuit, the output voltage is set to Vo nom. (see: Output data)

The R input is referenced to the secondary side of theconverter. Adjustment of the output voltage is possible bymeans of either an external resistor or a voltage source.

a) Adjustment by means of an external resistor Rext1:Depending upon the value of the required output voltage, theresistor shall be connectedeither: Between the R terminal and Vo– to achieve an outputvoltage adjustment range of approximatelyVo = 90 - 100 % Vo nom.(LOK4301, 4601 and 4801 types)

VoRext1 ≈ 4 kΩ • –––––––––

Vo nom – Vo

or: Between the R terminal and Vo+ to achieve an outputvoltage range of approximately Vo = 100 - 110% Vo nom forrectifier versions and 100 - 125% Vo nom for battery chargers.

(Vo – 2.5 V)Rext2 ≈ 4 kΩ • –––––––––––––––––––

2.5 V • (Vo/Vo nom – 1)

R

Vo+

Vo-

+

Vext

-

4 kΩVref = 2.5 V

controlcircuit

L

N

Rext1

Rext2

06029

b) Adjustment by means of an external voltage Vext betweenVo– and R terminal to achieve an output voltage adjustmentrange of approx. 90 - 110% Vo nom (LOK 4301, 4601 and4801 types), 93 - 117% Vo nom for battery chargers.

Vo • 2.5 VVext ≈ –––––––––

Vo nom

Attempting to adjust the output below this range will causethe converter to shut down (hiccup mode).

Note: Applying an external control voltage >3 V may damage theconverter.

Fig. 6Voltage setting by a temperature sensor, wiring diagram

+ –

Battery

Vo+

R

Vo–

Temperaturesensor

Sensorcable

Sensorwires

+

05

17

4a

green

brown

white

Fuse

–

Fig. 7Float charge voltage for defined temperature coefficients.

Output Voltage OK (D Output)The D-output is referenced to Vo– and monitors the outputvoltage Vo. If Vo drops below Vo t, the D-output will be disabled(open-collector circuit). The circuitry works independently of theinput voltage and can therefore be used as battery-low indicator.

Battery Charging/Temperature SensorThe LOK 4140/4240/4740 are designed to charge lead-acidbatteries. For optimum battery charging and extended life timeof the battery an external temperature sensor may beconnected to the R-input. The sensor should be mounted asclose as possible to one of the poles of the battery.Depending upon the cell voltage and the temperature coefficientof the battery, different temperature sensors are available. Formore information please see: Temperature Sensors (AccessoryProducts on the Web Site) or contact Power-One.

If no sensor is used, the float charge voltage should beadjusted with a suitable resistor connected to the R input (see:Adjustable Output Voltage).

Fig. 5Output voltage control by means of the R-input




Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)ImmunityA metal-oxide VDR together with the input fuse and the inputfilter form an effective protection against high input transient


Phenomenon Standard 1 Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test Per-mode 2 applied imped. procedure form. 3

Electrostatic IEC/EN 2 air discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and Bdischarge 61000-4-2 10 negative

discharges

Electromagnetic IEC/EN 2 antenna 3 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80…1000 MHz Bfield 61000-4-3 1 kHz 900 MHz

1800 MHz

Electrical fast IEC/EN 3 direct, i/ , +i/– i 2 kVp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive Btransients/burst 61000-4-4 2.5/5 kHz over 60 s negative


Surge IEC/EN 3 i/ 2 kVp 1.2 / 50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. A61000-4-5 2 +i/– i 1 kVp 2 Ω surges per

Conducted IEC / EN 2 box 3 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 - 80 MHz Adisturbances 61000-4-6 1 kHz

1 Related and previous standards are referenced in: Technical Information: Standards2 i = input, o = output, = PE case.3 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary deviation from specs possible.

EmissionInternal input filtering keeps the conducted noise of theconverters within the frequency range of 10 kHz to 30 MHzbelow level B according to EN 55011 and EN 55022 standards.

Fig. 8Typical conducted disturbances (quasi-peak) at the inputmeasured according to EN 55011/55022 at Vi nom and Io nom.LOK4601-2R, Vi = 230 VAC.

07113

EN 55022 A

EN 55022 B

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

0.01

0.05 0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

[dBµV]

MHz

0.02

Fig. 9Radiated disturbances measured according toEN 55011/55022 at Vi nom and Io nom. LOK4601-2R, Vi = 230VAC.

0

10

20

30

40

50

EN 55022 B

dBµV/m LOK4601-2RC1, Vin=230 VAC, Vo=24 V, Io=2 A, Antenna 10 m, 24-Jan-06, ESVS30, Dubnica

30 50 100 200 500 MHz

voltages, which typically occur in most installations. The LOS,LOR, and LOK series have been successfully tested to thefollowing specifications:




113.6 (4.47")

90 (

3.54

")38

(1.5

")

S90042

108 (4.25")

Tc Tc

Mechanical DataDimensions in mm.Weight:LOS/LOR: approx. 0.25 kgLOK: approx. 0.35 kG

Fig. 10Case

EuropeanProjection

Table 7: Temperature specifications

Characterisitcs Conditions min max Unit

TA Ambient temperature Operational 1 –10 50 °C

TC Case temperature –10 80

TS Storage temperature Non operational –40 851 See: Thermal Consideration.

Table 8: MTBF Values

MTBF Type Ground benign Ground fixed Ground mobile UnitTC = 40 °C TC = 40 °C TC = 70 °C TC = 50 °C

According to MIL-HDBK-217F, Notice 2 LOK 1 600 000 400 000 200 000 120 000 h

Immunity to Environmental ConditionsTable 6: Mechanical stress

Test Method Standard Test Conditions Status

Ca Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Convertersteady state MIL-STD-810D section 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not






Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 - 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 514.3 2 g n = 20 m/s2 (60 - 150 Hz) operating


LED




Installation InstructionsThese converters are components, intended exclusively forinclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyoperation or by professional installers. Installation must strictlyfollow the national safety regulations in compliance with theenclosure, mounting, creepage, clearance, casualty, markingsand segregation requirements of the end-use application.Connection to the system shall be according to Terminalallocation and Mechanical Data. Check for hazardous voltagesbefore altering any connection.Ensure that a converter failure (e.g. by an internal short-circuit)does not result in a hazardous condition. See also Safety ofoperator accessible output circuit.

The phase input (L ) is internally fused by a 1.6 A slowblowtype. It is not customer-accessible. This fuse is designed toprotect the unit in case of overcurrent. Option F or externalfuses in the wiring to one or both input pins (L and/or N ) maytherefore be necessary to ensure compliance with localrequirements.

A second fuse in the wiring to the terminal N is needed if:


• Neutral and earth impedance is high or undefined• Phase and neutral of the mains are not defined or cannot be

assigned to the corresponding termials (L to phase andN to neutral).

Note: Do not open the converters, or guarantee will be invalidated.

Make sure that there is sufficient air flow available forconvection cooling. This should be verified by measuring thecase temperature when the unit is installed and operated in theend-use application. The maximum specified casetemperature TC max shall not be exceeded.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory as routinetest in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950andshould not be repeated in the field. Power-One will not honorany guarantee/warranty claims resulting from electric strengthfield tests.

Caution: Testing by applying AC voltages will result in high anddangerous leakage currents flowing through the Y-capacitors(see fig. Block diagram).


Terminal AllocationThe terminal allocation table defines the electrical potentials ofthe AC-DC converters. For mechanical positions of theterminals see: Mechanical Data.

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters correspond to class I equipment. All modelsare UL recognized according to UL 1950, UL recognized forCanada to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 950-95 and TÜV, approved toIEC/EN 60950 standards.LOR and LOS are UL 508-listed components.The converters have been evaluated for:• Building in• Double or reinforced insulation or an earthed part between

input and output.• Basic insulation between input and earth• Functional insulation between output and earth• The use in a pollution degree 2 environment• Connecting the input to a primary circuit with overvoltage

category II.The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillance inaccordance with the above mentioned standards.For details see the Declaration of Conformity (last 2 pages).

Protection DegreeIP 20: All models.

Table 9: Terminal allocation

Terminal Electrical LOK/LOR/LOS

1 Input L

2 Protective earth

3 Input N

4 D/Output (positive) D /+

5 Output (positive) +

6 Output (negative) –

7 Output (negative) –

8 R input or open R/n.c.

Table 10: Isolation

Characteristic Input to Input to Output to Unitprotective earth output protective earth

Electric Actual factory test 1 s 2.1 2.1 1 1.4 kVDC

strength AC test voltage equivalent 1.5 1.5 1 1.0 kVACtest voltage to actual factory test

Insulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >100 MΩ1 In accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950 only subassemblies are pre-tested with 4.3 kVDC or 3.0 kVAC.




Under test conditions the leakage current flows through ameasuring instrument (MI) as described in fig. Measuringinstrument for earth leakage current tests, which takes intoaccount impedance and sensitivity of a person touchingaccessible parts. The current value is calculated by dividingthe measured voltage by 500 W. If inputs and/or outputs ofLOS, LOR, or LOK models are connected in parallel, theirindividual leakage currents are added.

Leakage Currents in AC-DC OperationLeakage currents flow due to internal leakage capacitance andRFI suppression Y-capacitors. The current values areproportional to the mains voltage and nearly proportional to themains frequency and are specified at an input voltage of 264 V(50 Hz) where phase, neutral and protective earth are correctlyconnected as required for class I equipment.

Fig. 11Measuring instrument (MI) for earth leakage current testsaccording to IEC/EN 60950.


Characteristic LOK Unit

Maximum earth Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 3.5 mAleakage current Specified value at 264 V, 50 Hz 1.0

Maximum output Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 0.25leakage current Specified value at 264 V, 50 Hz 0.035

V

MI

500 Ω

1500 Ω

10 kΩ 220 nF

22 nF

1006

1

MI foroutput leakagecurrent

Vo+

Vo-

10053

MI forearth

leakagecurrent

LL

NN

Fig. 12Test setup.





Option F: Built-in Second FuseA built-in second fuse in the neutral input line enables safeconnection to the mains where phase and neutral are notdefined or cannot be identified as e.g., in the case of plug andsocket connection to the mains via Schuko-plugs, see alsoInstallation Instruction.

Option K: System ConnectorsFor installation into systems using preassembled harnessesthe converters are available with connectors fitted with screwterminals. The system connectors are UL-listed and approvedfor currents up to 10 A. Wire cross-sections: Solid wires 1.5mm2 (AWG14), stranded wires 1 mm2 (AWG16).


TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change depending onthe date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitIf the output circuit of an AC-DC converter is operatoraccessible, it shall be a SELV circuit according to the IEC/EN60950 related safety standards.

The following table shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit of an LOS,LOR, or LOK4000 converter to be a SELV circuit according toIEC/EN 60950 up to a configured output voltage (sum ofnominal voltages if in series or +/– configuration) of36 V.However, it is the sole responsibility of the installer to assurethe compliance with the relevant and applicable safetyregulations.

Table 12 : Safety concept leading to a SELV output circuit


Nominal Supply Grade of insulation between Measures to achieve the resulting Safety statuts of the AC-DCvoltage input and output, provided safety statuts of the output circuit converter output circuit

by the AC-DC converter

Mains ≤250 VAC Double or reinforced Earth connection 1 and installation SELV circuitaccording to the applicable standards

1 The earth connection of terminal no. 2 has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards,e.g. IEC/EN 60950

Fig. 13Schematic safety concept.Use fuses and earth connection as per InstallationInstructions and table Safety concept leading to a SELVoutput circuit.

AC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10021

Fuse

Fuse





We


declare under our sole responsibility that all LOS/LOR/LOK series AC-DC (DC-DC)converters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low VoltageDirective (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.

Conformity with the directive is presumed by conformity wih the following harmonizedstandards:

• EN 61204: 1995 (= IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Perfomance characteristicsand safety requirements

• EN 60950: 2000 (= IEC 60950: 1999) for LOS/LOR modelsEN 60950-1: 2001 (= IEC 60950-1: 2001) for LOK modelsSafety of information technology equipment.

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe correct installationleading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with the LVD. All these regulatorsare components intended exclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrialassembly operation or by professional installers. They must not be operated as stand aloneproducts.

Hence conformity with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC (EMCDirective) needs not to be declared. Nevertheless, guidance is provided in most productapplication notes on how conformity of the end product with the indicated EMC standardsunder the responsibility of the installer can be achieved, from which conformity with theEMC directive can be presumed.

Uster, 1 Sept. 2005

Power-One AG

Rolf Baldauf Johann MilavecVicepresident Engineering Director Projects and IP


®

M Series Data Sheet50 Watt DC-DC and AC-DC Converters


DescriptionThe M Series of DC-DC and AC-DC converters represents abroad and flexible range of power supplies for use in advancedindustrial electronic systems. Features include high efficiency,reliability, low output voltage noise and excellent dynamicresponse to load/line changes due to individual regulation ofeach output.

The converter inputs are protected against surges andtransients occuring at the source lines. An input over- andundervoltage lockout circuit disables the outputs, if the inputvoltage is outside the specified range. An inrush currentlimitation prevents circuit breakers and fuses from tripping atswitch-on.

All outputs are open- and short-circuit proof, and are protectedagainst overvoltages by means of built-in suppressor diodes.The outputs can be inhibited by a logic signal applied to theconnector (pin 2). If the inhibit function is not used, pin 2 shouldbe connected to pin 23 to enable the outputs.


Full input to output, input to case, output to case, and output tooutput isolation is provided. The converters are designed andbuilt according to the international safety standardIEC/EN 60950-1 and UL/CSA 60950-1, and they have beenapproved by the safety agencies TÜV and UL.

The case design allows operation at nominal load up to 71 °Cin a free-air ambient temperature. If forced cooling is provided,the ambient temperature may exceed 71 °C but the casetemperature should remain below 95 °C under all conditions.

A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal, whichdisables the outputs, when the case temperature TC exceedsthe limit. The outputs automatically recover, when thetemperature drops below the limit.

Various options are available to adapt the converters toindividual applications.

The converters may either be plugged into a 19" rack systemaccording to IEC 60927-3 or be mounted onto a chassis or aplate.

Features• Extremly wide operating input voltage ranges from 8 to

385 VDC and 85 to 264 VAC, 47 to 440 Hz• RoHS lead-solder exemption compliant• Class I equipment• Input over- and undervoltage lockout• 1, 2, or 3 individually isolated and controlled outputs up

to 64 V• Outputs: SELV, no load, overload, short-circuit proof,

rectangular current limiting characteristic• Adjustable output voltages with remote on/off• Immunity according to IEC/EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6• Emissions according to EN 55011/55022• PCBs protected by lacquer• Very high reliability• Battery charger models available


1686.6"39

1.54" 8TE

1114.37"3U

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1 and UL/CSA 60950-1

Description ............................................................................. 1Model Selection ..................................................................... 2Functional Description ........................................................... 4Electrical Input Data ............................................................... 5Electrical Output Data ............................................................ 7Auxiliary Functions ............................................................... 10Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................................. 13

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ................................ 15Mechanical Data .................................................................. 16Safety and Installation Instructions ...................................... 17Description of Options ......................................................... 19Accessories .......................................................................... 25EC Declaration of Conformity .............................................. 26


®



Model SelectionNon-standard input/output configurations or special customadaptions are available on request. Table 1 provides anoverview of the basic input and output configurations. More

Table 1a: Standard models AM, BM, FM


Vo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom V nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 8 – 35 VDC [%] 14 – 70 VDC [%] 20 – 100 VDC [%]

5.1 8.0 - - - - AM1001-9R 72 BM1001-9R 74 FM1001-9R 74 -7, A, F, H12.0 4.0 - - - - AM1301-9R 79 BM1301-9R 80 FM1301-9R 80 P, D0 – D915.0 3.4 - - - - AM1501-9R 79 BM1501-9R 81 FM1501-9R 81 V0 – V3 324.0 2.0 - - - - AM1601-9R 81 BM1601-9R 83 FM1601-9R 8248.0 1.0 - - - - AM1901-9R 81 BM1901-9R 83 FM1901-9R 83

12.0 2.0 12.0 2.0 - - AM2320-9 77 BM2320-9 79 FM2320-9 80 -7, A, F, H15.0 1.7 15.0 1.7 - - AM2540-9 78 BM2540-9 80 FM2540-9 79 P, D0 – D9

5.1 5.0 12.0 0.7 12.0 0.7 AM3020-9 75 BM3020-9 76 FM3020-9 76 -7, A, F, H5.1 5.0 15.0 0.6 15.0 0.6 AM3040-9 75 BM3040-9 76 FM3040-9 76 D0 – D9

V0 – V3 3

than 1000 different types have been manufactured withdifferent input /output configurations and customizedspecialities. Please consult Power-One for additionalinformation.

Table 1b: Standard models CM, DM, LM


Vo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom V nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 28 – 140 VDC [%] 44 – 220 VDC [%] 88 – 372 VDC [%]

85 – 264 VAC 2

5.1 8.0 - - - - CM1001-9R 74 DM1001-9R 74 LM1001-9R 73 -7, E, A, F, H12.0 4.0 - - - - CM1301-9R 80 DM1301-9R 81 LM1301-9R 79 P, D0 – D915.0 3.4 - - - - CM1501-9R 82 DM1501-9R 82 LM1501-9R 78 V0 – V3 324.0 2.0 - - - - CM1601-9R 82 DM1601-9R 83 LM1601-9R 8148.0 1.0 - - - - CM1901-9R 82 DM1901-9R 83 LM1901-9R 8112.0 2.0 12.0 2.0 - - CM2320-9 79 DM2320-9 80 LM2320-9 77 -7, E, A, F, H15.0 1.7 15.0 1.7 - - CM2540-9 80 DM2540-9 80 LM2540-9 78 P, D0 – D9

5.1 5.0 12.0 0.7 12.0 0.7 CM3020-9 76 DM3020-9 77 LM3020-9 73 -7, E, A, F, H5.1 5.0 15.0 0.6 15.0 0.6 CM3040-9 76 DM3040-9 76 LM3040-9 71 D0 – D9

V0 – V3 3

Table 1c: EM and battery charger models


Vo Bat 6 Io nom Vo safe 5 Vo max Vo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin [VDC] [A] [VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 67 – 385 VDC [%] 88 – 372 VDC [%]

85 – 264 VAC 2

Same Vo nom - - - - - - EM1xxx-9R 3 - - same as DM and Io nom - - same as DM models - - EM2xxx-9R 3 - - models 3 DM models - - same as DM models same as DM models EM3xxx-9R 3 - -

12 3.6 12.84 14.15 – 14.6 - - - - - - LM1781-9RD5 79 -7, E, F, A24 1.8 25.68 28.3 – 29.15 - - - - - - LM1782-9RD5 8136 1.2 38.52 42.45 – 43.72 - - - - - - LM1783-9RD5 8248 0.9 51.36 56.6 – 58.3 - - - - - - LM1784-9RD5 8160 0.72 64.2 70.75 – 72.87 - - - - - - LM1785-9RD5 81

1 Min. efficiency at Vi nom and Io nom. Typ. values are approx. 2% better.2 Frequency range: 47 – 440 Hz3 Ask Power-One for availability!4 Option V0, V2, V3 available only for output 1 = 5.1 V (excludes option R)5 Setting voltage with open R-input (battery chargers)6 Vo nom for EM models


®



Part Number DescriptionC M 2 5 40 -9 E P D3 A H F

Operating input range Vi: 8 – 35 VDC ................... A14 – 70 VDC ................... B

20 – 100 VDC ................... F28 – 140 VDC ................... C44 – 220 VDC ................... D

67 – 385 VDC ................... E 1

85 – 264 VAC, 88 – 372 VDC ................... LSeries ................................................................................... MNumber of outputs ........................................................ 1, 2, 3Output 1, Vo1 nom: 5.1 V ............ 0, 1, 2

12 V .................... 315 V ................ 4, 524 V .................... 6

other voltages ................ 7, 848 V .................... 9

Single-output models (different specs.) ......................01 – 99Outputs 2, 3: Vo2 nom, Vo3 nom: 5.1 V .......................01 – 19

12 V ........................20 – 3915 V ........................40 – 5924 V ........................60 – 69

other voltages and specs. ............21 – 99Ambient temperature range TA: –25 to 71 °C .................. -7

– 40 to 71 °C .................. -9customer-specific ... -0, -5, -6, -8

Auxiliary functions and options:Inrush current limitation (CM, EM, LM) ........................ EOutput voltage control input (single-output models) .... R 2Potentiometers for adjustment of output voltages ....... P 2Save data signal (D0 – D9, to be specified) ................ D 3ACFAIL signal (V0, V2, V3, to be specified) ................ V 3Output voltage test sockets .......................................... AIncreased electric strength test voltage ....................... H 1Input fuse built-in (not accessible) ............................... F

1 Ask Power-One for availability2 Feature R excludes option P and vice versa3 Option D excludes option V and vice versa

Example: CM2540-9EPD3AHF: DC-DC converter,operating input voltage range 28 – 140 V, providing output 1 with 15 V/1.7 A and output 2 with 15 V /1.7 A; temperature range –40 to +71 °C, inrush current limitation, equipped withpotentiometers, undervoltage monitor D3, test sockets, a built-in fuse, and tested with higher voltage output to case.


®



Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input fuse, an input filter, arectifier, and an inrush current limiter to the input capacitor.This capacitor sources a single-transistor forward converter.Each output is powered by a separate secondary winding ofthe main transformer. The resultant voltages are rectified andtheir ripples smoothed by a power choke and an output filter.The main control circuit senses the main output voltage Vo1and generates, with respect to the maximum admissible output

currents, the control signal for the primary switching transistor.This signal is transferred to the primary side by a couplingtransformer.

The auxiliary output voltages Vo2 and Vo3 are individuallyregulated by means of secondary switching transistors. Eachauxiliary output's current is sensed using a current transformer.If one of the outputs is driven into current limit, the otheroutputs will reduce their output voltages as well, because alloutput currents are controlled by the same main control circuit.

1 Transient suppressor diode in AM, BM, CM, FM models.2 Bridge rectifier in LM, series diode in EM models.3 Inrush current limiter (NTC) in CM, DM, EM, LM models (option E: refer to the description of option E).4 Single-output models with feature R.5 LM-models

Fig. 1Block diagram, triple-output models

Inpu

t filt

er

Output 1filter

Output 3filter

Output 2filter

Control circuit

output 3


Controlcircuit

output 2

1

Fus

e

Option P

29

11

8

23

5

26

32

17

14

20

2

14

17

3

2

For

war

d co

nver

ter

appr

ox. 7

0 kH

z

4

4

CY

CY

CZ

CZ

Vi+

Vi–

i

D, V

R

G

03009a

5N

5

5L


®




Input DM EM LM Unit

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io nom - - 85 264 VAC 1

TC min – TC max 44 220 67 385 88 372 VDC



Pi 0 No-load input power: Vi nomSingle-output model Io1,2,3 = 0 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 WDouble-output model 7 9 7 9 7 9Triple-output model 6 9 6 9 6 9

Pi inh Idle input power inhibit mode 2 2 2

Iinr p 6 Peak inrush current Vi = Vi max 110 4 160 4 60 4 A

tinr r Rise time RS = 0 Ω 340 40 300 µs

tinr h Time to half-valueTC = 25 °C

250 240 900

Ri Input resistance TC = 25 °C 2000 4 2400 4 6200 4 mΩ

Ci Input capacitance 140 270 140 270 140 270 µF

Vi abs Input voltage limits 0 400 5 – 400 400 –400 400 VDCwithout any damage – – – – 0 284 VAC

1 In AC powered mode (LM models): 47 – 440 Hz2 With multiple-output models, the same condition for each output applies.3 RS = source resistance.4 Value for initial switch-on cycle.5 1 s max., duty cycle 1% max.6 I inr p = Vi / (Rs + Ri); see Inrush Current.

Electrical Input DataGeneral conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Connector pins 2 and 23 interconnected, R input not connected; with option P: Vo = Vo nom


Input AM BM FM CM Unit

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io nom 8 35 14 70 20 100 28 140 VDC

Vi nom Nominal input voltage TC min – TC max 15 30 50 60


Pi 0 No-load input power: V i nomSingle-output model I o1,2,3 = 0 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 WDouble-output model 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9Triple-output model 6 9 6 9 6 9 6 9

Pi inh Idle input power inhibit mode 2 2 2 2

Iinr p 6 Peak inrush current Vi = Vi max 400 500 400 170 4 A

tinr r Rise time RS = 0 Ω 360 50 40 60 µs

tinr h Time to half-valueTC = 25 °C

170 100 60 280

Ri Input resistance TC = 25 °C 87.5 140 250 824 4 mΩ

Ci Input capacitance 2600 4000 670 1100 370 600 370 600 µF

V i abs Input voltage limits 0 40 0 80 0 120 0 160 VDCwithout any damage


®



Input FuseA fuse holder containing a slow-blow type fuse (size: 5 × 20mm) is mounted in the back plate of the converter. The fuseprotects the converter against severe defects. It may not fullyprotect it at input voltages exceeding 200 VDC. In applications,where the converters operate at DC source voltages above200 VDC, an external fuse or a circuit breaker at system levelshould be installed.

The fuse and a VDR form together with the input filter aneffective protection against high input transients.

Note: For applications, where the fuse should not be accessible;see Option F.

Table 3: Fuse types (slow-blow)


AM1000 – 3000 SPT 10 A /250 V 0001.2514

BM1000 – 3000 SPT 8 A /250 V 0001.2513

FM1000 – 3000 SPT 5 A /250 V 0001.2511

CM1000 – 3000 SPT 3.15 A /250 V 0001.2509

DM1000 – 3000 SPT 2.5 A /250 V 0001.2508EM1000 – 3000LM1000 – 3000

Fig. 2Typical input current versus relative input voltage atnominal output load

Vi DC________Vi min DC2 3 4 5 61

0.1

1.0

10

AM

Ii [A]

LM

BM

FM

CM

DM

EM

04014a

70 350

60 300

50 250

40 200

30 150

20 100

10 50

0

80 400

0 0.82.0

1.02.5

1.23.0

1.43.5

1.64.0

0.61.5

0.41.0

0.20.5

AM

BM

CM

FM

EM

A-EMLM

Ii [A]

LM

DM

t [ms]

LM A-EM04015a

Input Under-/Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage remains below 0.8 Vi min or exceeds approx.1.1 Vi max, an internally generated inhibit signal disables theoutput(s). When checking this function the absolute maximuminput voltage rating Vi abs must be carefully considered (seetable Input data).

Note: When Vi is between Vi min and the undervoltage lockoutlevel, the output voltage may be below the value defined in tableOutput data.

Reverse PolarityReverse polarity at the input of AM, BM, CM, DM, and FMmodels will cause the fuse to blow. In EM and LM models aseries diode will protect the converter. A series diode is notincorporated in AM, BM, CM, DM and FM types to avoidunwanted power losses.

Inrush CurrentThe CM, DM, EM, and LM (excluding FM) models incorporatean NTC resistor in the input line, which (during the initialswitch-on cycle) limits the peak inrush current in order toprevent the connectors and switching devices from damage.Subsequent switch-on cycles within a short interval will causean increase of the peak inrush current due to the warming-upof the NTC resistor. Refer to Option E.

Fig. 3Typical inrush current at initial switch-on. Vi max (DC) andnominal output load


®



Electrical Output DataGeneral conditions– TA = 25°C, unless TC is specified.– Connector pins 2 and 23 interconnected, R input not connected; with option P: Vo = Vo nom

Table 4: Output data

Output Vo nom 5.1 V 12 V 15 V 24 V 48 V Unit

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 1 5.07 5.13 11.93 12.07 14.91 15.09 23.86 24.14 47.72 48.28 V

Vo p Output overvoltage 7.5 21 25 41 85protection 5

Io nom Output current Vi min – Vi max see table 1 Model Selection

Io L Output current TC min – TC max see fig. 4 Typical voltage Vo1 versus output currents Iolimitation

vo Output Switch. freq. V i nom, Io nom 1 15 30 25 50 35 70 40 80 50 100 mVppvoltage Total IEC/EN 61204 60 120 40 80 40 80 40 80 -noise BW = 20 MHz

∆Vo V Static line regulation Vi min – Vi nom ±10 ±30 ±12 ±50 ±15 ±60 ±15 ±60 ±15 ±60 mVVi nom – Vi maxIo nom 1

∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom 6 25 13 50 17 60 30 80 60 150Io nom – 0 2

∆Vo Ic Static cross load Vi nom 0 ±15 0 ±20 0 ±30 0 ±40 -regulation 4 Io nom – 0 3

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±220 ±110 ±150 ±130 ±150load deviation Io nom ↔ 1/3 Io nom 2

tdregulation Recovery IEC/EN 61204 0.6 0.6 0.5 1 2 ms

time

vo d c Dynamic Voltage Vi nom +10 +10 +10 +20 - mVcross load deviation Io nom ↔ 1/3 Io nom 3 –100 –75 –140 –200 -

td cregulation 4

Recovery IEC/EN 61204 0.05 0.2 0.5 1 - mstime 0.5 0.3 0.7 2 -

αVo Temperature Vi min – Vi max ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kcoefficient 0 – Io nom ±1.0 ±2.4 ±3.0 ±4.8 ±9.6 mV/K∆Vo /∆TC

1 With multiple-output models, all outputs are loaded with the nominal current.2 Condition for specified output. With multiple-output models, other output(s) loaded with constant current Io nom. See fig. 5 Dynamic load

regulation.3 Condition for non-specified output, individually tested, other output(s) loaded with constant current Io nom. See fig. 5 Dynamic load

regulation.4 Multiple-output models.5 By suppressor diode.


®



Fig. 6Output current derating versus temperature

Fig. 4Typical voltage Vo versus output currents Io.

Fig. 5Dynamic load regulation Vo d versus load change.

1.0

0

0.5

Vo

0.5

Vo nom

IoIo nom1.0 1.2

Io nom

Io1

Io2,Io3

IoL1

IoL2, IoL3

0.95

05022a

Io/Io nom

1

Vod

Vodtd td

∆Vo I ∆Vo I

t

Vo

0 t

≥10 µs≥10 µs05010a

0.3

Output Characteristic and ProtectionEach output is protected by a suppressor diode, which underworst case conditions may become a short circuit. Thesuppressor diodes are not designed to withstand externallyapplied overvoltages. Overload at any of the outputs will causea shutdown of all outputs. A red LED indicates the overloadcondition of the respective output.

Thermal Considerations and ProtectionIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air (convectioncooling) at the indicated maximum ambient temperature TA max(see table Temperature specifications) and is operated at itsnominal input voltage and output power, the temperaturemeasured at the measuring point of case temperature TC (seeMechanical Data) will approach the indicated value TC max afterthe warm-up phase. However, the relationship between TA andTC depends heavily on the conditions of operation andintegration into a system. The thermal conditions areinfluenced by input voltage, output current, airflow, and

temperature of surrounding components and surfaces. TA maxis therefore, contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.


Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sink allow TAto pass over 71 °C, if TC max is not exceeded.

For -7 or -9 models at an ambient temperature TA of 85 °C withonly convection cooling, the maximum permissible current foreach output is approx. 50% of its nominal value; see figure 6.

A temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signaldisabling the outputs, when the case temperature exceedsTC max. The outputs automatically recover, when thetemperature drops below this limit.

Parallel and Series ConnectionMain outputs of equal nominal voltage can be connected inparallel. It is important to assure that the main output of amultiple-output converter is forced to supply a minimumcurrent of 0.1 A to enable correct operation of its own auxiliaryoutputs.

In parallel operation, one or more of the main outputs mayoperate continuously in current limitation, causing an increaseof the case temperature TC. Consequently, a reduction of themax. ambient temperature by 10 K is recommended.

Main or auxiliary outputs can be connected in series with anyother output of the same or another converter. In seriesconnection, the maximum output current is limited by thelowest current limit. Output ripple and regulation values areadded. Connection wiring should be kept as short as possible.

If output terminals are connected together in order to establishmulti-voltage configurations, e.g., +5.1 V, ±12 V etc., thecommon-ground connecting point should be as close aspossible to the connectors of the converter in order to avoidexcessive output ripple voltages.

Note: Auxiliary outputs should never be connected in parallel!

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

50 60 70 80 90 100

Io/Io nom

TA [°C]

1.0Forced cooling

05031a

TC max

Convection cooling


®



Hold-up Time and Output ResponseWhen the input voltage is switched off, the output voltage willremain high for a certain hold-up time t h (see fig. 7) before theoutput voltage falls below 0.95 Vo nom. To achieve the hold-uptimes indicated in fig. 8, AM, BM, CM, DM, and FM modelsrequire an external series diode in the input line. This isnecessary to prevent the discharge of the input capacitorthrough the source impedance or other circuits connected tothe same source. EM and LM models have a built-in seriesdiode. In AM, BM, CM, DM, and FM models, no series diode isbuilt-in, since it would generate additional power losses insidethe converter.

Note: For hold-up time with option V, refer to Option V.

The behavior of the outputs is similar with either the inputvoltage applied or the inhibit switched low.

No output voltage overshoot occurs, when the converter isturned on or off.

Fig. 7Output response times versus Vi or inhibit control

Fig. 8Typical hold-up time t h versus input voltage at Io nom

Output Current Allocation for Special ModelsOutput currents differing from those given for standard models(see Model Selection) can be provided on request. A maximumoutput power of 50 W should be considered, if an ambienttemperature range of – 40 to 71 °C is required. The maximumpermissible output currents are indicated in the table below. If

the output voltages are different from standard values, therelevant output currents have to be adapted accordingly.

With reduced maximum ambient temperature or with forcedcooling, the total output power may exceed 50 W. Customizedconfigurations always need to be checked by a feasibility studyfirst. Please ask Power-One for more information.

Table 5: Current allocation with special models

Output voltage Output 1 Output 2 Output 2 Output 3 Temperatureall types all types AM – LM2000 AM – LM3000 AM – LM3000

Vo1/2/3 nom [V] Io1 max [A] Io2 max [A] Io2 max [A] Io3 max [A] TA [°C] TC [°C]

5.1 8.0 4.0 1.8 (2.5 1) 1.5 – 40 to 71 –25 to 9512 4.0 2.0 1.5 1.215 3.4 1.7 1.2 1.024 2.0 1.0 0.7 0.5

2 5.1 10.0 4.5 2.1 (2.8 1) 1.8 –25 to 60 –25 to 9012 5.0 2.5 1.7 1.515 4.0 2.0 1.5 1.324 2.5 1.3 0.9 0.7

5.1 11.0 5.0 2.4 (3.0 1) 2.0 –25 to 50 –25 to 8512 6.0 3.0 2.0 1.715 4.6 2.3 1.7 1.524 3.0 1.5 1.0 0.8

1 Special high-current components required. 2 Vi min has to be increased.

0 tr tft

t0

Inhibit

1

Vo/Vo nom

0.1

t0

1

0.95

thVi

05025a

2 3 4 5 610.1

1

1000

Vi DC______ Vi min DC

th [ms]

10

100

LM

EM

CM/DM

AM/BM/FM

05024a


®



Vi+

Vi– Vo–

i

Vo+Iinh

Vinh

06031a

Table 6: Output response time tr and tf (see fig. 7). Values not applicable for models equipped with option E.

Type of converter tr at Po = 0 and t f at Po = Po nom tr and t f at Po = 3/4 Po nom t r at Po = Po nom Unittyp max typ max typ max

AM – LM1001-9R 5 10 5 10 10 20 msAM – LM1301-9R 10 20 15 30 20 40AM – LM1501-9R 5 10 10 20 30 60AM – LM1601-9R 15 30 25 50 40 80AM – LM1901-9R 65 130 100 200 165 330

AM – LM2320-9 20 40 30 60 50 100AM – LM2540-9 15 30 20 40 35 70

AM – LM3020-9 55 110 85 170 145 290AM – LM3040-9 40 80 60 120 100 200

Conditions:R input not connected. For multiple-output models the figures indicated in the table relate to the output, which reacts slowest. Alloutputs are resistively loaded. Variation of the input voltage within Vi min – Vi max does not influence the values considerably.

Auxiliary Functions

InhibitThe outputs of the converters may be enabled or disabled bymeans of a logic signal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied between theinhibit input i and the negative pin of output 1 (Vo1–). Insystems with several converters, this feature can be used, forexample, to control the activation sequence of the converters.If the inhibit function is not required, connect the inhibit pin 2 topin 23 to enable the outputs (active low logic, fail safe). Theresponse times are specified in table 6.





Vinh Inhibit input voltage to keep Vo = on Vi min – V i max –50 0.8 Voutput voltage Vo = off TC min – TC max 2.4 50


1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032a


®



Table 8a: Rext1 for Vo < Vo nom (conditions: Vi nom, Io nom, rounded up to resistor values E 96, Rext2 is not fitted )


0.5 0.432 2.0 0.806 2.0 0.619 4.0 0.806 8.0 0.8061.0 0.976 3.0 1.33 4.0 1.47 6.0 1.33 12.0 1.331.5 1.65 4.0 2.0 6.0 2.67 8.0 2.0 16.0 2.02.0 2.61 5.0 2.87 8.0 4.53 10.0 2.87 20.0 2.872.5 3.83 6.0 4.02 9.0 6.04 12.0 4.02 24.0 4.023.0 5.76 7.0 5.62 10.0 8.06 14.0 5.62 28.0 5.623.5 8.66 8.0 8.06 11.0 11.0 16.0 8.06 32.0 8.064.0 14.7 9.0 12.1 12.0 16.2 18.0 12.1 36.0 12.14.5 30.1 10.0 20.0 13.0 26.1 20.0 20.0 40.0 20.05.0 200.0 11.0 44.2 14.0 56.2 22.0 44.2 44.0 44.2

Table 8b: R2 for Vo > Vo nom (conditions: Vi nom, Io nom, rounded up to resistor values E 96, Rext1 is not fitted )


5.15 464 12.1 1780 15.2 1470 24.25 3160 48.5 68105.20 215 12.2 909 15.4 750 24.50 1620 49.0 34805.25 147 12.3 619 15.6 511 24.75 1100 49.5 23705.30 110 12.4 464 15.8 383 25.00 825 50.0 17805.35 90.9 12.5 383 16.0 332 25.25 715 50.5 14705.40 78.7 12.6 316 16.2 274 25.50 590 51.0 12705.45 68.1 12.7 274 16.4 237 25.75 511 51.5 11005.50 61.9 12.8 249 16.5 226 26.00 453 52.0 953

13.0 200 26.25 402 52.5 84513.2 169 26.40 383 52.8 806

R-Control for Output Voltage AdjustmentAs a standard feature, single-output models without option Poffer an adjustable output voltage identified by letter R in thetype designation.


The output voltage Vo can either be adjusted by an externalvoltage (Vext) or by an external resistor (Rext1 or Rext2). Theadjustment range is approximative 0 – 110% of Vo nom. Foroutput voltages Vo > Vo nom, the minimum input voltage Vi minspecified in Electrical Input Data increases proportionally toVo/Vo nom.

Fig. 11Output voltage adjustment

a) Adjustment by means of an external resistor Rext.Depending upon the value of the required output voltage,the resistor shall be connected:either: Between the R and G pin to achieve an outputvoltage adjustment range of Vo ≈ 0 to 100 % of Vo nom.

VoRext1 ≈ 4 kΩ • ––––––––– Vo nom – Vo

or: Between the R pin and Vo+ to achieve an outputvoltage range of Vo ≈ 100 to 110% of Vo nom.

(Vo – 2.5 V)Rext2 ≈ 4 kΩ • –––––––––––––––––– 2.5 V • (Vo/Vo nom – 1)

Caution: To prevent damage, Rext2 should never be less than47 kΩ.

Note: R inputs of n converters with paralleled outputs may beparalleled too, but if only one external resistor is used, itsvalue should be Rext1/n or Rext2/ n respectively.

b) Adjustment by means of an external control voltage Vextbetween G and R pin.The control voltage range is 0 to 2.75 V and allows foradjustment in the range of Vo ≈ 0 to 110% of Vo nom.

Vo • 2.5 VVext ≈ –––––––– Vo nom

Caution: The external control voltage should be in the range0 to +3 V to prevent the converter from damage.

R

Vo+

G

+

Vext

-

4 kΩVref = 2.5 V

Controllogic Rext1

Rext2

06087a

Vi–

Vi+

17

14

+

8


®




LEDs "OK" and "i" status versus input voltage Vi

Conditions: Io ≤ Io nom , TC ≤ TC max , Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "OK" and "Io L" status versus output current Io

Conditions: Vi min – Vi max , TC ≤ TC max , Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i" versus case temperature

Conditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom , Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i" versus Vinh

Conditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom , TC ≤ TC max

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 adj


Vi

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OKIo L

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98 Vo1 adj

TC

i


Vinh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

Io L

LED off LED onLED status undefined

06002a

Fig. 12Status of LEDs.Vi uv = undervoltage lockout, Vi ov = overvoltage lockout


®




Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Per-mode 2 applied imped. procedure oper. form. 3

1 MHz burst IEC III i /o, i/c, o/o, o/c 2500 Vp 400 damped 200 Ω 2 s per yes Adisturbance 60255-22-1 +i/–i, +o/–o 1000 Vp

1 MHz waves/s coupling mode

Voltage surge IEC 60571-1 –i/c, +i /–i 800 Vp 100 µs 100 Ω 1 pos. and 1 neg. yes A

1500 Vp 50 µs voltage surge per

3000 Vp 5 µscoupling mode

4000 Vp 1 µs

7000 Vp 100 ns

Supply related RIA 12 A 4 +i/–i 3.5 • Vbatt 2/20/2 ms 0.2 Ω 1 positive yes Asurge B 1.5 • Vbatt 0.1/1/0.1 s surge

EN 50155:1995 1.4 • Vbatt 1 Ω

Direct transient RIA 12 C –i/c, +i/–i 960 Vp 10/100 µs 5 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes AEN 50155:1995 D 1800 Vp 5/50 µs impulses(for EN 50155

E 3600 Vp 0.5/5 µs 100 Ωlevels D, G,F 4800 Vp 0.1/1 µsH and L only)

G 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs

Indirect coupled H –o/c, +o/–o, –o/–i 1800 Vp 5/50 µstransient J 3600 Vp 0.5/5 µs

K 4800 Vp 0.1/1 µs

L 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs A 1

Electrostatic IEC/EN 4 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp


Electromagnetic IEC/EN x antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 26 to 1000 MHz yes A 1field 61000-4-3 1 kHz

Electromagnetic ENV 50204 4 30 V/m 50% duty cycle, 900 ±5 MHz yes Afield, 200 Hz repetitionpulse modulated frequency

Electrical fast IEC/EN 3 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes A 1

transient/burst 61000-4-4 4 direct, i/c, +i /–i 4000 Vp2.5/5 kHz over 60 s negative B15 ms; burst transients per

period: 300 ms coupling mode

Surge IEC/EN 4 i/c 4000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 3 +i/–i 2000 Vp 2 Ω surges per

x i/c, +i/–i 2500 Vp 10/700 µs 40 Ωcoupling mode

Conducted IEC/EN 3 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 to 80 MHz yes Bdisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBmV) 1 k Hz

1 For converters with 3 output voltages, temporary deviation from specs possible.2 i = input, o = output, c = case.3 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Temporary deviation from specs.4 Only met with extended input voltage range of BM (24 V battery), CM (48 V battery), and EM (110 V battery) models. Such models are

available on customer's request. Standard DM (110 V battery) will not be damaged, but overvoltage lockout will occur during the surge.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A suppressor diode or a metal oxide VDR (depending uponconverter model) together with an input fuse and an input filter

form an effective protection against high input transientvoltages, which typically occur in most installations, butespecially in battery-driven mobile applications. The H Serieshas been successfully tested to the following specifications:


®



Table 10: Emissions at Vi nom and Io nom (LM at 230 VAC)

Model Level

IEC/EN 55011IEC/EN 55022 EN 55014

≤30 MHz ≥30 MHz ≥30 MHz

AM1000 B B <limitAM2000 B B <limitAM3000 B B <limit

BM1000 B A <limitBM2000 B B <limitBM3000 B A <limit

CM1000 B B <limitCM2000 B B <limitCM3000 B A <limit

DM1000 B B <limitDM2000 B B <limitDM3000 B A <limit

EM1000 B B <limitEM2000 B B -EM3000 B A -

FM1000 B A <limitFM2000 B A >limitFM3000 B A -

LM1000 B B <limitLM2000 B B <limitLM3000 B A <limit


Fig. 13Typical disturbances (quasi-peak) at the input according toIEC/EN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

Fig. 14Typical radiated emissions according to IEC/EN 55011/22,normalized to a distance of 10 m, measured at Vi nom andIo nom.

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

0.01

0.05 0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

[dBµV]

MHz

0.02

07007

A

B

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBµV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07036


®



Table 13: MTBF

Values at specified Converter model Ground benign Ground fixed Ground mobile Unitcase temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C

MTBF 1 AM – LM1000 320 000 130 000 40 000 35 000 hAM – LM2000 225 000 105 000 32 000 28 000AM – LM3000 225 000 80 000 28 000 25 000

Device hours 2 AM – LM1000 880 000AM – LM2000 720 000AM – LM3000 740 000

1 Calculated in accordance with MIL-HDBK-217E2 Statistical values, based on an average of 4300 working hours per year in general field use over 3 years









Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating


Fda Random vibration IEC 60068-2-35 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converterwide band DIN 40046 part 23 Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operatingReproducibility Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 g n rmshigh Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter(sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle notNaCl solution) Storage: 40°C, 93% rel. humidity operating


Table 12: Temperature specifications, valid for an air pressure of 800 – 1200 hPa (800 – 1200 mbar)

Temperature -7 (option) - 9 (standard) UnitCharacteristics Conditions min max min maxTA Ambient temperature Operational –25 71 –40 71 °CTC Case temperature –25 95 –40 95TS Storage temperature Non operational –40 100 –55 100

Temperatures

Reliability


®



Mechanical DataDimensions in mm. European

Projection

111.2 ±0.8 (3U)88(11.6)

168.

5

127

173.

7 ±0

.5

20

100 ±0.6

1.6

6TE

2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32

Male connector H11 according to DIN 41612(gold-plated contacts on customer's request)

38.7

95 ±0.5

Measuring point for case temperatureTC


22

68

159.

4


5.08

10.1

615

.24

20.3

225

.40

30.4

8

2TE

7.09

17.25

28.6

34

15

4

Mounting holes for connector retention clips

12.17

103

3.27

20.5

12.1

94.5 ±0.1

0

31.5

±0.

1

0

ø 3

.5

ø 4

.0

IoL (LED red)

Test sockets (option A)

Potentiometer(s) (option P)

OK (LED green)

Inhibit i (LED red)

Potentiometer (option D)

or potentiometer (option V)

Front plate

Mainface

Rearface

Back plate

22.30

09012a

Fig. 15Case M02, weight 770 g (approx.).Case aluminium, black finish andself cooling.

Note: Long case, elongated by 60mm for 220 mm rack depth, isavailable on request.


®




Connector Pin AllocationPin no. 26 (protective earth) is leading, ensuring that it makescontact with the female connector first.

Table 14: Pin allocationFig. 16View of male H11 connector.

Installation InstructionsAll M Series converters are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by professional installers.Installation must strictly follow the national safety regulationsin compliance with the enclosure, mounting, creepage,clearance, casualty, markings and segregation requirementsof the end-use application.

Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H11. Other installation methods may not meet thesafety requirements.

The converters are provided with the leading pin 26 ( ), whichis reliably connected with the case. For safety reasons, it isessential to connect pin 26 with the protective earth of thesupply system.

An input fuse is connected in the line to pin 32 (Vi– or L ).Since this fuse is designed to protect the converter in case ofan overcurrent and does not necessarily cover all customerneeds, an external fuse suitable for the application and incompliance with the local requirements may be necessary inthe wiring to one or both input pins (no. 29 and/or no. 32),particularily if the phase or neutral line cannot be assigned tothe corresponding terminals (LM models operated with AC).

Important: Whenever the inhibit function is not in use,pin 2 (i) should be connected to pin 23 (Vo–) to enablethe output(s).

Caution: Do not open the converters, or warranty willbe invalidated.

Make sure that there is sufficient air flow possible forconvection cooling. This should be verified bymeasuring the case temperature TC, when theconverter is installed and operated in the end-useapplication. The maximum specified casetemperature TC max shall not be exceeded. See alsoThermal Considerations.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetrationof liquids (e.g., cleaning fluids) has to be prevented,

since the power supplies are not hermetically sealed.

Operation of LM Models at Greater than 63 HzIn such a case, the converters may exceed the leakage currentof 3.5 mA imposed in the safety standards. A warning markingis required in the end-use product.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the converter.

IP 40: All models, except those with options P or A, andexcept those with option D/V with potentiometer.

IP 30: All models fitted with options A or option D/V withoutpotentiometer.

IP 20: All models fitted with option P or with option D/V withpotentiometer.

Railway ApplicationsThe M Series converters have been designed observing therailway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121. All boards arecoated with a protection lacquer.

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters correspond to class I equipment and havebeen approved according to the standards IEC/EN 60950-1and UL/CSA 60950-1.

32 29 26 23 20 17 14 11 8 5 2

10015

Electrical determination AM – LM1000 AM – LM2000 AM – LM3000Pin Ident Pin Ident Pin Ident

Inhibit 2 i 2 i 2 iSafe Data or ACFAIL 5 D or V 5 5 D or V 5 5 D or V 5

Output voltage (positive) 8 Vo+ 8 n.c. 8 Vo3+Output voltage (negative) 11 Vo– 11 n.c. 11 Vo3–

Voltage adjust 14 R 1Adjust return 17 G 1


Output voltage (positive) 20 Vo+ 20 Vo1+ 20 Vo1+Output voltage (negative) 23 Vo– 23 Vo1– 23 Vo1–

Protective earthing PE 2 26 26 26

DC input voltage 3 29 Vi+ 29 Vi+ 29 Vi+DC input voltage 32 Vi– 32 Vi– 32 Vi–

AC input voltage 4 29 N 29 N 29 NAC input voltage 32 L 32 L 32 L

1 Not connected, if option P is fitted2 Leading pin3 AM, BM, CM, DM, EM, and FM models4 LM models5 Not connected, if option neither option D or V is fitted


®



Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operator-accessible, it shall be an SELV circuit according to the IEC/EN60950 safety standards.

Since the M Series converters provide double or reinforcedinsulation between input and output based upon a ratedprimary input voltage of 250 VAC or 400 VDC, only functionalinsulation is needed between the AC mains and the input of theconverter. Only voltage adaption and rectification to thespecified input voltage range of a DC/DC converter is needed.



Nominal Minimum required grade Maximum rated Minimum required Equip- Measures to achieve the Safety statussupply of insulation, to be pro- DC output voltage safety status of the ment specified safety status of of the DC-DCvoltage vided by the AC-DC front from the front end front end output the output circuit converter


Mains Operational (i.e. there is 400 VDC 1 (The Primary circuit A – LM Double or reinforced SELV circuit250 VAC no need for electrical rated voltage insulation, based on

isolation between the between any input 250 VAC and 400 VDCmains supply voltage and pin and earth can (provided by the DC-DCtheDC-DC converter be up to 250 VAC converter) and earthedinput voltage) or 400 VDC.) case 2

1 The front end output voltage should match the specified operating input voltage range of the DC-DC converter.2 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the safety standard IEC/EN 60950.

The converters have been evaluated for:• Class I equipment• Building in• Basic insulation between input and case and double or

reinforced insulation between input and output, based onthe input voltage of 250 VAC or 400 VDC

• Functional insulation between output(s) and case• Functional insulation between the outputs• Pollution degree 2 environment• Overvoltage catagory II• Altitude up to 2000 m

Table 17: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output(s) to Output(s) to Output to Unitand output(s) case (standard) case (option H) output

Electric Factory test >1 s 2.8 1 1.4 2.8 0.3 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 2.0 1.0 2.0 0.2 kVACtest to factory testInsulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >300 >100 2 MΩCreapage distances ≥ 3.2 3 -- -- mm

1 According to EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950, subassemblies connecting input to output are pre-tested with 5.6 kVDC or 4 kVAC.2 Tested at 300 VDC3 Input to outputs: ≥6.4 mm



Fig. 17Schematic safety concept

AC-DCfrontend

DC-DCcon-

verter

Mains Battery SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10018a

Max. 250 VAC or 400 VDC


Fuse

Fuse

+

The following table shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit of the DC-DCconverter to be an SELV circuit according to IEC/EN 60950 upto a configured output voltage (sum of nominal voltages if in

series or +/– configuration) of 48 V. However, it is the soleresponsibility of the installer to assure the compliance with therelevant and applicable safety regulations.


®



-7 Former Standard Temperature RangeOption -7 stays for the operational ambient temperature rangefrom –25 to 71 °C, which may be preferred by some customersfor reasons of documentation or approvals.

A Test SocketsTest sockets (pin Ø = 2 mm, distance d = 5.08 mm) are locatedat the front of the converter. The output voltage is sensed at theconnector pins inside of the converter. Outputs 2 and 3 oftriple-output models are not sensed.

P PotentiometerBuilt-in multi-turn potentiometers provide an output voltageadjustment range of minimum ± 5% of Vo nom and areaccessible through holes in the front cover. Compensation ofvoltage drop across connector and wiring becomes easilyachievable. For output voltages Vo > Vo nom, the minimum inputvoltage according to Electrical Input Data increasesproportionally to Vo/Vo nom. Triple-output models allow only theadjustment of Vo1.

Note: Potentiometers are not recommended for mobileapplications.

E Electronic Inrush Current LimitationAvailable for CM, EM and LM models.

The standard version of the models CM, DM, EM and LMinclude a passive inrush current limitation with an NTC resistor.

For applications, which require an improved inrush current



-7 Former standard operational ambient temperature range TA = – 25 to 71°C

A Test sockets at front panel for check of output voltage Vo internally measured at the connector terminals

E Electronic inrush current limitation circuitry Active inrush current limitation for CM, EM, LM models

P 1 Potentiometer for fine adjustment of output voltage Adjustment range ±5% of Vo nom, excludes R input

F Input fuse built-in inside case Fuse not externally accessible

H Enhanced output to case electric strength test voltage See table Isolation

D 2 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (D0 – D9)

V 2 3 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specifications (V0, V2, V3)

1 Models equipped with option P do not provide the R function; pins 14 and 17 are not connected.2 Option D excludes option V and vice versa3 Only available if main output voltage Vo1 = 5.1 V

Table 18: Configuration of option A and option P

Type of option AM – LM1000 AM – LM2000 AM – LM3000Output 1 Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3

Potentiometer 1 yes yes yes yes no no

Test sockets yes yes yes yes no no

1 Models equipped with option P do not provide the R function; pins 14 and 17 are not connected.

Inpu

t filt

er

Control logic

Con

vert

er

FET

CiRIRS

Rectifier(LM models)

11018a


limitation, an active electronic circuit as shown in fig. Option Eblock diagram has been developed. Typical inrush currentwaveforms of units equipped with this option are shown below.

CM models meet the CEPT/ETSI standards for 48 V supplyvoltage according to ETS 300132-2, if fitted with option Ecombined with option D6 (input voltage monitoring). Option D6,externally adjustable via potentiometer, is necessary to disablethe converter at input voltages below the actual serviceranges, avoiding an excessive input current when the inputvoltage is raised slowly according to ETS 300132-2. Option D6threshold level Vt i + Vh i (refer to description of option D) shouldbe adjusted to 36 – 40.5 V for 48 V nominal supply voltage (for60 V systems, threshold should be set to 44 – 50 V). The Doutput (pin 5) should be connected to the inhibit (pin 2). Forapplications, where potentiometers are not allowed, refer tooption D9.


®



Fig. 19Typical inrush current waveforms of CM, EM, and LMconverters with option E

Precautions:In order to avoid overload of the series resistor RI, the on/offswitching cycle should be limited to 12 s, if switched on/offcontinuously. There should not be more than 10 start-up cycleswithin 20 s at a case temperature of 25 °C.

If CM models are driven by input voltages below35 VDC or LM models below 100 VAC, the maximum casetemperature should be derated by 10 °C, or the total outputpower should be derated by 20%. EM and LM models driven


Characteristic CM EM, LM EM, LM Unitat Vi = 110 VDC at Vi = 110 VDC at Vi = 372 VDC

typ max typ max typ max

Iinr p Peak inrush current 6.5 8 2.2 4 7.3 10 A

tinr Inrush current duration 22 30 10 20 20 40 ms

10

8

6

4

2

00 10 20 30 40

t [ms]

Ii [A]

tinr

Normal operation:FET fully conducting

Ii = Po/(Vi • η)

11019a

tinr

CM at 110 VDCEM, LM at 372 VDC

EM, LM at 110 VDC

by DC input voltages do not need to be derated within the fullspecified input voltage range.

F Fuse Not AccessibleStandard M converter have a fuseholder containing a 5 × 20mm fuse, which is externally accessible and located in theback plate near to the connector. Some applications require aninaccessible fuse. Option F provides a fuse mounted directlyonto the main PCB inside the case.

The full self-protecting functions of the converter do normallynot lead to a broken fuse, except as a result of inverse polarityat the input of an AM, BM, CM, or FM models, or if a powercomponent inside fails. In such cases the defective converterhas to be returned to Power-One for repair.

H Enhanced Electric Strenght TestElectric strength test output to case; see table Isolation.

D Undervoltage MonitorThe input and/or output undervoltage monitor operatesindependently of the built-in input undervoltage lock-out circuit.A logic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal (NPN output) isgenerated at pin 5, when one of the monitored voltages dropsbelow the preselected threshold level Vt. The return for thissignal is Vo1– (pin 23). The D output recovers, when themonitored voltage(s) exceed(s) Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vtis either adjustable by a potentiometer accessible through ahole in the front cover, or adjusted in the factory to a fixed valuespecified by the customer.

Option D exists in various versions D0 – D9, as shown in table20.


Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt]JFET NPN Vi Vo1 of threshold level Vt for Vt min – Vt max

Vti Vto Vhi Vho

D1 D5 no yes – 3.5 V – 48 V 1 – 2.3 – 1

D2 D6 yes no Vi min – Vi max 1 – 3.0 – 0.5 –

D3 D7 yes yes Vi min – Vi max 1 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 3.0 – 0.5 "0"

D4 D8 no yes – 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 – "0"

D0 D9 no yes – 3.5 V – 48 V 3 – 1.8 – 1

yes no Vi min – Vi max 3 4 – 2.2 – 0.4 –

yes yes Vi min – Vi max 3 4 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 2.2 – 0.4 "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer (not recommended for mobile applications)2 Fixed value between 95% and 98% of Vo1 (tracking)3 Fixed value, resistor-adjusted according to customer's specifications ±2% at 25 °C; individual type number is determined by Power-One4 Adjusted at Io nom


®



JFET output (D0 – D4):

Connector pin D is internally connected via the drain-sourcepath of a JFET (self-conducting type) to the negative potentialof output 1. VD - 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitoredvoltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) < Vt. The current I D through theJFET should not exceed 2.5 mA. The JFET is protected by a0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 V against external overvoltages.

NPN output (D5 – D9):

Connector pin D is internally connected via the collector-emitter path of a NPN transistor to the negative potential ofoutput 1. VD – 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitoredvoltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) > Vt + Vh. The current ID throughthe open collector should not exceed 20 mA. The NPN outputis not protected against external overvoltages. VD should notexceed 40 V.


Vi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD – 0.4 V at I D = 2.5 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID – 25 µA at VD = 5.25 V


Vi or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID – 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh low, L, VD – 0.4 V at ID = 20 mA

Fig. 20Options D0 – D4, JFET output

Fig. 21Options D5 – D9, NPN output

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007a


If V i is monitored, the internal input voltage after the input filterand rectifier (EM and LM types) is measured. Consequently,this voltage differs from the voltage at the connector pins by thevoltage drop ∆Vti across input filter and rectifier. The thresholdlevel of the D0 and D9 options is adjusted in the factory atnominal output current Io nom and TA = 25 °C. The value of ∆Vtidepends upon input voltage range (AM, BM, etc.), thresholdlevel Vt, temperature, and input current.

Fig. 22Definition of Vti, ∆Vti, and Vhi (JFET output)

∆Vti Vhi

VD low

VD

VD high

Vi

Po

= P

o no

m

Po

= 0

Po

= 0

Vti

Po

= P

o no

m

11021a


®



Fig. 23Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VD, ID, and Vo1/Vo nomversus time.

1 See Electrical Output Data for hold-up time.2 With output voltage monitoring the hold-up time th = 03 The D signal remains high, if the D output is connected


0

10.95

0

Vi [V DC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min4 tlow min

4 thigh min

th1

Vti + Vhi

Vti


VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th

1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto

3


0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

3

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho



11008a

V ACFAIL Signal (VME)Available for converters with Vo1 = 5.1 V. This option defines anundervoltage monitoring circuit for the input or the input andmain output voltage equivalent to option D and generates theACFAIL signal (V signal), which conforms to the VMEstandard. The low state level of the ACFAIL signal is specifiedat a sink current of IV = 48 mA to VV – 0.6 V (open-collector

output). The pull-up resistor feeding the open-collector outputshould be placed on the VME backplane.

After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time th of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops to 4.875 V, when the 5.1 V output is fully loaded.This hold-up time t h is provided by the internal inputcapacitance. Consequently the working input voltage and the


®




Connector pin V is internally connected to the open collector ofa NPN transistor. The emitter is connected to the negativepotential of output 1. VV - 0.6 V (logic low) corresponds to amonitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) < U t. The current IVthrough the open collector should not exceed 50 mA. The NPNoutput is not protected against external overvoltages. VVshould not exceed 80 V.

exceeds Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vt is either adjustable by apotentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover, oradjusted in the factory to a determined customer-specificvalue.Versions V0, V2 and V3 are available as shown below.

Option V operates independently of the built-in input under-voltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal is generated at pin 5as soon as one of the monitored voltages drops below the pre-selected threshold level V t. The return for this signal is Vo1–(pin 23). The V output recovers, when the monitored voltage


V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Uh [% of Vt](VME compatible) of threshold level Vt for Vt min – Vt max

V i Vo1 V t i V to Vhi Vho

V2 yes no V i min – V i max 1 – 3.0 – 0.5 -

V3 yes yes V i min – V i max 1 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 3.0 – 0.5 "0"

V0 yes no V i min – V i max 3 4 - 2.2 – 0.4 -

yes yes V i min – V i max 3 4 0.95 – 0.98 Vo1 2 2.2 – 0.4 "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer (not recommended for mobile applications).2 Fixed value between 95% and 98% of Vo1 (tracking), output undervoltage monitoring is not a requirement of VME standard.3 Adjusted at Io nom.4 Fixed value, resistor-adjusted (±2%) acc. to customer's specifications; individual type designation is determined by Power-One.

Table 21: Available internal input capacitance and factory potentiometer setting of Ut i with resulting hold-up time

Types AM BM CM DM EM FM LM Unit

Ci min 2.6 0.67 0.37 0.14 0.14 0.37 0.14 mF

Vt i 9.5 19.5 39 61 104 39 120 VDC

t h 0.34 0.69 1.92 1.73 6.69 2.92 8.18 ms

Fig. 24Output configuration of options V0, V2, V3

threshold level Vt i should be adequately above the minimuminput voltage Vi min of the converter, so that enough energy isremaining in the input capacitance. If the input voltage is belowthe required level, an external hold-up capacitor (Ci ext) shouldbe added.

Formula for threshold level for desired value of t h:

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Vti = ––––––––––––––––––––– + Vi min2

C i min • η

Formula for additional external input capacitor

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100C i ext = ––––––––––––––––––––– – C i minη • (Vt i 2 – Vi min2)

where as:Ci min = minimum internal input capacitance [mF], according

to the table belowCi ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]η = efficiency [%]t h = hold-up time [ms]Vi min = minimum input voltage [V]Vt i = threshold level [V]Notes: The threshold level V t i of option V2 and V3 is adjusted inthe factory to a value according to the table below. A decouplingdiode should be connected in series with the input of AM, BM, CM,DM, and FM converters to avoid the input capacitance dischargingthrough other loads connected to the same source voltage. If LMmodels are powered by AC, an external input capacitor cannot beapplied unless an additional rectifier is provided.

Vi, Vo1 status V output, VV

V i or Vo1 < V t low, L, VV - 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

V i and Vo1 > V t + Vh high, H, IV - 25 µA at VV = 5.1 V

Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009a


®



3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vi [VDC]

0

t

t

Vti + Vhi

Vi


UV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo1

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo1

2.0 V



11010a

t

t

t

t


Vi is monitored after the input filter and rectifier (EM and LMmodels). Consequently, this voltage differs from the voltage atthe connector pins by the voltage drop ∆Vt i across input filterand rectifier. The threshold level of option V0 is factory-adjusted at Io nom and TA = 25 °C. ∆Vt i depends upon the inputvoltage range (AM, BM, ...), threshold level Vt i, temperature,and input current.

Fig. 26Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VV, IV, and Vo1/Vo nomversus time.

Fig. 25Definition of Vt i, ∆Vt i and Vhi

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms2 t low min = 40 – 200 ms, typically 80 ms3 VV level not defined at Vo1 < 2.0 V4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output voltage, if

the pull-up resistor R P is connected to Vo1+. The V signalremains high, if RP is connected to an external source.

∆Vti Vhi

VV low

VV

VV high

Vi

Po

= P

o no

m

Po

= 0

Po

= 0

Vti

Po

= P

o no

m

11023a


®



AccessoriesA great variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable including:

– Various mating H11 connectors STV-H11-xxx includingscrew, solder, fast-on, or press-fit terminals

– Connector retention clips RETENTIONCLIP(2X)[HZZ01209]

– Code key system for connector coding CODIERKEIL(5X)– Various front panels for 19" rack mounting, width 8 TE,

heigth 3U and 6U, Schroff or Intermas system.– Flexible H11 PCB for mounting the converter onto a PCB– Universal mounting bracket UMB-LHMQ [HZZ00610] for

chassis mounting or DIN-rail mounting in upright position.– DIN-rail mounting brackets DMB-MHQ (horizontal posi tion)– Mounting plate M (black finish) MOUNTINGPLATEM for

mounting the converter to a chassis or a wall, where onlyfrontal access is given

– Battery sensor [S-KSMH...] for using the converter asbattery charger. Different cell characteristics can beselected.

For additional accessory product information, see theaccessory data sheets listed with each product series orindividual model listing at www.power-one.com.

H11 female connector withscrew terminals and codekey system

Flexible H11 PCB

Mounting plate M (for wall-mounting),connector with fast-on terminals(STV-H11-F/CO), secured withconnector retention clips

Universal mounting bracketUMB-LHMQ for DIN-rail mounting.

Connectorretention clip

EuropeanProjection

Different frontpanels


65l


adhesive tape

30

15

09125

DIN-rail mounting bracketsDMB-MHQ


®





We


declare under our sole responsibility that all M and H Series AC-DC and DC-DCconverters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


· EN 61204:1995 ( = IEC 61204:1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements

· IEC 60950-1:2005 (1st Edition) and/or EN60950-1:2003Safety of information technology equipment.

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe correctinstallation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with theLVD. All M and H Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operationor by professional installers. They must not be operated as stand alone products.





®

P Series Data Sheet90 - 194 Watt DC-DC Converters

DescriptionThese extremely compact DC-DC converters incorporate allnecessary input and output filtering, signalling, and protectionfeatures, which are required in the majority of applications.The converters provide important advantages such as flexibleoutput power through primary current limitation, extremelyhigh efficiency, excellent reliability, very low ripple and RFInoise levels, full input-to-output isolation, negligible inrushcurrent, soft start, overtemperature protection, and inputover-/undervoltage lockout.The converter inputs are protected against surges andtransients occurring on the source lines and cover a totalinput voltage range from 16 to 150 VDC with five different

types. The outputs are continuously open- and short-circuitproof.Full system flexibility and n+1 redundant operating mode arepossible due to series or parallel connection capabilities ofthe outputs under the specified conditions. When severalconverters are connected in parallel, the T option can beemployed using a single wire connection between theconverters to ensure good current sharing. LEDs at the frontpanel and an isolated output OK option indicate the status ofthe converter. Voltage suppressor diodes and anindependent second control loop protect the outputs againstan internally generated overvoltage.The converters are designed using planar magnetics

1646.5"

200.8"4 TE

1114.4"3 U

Features• RoHS lead-free-solder and lead-solder-exempted

products available• Wide input voltage ranges up to 150 VDC• 1, 2, 3, or 4 isolated outputs up to 96 V• Class I equipment• Very high efficiency• Extremely low inrush current, hot swappable• Excellent surge and transient protection• Many output configurations available with flexible

load distribution• Externally adjustable output voltage• Inhibit primary or secondary referenced• Redundant operation (n+1), sense lines, current

sharing option• Extremly slim case (4TE, 20 mm), fully enclosed• Hipot test voltage 2.1 kVDC• All PCBs coated with protective lacquer• Telecom-compatible input voltage range of DP

models according to ETS 300132-2• CompactPCI-compatible output voltage (xP4720)

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1 and UL 60950-1


Description ............................................................................ 1Model Selection .................................................................... 2Functional Description .......................................................... 6Electrical Input Data ............................................................. 7Electrical Output Data .......................................................... 8Auxiliary Functions ............................................................. 14Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ................................ 16

Immunity to Environmental Conditions .............................. 18Mechanical Data ................................................................. 19Safety and Installation Instructions .................................... 20Description of Options ........................................................ 23Accessories ........................................................................ 24EC Declaration of Conformity ............................................ 25



®


transformers and control circuits in hybrid technology. Thereare always two powertrains fitted to a converter, eachconsisting either of a single output with synchronous rectifieror of a controlled main output with a tracking second output.The output power may be flexibly distributed among the mainand the tracking output of each powertrain. Close magneticcoupling in the transformers and output conductors togetherwith circuit symmetry ensure tight tracking of the auxiliaryoutput. The switching frequency is fixed.As a modular power supply or as part of a distributed power

supply system, the low-profile design significantly reducesthe required volume without sacrificing high reliability. Theconverters are particularly suitable for 19" rack systemsoccupying 3U/4TE only, but they can also be chassis-mounted by means of four screws. Connector type is H15 (orH15S2 for some single-output models). The fully enclosedblack-coated aluminium case acts as heat sink and RFIshield and protects the converter together with the coating ofall components against environmental impacts.

Model SelectionNote: Only standard models are listed. Other configurations arepossible as well; contact Power-One.

Table 1a: Model types BP, CP

Output 1, 4 Output 2, 3 Input voltage range and efficiency Options

Vo nom Po nom Po max Vo nom Po nom Po max ηηηηη 2 Vi min – Vi max4 ηηηηη 2 Vi min – Vi max4

[V] [W] [W] [V] [W] [W] [%] 16–36 V [%] 33.6–75 V

3.3 100 132 - - - 86 BP1101-9R 86 CP1101-9R -75.1 122 183 - - - 87 BP1001-9R 88 CP1001-9R D12 120 192 - - - 87.5 BP1301-9R 88.5 CP1301-9R T5

15 120 194 - - - 88.5 BP1501-9R 88.5 CP1501-9R i24 120 192 - - - 88 BP1601-9R 89 CP1601-9R K8

3.3 50 66 5.1 61 91 86 BP2101-9R 86 CP2101-9R B1, B3

5.1 61 91 5.1 61 91 87 BP2001-9R 88 CP2001-9R G

5.1 61 91 12 60 96 87 BP2020-9R 88 CP2020-9R12 60 96 12 60 96 87.5 BP2320-9R 88.5 CP2320-9R15 60 97 15 60 97 88.5 BP2540-9R 88.5 CP2540-9R24 60 96 24 60 96 88 BP2660-9R 89 CP2660-9R

5.1 61 91 12, 123 601 961 87 BP3020-9R 88 CP3020-9R5.1 61 91 15, 153 601 961 87.5 BP3040-9R 88.5 CP3040-9R5.1 61 91 24, 243 601 961 87.5 BP3060-9R 88.5 CP3060-9R

5.1, 3.37 30 50 12, 123 601 961 - BP4720-9R6 - CP4720-9R6 -712, 123 601 961 12, 123 601 961 88 BP4320-9R 89 CP4320-9R D, i15, 153 601 961 15, 153 601 961 88 BP4540-9R 89 CP4540-9R B1, B324, 243 601 961 24, 243 601 961 88 BP4660-9R 89 CP4660-9R G

1 The power of both outputs may in sum not exceed the total power for the specified ambient temperature.2 Min efficiency at Vi nom, Po nom, TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approx. 2% better.3 Isolated tracking output (±5% Vo nom, if each output is loaded with ≥ 5% of Po nom). Parallel or series configuration possible4 Short deviations below Vi min and beyond Vi max according to EN 50155 possible5 Only available for outputs with 3.3 V or 5.1 V6 Compatible to CompactPCI® specification; for detailed specification contact Power-One.7 Outputs 5.1 and 3.3 V have a common return.8 H15 standard connector, rather then H15-S2 connector; applies for xP1101 and xP1001.



®


Table 1b: Model types DP, EP

Output 1, 4 Output 2, 3 Input voltage range and efficiency2 Options

Vo nom Po nom Po max Vo nom Po nom Po max ηηηηη 2 Vi min – Vi max4 ηηηηη 2 Vi min – Vi max4

[V] [W] [W] [V] [W] [W] [%] 40 – 100.8 V 9 [%] 66 – 150 V

3.3 100 132 - - - 86 DP1101-9R 86 EP1101-9R -75.1 122 183 - - - 88 DP1001-9R 88 EP1001-9R D12 120 192 - - - 88 DP1301-9R 87.5 EP1301-9R T5

15 120 194 - - - 89 DP1501-9R 88 EP1501-9R i24 120 192 - - - 88.5 DP1601-9R 87.5 EP1601-9R K8

3.3 50 66 5.1 61 91 86 DP2101-9R 86 EP2101-9R B1, B3

5.1 61 91 5.1 61 91 88 DP2001-9R 88 EP2001-9R G

5.1 61 91 12 60 96 88 DP2020-9R 87.5 EP2020-9R12 60 96 12 60 96 88 DP2320-9R 87.5 EP2320-9R15 60 97 15 60 97 89 DP2540-9R 88 EP2540-9R24 60 96 24 60 96 88.5 DP2660-9R 87.5 EP2660-9R

5.1 61 91 12, 123 601 961 87.5 DP3020-9R 87.5 EP3020-9R5.1 61 91 15, 153 601 961 88 DP3040-9R 88 EP3040-9R5.1 61 91 24, 243 601 961 88 DP3060-9R 88 EP3060-9R

5.1, 3.37 30 50 12, 123 601 961 - DP4720-9R6 - EP4720-9R6 -712, 123 601 961 12, 123 601 961 89 DP4320-9R 88 EP4320-9R D, i15, 153 601 961 15, 153 601 961 89 DP4540-9R 88 EP4540-9R B1, B124, 243 601 961 24, 243 601 961 89 DP4660-9R 87 EP4660-9R G

Table 1c: Model types GP

Output 1, 4 Output 2, 3 Input voltage range and efficiency2 Options

Vo nom Po nom Po max Vo nom Po nom Po max ηηηηη 2 Vi min – Vi max4

[V] [W] [W] [V] [W] [W] [%] 21.6 – 50.4 V

3.3 100 132 - - - 86 GP1101-9R -75.1 122 183 - - - 88 GP1001-9R D12 120 192 - - - 87.5 GP1301-9R T5

15 120 194 - - - 88 GP1501-9R i24 120 192 - - - 87.5 GP1601-9R K8

3.3 50 66 5.1 61 91 86 GP2101-9R B1, B3

5.1 61 91 5.1 61 91 88 GP2001-9R G

5.1 61 91 12 60 91 87.5 GP2020-9R12 60 96 12 60 96 87.5 GP2320-9R15 60 97 15 60 97 88 GP2540-9R24 60 96 24 60 96 87.5 GP2660-9R

5.1 61 91 12, 123 601 961 87.5 GP3020-9R5.1 61 91 15, 153 601 961 88.5 GP3040-9R5.1 61 91 24, 243 601 961 88.5 GP3060-9R

5.1, 3.37 30 50 12, 123 601 961 - GP4720-9R6 -712, 123 601 961 12, 123 601 961 88 GP4320-9R D, i15, 153 601 961 15, 153 601 961 88 GP4540-9R B1, B324, 243 601 961 24, 243 601 961 88 GP4660-9R G

1 The power of both outputs may in sum not exceed the total power for the specified ambient temperature.2 Min efficiency at Vi nom, Po nom, TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approx. 2% better.3 Isolated tracking output (±5% Vo nom, if each output is loaded with ≥ 5% of Po nom). Parallel or series configuration possible4 Short deviations below Vi min and beyond Vi max according to EN 50155 possible5 Only available for outputs with 3.3 V or 5.1 V6 Compatible to CompactPCI® specification; for detailed specification contact Power-One.7 Outputs 5.1 and 3.3 V have a common return.8 H15 standard connector, rather then H15-S2 connector; applies for xP1101 and xP1001.9 According to ETS 300132-2 (DP models)



®


Part Number DescriptionC P 2 5 40 -9 R D T i B1

Input voltage Vi nom:24 VDC ................................................................ B48 VDC ................................................................ C72 VDC ................................................................ D110 VDC .............................................................. E36 VDC ............................................................... G

Series .................................................................................... PNumber of outputs:

Single output ........................................................ 1Double output ...................................................... 2Triple output ......................................................... 3Quadruple output ................................................. 4

Nominal voltage output 1 /output 4, Vo1/4 nom:3.3 V ..................................................................... 15.1 V ..................................................................... 012 V ...................................................................... 315 V ...................................................................... 524 V ...................................................................... 6other voltages1 ...................................................................... 7, 8

Other specifications and additional features1 ............ 01, ...99Nominal voltage output 2 /output 3, Vo2/3 nom:

5.1 V ................................................................... 013.3 V ................................................................... 1012 V .................................................................... 2015 V .................................................................... 4024 V .................................................................... 60other voltages and features1 ............................. 80, ... 99

Operational ambient temperature range TA:–40 to 71 °C ........................................................ -9–25 to 71 °C (option) .......................................... -7other1 ............................................................. 0, -6

Output voltage adjust (auxiliary function) .............................. ROptions: Out OK output ..................................................... D2

Current sharing .................................................. T3

Isolated inhibit on secondary side .................... i 2

H15 standard connector .................................... K4

Heatsink 20 or 30 mm ................................ B1, B3RoHS compliant for all 6 substances ............... G5

1 Customer-specific models.2 Option D and option i exclude each other.3 Only available for 3.3 V and 5 V outputs. Option T excludes option R, except for single-output models; refer to table 1.4 Only available for single-output models with 3.3 V or 5 V output5 G is always placed at the end of the part number. Consult Power-One for availability!

Example: CP 2540-9R: DC-DC converter, input voltage range 33.6 – 75 V, 2 regulated outputs each providing 15 V, equippedwith R-control for output 1 and operating ambient temperature of –40 to 71 °C.

Note: All models exhibit the following auxiliary functions, which are not shown in the type designation: input and output filters,primary referenced inhibit, sense lines (single-, double- and triple-output models only), and LED indicators.

Product MarkingBasic type designation, applicable safety approval and recognition marks, CE mark, warnings, pin allocation, Power-Onepatents, company logo, specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal output voltage(s) and output current(s), degreeof protection, batch no., serial no. and data code including production site, modification status and date of production.Identification of LEDs.



®


Output ConfigurationThe P Series allows high flexibility in output configuration tocover almost every individual requirement, by simply wiringoutputs in parallel, in seriel, or in independent configuration,as shown in the following diagrams.Parallel or serial operation of several converters with equaloutput voltage is possible, however it is not advantageous to

Fig. 3Independent double-output configuration. Both outputsare fully regulated

Fig. 2Series output configuration of a double-output model.The second output is fully regulated.

Fig. 4Independent triple-output configuration. Output 3 istracking

Fig. 1Standard configuration (single-output model)

Load 1

Load 2Vo2+

Vo4+

Vo2–

Vo4–

Vo1–

Vo1+Quadruple-

output model

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

4

8

14

12

6

10

01011-P

Load 3Vo3+

Vo3–

18

20

Load 4

Fig. 5Common ground configuration of output 1 with 4 andindependent configuration of output 2 and 3

Fig. 6Series configuration of all outputs (Vo = 96 V for xP4660).The R1-input influences only outputs 1 and 4. For thevalues of R1 and R2 see Output Voltage Adjust.

Load

Vo–

S–

S+

Vo+

Single-output model

Vi–

Vi+

i

30

32

4

12

22

24

14

10

01006-P

6

8Vo–

Vo+

28

R 16

OK+

OK–

connect converters in parallel without measures to providereasonable current sharing. Choose suitable single-outputmodels, if available.

Note: Unused tracking outputs should be connected parallel tothe respective regulated outputs.

S1–

S1+

Vo1–

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo2+

Double-output model

Vi–

Vi+

iLoad

28

30

32

6

10

4

12

14

8

01007-P

18

20

S2+

S2–

Load 1

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo2–

S1–

S1+

Vo1+

Triple-output model

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

4

12

14

8

6

10

01010-P

Load 2

Vo3+

Vo3–

18

20Load 3

Load 1

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo2–

S1–

S1+

Vo1+Double-output

model

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

4

12

14

8

6

10

01013-P

S2+

S2–

18

20

Load 2

Load

Vo4–

Vo4+

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo3+Quadruple- output model

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

20

6

10

12

14

4

01012-P

R1

Vo1–

16

8

Vo3–

18

R1

R2



®


Functional DescriptionThe power supplies are equipped with two independent flight-forward converters, switching 180° phase-shifted to minimizethe ripple current at the input. They use primary andsecondary control circuits in hybrid technology. The twoconverters, called "powertrains" (PT), each generate either asingle output with synchronous rectifier or two isolatedoutputs, one fully regulated and the other one tracking (semi-regulated), thus providing up to four output voltages. In somemodels, both outputs of a powertrain are connected in parallelinternally.The highly efficient input filter together with very low inputcapacitance causes very low and short inrush current. Aftertransformer isolation and rectification the output filter reducesripple and noise to a minimum without affecting the dynamicresponse. Outputs 3 and 4, if available, are tracking (semi-regulated) and rely upon the close magnetic coupling of thetransformer and the output inductor together with the circuitsymmetry for their voltage regulation. A current limitation islocated on the primary side of each powertrain limiting thetotal output current from that powertrain in overload

conditions. This allows flex power operation of the outputsfrom each powertrain. All outputs can either be connected inseries or in parallel; see Electrical Output Data.An auxiliary converter provides the bias voltages for theprimary and secondary referenced control logic and theoption circuits. An oscillator generates a clock pulse oftypically 307 kHz, which is fed to the control logic of eachpowertrain. The pulsewidth modulation and the magneticfeedback are provided by special ASICs. The converter isonly enabled, if the input voltage is within the operatingvoltage range.Double-output powertrains are equipped with a suppressordiode and an independant monitor sensing the output voltageof the tracking output. It shuts down the concernedpowertrain, if an overvoltage occurs.Single-output powertrains are protected by a suppressordiode.The temperature of the heat sink is monitored and causes theconverter to disable the outputs, until the temperature drops;then the converter will automatically resume.

Fig. 7Block diagram. Powertrains PT1 and PT2 have isolated outputs.Pin allocation see table 12

03107a

2 x

PT1PT2

Auxiliaryconverter

Clockgenerator

Ctrl1Ctrl2

Primary options Secondary options

PWM controller,duty cycle limiter,

non linear FF,ON/OFF control of

sync. rectifier

D, i, T

Vi

Vo1

Vo4

Vo2

Vo3Y

R

Input filter

Error amplifier,Vo monitor

Y

Outputfilter



®


Electrical Input DataGeneral Conditions:– TA = 25°C, unless TC is specified– Sense lines connected directly at the connector, inhibit (28) connected to Vi– (32)– R input open


Input BP GP CP Unit


V i Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io max 16 36 21.6 50.4 33.6 75 VTC min – TC max

V i nom Nominal input voltage 24 36 48

Short For ≤100 ms without 14.4 40 28.8term For ≤ 2 s lockoutexcur-

For ≤ 3 s with lockout 50 63 100sions

I i Typical input current 1 Vi nom, Io nom 5.6 3.7 2.8 A

P i 0 No-load input power 1 Vi min 1 – Vi max 4 6.5 4 6.5 5 10 W

P i inh Idle input power 1 4 Io = 0 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5

I inr p Peak inrush current 2 Vi max, Io max 61 64 66 A

tinr rise Rise time inrush 50 32 30 µs

tr Rise time inhibit 3 Io max – Vi nom 5 5 5 ms

tf Fall time inhibit 3 2 2 2

td on Start-up time 3 0 → Vi min, Io max 110 300


Input DP2 EP Unit

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max

V i Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io max 402 100.8 66 150 VTC min – TC max

V i nom Nominal input voltage 72 110

Short For ≤ 100 ms without 36 115 57.6 184term For ≤ 2 s lockout 168excur-

For ≤ 3s with lockout 134 200sions

Ii Typical input current 1 Vi nom, Io nom 1.9 1.2 A

P i 0 No-load input power 1 Vi min – Vi max 5 11 5 12 W

P i inh Idle input power 1 4 Io = 0 1 1.7 1.1 1.7

Iinr p Peak inrush current 2 Vi max, Io max 57 65 A

tinr rise Rise time inrush 20 20 µs

tr Rise time inhibit 3 Io max, Vi nom 5 5 ms

tf Fall time inhibit 3 2 1

td on Start-up time 3 0 → Vi min, Io max 200

1 Typical values depending on model2 According to ETS 300132-23 See fig. 164 Converter inhibited



®


Input FuseA fuse mounted inside the converter protects against furtherdamage in case of a failure. The fuse is not user-accessible.Reverse polarity at the input will cause the fuse to blow.

Table 3: Fuse specification

Model Fuse type Rating Reference

BP very fast blow 2 × 10 A, 125 V Littelfuse Pico 251

GP very fast blow 2 × 10 A, 125 V Littelfuse Pico 251

CP very fast blow 10 A, 125 V Littelfuse Pico 251

DP very fast blow 7 A, 125 V Littelfuse Pico 251

EP very fast blow 5 A, 250 V Littelfuse Pico 263

Input Transient ProtectionA VDR (Voltage Dependent Resistor), the input fuse, and asymmetrical input filter form an effective protection againstinput transients, which typically occur in most installations,but especially in battery-driven mobile applications.Nominal battery voltages in use are: 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 96,and 110 V. In most cases each nominal value is specified in a

tolerance of –30% to +25%, with short excursions to ±40% oreven more.In some applications, surges according to RIA 12 arespecified in addition to those defined in IEC 60571-1 or EN50155. The power supply must not switch off during thesesurges, and since their energy can practically not beabsorbed, an extremely wide input range is required. The PSeries input range has been designed and tested to meetthese requirements; see Electromagnetic Immunity.

Input Under- / Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage is below approx. 0.9 Vi min or exceedsapprox. 1.1 Vi max, an internally generated inhibit signaldisables the output(s). However, short extentions specified inEN 50155 will be withstood without shutdown.

Inrush CurrentThe inherent inrush current value is lower than specified inthe standard ETS 300132-2 (ver. 3.1). The units operate withrelatively small input capacitance resulting in low inrushcurrent of short duration. As a result in a power-bus systemthe units can be hot plugged-in or disconnected causingnegligible disturbance at the input side.

Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions:– TA = 25°C, unless TC is specified.– Sense lines connected directly at the connector, inhibit (28) connected to Vi– (32).– R input not connected

Table 4a: Output data for single-output powertrains

Output Single-output powertrain 3.3 V 5.1 V 12 V Unit


Vo Output voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 3.28 3.3 3.32 5.07 5.1 5.13 11.94 12 12.06 V

Vow Worstcase output Vi min – Vi max 3.24 3.35 5.02 5.18 11.82 12.18voltage TC min – TC max

Io = 0 – Io max

Vo P Overvoltage protection 2 6.45 6.8 6.45 6.8 14.3 15 15.8

Io nom Nominal output current 15 12 5 A

Io max Max. output current Vi min – Vi max 20 18 8

IoL Output current limit 3 TC min – TC max 22 19.8 8.8

vo Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io max 5 5 15 mVpp

noise Total incl. spikes BW = 20 MHz 20 20 30

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom 0.7 0.8 1.2 Vload deviation Io max ↔ 1/2 Io max

td 5 regulation Recovery time 0.4 0.3 0.15 ms

Vo tr Output voltage trim 1.1 Vi min – Vi max 1.79 3.63 2.75 5.61 6.5 13.2 Vrange (via R input) (0.1 – 1) Io max

TC min – TC max

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control or remote sensing, the output power should be reducedaccordingly, so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.

2 Breakdown voltage of the incorporated suppressor diode at 10 mA (3.3 V, 5.1 V) or 1 mA (12 V). Exceeding this voltage might damagethe suppressor diode.

3 See Output Current Limitation and Increased Output Power at Reduced Temperature4 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204 with a probe described in annex A5 Recovery time until Vo returns to ±1% of Vo; see Dynamic Load Regulation.



®


Table 4b: Output data for single-output powertrains. General conditions as in table 4a

Output Single-output powertrain 15 V 24 V Unit


Vo Output voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 14.93 15 15.08 23.88 24 24.12 V

Vow Worstcase output Vi min – Vi max 14.78 15.23 23.64 24.36voltage TC min – TC max

Io = 0 – Io max

Vo P Overvoltage protection 2 17.1 18 18.9 28.5 30 31.5

Io nom Nominal output current 4 2.5 A

Io max Max. output current Vi min – Vi max 6.5 4

IoL Output current limit 3 TC min – TC max 7.2 4.4

vo Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io max 15 15 mVpp

noise Total incl. spikes BW = 20 MHz 40 70

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom 1.2 0.5 Vload deviation Io max ↔ 1/2 Io max

td 5 regulation Recovery time 0.2 0.15 ms

Vo tr Output voltage trim 1.1 Vi min – Vi max 8.1 16.5 13 26.4 Vrange (via R input) (0.1 – 1) Io max

TC min – TC max

Table 4c: Output data for double-output powertrains. General conditions as in table 4a

Output Double-output powertrain 12 V UnitMain output Tracking output


Vo Output voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 11.88 12 12.12 11.76 12 12.24 V

Vow Worstcase output Vi min – Vi max 11.82 12.18 See Outputvoltage TC min – TC max Voltage Regulation

Io = 0 – Io max

Vo P Overvoltage protection 2 none 14.3 15 15.8

Vo L Overvoltage limitation 6 none 14.4

Io nom Nominal output current 2.5 2.5 A

Io max Max. output current Vi min – Vi max 4 4

IoL Output current limit 3 TC min – TC max 4.4 4.4

vo Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io max 15 15 mVpp

noise Total incl. spikes BW = 20 MHz 30 30

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom 1.2 1.2 Vload deviation Io max ↔ 1/2 Io max

td 5 regulation Recovery time 0.15 0.15 ms

Vo tr Output voltage trim 1.1 Vi min – Vi max 6.5 13.2 See Output Vrange (via R input) (0.1 – 1) Io max Voltage Regulation

TC min – TC max

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control or remote sensing, the output powershould be reduced accordingly, so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.

2 Breakdown voltage of the incorporated suppressor diode at 1 mA. Exceeding this voltage might damage the suppressor diode.3 See Output Current Limitation and Increased Output Power at Reduced Temperature4 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204 with a probe described in annex A5 Recovery time until Vo returns to ±1% of Vo; see Dynamic Load Regulation6 Output voltage limitation by an additional control loop



®


Parallel and Series ConnectionThe first outputs of power trains with equal nominal outputvoltage can be connected in parallel. Where available, werecommend ordering of option T.Any output can be connected in series with any other output.If the main and the tracking output of the same power train areconnected in series, consider that the effect of the R-input isdoubled. Notes:

If tracking outputs are not used, connect them in parallel to therespective regulated main output.

Connection of several outputs in parallel should includemeasures to approximate all output currents. 3.3 and 5 V outputswith option T have current share pins (T or T1), which must beinterconnected. For other outputs, the load lines should exhibitsimilar resistance. Parallel connection of regulated outputswithout such precautions is not recommended.

The maximum output current of a serial-connected outputs islimited by the output with the lowest current limit.

Rated output voltages above 48 V (SELV = Safety Extra LowVoltage) require additional safety measures in order to complywith international safety requirements.

Parallel operation of two double-output converters withseries-connected outputs is shown in fig. 9. The link

Table 4d: Output data for double-output powertrains. General conditions as in table 4a

Output Double-output powertrain 15 V 24 V UnitMain output Tracking output Main output Tracking output

Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo Output voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 14.85 15 15.15 14.7 15 15.3 23.76 24 24.24 23.52 24 24.48 V

Vow Worstcase output Vi min – Vi max 14.78 15.23 See Output 23.64 24.36 See Outputvoltage TC min – TC max Voltage Regulation Voltage Regulation

Io = 0 – Io max

Vo P Overvoltage protection2 none 17.1 18 18.9 none 28.5 30 31.5

Vo L Overvoltage limitation 6 none 17.6 none 28.8

Io nom Nominal output current 2 2 1.25 1.25 A

Io max Max. output current Vi min – Vi max 3.25 3.25 2 2

IoL Output current limit 3 TC min – TC max 3.6 3.6 2.2 2.2

vo Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io max 15 15 15 15 mVpp

noise Total incl. spikes BW = 20 MHz 40 40 70 70

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom 1.2 1.2 0.5 0.5 Vload deviation Io max ↔ 1/2 Io max

td 5 regulation Recovery time 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 ms

Vo tr Output voltage trim 1.1 Vi min – Vi max 8.1 16.5 See Output 13 26.4 See Output Vrange (via R input) (0.1 – 1) Io max Voltage Regulation Voltage Regulation

TC min – TC max

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control or remote sensing, the output power should be reducedaccordingly, so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.

2 Breakdown voltage of the incorporated suppressor diode at 1 mA. Exceeding this voltage might damage the suppressor diode.3 See Output Current Limitation and Increased Output Power at Reduced Temperature4 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204 with a probe described in annex A5 Recovery time until Vo returns to ±1% of Vo; see Dynamic Load Regulation6 Output voltage limitation by an additional control loop

Fig. 8Series connection of double-output models. Sense linesconnected at the connector.

Load

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S1–

S1+

Vo2+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

+

i+–

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S1–

S1+

Vo2+

Rp

05092-P

Double-output model

S2+

S2–

S2+

S2–

Double-output model



®


Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

Vo2+

Double-output model

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK–

Out OK+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK–

Out OK+

+

i+–

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S1–

S1+

Rp

Vo2+

S2–

S2+

S2–

S2+

S1–

S1+

Double-output model

Load

2

T1

T1

06157a

Load

1

DS

RS

DS

RS

Wires of equal length and sectinon

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

Vo2+

Double-output model

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

+

i+–

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S1–

S1+

Rp

06158a

Vo2+

S2–

S2+

S2–

S2+

S1–

S1+

Double-output model

Load

T1

T1

Fig. 10Redundant configuration

Fig. 9Parallel operation of 2 double-output converters withseries-connected outputs.

Hold-up TimeThe converters provide virtually no hold-up time. If a hold-uptime is required, use external output capacitors or decouplingdiodes and input capacitors of adequate size.Formula for additional external input capacitor:

2 • Po • th • 100C i ext = ––––––––––––––––––

(V t i2 – Vi min2) • η whereas:

C i ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]η = efficiency [%]th = hold-up time [ms]V i min = minimum input voltage [V]V t i = threshold level [V]

Output Voltage RegulationLine and load regulation of theregulated outputs is so good that inputvoltage and output current havevirtually no influence to the outputvoltage.However, if the tracking output is notloaded, the second control loop mayslightly reduce the voltage of the mainoutput. Thus, unused tracking outputsshould be connected in parallel to therespective main output.The dynamic load regulation is shownin fig. 11.

between the T1 pins ensures proper current sharing, eventhough only the first outputs are influenced. Sense lines areconnected directly at the connector, and load lines haveequal length and section.

Redundant SystemsAn example of a redundant system using converters with 2regulated ouputs (xP2020) is shown in fig. 10. Load 1 ispowered with 5.1 V and load 2 with 12 V.The converters are separated with ORing diodes. If oneconverter fails, the remaining one still delivers the power tothe loads. If more power is needed, the system may beextended to more parallel converters (n+1 redundancy).Current sharing of the 5.1 V outputs is ensured byinterconnected T1 pins, whereas the sense lines areconnected after the ORing diodes to maintain the correctoutput voltage.For the 12 V outputs, no current feature is available. As aresult, 2 little diodes Ds (loaded by little resistors Rs)simulate the voltage drop of the ORing diodes. Reasonablecurrent sharing is provided by load lines of equal length andsection.



®


Fig. 1424 V tracking output Vo = f(Io), Vi = Vi nom

Fig. 1315 V tracking output Vo = f(Io), Vi = Vi nom

Fig. 1212 V tracking output Vo4 versus Io4 (powertrain 1) orVo3 versus Io3 (powertrain 2). Vi = Vi nom

Fig. 11Typical dynamic load regulation of output voltage

Vod

Vod

td td

Vo ±1% Vo ±1%

t

t

≥ 10 µs ≥ 10 µs

Vo

0

0.5

1

Io/Io nom

05102c

Tracking OutputsThe main outputs 1 and 2 are regulated to Vo nom independentof the output current. If the loads on outputs 3 and 4 are toolow (<10% of Io nom), their output voltage tends to rise. Vo3 andVo4 depend upon the load distribution: If all outputs areloaded with at least 10% of Io nom, Vo3 and Vo4 remain within±5% of Vo nom. The following diagrams show the regulation ofthe tracking outputs under different load conditions up to thecurrent limit. If Io1 = Io4 and Io2 = Io3 or if the tracking outputs areconnected in series with their respective regulated outputs,then Vo3 and Vo4 remain within ±1% of Vo nom provided that theload is at least Io min. A 2nd control loop protects the trackingoutputs against overvoltage by reducing the voltage of therespective regulated main output.Because the P Series uses main transformers and mainchokes in planar technology, the tracking outputs follow themain outputs very closely.

Note: If the tracking output (Vo3 or Vo4 is not loaded, it should beconnected in parallel to the respective main output (Vo3 parallel toVo2, Vo4 parallel to Vo1). Hot Swap

Important: For applications using the hot swap capabilities,dynamic output voltage changes during plug-in and plug-outoperations should be considered.

Output Current LimitationAll outputs are continously protected against open-circuit (noload) and short-circuit by an electronic current limitation.Single- and double-output powertrains have a rectangularcurrent limitation characteristic. In double output power-trainsonly the total current is limited allowing free choice of loaddistribution between the two outputs of each power train up toa total Io1 + Io4 = Io max or Io2 + Io3 = Io max.

2 4 6 8 A0

05180a

14 V

12 V

Io3 or Io4

Vo3 or Vo4

11 V

13 V

8 A6 A4 A2 A

1 2 3 4 A0

05178a

26 V

24 V

Io3 or Io4

Vo3 or Vo4

23 V

25 V

4 A3 A2 A1 A

1 2 30

05179a

15 V

Io3 or Io4

Vo3 or Vo4

14 V

16 V

6 A54

17 V6.5 A4.7 A3.2 A1.6 A



®


Fig. 15Output power derating versus TA.

Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is mounted upright in free air, allowingunrestricted convection cooling, and is operated at itsnominal input voltage and output power at TA max (see tableTemperature specifications), the temperature measured atthe measurement point on the case TC (see Mechanical Data)will approach TC max after an initial warm-up phase. Howeverthe relationship between TA and TC depends heavily on theoperating conditions and system integration. The thermalconditions are influenced significantly by the input voltage,the output current, airflow, and the temperature of theadjacent elements and surfaces. TA max is therefore contraryto TC max only an indicative value.

Thermal ProtectionA temperature sensor fitted on the main PCB disables theoutput, when the case temperature exceeds TC max. Theconverter automatically resumes, when the temperaturedrops below this limit. A temperature sensor on each powertrain reduces the output current limit of that power train, whenthe temperature exceeds a safe level.

Output Power at Reduced TemperatureOperating the converters with an output current between Io nomand Io max requires a reduction in maximum ambienttemperature or forced air cooling in order to keep TC below 95°C. When TC max is exceeded, the thermal protection isactivated and disables the outputs.

Note: Forced cooling or an additional heat sink can improve thereliability or allow TA to go beyond TA max, provided that TC max isnot exceeded. In rack systems without proper thermalmanagement the converters should not be packed too closelytogether! In such cases the use of a 5 or 6TE front panel isrecommended.

TA min 50 60 70 80 90 °C

Po

TA

forcedcooling

convectioncooling

TC max

05117aPo max

Po nom



®


Auxiliary Functions

Primary Inhibit (Remote On / Off)The inhibit input enables (logic low, pull down) or disables(logic high, pull up or open-circuit) the output, if a logic signal(TTL, CMOS) is applied. In systems consisting of severalconverters, this feature may be used to control the activationsequence by logic signals or to enable the power source tostart up, before full load is applied.

Note: If this function is not used, pin 28 must be connected withpin 32, otherwise the internal logic will disable the output.

Fig. 16Output response as a function of Vi (on/off switching) orinhibit control

The output response after enabling or disabling the output bythe inhibit input is shown in the figure below. See also InputData.



Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min - Vi max –50 0.8 VVoltage Vo = off TC min - TC max 2.4 50

I inh Inhibit current Vinh = –50 V –1000 µAVinh = 0 V –40Vinh = 50 V 900

Output Voltage Adjust of Vo1 and Vo 4


The converters offer adjust of the voltage of powertrain 1.Powertrain 2 can not be adjusted. The programming isperformed either by an external control voltage Vext or anexternal resistor R1 or R2, connected to the R-input. Trimmingis limited to the values given in the table Electrical OutputData.


With double output powertrains, both outputs are influencedby the R-input setting simultaneously.

Fig. 17Output adjust of Vo1 and Vo4 with an external voltage Vext.The other outputs are not influenced.

Fig. 18Output adjust of Vo1 and Vo4 using R1 or R2. The otheroutputs are not influenced.

Caution: To prevent damage, Vext should not exceed 20 V, nor benegative.

Note: If output voltages are set higher than Vo nom, the outputcurrents should be reduced accordingly, so that the maximumspecified output power is not exceeded.

a) Adjustment by means of an external voltage:

Vext ≈ –––2.72––––Vo1–– – 0.28 V Vo nom

Note: The secondary referenced inhibit function, refers to thedescription of option i.

0

tr

Vi

t

t

t0.8

Vi min0

Vinh [V]

2.4

0.1

Vo/Vo nom tf

td on

0.991.01

06159a b) Adjustment by means of an external resistor:The resistor can either be connected between the pins R(16) and S– (14) to set Vo < Vo nom, or between the pins R(16) and S+ (12) to set Vo > Vo nom.

Note: R inputs of n converters with paralleled outputs may beconnected together, but if only one external resistor is used, itsvalue should be R1/n or R2/n.

Load 1

Load 4Vo4+

Vo1–

Vo4–

S–

S+

Vo1+

Double- outputpowertrain

R

Vi–

Vi+

i

+Vext

–06093-P

2nd

pow

ertr

ain

Load 1

Load 4Vo4+

Vo1–

Vo4–

S–

S+

Vo1+

Double- outputpowertrain

R

Vi–

Vi+

i

06094-P

2nd

pow

ertr

ain

R1

R2



®


Table 6a: R1 for Vo < Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R2 not fitted

Vo nom = 3.3 V Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 V

Vo (V) R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo (V) R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

2.0 5.62 4.0 14.0 6.5 13.0 4.22 8.0 16.0 4.12 14.0 28.0 5.232.1 6.49 4.1 15.8 7.0 14.0 5.11 8.5 17.0 4.75 15.0 30.0 6.192.2 7.50 4.2 18.2 7.5 15.0 6.19 9.0 18.0 5.49 16.0 32.0 7.52.3 8.66 4.3 21.0 8.0 16.0 7.5 9.5 19.0 6.34 17.0 34.0 9.312.4 10.2 4.4 24.3 8.5 17.0 9.09 10.0 20.0 7.5 18.0 36.0 11.52.5 12.1 4.5 29.4 9.0 18.0 11.5 10.5 21.0 8.87 19.0 38.0 14.72.6 14.3 4.6 36.5 9.5 19.0 14.7 11.0 22.0 10.5 20.0 40.0 19.62.7 17.4 4.7 47.5 10.0 20.0 19.6 11.5 23.0 12.7 20.5 41.0 22.62.8 22.1 4.8 63.4 10.5 11.0 27.4 12.0 24.0 15.4 21.0 42.0 27.42.9 28.7 4.9 97.6 11.0 22.0 43.2 12.5 25.0 29.6 21.5 43.0 34.03.0 39.2 5.0 200.0 11.5 23.0 88.7 13.0 26.0 25.5 22.0 44.0 43.23.1 61.9 13.5 27.0 34.8 22.5 45.0 59.03.2 12.7 14.0 28.0 54.9 23.0 46.0 88.7

14.5 29.0 110.0 23.5 47.0 182.0

Table 6b: R2 for Vo > Vo nom ; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R1 not fitted

Vo nom = 3.3 V Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 V

Vo (V) R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo (V) R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

3.4 47.5 5.2 226.0 12.2 24.4 1100.0 15.3 30.6 1130.0 24.5 49.0 1820.03.5 24.3 5.3 115.0 12.4 24.8 499.0 15.5 31.0 665.0 25.0 50.0 909.03.6 16.3 5.4 78.7 12.6 25.2 332.0 15.7 31.4 475.0 25.5 51.0 604.0

5.5 59.0 12.8 25.6 255.0 16.0 32.0 332.0 26.0 52.0 464.05.6 48.7 13.0 26.0 205.0 16.2 32.4 280.0 26.4 52.8 392

13.2 26.4 174.0 16.5 33.0 232.0

1 First column: single output powertrains or double output powertrains with separated/paralleled outputs, second column:outputs in series connection.

Sense Lines

Important: Sense lines should always be connected. Incorrectlyconnected sense lines may damage the converter. If sense linesare left open-circuit, the output voltages will be inaccurate.

This feature enables compensation of voltage drop acrossthe connector contacts and the load lines including ORingdiodes in true redundant systems.Applying generously dimensioned cross-section load leadsavoids troublesome voltage drop. To minimize noise pick-up,wire sense lines parallel or twisted to the respective outputline. To be sure, connect the sense lines directly at the femaleconnector.The voltage difference between any sense line and itsrespective power output pin (as measured on the connector)should not exceed the following values at nominal outputvoltage.

Table 7: Voltage compensation allowed using sense lines

Output type Total drop Negative line drop

3.3, 5.1 V output <0.5 V <0.25 V

12, 15, 24 V output <1.0 V <0.5 V



®


voltages, which typically occur in most installations, butespecially in battery-driven mobile applications. The Pseries has been successfully tested to the followingspecifications:

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A metal oxide resistor (VDR) together with an input fuse andfilter form an effective protection against high input transient


Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Perf.mode1 applied imped. procedure oper. crit. 2

Supply related RIA 12 B +i/– i 1.5 • Vbatt 0.1/1/0.1 s 0.2 Ω 1 positive yes Asurge EN 50155 1.4 • Vbatt 1 Ω surge

Direct transients RIA 12 D4 –i/c, +i/–i 1800 Vp 5/50 µs 5 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes BEN 50155: G5 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs 100 Ω impulses

Indirect coupled 1995

H –o/c, +o/–o, –o/–i 1800 Vp 5/50 µstransients L 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs

Electrostatic IEC/EN 46 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Bdischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp


Electromagnetic IEC/EN x 7 antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 – 1000 MHz yes Afield, 61000-4-3 1 kHzmobile phone ENV 50204 x 10 antenna 20 V/m 50% duty cycle 900 ±5 MHz yes A

200 kHz repetition

Electrical fast IEC/EN 48 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Btransients/burst 61000-4-4 direct, +i/c, –i/c, +i/– i 4000 Vp

5 kHz over 60 s negative15 ms; burst transients per


Surges IEC/EN 33 +i/c, – i/c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B61000-4-5 23 +i/– i 1000 Vp 2 Ω surges per

coupling mode

Conducted IEC/EN 39 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes Adisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBµV) 1 kHz

1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specs, B = Temporary deviation from specs possible.3 Measured with an external input capacitor (to prevent oscillations)4 Corresponds to EN 50155:2001, waveform A, and EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.2.5 Corresponds to EN 50155:2001, waveform B.6 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.2.7 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.1, and EN 50121-5-2:2000, table 1.1.8 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.1.9 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.4.10 Fulfills also EN 50121-5:2000, table 1.2, where ENV 50204 is referenced.



®


Electromagnetic EmissionsTable 9: Emissions at Vi nom and Io nom

Types Level according toEN 55011 / EN 55022

≤≤≤≤≤30 MHz >30 MHz

BP 2320 BCP 1001 B

EP 3020 BEP 4660 B

Fig. 20CP 1001-7RB1Typical disturbance voltage at the input (Vi nom, Ii nom,resitive load, quasi peak).

Fig. 19BP 2320-7RDTypical disturbance voltage at the input (Vi nom, Ii nom,resitive load, quasi peak).

80

60

40

20

0

0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

dBµV

MHz

07127a

A quasi peak

B quasi peak

80

60

40

20

0

0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

dBµV

MHz

07128a

A quasi peak

B quasi peak



®






Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30°C) for 2 h Converter(sodium chloride Storage: 40°C, 93% rel. humidity for notNaCl solution) 22 h operating

Number of cycles 3 (= 3 days)


Number of bumps: 6000 (1000 in each direction)

Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 - 2000 Hz) operating

Frequency (1 Oct/min): 10 – 2000 HzTest duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h in each axis)



-- Shock EN 50155 / EN 61373 sect. Acceleration amplitude: 5.1 gn Converter10, class A and B Bump duration: 30 ms operatingbody mounted 1 Number of bumps: 18 (3 in each direction)

Fda Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-35 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converterwide band DIN 40046 part 23 Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operatingReproducibility Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rmshigh Test duration: 3 h (1 h in each axis)

-- Simulated long life EN 50155 / EN 61373 sect. 9, Acceleration spectral density: 0.02 gn2/Hz Convertertesting at cat 1, class B, body mounted 1 Frequency band: 5 – 150 Hz operatingincreased random Acceleration magnitude: 0.8 gn rmsvibration levels Test duration: 15 h (5 h in each axis)

1 Body mounted = chassis of a railway coach

TemperaturesTable 11: Temperature specifications, valid for an air pressure of 800 – 1200 hPa (800 – 1200 mbar)

Temperature -7 (option) -9 (standard)Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max UnitTA Ambient temperature Converter operating 1 –25 71 –40 71 °CTC Case temperature 2 –25 95 1 –40 95 1

TS Storage temperature Non operational –40 100 –55 100

Rth C-A Thermal resistance case to ambient in still air 2 2 K/W1 Operation with Po max requires reduction to TA max = 50 °C, TC max = 85° C respectively; see Thermal Considerations.2 Overtemperature shut-down at TC >95 °C (PTC)

ReliabilityTable 12: MTBF and device hours

Ratings at specified Model Ground Ground fixed Ground Devicebenign mobile hours 1

Case Temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C

MTBF acc. to CP 3000 340 000 h 88 000 h 42 000 h 40 000 h 7 670 000MIL-HDBK-217F, notice 2

1 Statistical values, based on an average of 4300 working hours per year and in general field use over 5 years; upgrades, customer-induced errors excluded.



®


Mechanical DataThe converters are designed to be inserted in a 19" rack acording to IEC 60297-3. Dimensions in mm.

Note: Long case, elongated by 60 mm for 220 mm rack depth isavailable on request.

Fig. 21Case Q04, weight app. 500 gAluminium, fully enclosed,black finish and self cooling

EuropeanProjection

104

70

111

20

100

127

(164

)

(19.

8)

M3; 4 deep


20.3

2 (4

TE

)

13.4

3

100

95

LED "Out OK" greenLED "In OK" green

(171

.9)

09099a

Front plate

Mainface

Rearface

Back plate

13.2

2

8.14

6.4

104

64.9 (17.6)

= ∅ 4.5



®


Fig. 23View of male H15S2 connector (with high-current contacts)used in P1000 and P1100 without option K


Connector Pin AllocationThe connector pin allocation table defines the electricalpotentials and the physical pin positions on the H15 andH15S2 connector. Pin no. 26, protective earth, is a leadingpin to ensure that it makes contact with the female connectorfirst.

Notes: The current through each standard H15 contact dependson the female connector, the ambient temperature, and the airflow in the region of the connector. We recommend to limit themean current to 15 A at 50 °C and to 13 A at 71 °C.

High currents require a large cross-sectional area of theconnections to the female contacts. We recommend solder orscrew terminal contacts. Each faston connection exhibits aresistance of max. 8 mΩ, which makes it less suitable for highcurrents.

For single-output models with option K, always both outputcontacts must be used and connected in parallel to the load withlarge cross-sectional area wires or thick copper lands.

32 28 24 20 16 12

30 26 22 18 14 8/10 4/6

S10051a


Pin P 1000 P2000 P3000 P400041 Vo+ Output 1 pos. Vo1+ Output 1 pos. Vo1+ Output 1 pos. Vo1+ Output 1 pos.61 Vo+ Output 1 pos. Vo2+ Output 2 pos. Vo2+ Output 2 pos. Vo2+ Output 2 pos.82 Vo– Output 1 neg. Vo1– Output 1 neg. Vo1– Output 1 neg. Vo1– Output 1 neg.6

102 Vo– Output 1 neg. Vo2– Output 2 neg. Vo2– Output 2 neg. Vo2– Output 2 neg.12 S+ Sense + S1+ Sense 1 + S1+ Sense 1 + Vo4+ Output 4 pos.14 S– Sense – S1– Sense 1 – S1– Sense 1 – Vo4– Output 4 neg.6

16 R Adjust of Vo R1 Adjust of Vo1 R1 Adjust of Vo1 R1 Adjust of Vo1/4

T1 Current share3 T1 Current share 3

18 T7 Current share S2+ Sense 2 + Vo3+ Output 3 pos. Vo3+ Output 3 pos.20 n.c. Not connected S2– Sense 2 – Vo3– Output 3 neg. Vo3– Output 3 neg.22 n.c. Not connected n.c. Not connected n.c. Not connected n.c. Not connected

Out OK+ Out OK+4 Out OK+ Out OK+4 Out OK+ Out OK+4 Out OK+ Out OK+4

i+ Inhibit second.5 i+ Inhibit second.5 i+ Inhibit second.5 i+ Inhibit second.5

24 n. c. Not connected n.c. Not connected n.c. Not connected n.c. Not connectedOut OK– Out OK–4 Out OK– Out OK–4 Out OK– Out OK–4 Out OK– Out OK–4

i– Inhibit second.5 i– Inhibit second.5 i– Inhibit second.5 i– Inhibit second.5

26 Prot. earth PE Prot. earth PE Prot. earth PE Prot. earth PE28 i Inhibit primary i Inhibit primary i Inhibit primary i Inhibit primary30 Vi+ Input pos. Vi+ Input pos. Vi+ Input pos. Vi+ Input pos.32 Vi– Input neg. Vi– Input neg. Vi– Input neg. Vi– Input neg.

1 Pin 4/6 (high-current contact) for P1000 models with 3.3 V or 5.1 V output (H15S2 connector)2 Pin 8/10 (high-current contact) for P1000 models with 3.3 V or 5.1 V output (H15S2 connector)3 Option T1 for 3.3 V and 5.1 V powertrains: Only I o1 is influenced4 Option D5 Option i6 Powertrains with 5.1 V and 3.3 V outputs have a common return: Vo1– and Vo4– are connected together.7 Not connected, if option T is not fitted.

Fig. 22View of male standard H15 connector

32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

30 26 22 18 14 10 6

10025a

High-current contacts of P1000 models exhibit no restriction ofthe output current. Their resistance is only 1 mΩ.



®


Table 14: Isolation

Characteristic Input to Outputs Output to Auxiliaries3 Auxiliaries3 Auxiliaries3 Unitcase + outputs1 to case output 4 to input to case to outputs

Electric Factory test >1 s 2.11 1.0 0.5 2.11 1.0 0.5 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 1.5 0.7 0.35 1.5 0.7 0.35 kVACtest to actual factory test

Insulation resistance >300 2 >300 2 >100 >300 2 >100 >100 MΩ

1 In accordance with EN 50116, IEC/EN 60950, subassemblies are pre-tested with 4.2 kVDC.2 Tested at 500 VDC3 Insulated secondary-referenced auxiliary circuits, i.e., Out OK circuit (option D), secondary inhibit input (option i).4 Powertrain with 5.1 and 3.3 V output have a commun return.

Installation InstructionsThese converters are components, intended exclusively forinclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyprocess or by a professionally competent person. Installationmust strictly follow the national safety regulations in respectof the enclosure, mounting, creepage distances, clearance,casualty, markings and segregation requirements of the end-use application.Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H15 or H15S2 (see Accessories). Other installationmethods may not meet the safety requirements. Check forhazardous voltages before altering any connections. Pin 26(PE) is a leading pin and is reliably connected to the case. Forsafety reasons it is essential to connect this pin to theprotective earth of the supply system.The Vi– input (pin 32) is internally fused. This fuse is designedto protect the converter against overcurrent caused by afailure, but may not be able to satisfy all requirements.External fuses in the wiring to one or both input pins (no. 30and/or no. 32) may therefore be necessary to ensurecompliance with local requirements.

Important: Whenever the inhibit function is not in use, pin 28 (i)should be connected to pin 32 (Vi–) to enable the output(s).

Do not open the converters, or the warranty will beinvalidated. Make sure that there is sufficient airflow availablefor convection cooling. This should be verified by measuringthe case temperature at the specified measuring point, whenthe converter is operated in the end-use application. TC maxshould not be exceeded. Ensure that a failure of the converterdoes not result in a hazardous condition; see also Safety ofOperator-Accessible Output Circuits.

Standards and ApprovalsThe P Series converters are approved according to the safetystandards IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1, and CSA60950-1.They have been evaluated for: • Class I equipment • Building in • Double or reinforced insulation based on 250 VAC or 240

VDC between input and output and between input andauxiliary circuits

• Overvoltage category II • Functional insulation between output(s) and case • Functional insulation between the outputs • Pollution degree 2 environment • The converters fulfill the requirements of a fire enclosure.CB-scheme is available (CB 06 07 24238 800).The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillance inaccordance with the above mentioned UL standards and withISO 9001:2000.

Cleaning AgentsThe converters are not hermetically sealed. In order to avoidpossible damage, any penetration of liquids shall be avoided.

Protection DegreeThe DC-DC converters correspond to protection degree IP40, provided that the female connector is fitted to theconverter.

Railway ApplicationThe P Series converters have been designed observing therailway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121. All boards arecoated with a protective lacquer.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory asroutine test in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950and should not be repeated in the field. Power-One will nothonor any warranty claims resulting from electric strengthfield tests.



®




Nominal Minimum required grade Maximum DC Minimum required safety Measures to achieve the Safety statussupply of insolation, to be pro- output voltage status of the front end specified safety status of the of the DC-DCvoltage vided by the AC-DC front from the front output circuit output circuit converter

end, including mains end 1 output circuitsupplied battery charger

Mains Functional (i.e. there is ≤168 V Primary circuit (The nominal Double or reinforced insula- SELV circuit≤250 VAC no need for electrical iso- voltage between any input tion, based on 250 VAC and

lation between the mains pin and earth shall not ex- 240 VDC (provided by thesupply circuit and the ceed 250 VAC or 240 VDC.) DC-DC converter) andDC-DC converter input earthed case 2

circuit)

Basic Earth related hazardous Double or reinforced insula-voltage secondary circuit tion, based on the maximum(The nominal voltage nominal output voltage frombetween any input pin and the front end (both providedearth shall not exceed by the DC-DC converter) and250 VAC or 240 VDC.) earthed case 2

Unearthed hazardous Supplementary insulation,voltage secondary circuit based on 250 VAC and DC

and double or reinforcedinsulation, based on themaximum nominal outputvoltage from the front end(both provided by the DC-DCconverter) and earthed case 2

Supplementary Unearthed hazardous Basic insulation, based onvoltage secondary circuit 3 250 VAC and DC (provided

by the DC-DC converter)

1 The front end output voltage should match the specified input voltage range of the DC-DC converter. The maximum rated inputvoltage of EP types is 150 V according to IEC/EN 60950.

2 The earth connection has to be procided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards, e.g., IEC/EN 60950.3 Has to be insulated from earth by at least supplementary insulation (by the installer) according to the relevant safety standards,

e.g. IEC/EN 60950, based on the maximum nominal output voltage from the front end. If the converter case is accessible, ithas to be earthed or the front end output circuit has to be insulated from the converter case by at least basic insulation, basedon the maximum nominal mains supply voltage.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operatoraccessible, it shall be an SELV circuit according to the IEC/EN 60950 related safety standards.The following table shows some possible installationconfigurations, compliance with which causes the outputcircuit of the DC-DC converter to be an SELV circuitaccording to IEC/EN 60950 up to a configured output voltage

(sum of nominal voltages if in series or +/– configuration) of35 V.However, it is the sole responsibility of the installer to ensurethe compliance with the relevant and applicable safetyregulations.Use fuses and earth connections as per table below. See alsoInstallation Instructions.


AC-DCfrontend

DC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earthconnection

+

–

~

~

10052a

Battery



Fuse

Fuse



®



Option D: Out OK MonitorOption D monitors the state of the output error amplifiers onboth power trains and not the input voltage, output voltage orthe current limit. It signals a fault, when one of the erroramplifiers reaches its limit, which means that at least oneoutput voltage is not within its regulation limits. This could bebecause the input voltage is below the minimum level or theload current is too high. This function is not adjustable.A galvanically isolated open-collector output generates the“Out OK” signal. The circuit monitors simultaneously if • the input voltage is present - same logic as LED “In OK” • the output voltages are within their limits - same logic as

LED(s) “Out OK”.The open collector is conducting, if the monitored conditionsare fulfilled.This option is located on a subassembly allowing specialcircuit design on customer request.

Option T: Active Current SharingFor 3.3 V and 5.1 V outputs only. The current share facilityshould be used, where several converters are operated inparallel. Examples could be high reliability n+1 redundantsystems or systems providing higher output power.Using this feature reduces the stress of individualconverters and improves the reliability of the system.Interconnection of the current sharing pins T or T1 causesthe converters to share their output current evenly.In redundant systems, the outputs of the converters are

decoupled by ORing diodes. Consequently, a failure of oneconverter will not lead to a system failure.Since the voltage on the T or T1 pin is referenced to thesense pin S–, the installer must ensure that the S– pins of allparallel converters are at the same electrical potential andthat there are no voltage drops across the connection linesbetween these pins.BP – GP2000 converters with outputs connected in seriescan also be paralleled with current sharing, if pins Vo1– of allconverters are connected together; see Sense Lines. If theoutput voltages are programmed to a voltage other thanVo nom by means of the R pin, the outputs should be adjustedindividually within a tolerance of ±1%.

Note: Option T is only available for 3.3 V or 5.1 V single-outputpower trains and only for output 1. In dual- or triple-output models,option T1 influences only output 1. In addition, the second powertrain has no R input (since no pin is left for that function).

Option i: Secondary-Referenced InhibitThe inhibit function is located on the primary side. Option igives the possibility of an inhibit function on the secondaryside using two galvanically isolated pins i+ and i–. The powersupply may be inhibited from either the input or the outputinhibit logic. The inhibit is enabled or disabled by a logicsignal (TTL, CMOS, etc). Output enabled: Logic low (<0.8 V)Output inhibited: Logic high (>2.4 V).This option excludes Opt.-D.Opt.-i is located on a subassembly allowing special circuitdesign on customer request.The secondary inhibit is fully floating with operationalinsulation to the secondary circuits (which is not sufficient tobe used as a primary to secondary insulation).The input is CMOS compatible, and the level should notexceed 5V. The internal pull-up (to an internal 5 V supply) is10 kOhms. We suggest connecting i– to Sense–; otherwisethe inhibit potential will be undefined.

Option B1 and B3: Heat SinkThe converter is fitted with an additional heat sink.

Table 16: Output OK data

Characteristics / Conditions min typ max Unit

VOK Out OK voltageOutput good, IOK < 50 mA 0.8 1.5 V

IOK Out OK currentOutput out of range, VOK < 18 V 25 µA

Caution: The Out OK circuit is protected by a Zener diode. Toprevent damage, the applied current IOK should be limited to ±50mA. The Zener diode should not be exposed to more than 0.25 W.

Fig. 25Output OK circuit (option D)

VpDimensioning of resistor value Rp ≥ –––––– 50 mA

Table 17: Thermal resistance case to ambient (approx.values)

Option Thermal resistance Thickness of case

Standard, 160 mm long 1.6 K/W < 20 mmHousing, 220 mm long 1 1.4 K/W < 20 mmOption B1 1.4 K/W < 40 mmOption B3 1.2 K/W < 50 mm

1 Customer-specific models

Outputmonitoring

circuit24

22 Out OK+

Out OK–

+

Rp

VOK

IOK

20 V

Vp06151a

Option GRoHS compliant for all six substances.



®


AccessoriesA great variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable: • Additional external input or output filters • Mating connectors including fast-on, screw, solder, or

press-fit terminals • Cable connector housing • Front panels for 19" rack in 3U or 6U configuration

Universal mountingbracket for DIN-railand chassis mounting


NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized for use as critical componentsin life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systems without the express written consent of therespective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change depending on thedate manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

• Mechanical mounting supports for chassis, DIN-rail, andPCB mounting

• Connector retention facilitiesFor additional accessory product information, see theaccessory data sheets listed with each product series orindividual model listing at www.power-one.com.

Front panel for 19" rack with 6U



®



CE MARKING We, Power-One, Inc.,740 Calle Plano, Camarillo, CA. 93012 USA declare under our sole responsibility that the products;

Power Supply Model: P Series to which this declaration relates, is/are in compliance with the following document(s):

Quality Standard(s): ISO 9001, EN 29001

Directive: DIR 73/23/EEC, Low Voltage Directive

Product Safety Standard(s): EN 60950-1: 2001 IEC 60950-1: 2001 (Licensed by a Notified Body to the European Union ) These component level power supplies are intended exclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operation or by professional installers per the Installation Instructions provided with the power supplies. The power supplies are considered Class I and must be connected to a reliable earth grounding system. Camarillo, Ca. July 5, 2006 (Manufacturer) (Place) (Date) Robert P. White Jr. Product Safety Director


PC Series Data Sheet190 - 230 Watt AC-DC Converters

REV. MAY 12, 2004 Page 1 of 4

• Extremely slim case (4TE), fully enclosed• Single outputs for 72 and 85 VDC loads• Ideal to supply isolated P series DC-DC

converters• Operating ambient temperature range

–40 to 71°C with convection cooling

Converter with single stage AC to DC con-version and PFCNo electrical isolation input to outputInput voltage range 85(95) - 255 V AC

InputInput voltage continuous range 85(95) - 255 V ACInput frequency 47 - 63 HzInrush current extremely low input capacitance of 1.25 µF negligible

OutputEfficiency Vi nom, Io nom 94%Output voltage setting accuracy Vi nom, Io nom ±2 V Vo nom

Output voltage noise IEC/EN 61204, low frequency typ. 5 Vpp

IEC/EN 61204, switching frequency typ. 25 mVpp

Line regulation Vi min - Vi max, Io nom typ. ±1 VLoad regulation Vi nom, 10 - 100% Io nom typ. 250 mV

Vi nom, 0 - 10% Io nom typ. 700 mVMinimum output current not required 0 APower limitation approx. 1 s, restart after 3 s typ. 240 WCurrent limitation approx. 1 s, restart after 3 s typ. 200% Io nom

Operation in parallel by load regulation up to 5 unitsHold-up time Vo = 72 - 66 VDC, Po = 190 W typ. 4.3 ms

Vo = 85 - 40 VDC, Po = 230 W typ. 24 ms

Model SelectionOutput 1 Input voltage Rated power Efficiency Type Options

Vo nom Io nom Vi Po max h[VDC] [A] [V AC] [W] [%]

72 2.7 85 - 255 190 94 LPC 1901-7D -985 2.7 95 - 255 230 94 LPC 1902-7D -9

Model numbers highlighted in yellow or schaded are not recommded for new designs.

LGA




ProtectionInput undervoltage lockout typ. 68 V ACInput overvoltage lockout typ. 306 V ACInput transient protection two varistorsOutput no-load, overload and short circuit proofOutput overvoltage suppressor diode in each output typ. 150% Vo nom

Overtemperature switch-off with auto restart TC typ. 110°C

ControlStatus indication LED: OKIsolated open collector signal In OK/Out OK feature D

SafetyApprovals EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950Class of equipment class IProtection degree IP 40Electric strength test voltage I/case and O/case 1.5 kV AC

EMCElectrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2, contact/air, level 2/3 (4/8 kV) criterion BElectromagnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-3, level 2 (3 V/m) criterion AElectr. fast transients/bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-4, level 3 (2 kV) criterion BSurge IEC/EN 61000-4-5, input, level 2/3 (1/2 kV) criterion BConducted disturbances IEC/EN 61000-4-6, level 2 (3 V) criterion AElectromagnetic emissions CISPR 22/EN 55022, conducted class B

CISPR 14/EN 55014, radiated below limit

EnvironmentalOperating ambient temperature Vi nom, Io nom, convection cooled –25 to 71°COperating case temperature TC Vi nom, Io nom –25 to 95°CStorage temperature non operational –40 to 100°CDamp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-3, 93%, 40°C 56 daysVibration, sinusoidal IEC/EN 60068-2-6, 10 - 60/60 - 150 Hz 0.35 mm/5 gn

Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27, 11 ms 50 gn

Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29, 11 ms 25 gn

Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64, 20 - 500 Hz 4.9 gn rms

MTBF MIL-HDBK-217E, GB, 40°C, notice 2 763'000 h

OptionsExtended temperature range –40 to 71°C, ambient, operating -9




Mechanical dataTolerances ±0.3 mm (0.012") unless otherwise indicated. European

Projection

104 (4.09")

65 (2.56")

111 (4.37")

20 (0

.79"

)12

7 (5

.18"

)

164

(6.4

6")

8 (0

.31"

)

19.8

(0

.78"

)

Potentiometer (option P) LED "OUT OK"

171.

93 (

DIN

414

94)

(6.7

6")

S09

106

M3, 4 deep


35 (

1.38

")




30 26 22 18 14 10 6 S10025

32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

Pin allocationPin no. Electrical determination

4 Output voltage negative Vo–

6 Output voltage positive Vo+

8 Phase P

10 Neutral N

12 Protective earth

14 Protective earth

16 - n.c.

18 - n.c.

20 Output good Out OK+

22 Output good Out OK–

24 - n.c.





AccessoriesFront panels 19” (Schroff/Intermas)Mating H11 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on or press-fit terminalsConnector retention facilities and code key system for connector codingFlexible PCB for connecting the converter via an H11 connector, if mounted on a PCBChassis or wall mounting plates for frontal accessUniversal mounting brackets for chassis or DIN-rail mounting

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not authorized for use as critical compo-nents in life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systems without theexpress written consent of the respective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels,may change depending on the date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.


PSA, PSR Series Data Sheet1 to 6 A Switching Regulator

FEB 09, 2006 revised to MAY 31, 2006 Page 1 of 3 www.power-one.com

Input voltage up to 144 VDCSingle output of 3.3 to 48 VDCNo input-to-output isolation

Model SelectionOutput Input voltage Rated power Efficiency Type Options

Vo nom Io nom Vi Po tot η[VDC] [A] [VDC] [W] [%]

5 2 8 - 80 10 74 PSR 52-7 Y5 3 8 - 80 15 79 PSR 53-7 -9, i, P, R, Y5 4 7 - 40 20 83 PSR 54-7 -9, i, P, R, Y5 5 7 - 35 25 83 PSA 55-7 -9, i, P, R, Y

5.1 2 8 - 40 10.2 75 PSA 5A2-2 iRY-Package5.1 5 7 - 35 25.5 83 PSA 5A5-2 iRY-Package

12 1.5 18 - 144 18 87 PSA 121.5-7iR -9, P, Y12 2.5 15 - 80 30 87 PSR 122.5-7 -9, i, P, R, Y12 3 15 - 40 36 89 PSA 123-2 iRY-Package

15 1.5 22 - 144 22.5 89 PSA 151.5-7iR -9, P, Y15 2.5 19 - 80 37.5 89 PSR 152.5-7 -9, i, P, R, Y15 3 19 - 40 45 90 PSA 153-2 iRY-Package

24 1.5 31 - 144 36 93 PSA 241.5-7iR -9, P, Y24 2 29 - 80 48 92 PSR 242-7 -9, i, P, R, Y24 2.5 29 - 60 60 93 PSA 242.5-2 iRY-Package

36 1.2 44 - 144 43.2 95 PSA 361-7iR -9, P, Y36 2 42 - 80 72 94 PSR 362-7 -9, i, P, R, Y

48 1 58 - 144 48 95 PSA 481-7iR -9, P, Y

Features• RoHS lead solder exemption compliant• Efficiency up to 95%• Low input-output differential voltage• No derating over temperature• Board or chassis mountable




InputInput voltage refer to selection chartNo load input current ≤50 mA

OutputEfficiency Vi nom, Io nom up to 95%Output voltage setting accuracy Vi nom, Io nom ±0.6% Vo nom

Output voltage switching noise IEC/EN 61204, total typ. 0.3%Line regulation Vi min - Vi max, Io nom typ. ±0.3%Load regulation Vi nom, 0 - Io nom typ. 0.3%Minimum load not required 0 ACurrent limitation rectangular U/I characteristic typ. 110% Io nom

Operation in parallel by current limitation

ProtectionInput reverse polarity with external fuseInput undervoltage lockout typ. 80% Vi min

Input transient protection suppressor diodeOutput no-load, overload and short circuit proofOutput overvoltage suppressor diode typ. 150% Vo nom

SafetyApprovals EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950Protection degree IP 20/40Electric strength test voltage I/case and O/case 500/750/1500 VDC

EMCElectrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2Electromagnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-3Electr. fast transients/bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-4Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5Conducted disturbances IEC/EN 61000-4-6Electromagnetic emissions CISPR 22/EN 55022

EnvironmentalOperating ambient temperature -2, Vi nom, Io nom, convection cooled –10 to 50 °COperating case temperature TC -2, Vi nom, Io nom –10 to 80 °CStorage temperature -2, non operational –25 to 100 °COperating ambient temperature -7, Vi nom, Io nom, convection cooled –25 to 71 °COperating case temperature TC -7, Vi nom, Io nom –25 to 95 °CStorage temperature -7, non operational –40 to 100 °CDamp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-3Vibration, sinusoidal IEC/EN 60068-2-6Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64MTBF MIL-HDBK-217

OptionsExtended temperature range –40 - 71°C, ambient, operating -9Inhibit, TTL input, output(s) enabled if left open iOutput voltage adjustment 0 - 108% Vo nom ROutput voltage adjustment ±8% Vo nom PSoldering pins 0.5 x 1.0 mm for PCB mounting Y





Projection

AccessoriesIsolation pads for easy and safe PCB mountingFilters and ring core chokes for ripple and interference reductionAdapter kits for DIN-rail and chassis mounting



5 (0.2")

Potentiometer(option P)

YellowLED output voltage indicator

6.3 (0.25")18.7 (0.74")

1.2 (0.04")

8.75

(0.

34")

65 (

2.56

")

47.5

(1.

87")

Measuring pointof case temperature

Vi+

Vo+

50.2 (2")

2.7 (0.1")

70.2

(2.

76")

6.5

(0.2

5")

25.2

(1"

)20.5 (0.8")

1.0 x 0.5 (0.04 x 0.02")

option Y

Go– i R

Gi–

S09015

2.8 x 0.5 (0.11 x 0.02")


PSB Series Data Sheet3 to 8 A Switching Regulators

MAR 25, 2004 revised to JUN 01, 2006 Page 1 of 3 www.power-one.com

Features• RoHS lead solder exemption compliant• Efficiency up to 96%• Low input-output differential voltage• No derating over temperature



Vo nom Io nom Vi Po tot η[VDC] [A] [VDC] [W] [%]

5.1 4 (5)1 15 - 144 25.5 80 PSB 5A4-7iR -9, L, P, C5.1 6 8 - 80 30.6 81 PSB 5A6-7iR -9, L, P, C5.1 7 7 - 40 35.7 84 PSB 5A7-7iR -9, L, P, C5.1 8 7 - 40 40.8 81 PSB 5A8-2 iR-Package

12 3 (4)1 18 - 144 48 89 PSB 123-7iR -9, L, P, C12 5 15 - 80 60 90 PSB 125-7iR -9, L, P, C12 6 15 - 40 72 90 PSB 126-2 iR-Package



36 3 (4)1 44 - 144 144 90 PSB 153-7iR -9, L, P, C36 5 42 - 80 180 92 PSB 155-7iR -9, L, P, C

48 3 (4)1 58 - 144 192 96 PSB 483-7iR -9, L, P, C1 For Vi ≤80V




InputInput voltage refer to selection chartNo load input current ≤50 mA




ProtectionInput reverse polarity with external fuse (built-in fuse with option C installed)Input undervoltage lockout typ. 80% Vi min

Input transient protection suppressor diodeOutput no-load, overload and short circuit proofOutput overvoltage suppressor diode in each output typ. 150% Vo nom

SafetyApprovals EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950Protection degree IP 20Electric strength test voltage I/case and O/case 500/750/1500 VDC


EnvironmentalOperating ambient temperature -2, Vi nom, Io nom, convection cooled –10 to 50°COperating case temperature TC -2, Vi nom, Io nom –10 to 80°CStorage temperature -2, non operational –25 to 100°COperating ambient temperature -7, Vi nom, Io nom, convection cooled –25 to 71°COperating case temperature TC -7, Vi nom, Io nom –25 to 95°CStorage temperature -7, non operational –40 to 100°CDamp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-3Vibration, sinusoidal IEC/EN 60068-2-6Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64MTBF MIL-HDBK-217

OptionsExtended temperature range –40 to 71°C, ambient, operating -9Inhibit, TTL input, output enabled if left open iOutput voltage adjustment 0 - 108% Vo nom RAdditional internal input filter LOutput voltage adjustment ±8% Vo nom PThyristor crowbar on output C




Mechanical dataTolerances ±0.3 mm (0.012") unless otherwise indicated.

101 (3.98") (for M3 mounting screws)

(32.

5 (1

.28"

)

V i+ Gi– Vo+Go–

iG R

106 (4.17")

32.2

(1.2

7")

69 (

2.72

")

36.5

(1.

44")

S09014


3.1

(0.1

2")

6 (0

.24"

)

2.8 x 0.8 (0.11 x 0.03")

6.3 x 0.8 (0.25 x 0.03")

5 (0.2")

AccessoriesIsolation pads for easy and safe PCB mountingRing core chokes for ripple and interference reduction

EuropeanProjection

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized foruse as critical components in life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear controlsystems without the express written consent of the respective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.



PSC Series Data Sheet6 to 12 A Switching Regulators

APR 05, 2004 revised to JUN 06, 2006 Page 1 of 3 www.power-one.com




Vo nom Io nom Vi Po tot htyp[VDC] [A] [VDC] [W] [%]

3.3 12 8 - 40 39.6 77 PSC 3E12-2 iR-Package

5.1 10 8 - 80 51 79 PSC 5A10-7iR -9, L, P, C, D5.1 11 8 - 40 56.1 79 PSC 5A11-2 iR-Package5.1 12 7 - 40 61.2 83 PSC 5A12-7iR -9, L, P, C, D

12 6 18 - 144 72 89 PSC 126-7iR -9, L, P, C, D12 8 15 - 80 96 90 PSC 128-7iR -9, L, P, C, D12 9 15 - 40 108 90 PSC 129-2 iR-Package



36 6 44 - 144 216 95 PSC 366-7iR -9, L, P, C, D36 8 42 - 80 288 96 PSC 368-7iR -9, L, P, C, D

48 6 58-144 288 97 PSC 486-7iR -9, L, P, C, D




InputInput voltage refer to selection chartNo load input current -50 mA





Input transient protection suppressor diodeOutput no-load, overload and short circuit proofOutput overvoltage suppressor diode typ. 150% Vo nom

SafetyApprovals EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950Protection degree IP 20Electric strength test voltage I/case and O/case 500/750/1500 V DC



OptionsExtended temperature range –40 to 71°C, (ambient) -9Inhibit, TTL input, output(s) enabled if left open iOutput voltage adjust 0 - 108% Vo nom ROutput voltage adjust potentiometer ±8% Vo nom PAdditional internal input filter LThyristor crowbar on output CInput/output undervoltage monitor D/D1




Mechanical dataTolerances ±0.3 mm (0.012") unless otherwise indicated.

Gi– Go– Vo+

i

Vi+ DUo

Ut

G R

7.5 27.518.5 11.3

40 7.5 10 7.5 10 (14)7.5

10 ±

2

4.3

min

. 8

5 ±0.5

144

12.5 ±1

43 ±

1(4

5)

88 ±

1

7 ±

2

151 ±1

32.2

±0.

5

2.8

x 0.

88.

1 ±

1

6.35

±1

6.3

x 0.

8

Distance between M4 mounting screws

Measuring pointof case temperature TC

Yellow LED outputvoltage indicator

Potentiometer(option P)

Potentiometer(option D)

09023

Uo

AccessoriesIsolation pads for easy and safe PCB mountingRing core chokes for ripple and interference reduction

EuropeanProjection




PSS, PSK Series Data Sheet9 - 25 A Switching Regulator

REV. FEB 09, 2006 Page 1 of 5 www.power-one.com

• RoHS lead solder exemption compliant• Efficiency up to 97%• Low input-output differential voltage• No derating over temperature


Selection chartOutput Input voltage Rated power Efficiency Type Options

Vo nom Io nom Vi Po tot htyp[VDC] [A] [VDC] [W] [%]

3.3 25 8 - 40 82.5 82 PSK 3E25-7 -9, E, P, B, B1

5.1 12 8 - 80 61.2 79 PSS 5A12-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B15.1 14 8 - 40 71.4 83 PSS 5A14-2 B, B15.1 16 8 - 80 81.6 79 PSK 5A16-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B15.1 18 8 - 40 91.8 82 PSK 5A18-2 B, B15.1 20 8 - 80 102 79 PSK 5A20-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B15.1 25 8 - 40 127.5 82 PSK 5A25-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B1

12 (15)1 9 18 - 144 108 (135) 91 PSS 129-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B112 (15)1 12 15 - 80 144 (180) 91 PSS 1212-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B112 (15)1 12 18 - 144 144 (180) 91 PSK 1212-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B112 (15)1 14 16 - 40 168 (210) 90 PSS 1214-2 B, B112 (15)1 16 15 - 80 192 (240) 90 PSK 1216-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B112 (15)1 18 16 - 40 216 (270) 90 PSK 1218-2 B, B112 (15)1 20 15 - 80 240 (300) 90 PSK 1220-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B1

24 9 31 - 144 216 94 PSS 249-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B124 12 29 - 80 288 94 PSS 2412-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B124 12 31 - 144 288 94 PSK 2412-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B124 14 29 - 60 336 94 PSS 2414-2 B, B124 16 29 - 80 384 94 PSK 2416-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B124 18 29 - 60 432 94 PSK 2418-2 B, B124 20 29 - 80 480 94 PSK 2420-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B1

36 9 44 - 144 324 96 PSS 369-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B136 12 42 - 80 432 96 PSS 3612-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B136 12 44 - 144 432 96 PSK 3612-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B136 16 42 - 80 576 95 PSK 3616-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B136 20 42 - 80 720 95 PSK 3620-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B1

48 9 58 - 144 432 97 PSS 489-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B148 12 58 - 144 576 97 PSK 4812-7 -9, E, P, C, B, B1

1 These converters (Vo nom = 12 V) can be adjusted to 15 V using the R-control input.




InputInput voltage refer to selection chartNo load input current ≤ 50 mA



Hold-up time Vi nom, Io nom, with ext. diode in input line, PSS up to 7 ms

ProtectionInput reverse polarity built-in fuseInput undervoltage lockout typ. 80% Vi min


Overtemperature switch-off with auto restart TC typ. 100°C

ControlInhibit TTL input, output enabled if left openR control min. adjustable output voltage 0 V

max. adjustable output voltage up to 125% Vo nom

Output voltage indication LED (except -2)Sense lines compensation for voltage drop across load lines, PSSTest sockets test sockets for check of output voltageOperation in parallel current sharing feature (CS)

SafetyApprovals EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950Protection degree units without options IP 20/30Electric strength test voltage I/case and O/case 500/750/1500 VDC






OptionsLarge and small cooling plate instead of standard heatsink B/B1Extended temperature range –40 to 71°C, ambient, operating -9Electronic inrush current limitation EOutput voltage adjustment ±8% Vo nom, excludes feature R and vice versa PThyristor crowbar on output C

AccessoriesFront panels 19" (Schroff/Intermas), 12 und 16 TEMating H15 or H15 S4 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on or press-fit terminalsConnector retention facilitiesAdapter kit for DIN-rail

Pin allocationElectrical Determination Type H15 Type H15 S4

Pin No. Ident. Pin No. Ident.Output voltage (positive) 4 Vo+

4/6 Vo+Output voltage (positive) 6 Vo+

Output voltage (negative) 8 Go–8/10 Go–

Output voltage (negative) 10 Go–

Crowbar trigger input (option C) 12 C 12 C

Inhibit input 14 i 14 i

R-input (output voltage programming) 1 16 R 16 R

Sense line (negative) 18 S– 18 S–

Sense line (positive) 20 S+ 20 S+

Current sharing control input 22 CS 22 CS

Protective ground (leading pin) 24 24

Input voltage (negative) 26 Gi–26/28 Gi–

Input voltage (negative) 28 Gi–

Input voltage (positive) 30 Vi+30/32 Vi+

Input voltage (positive) 32 Vi+




32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

Connector type H15

S10010

30 26 22 18 14 10 6

Connector type H15 S4

S10010

32/30 24 20 16 12 4/6

26/28 22 18 14 10/8

H15 S4 connectors for 20 and 25 A types


Projection

159 (6.25") 4.5 (0.18")

89 (

3.50

")

111

(3U

) (4

.37"

)

168.5 (6.63")

80 (3.15")

6.5

(0.2

6")

7 TE 9 TE


171.93 (6.77") (DIN 41494)50 (1.97")

S09029

Potentiometer(option P)Test sockets

LED OK

PSK

Pin allocation




111

(3U

) 4.

37")

168.5 (6.63")


60 (2.36")

7 TE 5 TE

25.9

(1

.02"

)

171.93 (DIN 41494) (6.77")

11.8

(0.4

6")

152 (5.98")

100

(3.9

3")

M4

S09028

Potentiometer(option P)Test sockets

LED OK

PSS

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not authorized for use as criticalcomponents in life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systemswithout the express written consent of the respective divisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured onlabels, may change depending on the date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.


PSL Series Data Sheet6 to 12 A Switching Regulators



Input voltage up to 144 V DCSingle output of 5.1 to 48 V DCNo input-to-output isolation


Vo nom Io nom Vi Po tot htyp[V DC] [A] [V DC] [W] [%]

5.1 10 8 - 80 51 79 PSL 5A10-7R5.1 11 8 - 40 56.1 79 PSL 5A11-2R5.1 12 7 - 40 61.2 83 PSL 5A12-7R

12 6 18 - 144 72 89 PSL 126-7R12 8 15 - 80 96 90 PSL 128-7R12 9 15 - 40 108 90 PSL 129-2R

15 6 22 - 144 90 90 PSL 156-7R -9, L, i, P, C, D15 8 19 - 80 120 91 PSL 158-7R D1, A15 9 19 - 40 135 91 PSL 159-2R

24 6 31 - 144 144 94 PSL 246-7R24 8 29 - 80 192 94 PSL 248-7R24 9 29 - 60 216 94 PSL 249-2R

36 6 44 - 144 216 96 PSL 366-7R36 8 42 - 80 288 96 PSL 368-7R

48 6 58 - 144 288 97 PSL 486-7R




InputInput voltage refer to selection chartNo load input current -50 mA






SafetyApprovals EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950Protection degree IP 20Electric strength test voltage I/case and O/case 500/750/1500 V DC






Pin allocationPin Electrical determination Design.2 R-input (or inhibit input) R (i)

5 Undervoltage monitor (Option D) D

8 Output voltage (negative) Go–

11 Output voltage (negative) Go–

14 Output voltage (positive) Vo+

17 Output voltage (positive) Vo+

20 Input voltage (negative) Gi–

23 Input voltage (negative) Gi–

26 Input voltage (positive) Vi+

29 Input voltage (positive) Vi+

32 Protective ground (leading pin)

OptionsExtended temperature range –40 - 71°C, ambient, operating -9Inhibit, TTL input, output(s) enabled if left open iOutput voltage adjustment 0 - 108% Vo nom RAdditional internal input filter LOutput voltage adjustment ±8% Vo nom PThyristor crowbar on output CInput or output undervoltage monitoring D/D1Test sockets for check of output voltage A

S10007

32 29 26 23 20 17 14 11 8 5 2




Mechanical dataThe regulators are designed to be inserted into 19" rack according to IEC60297-3.Dimensions in mm.

AccessoriesIsolation pads for easy and safe PCB mounting.Ring core chokes for ripple and interference reduction.

127 (5")

168.5 (6.63")

173.7 (6.83")

100

(3.9

4")

Measuring point of case temperature TC

M3, 4 mm deep (for mounting screws)

107

(4.2

1")

36.5

(1.4

4")

20 (0.79")

S09027

EuropeanProjection




®

Q Series Data Sheet66 - 132 Watt DC-DC Converter


Features• RoHS lead-free-solder and lead-solder-exempted

products are available• Wide input voltage ranges up to 150 VDC• 1 or 2 isolated outputs from 3.3 to 48 VDC• Class I equipment• Extremely high efficiency of up to 90%• Flexible output power• Excellent surge and transient protection• Outputs open- and short-circuit proof• Redundant operation, current sharing• Extremely low inrush current, hot swappable• Externally adjustable output voltage and inhibit• Electric strength test 2.1 kVDC• Very compact (<20 mm wide)• Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1• Telecoms-compatible input voltage range of 48Q

models according to ETS 300132-2 (38.4 – 75 VDC)

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1, UL/CSA 60950-1

DescriptionThese extremely compact DC-DC converters incorporate allnecessary input and output filtering, signaling, and protectionfeatures, which are required in the majority of applications.The converters provide important advantages such as flexibleoutput power through primary current limitation, highefficiency, excellent reliability, very low ripple and RFI noiselevels, full input to output isolation, negligible inrush current,overtemperature protection, and input over-/undervoltagelockout. The converter inputs are protected against surgesand transients occurring on the source lines. They areparticularly suitable for rugged environment, such as railwayapplications, and they have been designed in accordance withthe European railway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121.

The outputs are continuously open- and short-circuit proof. Anisolated output Power Good signal and LEDs at the front panelindicate the status of the converter. Test sockets at the frontpanel allow for a check of the main output voltage.

1646.5"

200.8"4 TE

1114.4"3 U

Full system flexibility and n+1 redundant operating mode arepossible due to virtually unrestricted series or parallelconnection capabilities of all outputs. In parallel connection ofseveral converters, automatic current sharing is provided by asingle-wire interconnection.

As a modular power supply or as part of a distributed powersupply system, the extremely low profile design significantlyreduces the necessary power supply volume withoutsacrificing high reliability. A temperature sensor disables theoutputs, if the case temperature exceeds the limit. The outputsare automatically re-enabled, when the temperature dropsbelow the limit.

The fully enclosed, black-coated aluminum case acts as a heatsink and an RFI shield. The converters are designed for 19"DIN-rack systems occupying 3U/4TE only, but can also bechassis-mounted by means of four M3 screws. It is possible tofit an additional heat sink.


Description .......................................................................... 1Model Selection .................................................................. 2Functional Description ........................................................ 5Electrical Input Data ............................................................ 6Electrical Output Data ......................................................... 8Auxiliary Functions ............................................................ 16Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................... 19

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ............................. 21Mechanical Data ............................................................... 22Safety and Installation Instructions ................................... 23Description of Options ...................................................... 26Accessories ....................................................................... 27EC Declaration of Conformity ........................................... 28


®



Model SelectionTable 1a: Model types BQ, GQ

Output 1 Output 2 Output power 1 Operating input voltage range, efficiency Options

Vo nom Io nom Io max Vo nom Io nom Io max TA = 71 °C TA = 50 °C Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin 2 Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin 2

[VDC] [A] [A] [VDC] [A] [A] Po nom [W] Po max [W] 14.4 – 36 VDC [%] 21.6 – 54 VDC [%]

3.3 20* 25* - - - 66* 82* BQ1101-9 81* GQ1101-9 -7, B1, G5.1 16 20 - - - 82 102 BQ1001-9R 85 GQ1001-9R 85.5 -7, P, B1, G12 3 8 10 - - - 96 120 BQ2320-9R 86 GQ2320-9R 86 -7, P, B1, G15 3 6.6 8 - - - 99 120 BQ2540-9R 87 GQ2540-9R 86.5 -7, P, B1, G24 3 4.4 5.5 - - - 106 132 BQ2660-9R 88 GQ2660-9R 88 -7, P, B1, G

5.1 4 7.5 15 5.1 4 7.5 15 77 97 BQ2001-9R 85 GQ2001-9R 85.5 -7, B1, G12 4 4 9.2 12 4 4 9.2 96 120 BQ2320-9R 86 GQ2320-9R 86 -7, P, B1, G15 4 3.3 7.4 15 4 3.3 7.4 99 120 BQ2540-9R 87 GQ2540-9R 86.5 -7, P, B1, G24 4 2.2 5.1 24 4 2.2 5.1 106 132 BQ2660-9R 88 GQ2660-9R 88 -7, P, B1, G

Table 1c: Model types DQ, EQ



[VDC] [A] [A] [VDC] [A] [A] Po nom [W] Po max [W] 43 – 108 VDC [%] 65 – 150 5 VDC [%]

3.3 20* 25* - - - 66* 82* DQ1101-9 82* EQ1101-9 -7, B1, G5.1 16 20 - - - 82 102 DQ1001-9R 85.5 EQ1001-9R 84.5 -7, P, B1, G

12.0 3 8 10 - - - 96 120 DQ2320-9R 88 EQ2320-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G15.0 3 6.6 8 - - - 99 120 DQ2540-9R 88 EQ2540-9R 87.5 -7, P, B1, G24.0 3 4.4 5.5 - - - 106 132 DQ2660-9R 88 EQ2660-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G

5.1 4 7.5 15 5.1 4 7.5 15 77 97 DQ2001-9R 85 EQ2001-9R 84 -7, B1, G12.0 4 4 9.2 12.0 4 4 9.2 96 120 DQ2320-9R 88 EQ2320-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G15.0 4 3.3 7.4 15.0 4 3.3 7.4 99 120 DQ2540-9R 88 EQ2540-9R 87.5 -7, P, B1, G24.0 4 2.2 5.1 24.0 4 2.2 5.1 106 132 DQ2660-9R 88 EQ2660-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G

* Converters with version V104 or higher.1 The cumulated power of both outputs can not exceed the total power for the specified ambient temperature. See also Output Power at

Reduced Temperature.2 Minimum efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom and TA = 25 °C; typ. values are 2% better.3 Double-output models with both outputs connected in parallel4 Double-output models. Output 2 is a tracking output isolated from the output 1.5 168 V for ≤ 2 s.

Table 1b: Model types CQ, 48Q



[VDC] [A] [A] [VDC] [A] [A] Po nom [W] Po max [W] 33.6* – 75 VDC [%] 38.4 – 75 VDC [%]

3.3 20* 25* - - - 66* 82* CQ1101-9 82* -7, B1, G5.1 16 20 - - - 82 102 CQ1001-9R 85 -7, P, B1, G5.1 16 16 - - - 82 82 48Q1001-2R 83 B1, G

12.0 3 8 10 - - - 96 120 CQ2320-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G12.0 3 8 8 - - - 96 96 48Q2320-2R 85 B1, G15.0 3 6.6 8 - - - 99 120 CQ2540-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G15.0 3 6.6 6.6 - - - 99 99 48Q2540-2R 85 B1, G24.0 3 4.4 5.5 - - - 106 132 CQ2660-9R 88 -7, P, B1, G24.0 3 4.4 4.4 - - - 106 106 48Q2660-2R 87 B1, G

5.1 4 7.5 15 5.1 4 7.5 15 77 97 CQ2001-9R 85 -7, B1, G12.0 4 4 9.2 12.0 4 4 9.2 96 120 CQ2320-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G12.0 4 4 7.2 12.0 4 4 7.2 96 96 48Q2320-2R 85 B1, G15.0 4 3.3 7.4 15.0 4 3.3 7.4 99 120 CQ2540-9R 87 -7, P, B1, G15.0 4 3.3 6 15.0 4 3.3 6 99 99 48Q2540-2R 85 B1, G24.0 4 2.2 5.1 24.0 4 2.2 5.1 106 132 CQ2660-9R 88 -7, P, B1, G24.0 4 2.2 4 24.0 4 2.2 4 106 106 48Q2660-2R 87 B1, G


®



Part Number DescriptionInput voltage range Vi:

14.4 – 36 V ....................................................... B21.6 – 54 V ....................................................... G33.6 – 75 V ........................................................ C38.4 – 75 V ..................................................... 4843 – 108 V ......................................................... D65 – 150 V ......................................................... E

Series ................................................................................... Q

Number of outputs:Single-output models ......................................... 1Double-output models ........................................ 2Single-output models (long case)1 ..................... 6Double-output models (long case)1 .................... 7

Single-output models:Nominal output voltage (main output):3.3 V ................................................................... 15.1 V ................................................................... 012 V .................................................................... 315 V .................................................................... 524 V ................................................................ 6, 7Other voltages1 .......................................... 7, 8, 9Other specifications or additional features for single-output models1 ...... 01 – 99

Double-output models:Nominal voltage of 2nd output Vo2 nom5.1 V ........................................................ 01 – 0912 V ......................................................... 20 – 3915 V ......................................................... 40 – 5924 V ......................................................... 60 – 79Other voltages or additional features1 ................................................................... 01 – 99

Operational ambient temperature range TA:–10 to 50 °C ..................................................... -2–25 to 71 °C ..................................................... -7–40 to 71 °C ..................................................... -9other ....................................................... -0, -5, -6

Output voltage control input (auxiliary function) 2 ................ RPotentiometer (option) 2 ....................................................... PAdditional heatsinks ........................................................... B1RoHS compliant for all six substances .............................. G3

1 Customer-specific models2 Option P excludes feature R and vice versa3 G is always placed at the end of the part number. Consult Power-One for availability!

C Q 2 5 40 -9 P

Example: CQ2540-9P: DC-DC converter, input voltage range 33.6 – 75 V, double-output model, each output providing 15 V/3.3 A, equipped with potentiometer to adjust the output voltages, operating ambient temperature TA = –40 to 71 °C.

Note: All models have the following auxiliary functions, which are not shown in the type designation: input and output filter, inhibit, sense lines,current sharing, Out OK signal, LED indicators, and test sockets (not 48Q models).

Note: 48Q models are designed according to Telecom standards ETS 300132-2 and EN 41003. Vi min is 38.4 V such limiting the input currentI i to 150% of I i nom.


®



Output ConfigurationThe Q Series design allows different output configurations tocover almost every individual requirement, by simply wiring theoutputs in parallel, series, or symmetrical configuration as perthe following figures. For further information and for paralleland series operation of several converters see ElectricalOutput Data.

Fig. 4Symmetrical output configuration (with common ground)

Fig. 2Parallel output configuration

Fig. 1Single output configuration

Fig. 3Series output configuration

Fig. 5Independent output configuration

Load

Vo–

Vo–

S–

Vo+

Vo+

S+

Single-outputmodel

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

4

6

12

14

8

10

01001a

Load

Vo2–

Vo1–

S–

Vo1+

Vo2+

S+

Double-outputmodel

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

6

4

12

14

8

10

01002a

Load

Vo1–

S–

S+

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1+

Double-outputmodel

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

6

10

4

12

14

8

01003a

Load 1

Load 2Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo1+

Double-outputmodel

Vi–

Vi+

i28

30

32

4

12

14

8

6

10

01005a

Vo+

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo1+

Double-outputmodel

Vi–

Vi+

iLoad 1

Load 2

GND

Vo–

28

30

32

4

12

14

8

6

10

01004a

Product MarkingType designation, applicable safety approval and recognitionmarks, CE mark, warnings, pin allocation, Power-One patents,and company logo.

Identification of LEDs, test sockets, and potentiometer.

Input voltage range and input current, nominal output voltagesand currents, degree of protection, batch no., serial no., anddata code including production site, version (modificationstatus), and date of production.


®



Functional DescriptionThe converters are designed as forward converters usingprimary and secondary control circuits in SMD technology. Theswitching frequency is approximately 200 kHz under nominaloperating conditions. The built-in high-efficient input filtertogether with a small input capacitance generate very lowinrush currents of short duration. After transformer isolationand rectification, the output filter reduces ripple and noise to aminimum without compromising the dynamic ability. Theoutput voltage is fed to the secondary control circuit viaseparate sense lines. The resultant error signal is sent to theprimary control circuit via a signal transformer.

Double-output models have the voltage regulation of output 2relying on the close magnetic coupling of the transformer andthe output inductor together with the circuits' symmetry.

The current limitation is located at the primary side, thuslimiting the total output current in overload conditions. Thisallows flexible loading of each output for unsymmetrical loadsin the range 10 to 90% of the total output power. In applicationswith large dynamic load changes, we recommend connectingsuch a load to output 1. If output 2 is not used, it should beconnected parallel to output 2. Both outputs can either beseries- or parallel-connected (see Electrical Output Data).

In normal operation, the internal control circuits are poweredby a third winding of the main choke (except 48Q models).Startup is ensured from the input voltage by a linear regulator.

Note: When the output voltage is much lower then the nominalvalue, this linear regulator is activated, generating considerablepower losses.

Fig. 6Block diagram of a single-output converter

Fig. 7Block diagram of a double-output converter

28

30

32

26

Vi–

i

Vi+

Primarycontrol circuit

Outputcontrol

Outputfilter

IsolationCyCy

20

24

22

18

16

14

12

4

6

8

10

Outputmonitor

Out OK+

Out OK–

T

R3

S–1

S+1

Vo+

Vo+

Vo–

Vo–

Inputfilter

03111a

1

1 Leading pins 2 Potentiometer for option P 3 Do not connect for models xQ1101 or with option P 4 Do not connect

Fuse

2

4

28

30

32

26

Vi–

i

Vi+

Outputcontrol

Primarycontrol circuit

Outputfilter

Outputfilter

Isolation Cy

Cy

20

24

22

18

16

6

10

12

4

8

14

Outputmonitor Vo2

Out OK+

Out OK–

T

Vo2+

Vo2–

S+1

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–1

Inputfilter

03112a

Fuse

1 Leading pins 2 Potentiometer for option P 3 Do not connect for models with option P 4 Do not connect

R3

1

4

2


®




Input 48Q 2 DQ EQ Unit


V i Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io max 38.4 75 43 108 65 150 V

for ≤2 s TC min – TC max n.a. n.a. 65 168

for ≤100 ms n.a. 36 115 55 176

V i nom Nominal input voltage 48 72 110

V i abs Input voltage limits without damage 0 100 0 125 0 200

Ii Typical input current 1 Vi nom, Io nom 2.2 1.5 1.0 A

P i 0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max 2.5 5.5 5.0 W

P i inh Idle input power4 Io = 0 1.5 3.5 3.5

Iinr p Peak inrush current 2 Vi nom, Io nom 35 20 45 A

tinr r Rise time inrush 35 50 15 ms

tinr h Time to half value 80 90 25

td on Start-up time3 0 →Vi min, Io nom 8 20* 20*

* Models with version V104 or higher1 Typical input current depends on model type2 According to ETS 300132-23 See fig. 194 Converter inhibited

Electrical Input DataGeneral Conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Sense lines connected directly at the connector, inhibit (28) connected to Vi– (32).– R input not connected; with option P, Vo set to Vo nom at Vi nom.


Input BQ GQ CQ Unit


V i Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io max 14.4 36 21.6 54 33.6 75 V

V i nom Nominal input voltage TC min – TC max 24 36 48

V i abs Input voltage limits without damage 0 50 0 63 0 100

Ii Typical input current 1 Vi nom, Io nom 4.5 3.0 2.2 A

P i 0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max 2.5 3.0 2.5 W

P i inh Idle input power 4 Io = 0 1.0 1.5 1.5

Iinr p Peak inrush current2 Vi nom, Io nom 55 40 35 A

tinr r Rise time inrush 50 40 35 ms

tinr h Time to half value 130 110 80

td on Start-up time3 0 → Vi min, Io nom 5 5 8


®



Input Transient ProtectionA metal oxide VDR (Voltage Dependent Resistor) together withthe input fuse and a symmetrical input filter form an effectiveprotection against high input transient voltages, which typicallyoccur in most installations, especially in battery-driven mobileapplications.

Nominal battery voltages in use are: 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 96,and 110 V. In most cases each nominal value is specifiedin a tolerance band of –30% to +25%, with shortexcursions to ±40% or even more.

In some applications, surges according to RIA 12 arespecified in addition to those defined in IEC 60571-1 orEN 50155. The power supply must not switch off duringthese surges and since their energy can practically not beabsorbed, an extremely wide input voltage range isrequired. The Q Series input range has been designedand tested to meet most of these requirements. See alsoElectromagnetic Immunity.

Input Under-/Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage remains below approx. 0.9 Vi min or exceedsapprox. 1.1 Vi max, an internally generated inhibit signaldisables the output(s).

Inrush CurrentThe inherent inrush current value is lower than specified in thestandard ETS 300132-2. The converters operate withrelatively small input capacitance resulting in low inrushcurrent of short duration. As a result, in a power-bus systemthe converters can be hot plugged-in or disconnected causingnegligible disturbance.

Vi+

Vi–

Vo+

Vo–

+

Lext Rext

Ci Ri

JM001

Cext

Load

Fig. 8Input configuration

Input Stability with Long Supply LinesIf a Q Series converter is connected to the power source withlong input lines exhibiting a considerable inductance, anadditional external capacitor connected in parallel to the inputimproves stability and avoids oscillations.

Actually, a Q Series converter with nominal load acts like anegative resistor, as the input current rises when the inputvoltage decreases. It tends to oscillate with a resonantfrequency determined by the line inductance Lex t and the inputcapacitance Ci + Cext and damped by the resistors Ri + Rext.The whole system is not linear at all and eludes to a simplecalculation. One basic condition is given by the formula:

Rext << — Vin²—

Po— • η

Rext is the series resistor of the source voltage including inputlines. If this condition is not fulfilled, the converter cannot reachstable operating conditions. The situation is worst with lowinput voltage Vi and high output power Po.

Low inductance Lext of the input lines and a parallel connectedinput capacitor Cext are helpful. Recommended values for Cextare given in table 4, which should allow stable operation up toan input inductance of 2 mH.

Input FuseAn incorporated fuse in series to the negative input lineprotects against severe defects. The fuse is not externallyaccessible. Reverse polarity at the input will cause the fuse toblow.

Table 3: Fuse specifications

Model Fuse type Reference and rating

BQ very fast-blow 2× Littelfuse 251, 10 A, 125 V

GQ very fast-blow 2× Littelfuse 251, 7 A, 125 V

CQ very fast-blow Littelfuse 251, 10 A, 125 V

48Q very fast-blow Littelfuse 251, 10 A, 125 V

DQ very fast-blow Littelfuse 251, 7 A, 125 V

EQ very fast-blow Littelfuse 263, 5 A, 250 V

Table 4: Recommended values for Cext

Model Capacitance Voltage

BQ 680 µF 40 V

GQ 470 µF 63 V

CQ 470 µF 100 V

48Q 470 µF 100 V

DQ 150 µF 125 V

EQ 68 µF 200 V


®



Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Sense lines connected directly at the connector, inhibit (28) connected to Vi– (32).– R input not connected; with option P, Vo set to Vo nom at Vi nom.

Table 5a: Output data for single-output models and double-output models with both outputs in parallel configuration

Output BQ – GQ1101 48Q / BQ – GQ1001 48Q / BQ – GQ2320 Unit3.3 V 5.1 V 12 V


Vo1 Setting voltage of 1st output Vi nom, Io nom 3.28 3.32 5.07 5.13 11.94 12.06 V

Vow Worstcase output voltage Vi min – Vi max 3.24 3.35 5.02 5.18 11.82 12.18

Vo P Overvoltage limitation TC min – TC max 4.5 4.9 5.9 6.4 13.5 15.0by 2nd control loop Io = 0 – Io max

Io Output current 2 Vi min – Vi max 0.05 25* 0 16/20 3 0 8.0/10 3 A

Io nom Nominal output current TC min – TC max 20* 16 8.0

IoL Output current limit 2 26* 32.5* 16.8/213 20.8/263 8.4/10.53 10.4/12.53

vo 4 Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io nom 15 25 10 20 10 20 mVppvoltage noise Total incl.spikes BW = 20 MHz 25 50 20 50 20 40

Po max Output power 1 Vi min – Vi max 82 82/1023 96/120 3 WTC min – TC max

vo d 4 Dynamic Voltage deviation Vi nom ±300 ±250 ±350 mVload Io nom ↔ 1/2 Io nom

td 4 5 regulation Recovery time 800 800 800 µs

Vo os Dynamic line regulation 0 ↔ Vi max 0.5 0.5 0.8 V(output overshoot) 0 – Io max

Output via R-input 1 1.1•Vi min – Vi max n.a. 4.0 5.6 7.2 13.2voltage 0.1•Io nom – Io nomtrim range using opt. P 1 TC min – TC max n.a 4.6 5.6 10.8 13.2

* Converters with version V104 or higher.1 If the output voltage is increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting or remote sensing, the output power should be

reduced accordingly, so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.2 See Output Power at Reduced Temperature.3 Values for 48Q / BQ – GQ4 According to IEC/EN 612045 Recovery time see Dynamic load regulation.


®



Table 5b: Output data for double-output models with both outputs in parallel configuration. General conditions as per table 5a

Output 48Q /BQ – GQ2540 48Q /BQ – GQ2660 Unit15 V 24 V


Vo1 Setting voltage of 1st output Vi nom, Io nom 14.93 15.08 23.88 24.12 V

Vow Worstcase output voltage Vi min – Vi max 14.78 15.23 23.64 24.36

Vo P Overvoltage limitation TC min – TC max 17 19 27.5 30of second control loop Io = 0 – Io max

Io Output current 2 Vi min – Vi max 0 6.6/8.0 3 0 4.4/5.5 3 A

Io nom Nominal output current TC min – TC max 6.6 4.4

IoL Output current limit 2 6.9/8.4 3 8.6/10.4 3 4.6/5.75 3 6.2/8.0 3

vo 4 Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io nom 10 25 10 25 mVppvoltage noise Total incl. spikes BW = 20 MHz 20 40 20 40

Po max Output power 1 Vi min – Vi max 99/120 3 106/132 3 WTC min – TC max

vo d 4 Dynamic Voltage deviation Vi nom ±350 ±600 mVload Io nom ↔ 1/2 Io nom

td 4 5 regulation Recovery time 700 800 µs

Vo os Dynamic line regulation 0 ↔ Vi max 0.8 1.2 V(output overshoot) 0 – Io max

Vo tr Output via R-input 1.1•Vi min – Vi max 9.0 16.5 14.46 26.4voltage 0.1•Io nom – Io nomtrim range using opt. P 1 TC min – TC max 13.5 16.5 21.6 26.4

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting or remote sensing, the output power should bereduced accordingly so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.

2 See Output Power at Reduced Temperature.3 Values for 48Q /BQ – GQ4 According to IEC/EN 612045 Recovery time until Vo remains within ±1% of Vo, see Dynamic load regulation.6 For DQ2660 and EQ2660: 16.8 V


®



Table 6a: Output data for double-output models with output 1 and output 2 in symmetrical or independent configuration.General conditions as per table 5a.

Output 48Q /BQ – GQ2320 48Q /BQ – GQ2540 Unit 12 V /12 V 15 V /15 V

Characteristics Conditions Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo Output setting voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 11.94 12.06 11.88 12.12 14.93 15.08 14.85 15.15 V

Vow Worstcase output Vi min – Vi max 11.82 12.18 see Output 14.78 15.23 see Outputvoltage TC min – TC max Voltage Regulation Voltage Regulation

Vo P Overvoltage limitation Io = 0 – Io max n.a. 13.5 15 n.a. 17 19of second control loop

Io Output current 2 Vi min – Vi max 0.8 7.2/9.2 3 0.8 7.2/9.2 3 0.6 6.0/7.4 3 0.6 6.0/7.4 3 A

Io nom Nominal output current TC min – TC max 4.0 4.0 3.3 3.3

Io L Output current limit 2 8.4/10.5 3 10.4/13 3 8.4/10.5 3 10.4/13 3 6.9/8.4 3 8.6/10.4 3 6.9/8.4 3 8.6/10.4 3

vo 4 Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io nom 10 20 10 20 10 25 10 25 mVppvoltage BW = 20 MHznoise Total incl. spikes 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40

Po max Output power total1 Vi min – Vi max 96 /120 3 99/120 3 WTC min – TC max

vo d 4 Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±300 ±500 ±300 ±500 mVload deviation Io nom ↔ 1/2 Io nom

td 4 5 regulation Recovery Io2 = 1/2 Io nom 200 200 µstime

Output via R-input 1.1•Vi min - Vi max 7.2 13.2 see Output 9.0 16.5 see Output Vvoltage 0.1• Io nom – Io nom Voltage Regulation Voltage Regulationtrim range using opt. P TC min – TC max 10.8 13.2 13.5 16.5

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting, or remote sensing, the output power should bereduced accordingly so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.

2 See Output Power at Reduced Temperature.3 Values for 48Q /BQ – GQ4 According to IEC/EN 612045 Recovery time until Vo remains within ±1% of Vo, see Dynamic load regulation.6 Io nom = Io1 + Io2


®



Table 6b: Output data for double-output models with output 1 and output 2 in symmetrical or independent configuration.General conditions as per table 5a

Output 48Q2660 BQ – GQ2660 Unit24 V /24 V 24 V /24 V

Characteristics Conditions Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo Output setting voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 23.88 24.12 23.76 24.24 23.88 24.12 23.76 24.24 V

Vow Worstcase output Vi min – Vi max 23.64 24.36 see Output 23.64 24.36 see Outputvoltage TC min – TC max Voltage Regulation Voltage Regulation

Vo P Overvoltage limitation Io = 0 – Io max n.a. 27.5 30 n.a. 27.5 30of second control loop

Io Output current 2 Vi min – Vi max 0.4 4.0 0.4 4.0 0.4 5.1 0.4 5.1 A

Io nom Nominal output current TC min – TC max 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2

Io L Output current limit 2 4.6 6.2 4.6 6.2 5.8 8.0 5.8 8.0

vo 4 Output Switch. frequ. Vi nom, Io nom 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 mVppvoltage BW = 20 MHznoise Total incl. spikes 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40

Po max Output power total 1 Vi min – Vi max 106 132 WTC min – TC max

vo d 4 Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±400 ±500 ±400 ±500 mVload deviation Io nom ↔ 1/2 Io nom

td 4 5 regulation Recovery Io2 = 1/2 Io nom 400 400 µstime

Output via R-input 1.1•Vi min - Vi max 14.4 26.4 see Output 14.4 3 26.4 see Output Vvoltage 0.1•Io nom – Io nom Voltage Regulation Voltage Regulationtrim range using opt. P TC min – TC max n.a. 21.6 26.4

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting or remote sensing, the output power should bereduced accordingly so that Po max and TC max are not exceeded.

2 See: Output Power at Reduced Temperature.3 For DQ2660 and EQ2660: 16.8 V.4 According to IEC/EN 612045 Recovery time until Vo remains within ±1% of Vo, see Dynamic load regulation.


®



Parallel and Series ConnectionSingle- or double-output models with equal output voltage canbe connected in parallel without any precaution by inter-connecting the T-pins for equal current sharing; see fig. 9a.

Double-output models with their outputs connected in parallelbehave exactly like single-output models, and are fullyregulated. There is no inconvenience or restriction using R-input sense lines.

Single-output and/or double-output models can be connectedin series. For double-output models with both outputsconnected in series, consider that the effect via sense lines, R-input or option P is doubled. See fig. 9b.

Parallel configuration of double-output models with bothoutputs connected in series is shown in fig. 9c. It is essentialthat the Vo1– pins of all paralleled converters are connectedtogether, as the auxiliary signals are referenced to Vo1– or toS–. The effect via sense lines, R-input or option P is doubled.

Notes:• If the second output of double-output models is not used,connect it in parallel to the main output to maintain good regulation.

• Parallel connection of several double-output models shouldalways include main and second output to produce good regulation.

• Series connection of second outputs without involving their mainoutputs should be avoided as regulation may be poor.

• The maximum output current is limited by the output with thelowest current limit, if several outputs are connected in series.

• Rated output voltages above 48 V (SELV = Safety Extra LowVoltage) need additional measures in order to comply withinternational safety requirements.

Fig. 9bSeries connection of double-output models.

Fig. 9aParallel connection of single- and double-output models.

Vo+/Vo2+

Vo–/Vo1–

Vo–/Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo+/Vo1+

T

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

Vo+/Vo2+

Vo–/Vo1–

Vo–/Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo+/Vo1+

T

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

+

i+–

Rp

05091a

Load

Load

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S–

S+

Vo2+

Doubleoutput

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

+

i+–

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S–

S+

Vo2+

Doubleoutput

Rp

06114a

T

T

R

R

Fig. 9cParallel connection of double-output models with series-connected outputs.

Load

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S–

S+

Vo2+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK –

Out OK+

+

i+–

Vo1+

Vo2–

Vo1–

S–

S+

Vo2+

Rp

05092a


®



Redundant ConfigurationFig. 10a shows a circuit with ORing diodes DR in the positiveoutput lines, forming a redundant configuration. For accurateoutput voltage regulation, the sense lines are connected afterthe ORing diodes. The T pins should be connected together to

Fig. 10bRedundant configuration of double-output models withparallel-connected outputs.

Fig. 10aSimple redundant configuration of double-output models withparallel-connected outputs.

Load

0

Vo+/Vo2+

Vo–/Vo1–

Vo–/Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo+/Vo1+

T

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK–

Out OK+

Vo+/Vo2+

Vo–/Vo1–

Vo–/Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo+/Vo1+

T

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK–

Out OK+

+

i+–

Rp

06097b

DS

DR

RS

DR

DS

RS

Load

1Lo

ad 2

Load

Vo+/Vo2+

Vo–/Vo1–

Vo–/Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo+/Vo1+

T

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK–

Out OK+

Vo+/Vo2+

Vo–/Vo1–

Vo–/Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo+/Vo1+

T

Vi–

Vi+

i

Out OK–

Out OK+

+

i+–

Rp

05091b

DR

DR

produce reasonable current sharing between the parallel-connected converters.

If one of the converters fails, the remaining converters candeliver the whole output power.

Note: The current-share logic can only increase the output voltagemarginally and remains functional even in the case of a failingconverter.

Fig. 10b shows a quite similar circuit with ORing diodes DR, butwith different output loads. To compensate for the voltage dropof the ORing diodes (if necessary), an auxiliary circuit is addedto each power supply consisting of a small diode DS and asmall resistor RS. We recommend a current of approximately 10mA through DS and RS. Only Load 0 benefits from a securedsupply voltage.

The current sharing may be improved by interconnecting the Tpins of the converters. This circuit is a bit less accurate, butmore flexible and less sensitive.

Caution: Do not connect the sense lines after the ORing diodes,but directly with the respective outputs. If for some reason one ofthe converters switches off and the ORing diode is blocking, areverse voltage can appear between the sense pin and therespective output pin and damage the converter.

Output Voltage RegulationThe dynamic load regulation is shown in the figure below.

Fig. 11Deviation of Vo versus dynamic load change

Vod

Vod

td td

Vo ±1% Vo ±1%

t

t

≥ 10 µs ≥ 10 µs

Vo

0

0.5

1

Io/Io nom

05102c

The static load regulation measured at the sense pins isnegligible. Correct connection of the sense lines almosteliminates any load regulation; see Sense Lines.

In a symmetrical configuration the output 1 with open R input isregulated to Vo1 nom, regardless of the output currents. If theload on output 2 is too small (<10% of Io nom), its voltage will riseand may activate the overvoltage protection, which will thenreduce the voltage on both outputs.

Vo2 depends upon the load distribution: If each output is loadedwith at least 10% of Io nom, the deviation of Vo2 remains within±5% of Vo nom. The following figures explain the regulation withdifferent load distributions up to the current limit. If Io1 = Io2 orthe two outputs are connected in series, the deviation of Vo2remains within ±1% of the value of Vo nom, provided that theload is at least Io min.


®



Output Overvoltage ProtectionOutput voltage overshoot may occur, if the converter is eitherhot plugged-in or disconnected, the input voltage is switchedon or off, the converter is switched with an inhibit signal, or aftera reset of a short circuit and power failure. Output overvoltagecan also result due to incorrectly wired sense lines.

A fully independent output voltage monitor (second control

Fig. 12Double-output models with 12 V: Voltage deviation of Vo2versus Io2 for different currents on output 1

Vo1 + 0.5 V

Vo1

Vo1 – 0.5 V

2 4 6 8

Vo2 max = 14.2 V

0Io2 [A]

Vo2 [V]


10

05111a


Vo1 + 0.5 V

Vo1

Vo1 – 0.5 V

2 4 6 8

Vo2 max = 18 V

0Io2 [A]

Vo2 [V]


05112a


Vo1 + 1.0 V

Vo1

Vo1 – 1.0 V

Io2 [A]2 3 4 5

Vo2 max = 28 V

0 6

Vo2 [V]


1

05113a

Note: If output 2 is not used, we recommend to connect it inparallel to Vo1. This results in improved efficiency and stability.

loop) limits the voltage Vo or Vo2 to approximately 1.25 • Vo nom(in double-output models, the 2nd output is monitored). Thiscircuitry further protects the load in the unlikely event of amalfunction of the main control circuit.

There is no specific built-in protection against externallyapplied overvoltage.

Note: If output 2 is not loaded, the 2nd control loop mayreduce V01 under boundary conditions.

Output Current ProtectionAll outputs are fully protected against continuous open-circuitcondition or continuous short-circuit by an electronic currentlimitation located on the primary side.

Single-output models and series- or parallel-connecteddouble-output models have a quasi rectangular constantcurrent limitation characteristic.

In double-output models, only the total current is limited,allowing free choice of load distribution between the twooutputs, up to Io1 + Io2 ≤ Io max. However, a small current shouldremain on both outputs to guarantee good voltage regulation.In case of overload (Io1 + Io2 > Io max) both output voltages arereduced simultaneously.

1.00.95

0.5

0

Vo/Vo nom

Io

Io nom Io max

Ope

ratio

n at

red

uced

te

mpe

ratu

re o

nly

Io L05114c

Out

of s

pecs

.Fig. 15aBQ – GQ models: Current limitation of a single- or a double-output model with series-connected outputs

Fig. 15a48Q models: Current limitation of a single- or a double-outputmodel with series-connected outputs

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

00.2 0.4 1.0 1.2

0.2

0.6 0.8 1.4

Vo/Vo nom

0Io/Io nom

I o n

om

I o L

05104b

Out

of s

pecs

.


®



TA min 50 60 70 80 90 100

o

TA [°C]

forcedcooling

convectioncooling

TC max

05116Po max

Po nom

0.45 Po nom

Hold-up TimeThe Q Series converters provide virtually no hold-up time. Ifhold-up time is required, use external output capacitors ordecoupling diodes together with input capacitors of adequatesize.

Formula for additional external input capacitor: 2 • Po • th • 100

C i ext = ––––––––––––––– η • (V t i 2 – Vi min2)

where as:C i ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]η = efficiency [%]th = hold-up time [ms]Vi min = minimum input voltage [V]Vt i = threshold level [V]

Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is located upright in free flowing, quasi-stationaryair (convection cooling) at the indicated maximum ambienttemperature TA max (see table Temperature specifications), andis operated at its nominal input voltage and output power, thetemperature TC measured at the Measuring point of casetemperature (see Mechanical Data) will approach the indicatedvalue TC max after the warm-up phase. However, therelationship between TA and TC depends heavily on theconditions of operation and integration into a system. Thethermal conditions are influenced by input voltage, outputcurrent, airflow and temperature of surrounding componentsand surfaces. TA max is therefore, contrary to TC max, anindicative value only.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under all operatingconditions TC remains within the limits stated in the table:Temperature specifications.

Note: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sink improvesthe reliability or allows TA to be higher than TA max, as long as TC max

Fig. 17bOutput power derating versus TA for 48Q models

0

20

40

60

80

–10 30 40 50 60 70 80

Po nom [%]

TA [°C]

100

forcedcooling

convectioncooling

TC max

05110a

Fig. 17aOutput power derating versus TA for BQ – GQ models

Fig. 16Efficiency versus input voltage and output current (peroutput). Typical values of EQ2320 at Vo nom.

1 2 3 4 5

90

η [%]

Io [A]

Vi maxVi nomVi min

05115a

85

80

75

is not exceeded. In rack systems without proper thermalmanagement, the converters must not be packed too densely! Insuch cases the use of a 5 or 6TE front panel is recommended.

Thermal ProtectionA temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signal,which disables the outputs, if the case temperature exceedsTC max. The outputs are automatically re-enabled if thetemperature drops below this limit. This feature is not fitted to48Q models.

Output Power at Reduced TemperatureOperating BQ – GQ models with output current beyond Io nomrequires a reduction of the ambient temperature TA to 50 °C orforced cooling, in order to keep TC below 85 °C. If TC max isexceeded, the unit runs into its thermal protection and switchesoff (e.g. TA > 50 °C and Po > Po nom). See fig. 17a.

Fig. 17b shows the operation of 48Q models beyond TA = 50 °Cwith forced cooling.

Important: Short-term operation within the shaded area (e.g.start-up current, peak current) is possible without additionalmeasures, provided the case temperature remains below TC max.

Current distribution in overload is dependent upon the type ofoverload. A short-circuit in one output will cause the full currentflow into that output, whereas a resistive overload results inmore even distribution and in a reduced output voltage.

Efficiency


®



Auxiliary Functions

Inhibit for Remote On/OffNote: If this function is not used, the inhibit pin 28 must beconnected with pin 32 to enable the output(s). A non-connected pin 28 will be interpreted by the internal logic as anactive inhibit signal and the output(s) will remain disabled (failsafe function).

An inhibit input enables (logic low, pull down) or disables (logichigh, pull up) the output, if a logic signal, e.g. TTL, CMOS isapplied. In systems consisting of several converters, thisfeature may be used, for example, to control the activationsequence of the converters by means of logic signals, or toallow the power source for a proper start-up, before full load isapplied.



Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min – Vi max – 50 0.8 VDCvoltage Vo = off TC min – TC max 2.4 50

I inh Inhibit current Vinh = – 50 V –500 µAVinh = 0 V –40Vinh = 50 V +500

Fig. 18Definition of input and output parameters

Fig. 19Output response as a function of Vi (on/off switching) orinhibit control

The output response, when enabling and disabling the outputby the inhibit input, is shown in the following figure.

Current SharingThe current sharing facility should be used, where severalconverters are operated in parallel or redundant connection.This feature avoids that some converters are driven intocurrent limitation and thus produce excessive losses. As aresult, the stress of the converters is reduced, and the systemreliability is further improved.

Simple interconnection of the T pins causes the converters toshare the output current. The current tolerance of eachconverter is approx. ±20% of the sum of its nominal outputcurrents Io1 nom + Io2 nom.

In n+1 redundant systems, a failure of a single converter willnot lead to a system failure, if the outputs are decoupled bydiodes, see fig. 10.

Note: T function only increases the output voltage, until thecurrents are evenly shared. If in a redundant system, oneconverter fails, the remaining converters keep sharing theircurrents evenly.

Since the T pins are referenced to the pins S–, the S– pins ofall converters must have the same electrical potential.

Double-output converters with both outputs connected inseries can also be paralleled with current sharing, if pins Vo1–of all converters are connected together, see fig. 8c.

If the output voltages are programmed to a voltage other thanVo nom by means of the R pin or option P, the outputs should beadjusted individually within a tolerance of ±1%.

Important: For applications using the hot plug-in capabilities,dynamic output voltage changes during plug-in/plug-out must beconsidered.

Table 8: Output response times with outputs resistively loaded and R-input left open

Characteristics Conditions BQ 48Q CQ GQ DQ* EQ* Unit

t r Output voltage rise time Vi nom, RL = Vo nom/Io nom 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 ms(indicative values) Vi inh = 2.4 → 0.8 V

t f Output voltage fall time Vi nom, RL = Vo nom/Io nom 3.3 V 0.5Vi min (indicative values) Vi inh = 0.8 → 2.4 V 5 V 0.5 0.8 0.5

12 / 15 V 1 1 1 1.524 V 3 3 1.5 3 3 3

* Models with version V104 or higher

i

Vi–

Vi+

Vo–

S–

Vi

Io

Vo

Load

Ii

Iinh

Vinh

Vo–

Vo+

Vo+

S+28

30

32

2614

10

8

6

4

12

06091a

0

tr

Vi

t

t

t0.8

Vi min0

Vinh [V]

2.4

0.1

Vo/Vo nom tf

td on

0.991.01

06159a


®



Programmable Output Voltage (R-Function)This feature is not available on models with 3.3 V output or withoption P.

Note: Models with 3.3 V output or with option P: The R-input mustbe left open-circuit.

The converters offer a programmable output voltage. Theadjust is performed either by an external control voltage Vext oran external resistor R1 or R2, connected to the R-input.Trimming is limited to the values given in the table below (seealso Electrical Output Data). With open R-input, the outputvoltage is set to Vo nom.

With double-output models, both outputs are affected by theR-input settings.

If output voltages are set higher than Vo nom, the output currentsshould be reduced accordingly, so that the maximum specifiedoutput power is not exceeded.


a) Adjustment by means of an external control voltageVext between R (pin 16) and S– (pin 14), see fig. 20.

Vo VextVext ≈ 2.5 V • ––––––– Vo ≈ Vo nom • –––––Vo nom 2.5 V

b) Adjustment by means of an external resistor:

The resistor can either be connected:• between R (pin 16) and S– (pin 14) to set Vo < Vo nom, or• between R (pin 16) and S+ (pin 12) to set Vo > Vo nom.

Table 9a: R1 for Vo < Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R2 = not fitted


Vo (V) R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R1 [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

4.0 14.7 15 2 30.0 2 6.65 2

4.1 16.5 9 18 6.04 16 2 32.0 2 8.06 2

4.2 18.2 7 14 5.62 9.5 19 6.98 17 2 34.0 2 9.76 2

4.3 21.5 7.5 15 6.65 10 20 8.06 18 2 36.0 2 12.14.4 25.5 8 16 8.06 10.5 21 9.31 19 38.0 15.44.5 30.1 8.5 17 9.76 11 22 11 20 40.0 204.6 37.4 9 18 12.1 11.5 23 13.3 20.5 41.0 23.74.7 47.5 9.5 19 15.4 12 24 16.2 21 42.0 28.04.8 64.9 10 20 20 12.5 25 20 21.5 43.0 34.84.9 97.6 10.5 11 28 13 26 26.1 22 44.0 44.25 200 11 22 44.2 13.5 27 36.5 22.5 45.0 60.4

11.5 23 93.1 14 28 56.2 23 46.0 90.914.5 29 115 23.5 47.0 190

Table 9b: R2 for Vo > Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R1 = not fitted


Vo [V] R2 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R2 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R2 [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R2 [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

5.2 215 12.2 24.4 931 15.3 30.6 1020 24.5 49 16905.3 110 12.4 24.8 475 15.5 31 619 25 50 8665.4 75 12.6 25.2 316 15.7 31.4 453 25.5 51 5905.5 57.6 12.8 25.6 243 16 32 316 26 52 4425.6 46.4 13 26.0 196 16.2 32.4 267 26.4 52.8 374

13.2 26.4 169 16.5 33 221

1 First column: single or double output models with separated/paralleled outputs, second column: outputs in series connection.2 Not possible for DQ2660 and EQ2660.

Fig. 20Output adjust using an external control voltage Vext.

Fig. 21Output adjust using a resistor R1 (to lower Vo) or R2 (toincrease Vo).

Note: R inputs of n converters with paralleled outputs may beparalleled too, but if only one external resistor is used, its valueshould be R1/n or R2/n, respectively.

Load

R1

R2

Vo–

Vo–

S–

Vo+

Vo+

S+

Single-outputmodel

R

Vi–

Vi+

i

06094b

16

4

10

14

6

8

12

Load 1

Load 2Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo2–

S–

S+

Vo1+

Double- outputmodel

R

Vi–

Vi+

i

+Vext–

06093b

16

4

12

14

10

8

6


®



Output Good Signal (Out-OK)The isolated Out-OK output gives a status indication of theconverter and the output voltage. It can be used for controlfunctions such as data protection, central system monitoring oras a part of a self-testing system. It can be connected to get acentralized fault detection or may be used for other system-specific applications at the primary or the secondary side ofthe converter.

Connecting the Out-OK as per fig. 22, VOK <1.0 V indicates thatthe Vo or Vo1 of the converter is within the range Vt1 low – Vt1 high.Vt1 low corresponds to 0.95 - 0.98 Vo1 nom, Vt1 high to 1.02 – 1.05Vo1 nom.

Note: Using the R-input or the option P, the monitor level istracking the programmed output voltage.

In an error condition, if the output voltage is out of range due tooverload or an external overvoltage, VOK will approach Vp.

The output is formed by an NPN transistor. The emitter (OutOK–) can be connected to primary Vi– or secondary Vo1– toget an open-collector output. In a configuration of several QSeries converters, the Out OK pins can be series-connected inorder to get a system level signal (as shown in fig. 9). If one ofthe converters fails, the series-connected output rises to highimpedance.

Caution: Out-OK is protected by an internal seriesresistor and a Zener diode. To prevent damage, theapplied current IOK should be limited to ±10 mA.

Fig. 22Out OK function

VpDimensioning of resistor value Rp ≥ ––––––0.5 mA

Outputcontrolcircuit

24

22 Out OK+

Out OK–

+

Rp

VOK

IOK1 k

20 V

Vp06096a

Test JacksTest jacks (for pin diameter 2 mm) are located at the front of theconverter monitoring the main output voltage at the sense lineterminals. The test sockets are short-circuit protected byinternal series resistors. Double-output models show thesense line voltage of output 1 at the test sockets. 48Q modelshave no test jacks.

LEDs48Q models exhibit a green LED In-OK to monitor the inputvoltage. BQ – GQ models have an additional LED Out-OK,which is activated simultaneously to the Out-OK signal.

Table 11: Display status of LEDs

LED In OK LED Out OK Operating condition

green green normal operation

green x incorrect sense line connection

green off overtemperatureoverloadoutput overvoltageoutput undervoltage

off green not possible

off off no input voltageinput voltage too lowinput voltage too highinhibit input open/high

x = dependent on actual operating condition

Sense LinesThis feature allows for compensation of voltage drops at themain output across connector contacts and load lines. If thesense lines are connected at the load rather than directly at theconnector, the user must ensure that the differential voltages(measured on the connector) ∆VS+ (between Vo+ and S+) and∆VS – (between Vo– and S–) do not exceed the values in thetable below.

Applying generously dimensioned cross-section load leadshelp avoiding troublesome voltage drops. To minimize noisepick-up, wire the sense lines parallel or twisted. Forunsymmetrical loads, we recommend connecting the senselines directly at the female connector.

To ensure correct operation, both sense lines must beconnected to their respective power output. With double-output models, the sense lines must be connected to output 1only. Caution should be exercised, if outputs are series-connected, as the compensated voltage is effectively doubled.Because the effective output voltage and output power areincreased by the sense lines, the minimum input voltage risesproportionally to the compensated output voltage.

Caution: Sense lines should always be connected. Incorrectlyconnected sense lines may cause an overvoltage at the ouput,which could damage the output load and activate the secondcontrol loop. The sense lines can handle only small currents.

Note: Sense line connection in a redundant configuration is shownin fig. 10.

Table 10: Out-OK data


VOK Out-OK voltage Output okay, IOK < 0.5 mA 0.8 1.0 V

IOK Out-OK current Output fail, VOK ≤ 15 V 25 µA

Table 12: Voltage compensation by sense lines

Nominal output ∆∆∆∆∆VS+ ∆∆∆∆∆VS– Sum of Unitvoltage ∆∆∆∆∆VS+ + ∆∆∆∆∆VS–

3.3 V, 5.1 V ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.25 ≤ 0.5 V

12 V, 15 V ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 1.0

24 V ≤ 1.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 2.0


®



high input transient voltages, which typically occur in mostinstallations, but especially in battery-driven mobileapplications. The Q Series has been successfully tested to thefollowing specifications:

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A metal oxide VDR together with an input fuse and asymmetrical input filter form an effective protection against



Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Perf.mode1 applied imped. procedure oper. crit. 2

Supply related RIA 12 B +i/– i 1.5 • Vbatt 0.1/1/0.1 s 0.2 Ω 1 positive yes Asurge EN 50155 1.4 • Vbatt 1 Ω surge

Direct transients RIA 12 D 4 –i/c, +i/–i 1800 Vp 5/50 µs 5 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes AEN 50155: G5 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs 100 Ω impulses

Indirect coupled 1995

H –o/c, +o/–o, –o/–i 1800 Vp 5/50 µstransients L 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs

Electrostatic IEC/EN 46 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Bdischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp


Electromagnetic IEC/EN x7 antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 – 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

ENV 50204 411 antenna 30 V/m 50% duty cycle, n.a. 900 ±5 MHz yes A200 Hz repetition

frequency

Electrical fast IEC/EN 4 8 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Btransients/burst 61000-4-4 direct, +i/c, –i/c,+i/–i 4000 Vp

5 kHz over 60 s negative15 ms; burst transients per


Surges IEC/EN 3 3 i/c 2000 Vp3 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B61000-4-5 2 3 +i/–i 1000 Vp3 2 Ω surges per

coupling mode19 Pfl 1 +i/–i 150 Vp 0.1/0.3 ms <100 A 3 pos. 5 repetitions yes A 11

Conducted IEC/EN 3 9 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes Adisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBµV) 1 kHz1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specs, B = Temporary deviation from specs possible.3 Measured with an external input capacitor specified in table 44 Corresponds to EN 50155:2001, waveform A, and EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.2.5 Corresponds to EN 50155:2001, waveform B.6 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.2.7 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.1.8 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.1.9 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.4.10 Fulfills also EN 50121-5:2000, table 1.2, where ENV 50204 is referenced.11 Valid for 48Q and CQ only.


®





Model Level according toEN 55011 / EN 55022

≤≤≤≤≤30 MHz >30 MHz

BQ1000 B B B 1

BQ2000 B B B 1

48/CQ1000 B A B 1

48/CQ2000 B A B 1

DQ1000 A A B 1

DQ2000 A A B 1

EQ1000 A A B 1

EQ2000 A A B 1

GQ1000 B A A 1

GQ2000 B - -1 Load lines decoupled with ferrite cores.

Fig. 24Typical radiated disturbance at the input acc. to EN 55011/22(BQ1001-7R, Vi nom, Io nom, not decoupled load lines, quasipeak).

Fig. 25Typical disturbance voltage at the input (BQ2660-7R,decoupled load lines).

Fig. 23Typical disturbance at the input (BQ1001-7R,Vi nom , Io nom, decoupled load lines, quasipeak).

Fig. 26Typical radiated disturbance at the input according toEN 55011/22 (BQ2660-7R, Vi nom, Io nom, decoupled load lines,quasipeak).

80

60

40

20

0

0.01

0.05 0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

[dBµV]

MHz

0.02

07123a

A quasi peak

B quasi peak

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBµV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07124a

80

60

40

20

0

0.01

0.05 0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

[dBµV]

MHz

0.02

07125a

A quasi peak

B quasi peak

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBµV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07126a


®



Reliability

Table 17: MTBF and device hours

Ratings at specified Models Ground Ground fixed Ground Naval, Device Unitbenign mobile sheltered hours 1

Case Temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C 30 °C

MTBF according to CQ1000 588 000 196 000 96 000 74 000 880 000 hMIL-HDBK-217F 48Q1000 588 000 196 000 74 000 880 000

BQ1001-7R 594 000 194 000 94 000 74 000

MTBF according to BQ2000 853 000 164 000 65 100 57 700 152 000MIL-HDBK-217F, notice 21 Statistical values, based on an average of 4300 working hours per year and in general field use, over 3 years

Temperatures


Temperature -2 -7 (Option) -9Characteristics Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max UnitTA Ambient temperature Converter operating –10 50 –25 711 –40 711 °CTC Case temperature –10 80 –25 951 2 –40 951 2

TS Storage temperature Non operational –25 100 –40 100 –55 1001 See Thermal Considerations. Operation with Po max requires a reduction to TA max = 50 °C and TC max = 85 °C.2 Overtemperature lockout at TC >95 °C (PTC).





Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30°C) for 2 h Converter(sodium chloride Storage: 40°C, 93% rel. humidity for notNaCl solution) 22 h operating

Number of cycles 3 (= 3 days)



Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D section 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 - 2000 Hz) operating

Frequency (1 Oct/min): 10 – 2000 HzTest duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h in each axis)



-- Shock EN 50155 / EN 61373 sect. Acceleration amplitude: 5.1 gn Converter10, class A and B Bump duration: 30 ms operatingbody mounted 1 Number of bumps: 18 (3 in each direction)

Fda Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-35 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converterwide band DIN 40046 part 23 Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operatingReproducibility Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rmshigh Test duration: 3 h (1 h in each axis)

-- Simulated long life EN 50155 / EN 61373 sect. 9, Acceleration spectral density: 0.02 gn2/Hz Convertertesting at cat 1, class B, body mounted 1 Frequency band: 5 – 150 Hz operatingincreased random Acceleration magnitude: 0.8 gn rmsvibration levels Test duration: 15 h (5 h in each axis)

1 Body mounted = chassis of a railway coach


®



104

60

111

20

105

127

(164

)

19.8

M3; 4 deep


20.3

2 (4

TE

)

13.4

3

100

95

5.5

LED "In-OK" green1

Potentiometer (option P)

Test sockets1

LED "Out-OK" green

(171

.9)

09066b

Front plate

Rear-face

Main-face

Back plate

104

84.3

77.9

5

72.8

765

.35

59.2

3

11.4

4

8.14

6.4

= ∅ 4.2= ∅ 3.4= ∅ 3

1 Not fitted to 48Q units

Mechanical DataThe converters are designed to beinserted into a 19" rack according to IEC60297-3. Dimensions are in mm.

Notes:

Long case, elongated by 60 mm for 220 mm rack depthis available on request.

An additional heat sink (option B1) is available; itreduces the case temperature TC, and allows moreoutput power at higher ambient temperature TA.

Fig. 27Case Q01, weight approx. 500 gAluminium, fully enclosed,black finish and self cooling

EuropeanProjection


®




Connector Pin AllocationThe connector pin allocation table defines the electricalpotentials and the physical pin positions on the H15 connector.Pin no. 26, the protective earth pin, is a leading pin, ensuringthat it makes contact with the female connector first.

Table 18: Pin allocation of the H15 connector

Pin Electrical determination Q1000 Q2000

4 Output voltage (positive) Vo+ Vo1+

6 Output voltage (positive) Vo+ Vo2+

8 Output voltage (negative) Vo– Vo1–

10 Output voltage (negative) Vo– Vo2–

12 Sense line (positive) 2 S+ S+

14 Sense line (negative) 2 S– S–

16 Output voltage control input 1 R 1 R 1

18 Current sharing control input T T

20 Do not connect (internal Gnd.) - -

22 Output good signal (positive) Out-OK+ Out-OK +

24 Output good signal (negative) Out-OK– Out-OK –

26 Protective earth PE 2

28 Inhibit control input 3 i i

30 Input voltage (positive) Vi+ Vi+

32 Input voltage (negative) Vi– Vi–

1 Do not connect pin 16 for models with option P or with 3.3 V output.2 Leading pin (pre-connecting).3 If not actively used, connect with pin 32.

essential to connect this pin to protective earth; see Safety ofOperator-Accessible Output Circuits.

The Vi input (pin 32) is internally fused. This fuse is designed toprotect in case of overcurrent and may not be able to satisfy allcustomer requirements. External fuses in the wiring to one orboth input pins (no. 30 and/or no. 32) may therefore benecessary to ensure compliance with local requirements.

Important:

• If the inhibit function is not used, pin 28 (i) must be connectedwith pin 32 (Vi–) to enable the output(s).

• Do not open the converters, or warranty will be invalidated.

• Long input, output and auxiliary lines, or lines with inductors,filters or coupling/decoupling networks may cause instabilities.See Input Stability with Long Supply Lines.

Due to high output currents, the Q1001/1101 models offer twointernally parallel connected contacts for both the positive andthe negative output path (pins 4/6 and pins 8/10). It isrecommended to connect the load to both female connectorpins of each path in order to keep the voltage drop across theconnector pins to a minimum.

Make sure that there is sufficient air flow available forconvection cooling. This should be verified by measuring thecase temperature when the converter is installed and operatedin the end user application. The maximum specified casetemperature TC max shall not be exceeded. See also ThermalConsiderations.

Ensure that a converter failure (e.g. by an internal short-circuit)does not result in a hazardous condition. See also Safety ofOperator-Accessible Output Circuits.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetration of cleaningfluids must be prevented, since the power supplies are nothermetically sealed.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the converters.

IP 30: All models, except those with option P (potentiometer).IP 20: All models fitted with option P.

Fig. 28View of male H15 connector

Installation InstructionsThe Q Series converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by anindustrial assembly operation or by professional installers.Installation must strictly follow the national safety regulationsin compliance to enclosure, mounting, creepage, clearance,casualty, markings and segregation requirements of the end-use application.

Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H15 (see Accessories). Other installation methodsmay not meet the safety requirements.

The Q Series converters are provided with pin 26 ( ), which isreliably connected to the case. For safety reasons it is

32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

30 26 22 18 14 10 6

10025

Standards and ApprovalsThe Q Series converters correspond to class I equipment.

They have been approved according to IEC 60950-1,EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1, and CSA 60950-1.

The converters have been evaluated for:

• Class I equipment

• Building in

• Basic insulation between input and case and double orreinforced insulation between input and output, based ontheir maximum rated input voltage,

• Basic insulation between Out-OK and case, and double orreinforced insulation between Out-OK and input, andbetween Out-OK and output, based on their maximum ratedinput voltage.


®



Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operator-accessible, it shall be an SELV circuit according to IEC/EN60950.

The following table shows some possible installation config-urations, compliance with which causes the output circuit ofthe DC-DC converter to be SELV up to a configured outputvoltage (sum of nominal voltages, if in series or symmetricalconfiguration) of 35 V.

However, it is the sole responsibility of the installer to ensurethe compliance with the relevant and applicable safetyregulations.

• Functional insulation between output(s) and output(s) tocase

• Use in a pollution degree 2 environment,

• Connecting the input to a circuit, which is subject to amaximum transient rating of 1500 V.

CB Scheme is available (CB 06 07 24238 798).


Fig. 29Schematic safety conceptUse fuse, suppressor diode and earth connections as pertable: Safety concept leading to an SELV output circuit. Usefuse(s), if required by the application. See: InstallationInstructions.

Table 19: Isolation

Characteristic Input to Output(s) to Output Out-OK to Out-OK Unitcase + output(s) case to output case + input to output(s)

Electric Factory test ≥1 s 2.1 1 2.1 0.5* 2.1 1 2.1 1 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 1.5 1 1.5 0.35* 1.5 1 1.5 1 kVACtests to factory test

Insulation resistance >300 2 >300 2 >100 >300 2 >300 2 MΩ

Minimum creepage distances 1.4 3 1.4 mm

* Models with version V104 or higher. Older converters have only been tested with 0.3 kVDC.1 In accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950, subassemblies connecting input to output are pre-tested with 4.2 kVDC.2 Tested at 500 VDC.3 2.8 mm between input and output.

Railway ApplicationsThe Q Series converters have been designed observing therailway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121. All boards arecoated with a protective lacquer.

Isolation and Protective EarthThe test of the resistance of the protective earthing circuit(max. 0.1Ω) and the electric strength test (table 19) areperformed in the factory as routine tests in accordance with EN50116 and IEC/EN 60950, and should not be repeated in thefield. Power-One will not honor any warranty claims resultingfrom electric strength field tests.

AC-DCfrontend

DC-DCcon-

verter

Mains

Fuse

Battery

Earthconnection

Suppressor diode SELV

Earthconnection

+

–

~

~

10026

Fuse

Earthconnection

+


®





Nominal Minimum required grade Maximum DC Minimum required Types Measures required to achieve Safety statussupply of insolation, to be pro- output voltage safety status of the the specified safety status of of the DC-DCvoltage vided by the AC-DC front from the front front end output the output circuit converter

end, including mains- end 1 circuit output circuitsupplied battery charger

Mains Functional (i.e. there is ≤150 V 2 Primary circuit DQ Double or reinforced insula- SELV circuit≤150 VAC no need for electrical iso- EQ tion, based on 150 VAC and

lation between the mains DC (provided by the con-supply circuit and the verter) and earthed case 3

DC-DC converter inputcircuit)

Basic ≤60 V ELV circuit BQ, GQ Supplementary insulation,48Q based on 150 VAC (providedCQ by the DC-DC converter)

and earthed case 3

≤75 V Hazardous voltage 48Q Supplementary insulation,secondary circuit CQ based on 150 VAC and

double or reinforced insula-tion 4 (both provided by theDC-DC converter) andearthed case 3

Mains ≤60 V Earthed SELV BQ, GQ Functional insulation (provi-≤250 VAC circuit 3 48Q, CQ ded by the converter)

ELV circuit Input fuse 5, output suppressor Earthed

≤75 V Unearthed 48Q diodes 6, earthed output SELV circuit

hazardous voltage CQ circuit 3 and earthed 3 or non

secondary circuit user-accessible case

≤150 V 2 Earthed hazardous BQ, GQ Double or reinforced SELV circuitvoltage secondary 48Q, CQ insulation 4 (provided bycircuit 3 or earthed DQ the converter)ELV circuit 3 EQ and earthed case 3

Unearthed DQ Supplementary insulation, ba-hazardous voltage EQ sed on 250 VAC and doublesecondary circuit or reinforced insulation 4 (both

provided by the converter)and earthed case 3

Double or reinforced ≤60 V SELV circuit BQ, 48Q Functional insulation (provi-CQ, GQ ded by the converter)

≤120 V TNV-2 circuit 48Q, CQ Basic insulation 4 (provided

≤150 V 2 Double or re-infor- DQ by the converter)ced insulated un- EQ

earthed hazardousvoltage secondarycircuit 7

1 The front end output voltage should match the specified input voltage range of the DC-DC converter.2 The maximum rated input voltage of EQ models acc. to IEC/EN 60950 is 150 V. Power-One specifies the tolerance as +12% (max. 168 V)3 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to IEC/EN 60950.4 Based on the maximum rated output voltage provided by the front end.5 The installer shall provide an approved fuse with the lowest rating suitable for the application in a non-earthed input conductor directly at the

input of the DC-DC converter (see fig. Schematic safety concept). For UL’s purposes, the fuse needs to be UL-listed.6 Each suppressor diode should be dimensioned such that in the case of an insulation fault the diode is able to limit the output voltage to

SELV (<60 V), until the input fuse blows (see fig. Schematic safety concept).7 Has to be insulated from earth according to IEC/EN 60950, by at least supplementary insulation, based on the maximum nominal output

voltage from the front end.


®




Option P: Output Voltage AdjustmentOption P provides a built-in multi-turn potentiometer, whichallows an output voltage adjustment of ±10% of Vo nom. Thepotentiometer is accessible through a hole in the front cover.

With double-output models, both outputs are affected by thepotentiometer. If different converters are parallel-connected,their individual output voltage should be set within a toleranceof ±1%.

If Vo is set higher than Vo nom, the output currents should bereduced accordingly, so that the maximum specified outputpower is not exceeded.

Option -7: Temperature RangeOption -7 designates converters with an operational ambienttemperature range of –25 to 71 °C. Not for new designs.

Option B1: Additional Heat SinkSize: 12.5 mm high

Table 21: Thermal resistance case to ambient (approx.values)

Case Thermal resistance Thickness of case

Standard (160 mm long) 1.6 K/W < 20 mmCase 220 mm long 1 1.4 K/W < 20 mmOption B1 1.45 K/W < 33 mm

1 Customer-specific models

Option G:RoHS compliant for all six substances.


®





Brackets for DIN-railand chassis mounting


Connector retention clip(only in conjunction withmounting plate Q)

AccessoriesA great variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable:

• Various mating connectors including fast-on, screw, solderor press-fit terminals, code key system

• Connector retention brackets CRB-Q [HZZ01217]

• Cable connector housing (cable hood) KSG-H15/H15S4[HZZ00141], also available with fixation

• Various front panels wide 4, 5, or 6 TE for 19" racks with3U heigth. Front panels with 5 or 6 TE width provide somespace between the converters for better cooling.

• System kit for 19" racks with 6U, width 5 TE, including asupport bracket, KitG05-6HE-Q01 [HZZ01217]

• Mounting plate MOUNTINGPLATE-Q [HZZ01215] for wallmounting, with optional connector retention clipsRETENTIONCLIP(2X) [HZZ01209]

• Brackets for DIN-rail mounting UMB-LHMQ [HZZ00610]

• Additional external input and output filters

• Battery sensor [S-KSMH...] for using the converter asbattery charger. Different cell characteristics can beselected.

For additional accessory product information, see theaccessory data sheets listed with each product series orindividual model listing at www.power-one.com. System kit for 19" rack, 6U.

Mounting plate Q for wallmounting with fitted connectorretention clip

Connector retentionbracket CRB-Q


®




We

Power-One AGAckerstrasse 56 CH-8610 Uster

declare under our sole responsibility that all Q Series DC-DC Converters carryingthe CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive(LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


· EN 61204: 1995 (= IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Perfomance characteristicsand safety requirements

· EN 60950-1:2001 (=IEC 60950-1:2001)Safety of information technology equipment

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe correctinstallation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with theLVD. All Q Series DC-DC Converters ar components, intended exclusively forinclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operation or byprofessional installers. They must not be operated as standalone products.


Uster, 12 Dec. 2006 Power-One AG



S Series Data Sheet100 Watt AC-DC and DC-DC Converters

APR 26, 2006 revised to SEP 25, 2006 Page 1 of 33 www.power-one.com

• RoHS lead solder exemption compliant• Extremely-wide input voltage range• Input over- and undervoltage lockout• Efficient input filter and built-in surge and transient

suppression circuitry• Outputs: SELV, no-load, and short-circuit proof• No derating over entire operating temperature range• PCBs coated with protective lacquer• Very high reliability


Description ................................................................................1Model Selection ........................................................................2Part Number Description and Product Marking ........................3Functional Description ..............................................................4Electrical Input Data ..................................................................5Electrical Output Data ..............................................................8Auxiliary Functions ..................................................................12

1686.6"

602.4"12 TE

1114.4"3 U


Page

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ....................................15Immunity to Environmental Conditions ..................................17Mechanical Data ....................................................................18Safety and Installation Instructions ........................................19Description of Options ............................................................23Accessories ............................................................................32EC-Declaration of Conformity ................................................33

Input voltage ranges from 8 to 385 VDC and 85 to 264 VAC, 47-440 Hz1or 2 isolated outputs up to 48 VDCClass I equipment

DescriptionThe S Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters represents a broadand flexible range of power supplies for use in advancedelectronic systems. Features include high efficiency, highreliability, low output voltage noise and excellent dynamicresponse to load/line changes. LS models can be powered byDC or AC with a wide-input frequency range (without PFC).The converter inputs are protected against surges andtransients. An input over- and undervoltage lockout circuitrydisables the outputs if the input voltage is outside of thespecified range. Certain types include an inrush current limiterpreventing circuit breakers and fuses from tripping at switch-on.All outputs are open- and short-circuit proof and are protectedagainst overvoltages by means of built-in suppressor diodes.The outputs can be inhibited by a logic signal applied to pin 18(i). If the inhibit function is not used, pin 18 must be connectedwith pin 14 to enable the outputs.LED indicators display the status of the converter and allow forvisual monitoring of the system at any time.Full input-to-output, input-to-case, output-to-case and output-to-output isolation is provided. The converters are designed andbuilt according to the international safety standards IEC/EN60950 and EN50155. They have been approved by the safetyagencies TÜV and UL (for USA and Canada).

The case design allows operation at nominal load up to 71 °C in afree-air ambient temperature. If forced cooling is provided, theambient temperature may exceed 71 °C, but the case temperaturemust remain below 95 °C under all conditions.A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal, which disablesthe outputs if the case temperature Tc exceeds the limit. Theoutputs are automatically re-enabled when the temperature dropsbelow the limit.Various options are available to adapt the converters to individualapplications.The converters may either be plugged into a 19" rack systemaccording to IEC 60297-3, or be chassis mounted. They are ideallysuited for Railway applications.

Features

Important: For applications requiring compliance with IEC/EN61000-3-2 (harmonic distortion), please use our LS4000 and LS5000Series with incorporated power factor correction (PFC).




Output 1 Output 2 Input Voltage Efficiency 1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min - Vi max η[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 8 to 35 VDC [%]

5.1 16 - - AS1001-7R 76 -9

12 8 - - AS1301-7R 81 D

15 6.5 - - AS1501-7R 83 V 2

24 4.2 - - AS1601-7R 84 P

12 4 12 3 4 AS2320-7R 79 T

15 3.2 15 3 3.2 AS2540-7R 80 B1, B2

24 2 24 3 2 AS2660-7R 80


5.1 16 - - BS1001-7R 77 CS1001-7R 77 FS1001-7R 77 -9

12 8 - - BS1301-7R 83 CS1301-7R 83 FS1301-7R 83 E 4, -9E 4

15 6.5 - - BS1501-7R 85 CS1501-7R 84 FS1501-7R 84 V 2

24 4.2 - - BS1601-7R 86 CS1601-7R 85 FS1601-7R 86 P

12 4 12 3 4 BS2320-7R 80 CS2320-7R 80 FS2320-7R 80 T

15 3.2 15 3 3.2 BS2540-7R 82 CS2540-7R 82 FS2540-7R 82 B1, B2

24 2 24 3 2 BS2660-7R 82 CS2660-7R 82 FS2660-7R 82

Model SelectionNon-standard input/output configurations or special custom adaptions are available on request.

Table 1a: Model types AS

Table 1b: Model types BS, CS, and FS

Table 1c: Model types DS, ES, and LS

1 Min. efficiency η at Vi nom, Io nom, and TA = 25 °C (DC input for LS models). Typical values are approx. 2% better.2 Option V for S1001 models only.3 Second output semi-regulated.4 Option E only for CS, DS, ES, FS, and LS models; mandatory for all -9 models.


85 to 264 VAC5.1 16 - - DS1001-7R 79 ---- -- LS1001-7R 78 E 4, -9E 4

12 8 - - DS1301-7R 84 ES1301-7R 83 LS1301-7R 83 D

15 6.5 - - DS1501-7R 86 ES1501-7R 84 LS1501-7R 84 V 2

24 4.2 - - DS1601-7R 86 ES1601-7R 86 LS1601-7R 85 P

12 4 12 3 4 DS2320-7R 81 ES2320-7R 81 LS2320-7R 80 T

15 3.2 15 3 3.2 DS2540-7R 82 ES2540-7R 83 LS2540-7R 81 B1, B2

24 2 24 3 2 DS2660-7R 83 ES2660-7R 83 LS2660-7R 81




Part Number Description and Product MarkingC S 2 5 40 -9 E R D3 T B1

Input voltage range Vi:

8 - 35 VDC ................A14 - 70 VDC .............. B

20 - 100 VDC .............. F28 - 140 VDC ................C44 - 220 VDC ................D67 - 385 VDC .............. E

85 - 264 VAC or 88 - 372 VDC................ L

Series................................................................................SNumber of outputs ........................................................1, 2Single output models:Nominal voltage output 1 (main output), Vo1 nom

5.1 V ......0, 1, 212 V ................315 V ............4, 524 V ................6

Other voltages1

............7, 8Other specifications for

single output models1

......01 - 99Double output models:

Nominal voltage output 1 and 212, 12V ......................................................................2015, 15V ......................................................................4024, 24V ......................................................................60Other specifications and additional features

1......70 - 99

Operational ambient temperature range TA:–25 to 71 °C................-7–40 to 71 °C................-9

Other 1 ....-0, -5, -6Auxiliary functions and options:Inrush current limiter ......................................................E 3

Output voltage control input ..........................................R 2

Potentiometer (output voltage adjustment) ....................P 2

Undervoltage monitor (D0 - DD, to be specified) ..........D 4

ACFAIL signal (V0, V2, V3, to be specified) ..................V 4

Current share ....................................................................TCooling plate standard case ..........................................B1Cooling plate for long case (220 mm) 1 ..........................B21 Customer-specific models.2 Feature R excludes option P and vice versa.3 Option E available for CS, DS, ES, FS, and LS models; mandatory for all -9 model types.4 Option D excludes option V and vice versa; option V available for S1001 models only.

Example: CS2540-9ERD3TB1: DC-DC converter, input voltage range 28 - 140 V, double output, each providing 15 V/3.2 A,equipped with inrush current limiter, R input (voltage adjust), undervoltage monitor D3, current share, and a cooling plateB1. Ambient temperature –40 to 71 °C.

Product MarkingBasic type designation, applicable approval marks, CE mark, warnings, pin allocation, Power-One patents, and company logo.Identification of LEDs, test sockets, and potentiometer.Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal output voltages and currents, degree of protection, batch no., serial no., anddata code including production site, modification status, and date of production.




Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input fuse, an input filter, a bridgerectifier (LS), and an inrush current limiter to the input capacitor.This capacitor sources a single transistor forward converter.Each output is powered by a separate secondary winding of themain transformer. The resultant voltages are rectified and theirripple smoothed by a power choke and output filter. The controllogic senses the main output voltage Vo1 and generates, with

respect to the maximum admissible output currents, the controlsignal for the primary switching transistor.The second output of double-output models is controlled by themain output but has independent current limiting. If the main outputis driven into current limitation, the second output voltage will fall aswell and vice versa.

1 Transient suppressor (VDR) in CS, DS, ES, FS, LS models2 Suppressor diode in AS, BS, CS, FS models

Con

trol

circ

uit

1

2

P

3

For

war

d co

nver

ter

(app

rox.

110

kH

z)

16

18

20

22

12

14

4

6

8

10

Out

put 2

filte

rO

utpu

t 1fil

ter

26

28

3032

24

– +

Y

Y Y

Y

Y

Y

R

i

D

T

Vi+

Vi–

03058-022706

Vo1+

Vo1–

Vo2+

Vo2–

Inpu

t filt

er 4

5N

5L

Fus

e

3 Inrush current limiter in CS, DS, ES, LS (NTC resistor or option E circuit)4 Bridge rectifier (LS only)5 LS models

Inpu

t filt

er

Con

trol

circ

uit

2

4

P

3

For

war

d co

nver

ter

(app

rox.

120

kH

z)

Y

16

18

20

22

12

4

6

8

10

14

Y

Out

put

filte

r

1

26

28

3032

24

– +

Y

YVi+

Vi–

R

i

D/V

T

03057-022706

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

Fus

e

5N

5L

Fig. 2Block diagram of symmetrical double output converters AS - LS2000

Fig. 1Block diagram of single output converters AS - LS1000





Input CS DS ES LS


Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 - Io nom 28 140 44 220 67 385 88 372 VDCTC min - TC max 85 4 264 4 VAC

Vi nom Nominal input voltage 60 110 220 310 VDC


Pi0 No-load input power Vi min - Vi max 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 W

Pi inh Idle input power converter inhibited 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.5

Ri Input resistance 150 170 180 480 mΩ

RNTC NTC resistance 2 1 2 4 4 Ω

Ci Input capacitance 830 330 270 270 μF

Vi RFIConducted input RFI EN 55022 B B B B

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom B B B A

Vi abs Input voltage limits 0 154 0 400 3 0 400 -400 400 VDCwithout damage

1 For double output models both outputs loaded with Io nom.2 Valid for -7 versions without option E. This is the nominal value at 25 °C and applies to cold models at initial switch-on cycle. Subsequent

switch-on/off cycles increase the inrush current peak value.3 For 1 s max.4 AC operating frequency range is 47 to 440 Hz (440 Hz for 115 V mains). For frequencies ≥ 63 Hz refer to Safety and Installation Instructions.

Input Transient ProtectionA suppressor diode and/or a VDR (depending on input voltagerange) together with the input fuse and a symmetrical input filterform an effective protection against high input transient voltageswhich typically occur in most installations, but especially inbattery-driven mobile applications.Nominal battery voltages in use are: 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 110,and 220 V. In most cases each nominal value is specified in a

tolerance of –30% to 25%.In certain applications, surges according to RIA 12 arespecified in addition to those defined in IEC 60571-1. Thepower supply must not switch off during these surges andsince their energy can practically not be absorbed anextremely wide input range is required. The ES input rangefor 110 V batteries has been designed and tested to meetthis requirement.



Input AS BS FS


Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 - Io nom 8 35 14 70 20 100 VDC

Vi nom Nominal input voltage TC min - TC max 15 30 50


Pi0 No-load input power Vi min - Vi max 2.5 2.5 2.5 W

Pi inh Idle input power converter inhibited 1.5 1.5 1.5

Ri Input resistance 65 100 70 mΩ

Ci Input capacitance 1040 370 1500 μF

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55022 A B B

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom A A B

Vi abs Input voltage limits 0 40 0 80 0 100 VDCwithout damage




Input FuseA fuse mounted inside the converter protects the module againstsevere defects. This fuse may not fully protect the module whenthe input voltage exceeds 200 VDC! In applications where theconverters operate at source voltages above 200 VDC anexternal fuse or a circuit breaker at system level should beinstalled!

The inrush current peak value (initial switch-on cycle) can bedetermined by following calculation:

Vi sourceIinr p = ––––––––––––––––(Rs ext + Ri + RNTC)


Vi source

+Ci int

05109_060805

Reverse PolarityThe converters (except LS) are not protected against reversepolarity at the input, but in general, only the input fuse will trip. LSmodels are fully protected due to the built-in bridge rectifier.

Static Input Current Characteristic

Fig. 5Typical input current versus relative input voltage

2 3 4 5 61

1

2

5

10

FS

CS

ES

LS (DC input)

ViVi min

Ii [A]

DS

20

0.5

AS

BS

04037_011906

Input Under-/Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage remains below approx. 0.8 Vi min or exceedsapprox. 1.1 Vi max, an internally generated inhibit signal disablesthe output(s). When checking this function the absolute maximuminput voltage rating Vi abs should be considered! Between Vi minand the undervoltage lockout level the output voltage may bebelow the value defined in table: Electrical Output Data.

Fig. 3Typical inrush current versus time at Vi max, Rext = 0.For AS, BS, and FS as well as for application-related valuesuse the formula given in this section to get realistic results.

Inrush CurrentThe CS, DS, ES, and LS models (not -9, not option E)incorporate an NTC resistor in the input circuitry, which at initialturn-on reduces the peak inrush current value by a factor of 5 to10. Subsequent switch-on cycles within short periods increasethe inrush current due to the hotter NTC resistor.

1 2 3 t [ms]0

50

100

Ii inr [A]

150

CSES, LSDS

04038_110705

Fig. 4Equivalent circuit for input impedance

Table 3: Fuse Specification

Model Fuse type Reference Rating

AS 1 fast-blow Little fuse 314 30.0 A, 125 VBS 1 fast-blow Little fuse 314 25.0 A, 125 VCS 2 slow-blow SPT 12.5 A, 250 VDS 2 slow-blow SPT 8 A, 250 VES 2 slow-blow SPT 4 A, 250 VFS 2 slow-blow SPT 16 A, 250 VLS 2 slow-blow SPT 4 A, 250 V1 Fuse size 6.3 x 32 mm 2 Fuse size 5 x 20 mm




2 3 4 5 610.30

1

Vi–––––Vi min

th [ms]

10

100

DS

CSES

FS

AS BS

04041_011906

2 3 4 5 612

th [ms]

10

100 04049_011906

ViVi min

Fig. 6aTypical hold-up time th versus relative input voltage Vi/Vi min. The DC-DC converters require an externalseries diode in the input path if other loads are connectedto the same input supply lines.

Fig. 6bTypical hold-up time th versus relative AC input voltage (LSmodels)

Hold-up Time Versus Relative Input Voltage


Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.

– Pin 18 (i) connected to pin 14 (S–/Vo1–), Vo adjusted to Vo nom (option P), R input not connected.

– Sense line pins 12 (S+) and 14 (S–) connected to Vo1+ and Vo1–, respectively.

Table 4a: Output data: single output models

Output AS-LS1001 AS-LS1301 AS-LS1501 AS-LS1601Vo nom 5.1 V 12 V 15 V 24 V



Vo P Overvoltage protection 7.6 21 26.5 43.5(suppressor diode)

Io nom Output current nom 1 Vi min - Vi max 16 8 6.5 4.2 ATC min - TC max

Io L Output current limit 2 Vi min - Vi max 16.2 8.2 6.7 4.4


Total incl. BW = 20 MHz 50 50 60 90spikes

ΔVo u Static line regulation Vi min - Vi max ±15 ±20 ±25 ±30 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io nom

ΔVo I Static load regulation Vi nom, -20 -25 -30 -40(0.1 - 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, ±100 ±100 ±100 ±100load deviation 3 Io nom ↔ 0.5Io nom

td regulation 5

Recovery 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 mstime 3

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min - TC max, ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 4 Io nom

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrent should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is not exceeded.

2 See: Output Voltage Regulation.3 See: Dynamic Load Regulation. 4 For battery chargers a defined negative temperature coefficient can be provided, see Accessories.5 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204.6 LS models have an additional low-frequency ripple at twice the input frequency (< 5mVpp).






Table 4c: Output data: double output models

Output AS-LS2660Vo nom 24 V/24 V



Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom1 23.76 24.24 23.52 24.48 V

Vo P Overvoltage protection 37 37(suppressor diode)

Io nomOutput current nom 2 Vi min - Vi max 2 2 ATC min - TC max

Io L Output current limit 6 Vi min - Vi max 2.2 2.2

vo Output Switching freq. Vi nom, Io nom 5 7 5 7 mVppnoise 3

Total including BW = 20 MHz 50 50spikes

ΔVo u Static line regulation Vi min - Vi max ±30 6 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io1 nom, Io2 nom

ΔVo I Static load regulation Vi nom, Io2 nom, -60 6

(0.1 - 1) Io1 nom

Vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom↔ 0.5Io1 nom,

tdregulation3

Recovery 0.5Io2 nom 0.2 mstime 4

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min - TC max ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 5 Io1 nom, Io2 nom

1 Same conditions for both outputs.2 If the output voltages are increased above

Vo nom via R-input control, option P setting,

remote sensing or option T, the output currentsshould be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is

not exceeded.3 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204.4 See: Dynamic Load Regulation.5 For battery chargers a defined negative

temperature coefficient can be provided, seeAccessories.

6 See: Output Voltage Regulation of DoubleOutput Models.

7 LS models have an additional low-frequencyripple at twice the input frequency (< 5 mVpp).

Table 4b: Output data: double output models

Output AS-LS2320 AS-LS2540Vo nom 12 V/12 V 15 V/15 V




Vo P Overvoltage protection 19 19 24 24(suppressor diode)

Io nomOutput current nom 2 Vi min - Vi max 4 4 3.2 3.2 ATC min - TC max

Io L Output current limit 6 Vi min - Vi max 4.2 4.2 3.4 3.4


Total including BW = 20 MHz 40 40 50 50spikes

ΔVo u Static line regulation Vi min - Vi max ±20 6 ±25 6 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io1 nom, Io2 nom

ΔVo I Static load regulation Vi nom, Io2 nom, -40 6 -50 6

(0.1 - 1) Io1 nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom, ±100 ±150 ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom↔ 0.5Io1 nom,

tdregulation 3

Recovery 0.5Io2 nom 0.2 0.2 mstime 4

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min - TC max ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 5 Io1 nom, Io2 nom




Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air (convectioncooling) at the indicated maximum ambient temperature TA max(see table: Temperature specifications) and is operated at itsnominal input voltage and output power, the temperaturemeasured at the Measuring point of case temperature TC (see:Mechanical Data) will approach the indicated value TC max afterthe warm-up phase. However, the relationship between TA andTC depends heavily on the conditions of operation andintegration into a system. The thermal conditions are influencedby input voltage, output current, airflow and temperature ofsurrounding components and surfaces. TA max is therefore,contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.


Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sink allows TAto be higher than 71 °C (e.g., 85 °C) if TC max is not exceeded.

For -7 or -9 models at ambient temperature TA = 85 °C with onlyconvection cooling, and the maximum permissible current for eachoutput is approx. 40% of its nominal value as per the figure below.

Output Protection

Each output is protected against overvoltages which could occurdue to a failure of the internal control circuit. Voltage suppressordiodes (which under worst case condition may become a shortcircuit) provide the required protection. The suppressor diodes arenot designed to withstand externally applied overvoltages.Overload at any of the outputs will cause a shut-down of alloutputs. A red LED indicates the overload condition.

Parallel or Series Connection Single or double-output models with equal nominal output voltagecan be connected in parallel without any precautions using Option T (current sharing).Single output models and/or main and second outputs of double-output models can be connected in series with any other (similar)output.

Notes:– Parallel connection of double output models should include both,

main and second output to maintain good regulation of bothoutputs.

– Not more than 5 models should be connected in parallel.– Series connection of second outputs without involving their main

outputs should be avoided as regulation may be poor.– Rated output voltages above 36 V need additional measures in

order to comply with the safety requirements for SELV (Safe ExtraLow Voltage)

– The maximum output current is limited by the output with the lowestcurrent limitation if several outputs are connected in series.

00.10.20.3

0.40.50.6

0.70.8

50 60 70 80 90 100

Io/Io nom

TA [˚C]

0.9

1.0Forced cooling

05089_052305

TA min

TC max

Convection cooling


Thermal Protection

A temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signal whichdisables the outputs if the case temperature exceeds TC max.The outputs are automatically re-enabled when the temperaturedrops below this limit.Continuous operation under simultaneous worst-case conditionsof the following three parameters should be avoided: minimuminput voltage, maximum output power, and maximumtemperature.

Output Voltage Regulation

Fig. 8Output characteristic Vo1 vs. Io1 (typ.)

VoVo nom

0.98

0.5

00.5 1.0

Io1

IoL

IoIo nom

05098_050605

The following figures apply to single-output or double-outputmodels with parallel-connected outputs.




Output 1 is under normal conditions regulated to Vo1 nom,independent of output currents. Vo2 depends upon the loaddistribution. If both outputs are loaded with more than 10% of Ionom, the deviation of Vo2 remains within ±5% of the value of Vo1.The following 3 figures show the regulation with varying loaddistribution.Two outputs of an S2000 model connected in parallel will behavelike the output of an S1000 model.

Fig. 10AS - LS2320: ΔVo2 (typ.) vs. Io2 with different I01

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Io2[A]

11.2

11.4

11.6

11.8

12.0

12.2

12.4

12.6

[V] Vo2


05105_060805

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Io2[A]

14.00

14.25

14.50

14.75

15.00

15.25

15.50

15.75

[V] Vo2


05106_070805


[V] Vo2

Io2[A]0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

23.0

23.5

24.0

24.5

25.0

25.5

26.0Io1 = 3.0 AIo1 = 2.0 AIo1 = 1.0 AIo1 = 0.5 AIo1 = 0.3 A

05107_060805


Output Voltage Regulation of Double Output Models

Note: If output 2 is not used, we recommend connecting it inparallel with output 1. This ensures good regulation and efficiency.

Vod

Vod

td td

Vo ±1% Vo ±1%

t

t ≥ 10 μs ≥ 10 μs

Vo

0

0.5

1

Io/Io max

05102

Fig. 9Typical dynamic load regulation of Vo




Fig. 15Typical output response as a function of inhibit control



Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min - Vi max –50 0.8 Vvoltage Vo = off 2.4 50

Iinh Inhibit current Vinh = 0 –400 µA

tr Rise time 30 ms

tf Fall time depending on Io

0 t

t0

Inhibit

1

0.1

1Vo/Vo nom

tr tf

06001

Sense Lines(Only single output models)

Important: Sense lines must always be connected! Incorrectlyconnected sense lines may activate the overvoltage limitation,resulting in a permanent short-circuit of the output.

This feature allows for compensation of voltage drops across theconnector contacts and if necessary, across the load lines. If thesense lines are connected at the load rather than directly at theconnector, the user should ensure that the voltage differencesspecified in the table below are not exceeded. We recommendconnecting the sense lines directly at the female connector.To ensure correct operation, both sense lines (S+ and S–) shouldbe connected to their respective power outputs (Vo1+ and Vo1–)and the voltage difference between any sense line and itsrespective power output pin (as measured on the connector)should not exceed the following values:


Output Total voltage difference Voltage differencevoltage between sense lines and between


5.1 V < 0.5 V < 0.25 V

12, 15, 24 V < 1.0 V < 0.25 V

If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via the R-inputcontrol, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrents must be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is notexceeded.

Auxiliary Functions

i Inhibit for Remote On and Off

Note: With open i input the output is disabled.

The outputs may be enabled or disabled by means of a logicsignal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied between the inhibit input i andthe negative pin of output 1 (Vo1–). In systems with severalconverters, this feature can be used to control the activationsequence of the converters. If the inhibit function is not required,connect the inhibit pin 18 to pin 14 to enable the outputs (activelow logic, fail safe).

Vi+

Vi– Vo–

i

Vo+I inh

Vinh

06031

1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032


Fig. 14Typical inhibit current Iinh versus inhibit voltage Vinh




Programmable Output Voltage (R-Function)As a standard feature, the converters offer an adjustable outputvoltage, identified by letter R in the type designation. The controlinput R (pin 16) accepts either a control voltage Vext or aresistor Rext to adjust the desired output voltage. When notconnected, the control input automatically sets the outputvoltage to Vo nom.

a) Adjustment by means of an external control voltage Vextbetween pin 16 (R) and pin 14:

The control voltage range is 0 - 2.75 VDC and allows anoutput voltage adjustment in the range of approximately 0 - 110% Vo nom.

VoVext = –––––– • 2.5 V (approximate formula)Vo nom

b) Adjustment by means of an external resistor:Depending upon the value of the required output voltage theresistor shall be connectedEither: Between pin 16 and pin 14 (Vo < Vo nom) to achievean output voltage adjustment range of approximately 0 - 100% Vo nom

or: Between pin 16 and pin 12 (Vo > Vo nom) to achieve anoutput voltage adjustment range of approximately 100 - 110%Vo nom.

Warning:– Vext shall never exceed 2.75 VDC.– The value of R'ext shall never be less than the lowest value

as indicated in table R'ext for (Vo > Vo nom)

Notes:– The R-Function excludes option P (output voltage adjustment by

potentiometer).– If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R-input

control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrent(s) should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is notexceeded.

– With double-output models the second output follows the value ofthe controlled main output.

– In case of parallel connection the output voltages should beindividually set within a tolerance of 1 - 2%.

Fig. 16Output voltage control for single-output models AS - LS1000.

R

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–Vext

Vi+

Vi–

Rext

R'ext

14

16

16

14

+

S+

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–

Vi+

Vi–

R12

05074_050905

Table 7a: Rext for Vo < Vo nom; approximative values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R'ext = not fitted


Vo [V] Rext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩ]

0.5 0.432 2 4 0.806 2 4 0.619 4 8 0.8061.0 0.976 3 6 1.33 4 8 1.47 6 12 1.331.5 1.65 4 8 2 6 12 2.67 8 16 22.0 2.61 5 10 2.87 8 16 4.53 10 20 2.872.5 3.83 6 12 4.02 9 18 6.04 12 24 4.023.0 5.76 7 14 5.62 10 20 8.06 14 28 5.623.5 8.66 8 16 8.06 11 22 11 16 32 8.064.0 14.7 9 18 12.1 12 24 16.2 18 36 12.14.5 30.1 10 20 20 13 26 26.1 20 40 205.0 200 11 22 42.2 14 28 56.2 22 44 44.2

1 First column: Vo or Vo1, second column: outputs of double-output models in series connection




Table 7b: R’ext for Vo > Vo nom; approximative values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); Rext = not fitted


Vo [V] R'ext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩ]

5.15 432 12.1 24.2 1820 15.2 30.4 1500 24.25 48.5 33205.2 215 12.2 24.4 931 15.4 30.8 768 24.5 49.0 16905.25 147 12.3 24.6 619 15.6 31.2 523 24.75 49.5 11305.3 110 12.4 24.8 475 15.8 31.6 392 25.0 50.0 8455.35 88.7 12.5 25.0 383 16.0 32.0 316 25.25 50.5 6985.4 75 12.6 25.2 316 16.2 32.4 267 25.5 51.0 5905.45 64.9 12.7 25.4 274 16.4 32.8 232 25.75 51.5 5115.5 57.6 12.8 25.6 243 16.5 33.0 221 26.0 52.0 442

13.0 26.0 196 26.25 52.5 40213.2 26.4 169 26.4 52.8 383

1 First column: Vo or Vo1, second column: outputs of double-output models in series connection


Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj


Vi

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OKIo L

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

TC

i


Vi inh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

Io L


06002_011106

Test JacksTest jacks for measuring the output voltage Vo or Vo1 arelocated at the front of the converter. The positive test jack isprotected by a series resistor (see: Functional Description,block diagrams). The voltage measured at the test jacks isslightly lower than the value at the output terminals.

Fig. 18LEDs "OK", "i" and "Io L"status versus input voltage

Conditions: Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

Vi uv = undervoltage lockout, Vi ov = overvoltage lockout

LEDs "OK" and "Io L"status versus output current

Conditions: Vi min - Vi max, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i"versus case temperatureConditions: Vi min - Vi max, Io ≤ Io nom, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i"versus VinhConditions: Vi min - Vi max, Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max

R'extRext

14

16

Vo1–

Vo1+

R

Vo2–

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo2+

12

10

8

6

4 +

–

Vo1

24 V30 V48 V

06004_012006

co

Fig. 17Wiring for output voltage 24 V, 30 V, or 48 V (double-outputmodels) with both outputs connected in series. A ceramiccapacitor (Co) across the load reduces ripple and spikes.




typically occur in most installations; especially in battery-drivenmobile applications.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A suppressor diode and/or a metal oxide VDR (depending upontype) together with an input fuse and an input filter form aneffective protection against high input transient voltages which

RIA 12

(covers also

IEC60571-1 and

EN50155:1995)



Phenomenon Standard Surge/ Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Per-Level mode 1 applied imped. procedure oper. form. 2

Supply related A 3 +i/–i 3.5 Vbatt 2/20/2 ms 0.2 Ω 1 positive yes Asurge B 1.5 Vbatt 0.1/1/0.1 s surge

Direct transient C +i/c, –i/c 960 Vp 10/100 µs 5 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B

D 4 1800 Vp 5/50 µs impulses

E 3600 Vp 0.5/5 µs 100 Ω

F 4800 Vp 0.1/1 µs

G 5 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs

Indirect coupled H +o/c, –o/c, 1800 Vp 5/50 µstransient J 3600 Vp 0.5/5 µs

K 4800 Vp 0.1/1 µs

L 8400 Vp 0.05/0.1 µs



Electromagnetic IEC/EN 3 7 antenna 20 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 - 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

3 antenna 10 V/m 50% duty cycle, n.a. 900 ±5 MHz yes A200 Hz repetition

frequency

Fast IEC/EN 4 8 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransients/burst 61000-4-4 i/c, +i/–i 4000 Vp



Surges IEC/EN 3 i/c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 3 +i/–i 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 2 Ω surges per

coupling mode

RF conducted IEC/EN 3 9 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 - 80 MHz yes Aimmunity 61000-4-6 (140 dBμV) 1 kHz

1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary deviation from specs possible.3 Only met with customer-specific models, CS (48 V battery) and ES (110 V battery) designed for an extended Vi range. Standard DS

models (110 V battery) will not be damaged, but overvoltage lockout will occur during the surge.4 Corresponds to EN 50155:2001, waveform A, and EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.2.5 Corresponds to EN 50155:2001, waveform B.6 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.2.7 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.1.8 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.1.9 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.4.




Fig. 19aTypical disturbance voltage (peak) at the input according toEN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom (DK1301-7R).

Fig. 19bTypical disturbance voltage (peak) at the input according toEN 55011/22, measured at Vi = 230 VAC and Io nom,(LK1001-7RD9B1).

CS1601-7R, Peak Vi+, Conducted 0,15 ÷ 30 MHz, Divina, 2006-10-01

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

EN 55022 B

dBμV

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80dBμV LS1301-7R, Peak Vi+, Conducted 0,15 ÷ 30 MHz, Divina, 2006-11-01

EN 55022 B

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBμV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07077

Fig. 19cTypical radiated electromagnetic field strength (quasi-peak)according to EN 55011/22, normalized to a distance of 10 m,measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

Electromagnetic Emission

Note: The Railway Standard, EN50121-3-2:2000 table 3, imposesmuch higher limits, which are by far fulfilled.







TA Ambient temperature Converter –25 71 –40 71 °C

TC Case temperature1Operating

–25 95 –40 95

TS Storage temperature Non-operational –40 100 –55 100


Table 11: MTBF

Values at specified Model types Ground benign Ground fixed Ground mobile Unitcase temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C

MTBF 1 AS - LS 500 000 150 000 80 000 50 000 h


1 Calculated in accordance with MIL-HDBK-217F.2 Statistical values, based on an average of 4300 working hours per year and over 3 years in general field use.

1 Covers also EN50155/EN61373 (Category 1, body mounted Class B).

Failure Rates


Table 9: Mechanical and climatic stress


Ca Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Converter steady state MIL-STD-810D sect. 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not


Ea Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 1 Acceleration amplitude: 100 gn = 981 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Eb Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 40 gn = 392 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 - 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 - 2000 Hz) operating


Fn Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converter

broad band Frequency band: 5 - 500 Hz operatingrandom Acceleration magnitude: 4.97 gn rms (digital control) Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter (sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle notNaCl solution) Storage: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity operating



111

(3U

)

168.5

60

4.5

19.7

9.5

29.9

51.5

30.3

20.3

12.1

10.3

7.0

3.27

7 TE 5 TE

Test jacks

Option P (Vo)

Option D (Vti)

LED OK (green)

LED i (red)

LED IoL (red)

Option D (Vto)

25.9


(171.0 to 171.9)

50

11.8

= Ø 3.5= Ø 4.1

(+/–)

15210

0

M4

55

81528

0900

4_11

0705


d




Fig. 20Aluminum case S02 with heat sink, black finish and self-cooling,weight: Approx. 1.25 kg

Fig. 21Aluminum case S02 with option B1 (cooling plate), black finish andself-cooling, weight: Approx. 1.15 kg

Note:– d ≥15 mm, recommended clearance to next part in order to

ensure proper air circulation at full power.– Free air location: the converter should be mounted with fins in

a vertical position to achieve maximum airflow through theheat sink.

EuropeanProjection

111

(3U

)

17.3 133.4

168

101

547.2

1585

M 4

5


50

(171.0 to 171.9)

3.27

7 TE 4 TE09003_110705

Note: Long case with option B2, elongated by 60 mm for 220mm rack depth, is available on request with a customer-specificpart number (no LEDs and no test jacks).


Table 12: H15 connector pin allocation

Pin Connector type H15

No. AS to LS1000 AS to LS2000

4 Vo1+ Pos. output 1 Vo2+ Pos. output 2

6 Vo1+ Vo2+

8 Vo1– Neg. output 1 Vo2– Neg. output 2

10 Vo1– Vo2–

12 S+ Sense Vo1+ Pos. output 1

14 S– Sense Vo1– Neg. output 1

16 R 1 Control of Vo R 1 Control of Vo1

18 i Inhibit i Inhibit

20 D 3 Save data D 3 Safe data

V 3 ACFAIL

22 T 5 Current share T 5 Current share

24 2 Protective earth Protective earth

26 Vi+ N 4 Pos. input Vi+ N 4 Pos. input

28 Neutral line 4 Neutral line 4

30 Vi– L 4 Neg. input Vi– L 4 Neg. input

32 Phase line 4 Phase line 4

1 Not connected, if option P is fitted.2 Leading pin (pre-connecting).3 Option D excludes option V and vice versa. Pin not connected unless

option D or V is fitted.4 LS models.5 Not connected, unless option T is fitted.




Connector Pin Allocation

The connector pin allocation table defines the electricalpotentials and the physical pin positions on the H15/H15 S4connector. Pin no. 24 (protective earth) is a leading pin, ensuringthat it makes contact first.


The S Series converters are components, intended exclusively forinclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyoperation or by professional installers. Installation must strictlyfollow the national safety regulations in compliance with theenclosure, mounting, creepage, clearance, casualty, markings andsegregation requirements of the end-use application.

Fig. 22View of converter’s male connector

Connection to the system shall be made via the female connectorH15 (see: Accessories). Other installation methods may not meetthe safety requirements.

The converters are provided with pin 24 ( ), which is reliablyconnected with the case. For safety reasons it is essential toconnect this pin to protective earth. See: Safety of OperatorAccessible Output Circuit.

Input pins 30 and 32 are internally fused. Since this fuse isdesigned to protect the converter in case of an overcurrent anddoes not necessarily cover all customer needs, an external fusesuitable for the application and in compliance with the localrequirements might be necessary in the wiring to one or both inputpotentials, pins 26 and 28, and/or 30 and 32.

432

Type H15


(see Accessories)

10090

Important: When the inhibit function is not in use, pin no. 18 (i)should be connected to pin no. 14 (S–/Vo1–) to enable the output(s).Do not open the converters, or guarantee will be invalidated.

Due to high current values, some models provide two internallyparallel connected contacts for certain paths (pins 4/6, 8/10, 26/28and 30/32). It is recommended to connect load and supply to bothfemale connector pins of each path in order to keep the voltagedrop across the connector pins at an absolute minimum and toavoid overstress of the connector contacts with currents higherthan 8 A.Make sure that there is sufficient airflow possible for convectioncooling. This should be verified by measuring the casetemperature when the converter is installed and operated in theend-use application. The maximum specified case temperatureTCmax shall not be exceeded. See also Thermal Consid-erations.

If the end-product is to be UL certified, the temperature of the mainisolation transformer should be evaluated as part of the end-product investigation.Check for hazardous voltages before altering any connections.Ensure that a converter failure (e.g., by an internal short-circuit)does not result in a hazardous condition. See also: Safety ofOperator-Accessible Output Circuits.




Table 14: Isolation

Characteristic Input to Output to Output to Unit case + output(s) case output

Electric Factory test >1 s 2.8 1 1.4 0.14 kVDC

strength AC test voltage equivalent to factory test 2.0 1.0 0.1 kVACtest voltage

Insulation resistance at 500 VDC 300 2 300 2 100 MΩ1 In accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950 subassemblies are pretested with 5.6 kVDC.2 Tested at 500 VDC.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory as routinetest in accordance with EN 50116, IEC/EN 60950 and UL 1950and should not be repeated in the field. Power-One will nothonor any guarantee claims resulting from electric strength fieldtests.

LS-models Operated at Greater than 63 HzAbove 63 Hz the earth leakage current may exceed 3.5 mA, themaximum specified in IEC/EN 60950. The built-in Y-caps areonly approved for ≤ 100 Hz. Frequencies greater than 350 Hzare only permitted for Vi ≤ 200 VAC.

Characteristic Class I UnitLS1000, LS2000

Maximum earth Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 3.5 mAleakage current

Specified value at 264 V, 50 Hz 1.43

Table 13: Leakage Currents for LS-models

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters are UL recognized according to UL 1950,CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 950-95, and TÜV approved to IEC/EN60950 standards.The converters correspond to Class I equipment and have beenevaluated for:• Building in,• Basic insulation between input and case based on 250 V and

double or reinforced insulation or an earthed part betweeninput and output.

• The use in a pollution degree 2 environment,• Connecting the input to a primary or secondary circuit which

is subject to a maximum transient rating of 2500 V.The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillance inaccordance with the above mentioned UL and ISO 9001:2000standards.

Railway ApplicationsThe S Series converters have been designed according tothe Railway Standards EN50155 and EN50121. All boardsand components are coated with a protective lacquer.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetration ofcleaning fluids must be prevented, since the powersupplies are not hermetically sealed.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the converter.IP 30: All models except those with option P and optionD,

or V with potentiometer.IP 20: All models exhibiting a potentiometer.




AC-DCfrontend

DC-DCcon-

verter

Mains Battery SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10044_082605Max. 150 VAC or VDC for AK, BKMax. 250 VAC or VDC for CK, DK, EK, FK, LK

Fuse

Fuse

Max. 150 VAC or VDC for AK, BKMax. 250 VAC or VDC for CK, DK, EK, FK, LK


Conditions Front end Result DC-DC converter Result

Nominal Minimum required grade DC output voltage Minimum required Types Measures to achieve the Safety status supply of insulation, to be pro- from the front end safety status of the specified safety status of of the DC-DCvoltage vided by the AC-DC front front end output the output circuit converter


Mains Functional ≤100 V. The Primary circuit AS a) Double or reinforced SELV circuit≤150 VAC (no electrical insulation nominal voltage BS insulation based on

between the mains between any the mains voltagesupply voltage and the output pin and (provided by the DC-DCDC-DC converter input) earth is ≤150 V converter) AND

(AC or DC) b) earthed case 3

Mains ≤250 V The CS≤250 VAC nominal voltage DS

between any ESoutput pin and FSearth is ≤250 V(AC or DC)

Basic ≤250 V Unearthed AS a) Supplementary insulation,hazardous voltage BS based on 250 VAC ANDsecondary circuit CS b) double or reinforced

DS insulation 2 (provided byES DC-DC converter) ANDFS c) earthed case 3

Earthed a) Double or reinforcedhazardous voltage insulation 2 (provided by secondary circuit the DC-DC converter) AND

b) earthed case 3

Double or reinforced ≤60 V SELV circuit4

≤120 V TNV-3 circuit Basic insulation (providedby the DC-DC converter) 4

1 The front end output voltage should match the specified input voltage range of the DC-DC converter.2 Based on the maximum nominal output voltage from the front end.3 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards, e.g. IEC/EN 60950.4 Earthing of the case is recommended, but not mandatory.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output Circuits

If the output circuit of a DC-DC converter is operator-accessible,it shall be a SELV circuit according to safety standard IEC/EN 60950.

The following table shows some possible installationconfigurations, compliance with which causes the output circuit

of a DC-DC converter to be a SELV circuit according to IEC/EN60950 up to a configured output voltage (sum of nominal voltagesif in series or +/– configuration) of 36 V.

Fig. 23Schematic safety concept.Use earth connection as per the table below.





Mains Double or reinforced Earthed case 1 and installation SELV circuit≤250 VAC according to the applicable standards




If the output circuit of a AC-DC converter is operator-accessible,it shall be a SELV circuit according to the related IEC/EN 60950safety standards.The following table shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit of an LS SeriesAC-DC converter to be a SELV circuit according to IEC/EN

60950 up to a configured output voltage (sum of nominal voltagesif in series or +/– configuration) of 36 V.If the LS converters are used as DC-DC converters, please refer tothe previous section.

AC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10021

Fuse

Fuse

Fig. 24Schematic safety concept. Use fuses and earthconnection as per: Installation Instructions and table:Safety concept leading to a SELV output circuit.



Option Function of Option Characteristics

-9 Extended operational ambient temperature range TA = –40 to 71 °C

E Electronic inrush current limitation circuitry Active inrush current limitation for CK, DK, EK

P Potentiometer for fine adjustment of output voltage Adjustment range +10/–60% of Vo nom (R input not connected)

D 1 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (versions D0 - DD)

V 1, 2 Input (and output) undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specs (versions V0, V2, V3)

T Current sharing Interconnect T-pins if paralleling outputs (5 converters max.)

B1/B2 Cooling plate Replaces standard heat sink, allowing direct chassis-mounting1 Option D excludes Option V and vice versa.2 Only available for Vo = 5.1 V.

Table 18: Inrush current characteristics with option E(DC-DC converters)

Characteristics CS DS ES FS Unit

Vi nom, Io nom Input voltage 60 110 220 48 V

Iinr p Peak inrush 6.8 7.4 14.6 4.5 Acurrent

tinr Inrush current 18 14 16 22 msduration

Vi max, Io nom Input voltage 140 220 380 100 V

Iinr p Peak inrush 9.3 14.5 25.3 7.5 Acurrent

tinr Inrush current 20 14 12 23 msduration



Option -9: Extended Temperature RangeOption -9 extends the operational ambient temperature rangefrom –25 to 71 °C to –40 to 71 °C. The power supplies providefull nominal output power with convection cooling. Option -9excludes inrush current limitation by NTC.

Option E: Inrush Current LimiterCS/DS/ES/FS/LS types may be supplemented by an electroniccircuit (option E, replacing the standard built-in NTC) to achievean enhanced inrush current limiting function. Option E ismandatory for -9 models.CS models fitted with option E and option D6 (input voltagemonitoring) meet the standard ETS 300132-2 for 48 VDC supplyvoltage. Option D6 (externally adjustable via potentiometer from36.0 to 40.5 V) is necessary to disable the converter at low inputvoltages, avoiding an excessive input current. Option D6threshold level should be adjusted to 44.0 - 50.0 V for 60 Vnominal supply systems (refer to the description of option D). TheD output can be connected directly to the inhibit input.

Note: Subsequent switch-on cycles at startup are limited to max.10 cycles during the first 20 seconds (cold model) and then tomax. 1 cycle every 8 seconds.

Inpu

t Filt

er

Control

Con

vert

er

FET

CiRIRS

10017_111105

Rectifier (only AC-DC models)


Current limiting resistance = RS + RI = 15 Ω (all models)

I [A]

Vi/RV

<30t [ms]

Capacitor Ci

fully chargedNormal operation(current limitingcircuit is fullyconducting)

00

Ii = Pi/Vi

11039_052605

Fig. 26Inrush current with option E (DC-DC converters)




Table 19: Inrush current characteristics with option E (AC-DC converters)

Characteristics LS UnitV = 230 VAC min typ max

Iinr p Peak inrush current – – 25.3 A

tinr Inrush current duration – 35 50 ms

15

Ii [A]

10

5

0

–5

–10

–15

0 20 40 60 80

t [ms]

tinr



20

10065_102005

Fig. 27Inrush current with option E(LS models, Vi = 230 VAC, fi = 50 Hz, Po = Po nom)




Load

1

1

1

2

2

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

Vi+

Vi–

T

Vi+

Vi–

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

T

1


11036_012006

Converter

Converter

Fig. 29Paralleling of single-output models using option T with thesense lines connected at the load

1 Leads should have equal length and cross sections and shouldrun in the same cable loom.

2 Diodes for redundant operation.

Vo+

Vo–

Vo+

Vo–

Load

Vo+

Vo–

11003_102005

Fig. 28An example of poor wiring for connections in parallel(unequal length of load lines)

Option T: Current SharingThis option ensures that the output currents areapproximately shared between all paralleled converters,hence increasing system reliability. To use this facility,simply interconnect the T pins of all converters and makesure that the reference pins for the T-pin (S- for the S1000or Vo1– for S2000) are also connected together. The loadlines should have equal length and cross section to ensureequal voltage drops. Not more than 5 converters should beconnected in parallel. The R-pins should be left in an open-circuit condition. If not, prior to paralleling the Vo1 outputsshould be individually adjusted within 1 to 2%. Parallelconnection of converters with option P is notrecommended.

Option P: PotentiometerThe potentiometer allows for an output voltage adjustmentin the range of +10/–60% of Vo nom. It is accessiblethrough a hole in the front cover. This feature enablescompensation of voltage drops across the connector andwiring. Option P is not recommended if models areconnected in parallel. In double-output models both outputs are influenced by thepotentiometer setting. If option P is fitted, the R-pin 16 isnot connected.

Note: If the output voltage is increased above Vo nom via the R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing, or option T,the output current(s) should be reduced accordingly so thatPo nom is not exceeded.

Load


+ –Power bus

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

Converter

Converter

11037_012006

Fig. 30Paralleling of double output models with the outputsconnected in series, and using option T in an applicationwith a power bus. Note that the signal at the T-pins isreferenced to Vo1-.




Option D: Undervoltage MonitorThe input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuit operatesindependently of the built-in input undervoltage lockout circuit. Alogic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal (NPN output) isgenerated at pin 20 as soon as one of the monitored voltagesdrops below the preselected threshold level Vt. The return forthis signal is Vo1–. The D output recovers when the monitoredvoltage(s) exceed(s) Vt + Vh. The threshold levels Vti and Vto

are either adjustable by a potentiometer, accessible through a holein the front cover, or factory adjusted to a fixed value specified bythe customer.Option D exists in various versions D0 - DD as shown in thefollowing table.


Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt]of threshold level Vt for Vt min - Vt max

JFET NPN Vi Vo1 Vti Vto Vhi VhoD1 D5 no yes - 3.5 - 40 V 1 - 2.5 - 0.6

D2 D6 yes no Vi min - Vi max1 - 3.4 - 0.4 -

D3 D7 yes yes Vi min - Vi max1 (0.95 - 0.985 Vo1) 2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

D4 D8 no yes - (0.95 - 0.985 Vo1) 2 - "0"

D0 D9 no yes - 3.5 - 40 V 3 - 2.5 - 0.6

yes no Vi min - Vi max3, 4 - 3.4 - 0.4 -

yes yes Vi min - Vi max3, 4 3.5 - 40 V 3 3.4 - 0.4 2.5 - 0.6

yes yes Vi min - Vi max3, 4 (0.95 - 0.985 Vo1) 2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

- DD yes yes Vi min - Vi max1 3.5 - 40 V 1 3.4 - 0.4 2.5 - 0.6

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer 2 Fixed value tracking if Vo1 is adjusted via R-input, option P or sense lines.

3 The threshold level is permanently adjusted according to customer specification ±2% at 25 °C. Any value within thespecified range is possible, but causes a new customer-specific type designation.

4 Adjusted at Io nom




NPN output (D5 - DD):Pin 20 (D) is internally connected via the collector-emitterpath of an NPN transistor to Vo1+ or Vo+. VD < 0.4 V(logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltage level (Viand/or Vo1) > Vt +Vh. The current ID through pin 20should not exceed 20 mA. This output is not protectedagainst external overvoltages. VD should not exceed 40 V.

Vi, Vo1 status D output, VDVi or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 20 mA

JFET output (D0 - D4):Pin 20 (D) is internally connected via the drain-source pathof a JFET (self-conducting type) to Vo1+ or Vo+.VD ≤ 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltagelevel (Vi and/or Vo1) < Vt. The current ID through the JFETshould not exceed 2.5 mA. The JFET is protected by a 0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 V against external overvoltages.

Vi, Vo1 status D output, VDVi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 2.5 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 5.25 VFig. 31Option D1 - D0: JFET output, ID ≤ 2.5 mA


Version of D Vi << Vt resp. Vo << Vt Vi >> Vt + Vh resp. Vo >> Vt Configuration



Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Fig. 32Option D5 - DD: NPN output, Vo1 ≤ 40 V, ID ≤ 20 mA

Threshold tolerances and hysteresis:If Vi is monitored, the internal input voltage after the inputfilter is measured. Consequently, this voltage differs fromthe voltage at the connector pins by the voltage drop ΔVtiacross the input filter. The threshold levels of the D0 andD9 options are factory-adjusted at nominal output currentIo nom and at TA = 25 °C. The value of ΔVti depends uponthe input voltage range (CS, DS, ..), threshold level Vt,temperature and input current. The input current is afunction of the input voltage and the output power.

Fig. 33Definition of Vti, ΔVt i and ΔVhi (JFET output)

ΔVti Vhi

VD low

VD

VD high

Vi

P o =

Po

nom

P o =

0

P o =

0

Vti

P o =

Po

nom

11021




D-signal with respect to input and output voltage versus time:

Fig. 34Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VD, Vo1/Vo nom versus time

0

10.95

0

Vi [V DC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min4 tlow min

4 thigh min

th1

Vti +Vhi

Vti


VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto

3


0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

3

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho



11008

1 Hold-up time see: Electrical Input Data

2 With output voltage monitoring, hold-up time th = 0.

3 The signal will remain high if the D output is connectedto an external source.

4 tlow min = typically 130 ms.





V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vh [% of Vt](VME compatible) of threshold level Vt for Vt min - Vt max

Vi Vo1 Vti Vto Vhi VhoV2 yes no Vi min - Vi max

1 – 3.4 - 0.4 –

V3 yes yes Vi min - Vi max1 0.95 - 0.985 Vo1

2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

V0 yes no Vi min - Vi max3, 4 – 3.4 - 0.4 –

yes yes Vi min - Vi max3, 4 0.95 - 0.985 Vo1

2 3.4 - 0.4 "0"

1 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer.

2 Fixed value between 95% and 98.5% of Vo1 (tracking).

3 Adjusted at Io nom.

4 Fixed value, resistor-adjusted (±2% at 25 °C) acc. to customer's specifications; individual type number is determined by Power-One.

Table 22: Available internal input capacitance and factory potentiometer setting of Vti with resulting hold-up time

Types AS BS FS CS DS ES LS Unit

Ci min 0.83 0.3 1.2 0.66 0.26 0.21 0.21 mF

Vt i 9.5 19.5 39 39 61 97 120 VDC

th 0.1 0.1 5.3 1.9 1.8 4.3 6.4 ms

Option V: ACFAIL Signal (VME)

Available only for models with Vo = 5.1 V.

This option defines an undervoltage monitoring circuit for theinput and main output voltage. It generates an ACFAIL signal (V signal) which conforms to the VME standard.The low state level of the ACFAIL signal is specified at a sinkcurrent of IV ≤ 48 mA to VV ≤ 0.6 V (open-collector output of anNPN transistor). The pull-up resistor feeding the open-collectoroutput should be placed on the VME backplane. After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time (th) of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops to 4.875 V when the output is fully loaded. Thehold-up time is provided by the internal input capacitance.Consequently, the working input voltage and the threshold level(Vti) should be adequately above the minimum input voltage (Vi min) of the converter so that enough energy is remaining inthe input capacitance. If the input voltage is below the requiredlevel, an external hold-up capacitor (Ci ext) should be added.


2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Vti = ––––––––––––––––––––– + Vi min

2Ci min • η

Formula for the external input capacitor:

2 • Po • (th + 0.3 ms) • 100Ci ext = –––––––––––––––––––––– – Ci min

η • (Vti 2 – Vi min

2)

where as:Ci min = internal input capacitance [mF]Ci ext = external input capacitance [mF]Po = output power [W]

η = efficiency [%]th = hold-up time [ms]

Vi min = minimum input voltage [V] 1

Vti = threshold level [V]

1 Min. input voltage according to Electrical Input Data. For output voltagesVo > Vo nom, the minimum input voltage increases proportionally to

Vo/Vo nom.

Remarks:

Option V2 and V3 can be adjusted by potentiometer to a thresholdlevel between Vi min and Vi max. A decoupling diode should beconnected in series with the input of AS - FS converters to avoidthe input capacitance discharging through other loads connectedto the same source voltage.

Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vti is either adjustable by

potentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover,or adjusted during manufacture to a determined customerspecified value.

Versions V0, V2, and V3 are available as shown below.

Option V operates independently of the built-in inputundervoltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal is generated atpin 20 as soon as one of the monitored voltages drops below thepreselected threshold level Vt. The return for this signal is Vo1–.The V output recovers when the monitored voltage(s) exceed(s)





Connector pin V is internally connected to the open collector ofan NPN transistor. The emitter is connected to Vo1- or Vo-. VV ≤ 0.6 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltage level(Vi and/or Vo1) <Vt. The current IV through the open collectorshould not exceed 50 mA. The NPN output is not protectedagainst external overvoltages. VV should not exceed 60 V.

Vi, Vo1 status V output, VVVi or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VV ≤ 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

Vi and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, IV ≤ 25 µA at VV = 5.1 V Fig. 35Output configuration of options V0, V2, and V3

Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009

Threshold tolerances and hysteresis:If Vi is monitored, the internal input voltage is measured after theinput filter. Consequently, this voltage differs from the voltage atthe connector pins by the voltage drop DVti across the inputfilter. The threshold level of option V0 is adjusted duringmanufacture at Io nom and TA = 25 °C. The value of ΔVtidepends upon the input voltage range (AS, BS, etc.), thresholdlevel Vt, temperature and input current. The input current is afunction of input voltage and output power.

ΔVti Vhi

VV low

VV

VV high

Vi

P o =

Po

nom

P o =

0

P o =

0

Vti

P o =

Po

nom

11023





3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vi [VDC]

0

t

t

Vti + Vhi

Vti


VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo1

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo1

2.0 V



11010

t

t

t

t

Fig. 37Relationship between Vi, Vo1, VV, IV and Vo1/Vo nomversus time.

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms 2 tlow min = 40 - 200 ms, typically 80 ms

3 VV level not defined at Vo1 < 2.0 V

4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output voltage. Ifthe pull-up resistor RP is connected to Vo1+. The V signal

remains high if RP is connected to an external source.

Options B1/B2: Cooling Plate

Where a cooling surface is available, we recommend the useof a cooling plate (option B1) instead of the standard heat sink.The mounting system should ensure sufficient coolingcapacity to guarantee that the maximum case temperature TC max is not exceeded. The cooling capacity is calculated by:

(100% – η)PLoss = –––––––––– • Vo • IoηEfficiency η see: Model Selection

Elongated case for 220 mm rack depth: Option B2

Dimensions see Mechanical Data


Chassis mounting brackets CMB-S



Accessories

A variety of electrical and mechanical accessories are availableincluding:– Front panels for 19" DIN-rack: Schroff 16 TE /3U,

[HZZ00831] and 16 TE /6U [HZZ00832], or Intermas 16 TE /3U [HZZ00731].

– Mating H15/H15 S4 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on orpress-fit terminals.

– Cable connector housing: Screw version [HZZ00141] orretention clip version [HZZ00142].

– Connector retention clips (2x) [HZZ01209].– Connector retention brackets CRB [HZZ01216].– Coding clips for connector coding [HZZ00202].– Chassis mounting plate CMB-S [HZZ00616] for fastening to a

chassis with only front access.– DIN-rail mounting assembly DMB-K/S [HZZ00615].– Wall-mounting plate K02 [HZZ01213] for models with option

B1.– Additional external input or output filters.– Battery temperature sensor [S-KSMH...] for use of the

converter as a battery charger. Different battery charact-eristics can be selected. For additional accessory product information, see the accessorydata sheets listed with each product series or individually atwww.power-one.com through the following menus: “SelectProducts”, “Download Data Sheets & Applications Notes”, orwith each model in the product overviews.


Front panels

DIN mounting assembly DMB-K/S

Connector retention bracket CRBConnector retention clip

NUCLEAR AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS - Power-One products are not designed, intended for use in, or authorized for use as critical componentsin life support systems, equipment used in hazardous environments, or nuclear control systems without the express written consent of the respectivedivisional president of Power-One, Inc.

TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change depending on the datemanufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

20 to 30 Ncm





We


declare under our sole responsibility that K and S Series AC-DC and DC-DCconverters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


• EN 61204:1995 (= IEC 61204:1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Perfomance characteristics and safety requirements

• EN 60950:2000 (= IEC 60950:2000)Safety of information technology equipment

The installation instructions given in the data sheet describe correct installationleading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with the LVD. All Kand S Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyoperation or by professional installers. They must not be operated as stand aloneproducts.



Rolf Baldauf Johann MilavecVP Engineering Director Projects and IP


BCD20003-G Rev AA Page 1 of 27 www.power-one.com

S Series with PFC Data Sheet100 Watt AC-DC PFC Converters

• RoHS lead-solder exemption compliant• Power factor >0.93, harmonics IEC/EN 61000-3-2• Immunity to IEC/EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6• Emissions according to EN 55011/55022• High efficiency• Input over- and undervoltage lockout• Adjustable output voltage with remote on/off• Outputs: SELV, no load, overload and short-circuit proof• Rectangular current limiting characteristic• No derating over entire operating temperature range• PCBs protected by lacquer• Very high reliability

DescriptionThe S 4000/5000 Series of AC-DC converters represents aflexible range of power supplies for use in advancedelectronic systems. Features include full power factorcorrection, good hold-up time, high efficiency andreliability, low output voltage noise, and excellent dynamicresponse to load/line changes.The converters are protected against surges andtransients occurring at the source lines. An input over- andundervoltage lockout circuitry disables the outputs, whenthe input voltage is outside of the specified range. Inputinrush current limitation is included for preventing circuitbreakers and fuses from tripping at switch-on.All outputs are overload, open- and short-circuit proof andprotected by a built-in suppressor diode. The outputs can

be inhibited by a logic signal applied to connector pin 18. Ifthe inhibit function is not used, pin 18 must be connectedwith pin 14 to enable the outputs.LED indicators display the status of the converter andallow visual monitoring of the system at any time.Full input to output, input to case, output to case andoutput to output isolation is provided. The converters aredesigned and built according to the international safetystandards IEC/EN 60950. They have been approved bythe safety agencies TÜV and UL (for USA and Canada).The case design allows operation at nominal load up to71 °C in a free air ambient temperature. If forced cooling isprovided, the ambient temperature may exceed 71 °C butthe case temperature must remain below 95 °C under allconditions.

1686.6"

602.4"12 TE

1114.4"3 U

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1


FeaturesUniversal AC input range 100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz1 or 2 isolated outputs up to 56.5 VDCClass I equipment

Description ....................................................................... 1Model Selection ............................................................... 2Functional Description ..................................................... 4Electrical Input Data ........................................................ 5Electrical Output Data ..................................................... 7Auxiliary Functions ........................................................ 11Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ........................... 14

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ......................... 16Mechanical Data ............................................................ 17Safety and Installation Instructions ............................... 18Description of Options ................................................... 20Accessories ................................................................... 26EC Declaration of Conformity ....................................... 27




A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal, whichdisables the outputs if the case temperature TC exceedsthe limit. The outputs are automatically re-enabled, whenthe temperature drops below the limit.Various options including battery chargers are available toadapt the converters to individual applications.The converters may either be plugged into 19" rack

Model SelectionNon-standard input/output configurations or special customer adaptations are available on request.

Table 1: Model types LS

Output 1 Output 2 Oper. input voltage range Efficiency 1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηη min[VDC] [A] 2 [VDC] [A] 85 – 264 VAC [%]

5.1 16 LS4001-7R 77 -9E12 8 LS4301-7R 81 D15 6.5 LS4501-7R 83 V 2

24 4.2 LS4601-7R 83 P

24 4 LS5320-7R 81 T

30 3.2 LS5540-7R 81 B1, B2 4

48 2 LS5660-7R 81

12 4 12 3 4 LS5320-7R 8115 3.2 15 3 3.2 LS5540-7R 8124 2 24 3 2 LS5660-7R 81

1 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approximately 2% better.2 Option V for LS 4000 models with 5.1 V output; excludes option D3 Second output semi-regulated4 For customer-specific models with 220 mm case length

systems according to IEC 60297-3, or be chassis mounted.Important:

These products are intended to replace the LS1000 andLS2000 models, in order to comply with IEC/EN 61000-3-2. Forapplications with DC input or main frequencies other than 50/60Hz, the LS1000 and LS2000 models are still available.

Table 2: Battery charger models

Nom. output values Output range Oper. input voltage range Efficiency 1 OptionsVo nom Io nom Vo nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηη min[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] 85 – 255 VAC [%]

12.84 7 12.62 – 14.12 LS4740-7R 81 -9E, D, B1, B2

25.68 2 3.4 25.25 – 28.25 LS5740-7R 8151.36 3 1.7 50.5 – 56.5 LS5740-7R 81

1 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom and TA= 25 °C. Typical values are approximately 2% better.2 Both outputs connected in parallel3 Both outputs connected in series




Example: LS5540-9EPD3TB1: Power factor corrected AC-DC converter, operating input voltage range 85 – 255VAC, 2 electrically isolated outputs, each providing 15 V, 3.2 A, equipped with inrush current limiter, apotentiometer to adjust the output voltages, undervoltage monitor D3, current share feature, and a coolingplate B1.

Product MarkingBasic type designation, applicable approval marks, CE mark, warnings, pin designation, Power-One patents and companylogo, identification of LEDs, test sockets, and potentiometer.Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal output voltages and currents, degree of protection, batch no., serialno., and data code including production site, modification status and date of production.

Part Number DescriptionOperating input voltage Vi: 85 – 255 VAC ....................... LSNumber of outputs ....................................................... 4, 5Single output models:Nominal voltage output 1 (main output), Vo1 nom

5.1 V..................................................................... 0, 1, 212 V .............................................................................. 315 V .......................................................................... 4, 524 V .............................................................................. 6Other voltages 1 ....................................................... 7, 8Other specifications (single output models)1 ....... 01 – 99

Double output models:Nominal voltage output 1 and 2

12 V, 12 V ............................................................................................... 2015 V, 15 V ............................................................................................... 4024 V, 24 V .................................................................. 60Other specifications or additional features 1 ...... 70 – 99

Operational ambient temperature range TA:–25 to 71 °C................................................................ -7–40 to 71 °C................................................................ -9Other 1 ............................................................... -0, -5, -6

Auxiliary functions and options:Inrush current limitation ............................................. E 2

Output voltage control input ....................................... R 3

Potentiometer (output voltage adjustment) ................ P 3

Undervoltage monitor (D0 – DD, to be specified) ...... D 4

ACFAIL signal (V2, V3, to be specified) .................... V 4

Current share ............................................................... TCooling plate standard case ...................................... B1Cooling plate for longe case 220 mm 1 ...................... B2

1 Customer-specific models2 Option E mandatory for all -9 models3 Feature R excludes option P and vice versa.4 Option D excludes option V and vice versa; option V is available for 5.1 V models only.

LS 5 5 40 -9 E P D3 T B1




Fig. 2Block diagram of symmetrical double-output converters LS5000

1 Transient suppressor (VDR)2 Inrush current limiter (NTC), or Opt. E (mandatory for -9 models)3 Input fuse4 Bulk capacitor (Ci)

Inpu

t filte

r

Cont

rol c

ircui

t

1

P

2

16182022

12

1446

810

Out

put 2

filter

Out

put 1

filter

2628

3032

24

3

– +

Y

Y Y

Y

Y

Y

Forw

ard

conv

erte

r (ap

prox

. 80

kHz)

Boos

t con

verte

r (PF

C)

+

360

VDC

Ci

4

03002a

N~

L~

RiDT

Vo1+

Vo1–

Vo2+

Vo2–

Functional DescriptionThe input voltage is fed via an input fuse, an input filter, arectifier,2 and an inrush current limiter to a boost converter.This step-up converter provides a sinusoidal input current(IEC/EN 61000-3-2, class D equipment) and charges thebulk capacitor C i to approx. 370 VDC. This capacitorsources a single transistor forward converter and providesthe power during the hold-up time.Each output is powered by a separate secondary winding ofthe main transformer. The resultant voltages are rectified

and their ripple smoothed by a power choke and an outputfilter. The control logic senses the main output voltage Vo1and generates, with respect to the maximum admissibleoutput currents, the control signal for the switchingtransistor of the forward converter.The second output of double output models is tracking tothe main output, but has its own current limiting circuit. Ifthe main output voltage drops due to current limitation, thesecond output voltage will fall as well and vice versa.

Fig. 1Block diagram of single-output converters LS4000

1 Transient suppressor (VDR)2 Inrush current limiter (NTC), or Opt. E (mandatory for -9 models)3 Input fuse4 Bulk capacitor (Ci)

Inpu

t filt

er

Con

trol

circ

uit

P

2

Y

161820221246

8

10

14

Y

Out

put

filte

r

1

28

3032

24

3

– +

Y

Y

For

war

d co

nver

ter

(app

rox.

80

kHz)

+

Boo

st c

onve

rter

(P

FC

)

360

VD

C

Ci

4

03001a

RiD/VTS+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

26N~

L~





Table 3: Input data

Input LS


Vi Rated input voltage range Io = 0 – Io nom 100 240 VAC 1

Vi op Operating input voltage range TC min – TC max 85 264

Vi nom Nominal input voltage 50 – 60 Hz 230

I i Input current Vi nom, Io nom 2 0.55 A

P i0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max, Io = 0 7.5 9 W

P i inh Idle input power conv. inhibited 2 3

R i Input resistance 480 mΩ

RNTC NTC resistance (see fig. 3)3 conv. not operating 3200 4000

C i Input capacitance 80 100 120 µF

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55022 B

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom B

Vi abs Input voltage limits 283 VACwithout damage –400 400 VDC 4

1 Nominal frequency range: 50 – 60 Hz, operating frequency range 47 – 63 Hz2 With double-output models, both outputs loaded with Io nom3 Valid for -7 versions without option E. This is the NTC resistance value at 25 °C and applies to cold converters. Subsequent

switch-on/off cycles increase the inrush current peak value.4 Operation with DC input voltage is not specified and not recommended.

Input Transient ProtectionA VDR together with the input fuse and a symmetrical inputfilter form an effective protection against high inputtransient voltages.

Input FuseA fuse mounted inside the converter in series to the phaseline protects against severe defects. A second fuse in theneutral line may be necessary in certain applications; seeInstallation Instructions.Fuse specification:Slow-blow, 4 A, 250 V, 5 × 20 mm.

Input Under- /Overvoltage LockoutIf the input voltage remains below approx. 65 VAC orexceeds Vi abs, an internally generated inhibit signaldisables the output(s). Do not check the overvoltagelockout function!If Vi is below Vi min, but above the undervoltage lockoutlevel, the output voltage may be below the value specifiedin the tables Electrical Output Data.

Inrush Current LimitationThe -7 models without option E incorporate an NTC resistor

in the input circuitry, which at initial turn-on reduces thepeak inrush current value by a factor of 5 to 10 to protectconnectors and switching devices from damage.Subsequent switch-on cycles within short periods willcause an increase of the peak inrush current value due tothe warming-up of the NTC resistor.The inrush current peak value (initial switch-on cycle) canbe determined by following calculation:

Vi • √ 2––

I inr p = –––––––––––––––– (Rs ext + R i + RNTC)

Fig. 3Equivalent circuit diagram for input impedance.


Vi Ci

04001a




100 150 200 250 30050

1

3

0.5

1.5

2

2.5

li [A]

Vi [V]

04005a

Fig. 4Theoretical input inrush current versus time at Vi = 255 Vand 115 V, Rext = 0 for models without option E

Fig. 5Input current versus input voltage at Io nom

Fig. 7Harmonic currents at the input (LS4601, Vi = 230 VAC,Io = Io nom).

Power Factor and HarmonicsPower factor correction is achieved by controlling the inputcurrent waveform synchronously with the input voltagewaveform. The power factor control is active under alloperating conditions.

Fig. 6Power factor versus output current (LS4601-7R)

The harmonic distortion is well below the limits specified inIEC/EN 61000-3-2, class D.

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 10

60

0

10

20

30

40

50

Frequency [kHz]

Io/Io nom

70

80

1.2

05008a

Fig. 8Typ switching frequency versus load. The boostconverter at the input stage operates with a constantswitching frequency of 100 kHz.

Hold-up Time

Fig. 9Hold-up time versus output power (LS4601-7R)

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Io/Io nom

Power factor

V i = 230 VAC

V i = 85 VAC

PF-LS4601

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

3 5 7 9 11 13

Harm-LS4601mA/W

Harm. 0.1 1 ms

50

100

Iinr [A]

0

04054LS

0.5

LS

020406080

100120140160180200

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Io/Io nom

[ms]LS4601-hu

V i = 230 VAC

V i = 85 VAC




Electrical Output DataGeneral Conditions:– TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.– Pin 18 (i) connected to pin 14 (S– or Vo1–), R input not connected, Vo adjusted to Vo nom (option P),– Sense line pins 12 (S+) and 14 (S–) connected to pins 4 (Vo1+) and 8 (Vo1–), respectively.

Table 4a: Output data of single-output models

Output LS4001 LS4301 / 4740 5 LS4501 LS46015.1 V 12 V 5 15 V 24 V


Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 5.05 5.15 11.88 5 12.12 5 14.85 15.15 23.76 24.24 V

Vo BR Overvoltage protection 7.6 15.2/17 5 19.6 28.5(supressor diode) 6

Io nom Output current nom. 1 Vi min – Vi max 16 8 /7 5 6.5 4.2 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 1 Vi min – Vi max 16.2 8.2/8 5 6.7 4.4

vo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 2 2 2 2 mVppnoise 3



∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max ±5 ±12 ±15 ±24 mVwith respect to Vi nom Io nom

∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom –20 –25 –30 –40(0.1 – 1) Io nom


t dregulat. 2 Recovery time2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 ms

α v o Temperature coefficient TC min – TCmax ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 4 Io nom

1 If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom through R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, the outputcurrents should be reduced accordingly so that Po nom is not exceeded.

2 See Output Voltage Regulation3 Measured according to IEC/EN 61204 with a probe according to annex A4 For battery charger applications, a defined negative temperature coefficient can be provided by using a temperature sensor (see

Accessories), but we recommend choosing special battery charger models.5 Especially designed for battery charging using the temperature sensor (see Accessories). Vo is set to 12.84 V ±1% (R-input open).6 Breakdown voltage of the incorporated suppressor diode (1 mA; 10 mA for 5 V output). To exceed Vo BR is dangerous for the

suppressor diode.

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.80

0.9

0.3

0.5

0.7

Io/Io nom

Vi = 230 V Vi = 85 V

05014a

Fig. 10Efficiency versus output power.

Efficiency




Table 4b: Output data of double-output models

Output LS5320 LS55402 × 12 V 2 × 15 V




Vo P Overvoltage protection 15.2 15.2 19.6 19.6(supressor diode) 8

Io nom Output current nom 2 Vi min – Vi max 4 4 3.2 3.2 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 6 Vi min – Vi max 4.2 4.2 3.4 3.4

uvo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 3 3 3 3 mVppnoise 3




∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom –40 6 –50 6

(0.1 – 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±100 ±150 ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom ↔ 1/2 Io1 nom

t dregulat.3 Recovery time4 1/2 Io2 nom 0.3 0.4 ms


Table 4c: Output data of double-output models

Output LS5660 / 57407

2 × 24 V / 25.68 V7



Vo Output voltage Vi nom, Io nom 1 23.767 24.247 23.527 24.487 V

Vo P Overvoltage protection 28.5/347 28.5/347

(supressor diode)

Io nom Output current nom 2 Vi min – Vi max 2/1.77 2/1.77 ATC min – TC max

IoL Output current limit 6 Vi min – Vi max 2.1/27 2.1/27

uvo Output Low frequency Vi nom, Io nom 3 3 mVppnoise 3

Switching frequ. BW = 20 MHz 5 5Total incl. spikes 40 40

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max ±30 6 mVwith respect to Vi nom 3 Io nom

∆Vo I Static load regulation Vi nom –40 6

(0.1 – 1) Io nom

vo d Dynamic Voltage Vi nom ±100 ±150load deviation 4 Io1 nom ↔ 1/2 Io1 nom

t dregulat.3 Recovery time4 1/2 Io2 nom 0.3 ms

α v o Temperature coefficient TC min – TC max ±0.02 %/Kof output voltage 5 Io nom

1 Same conditions for both outputs2 If the output voltages are

increased above Vo nom via R-input control, option P setting,remote sensing or option T, theoutput currents should bereduced accordingly so thatPo nom is not exceeded.

3 Measured according to IEC/EN61204 with a probe annex A

4 See Dynamic Load Regulation5 For battery charger applications

a defined negative temperaturecoefficient can be provided byusing a temperature sensor, seeAccessories.

6 See Output Voltage Regulationof Double-Output Models

7 Especially designed for batterycharging using the batterytemperature sensor (seeAccessories). Vo1 is set to 25.68 V±1% (R-input open).

8 Breakdown voltage of theincorporated suppressor diodes(1 mA). To exceed Vo BR isdangerous for the suppressordiodes.




Thermal ConsiderationsIf a converter is located in free, quasi-stationary air(convection cooling) at the indicated maximum ambienttemperature TA max (see table Temperature specifications)and is operated at its nominal input voltage and outputpower, the temperature measured at the Measuring point ofcase temperature TC (see Mechanical Data) will approachthe indicated value TC max after the warm-up phase.However, the relationship between TA and TC dependsheavily on the conditions of operation and integration into asystem. The thermal conditions are influenced by inputvoltage, output current, airflow, and temperature ofsurrounding components and surfaces. TA max is therefore,contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.

Caution: The installer must ensure that under all operatingconditions TC remains within the limits stated in thetableTemperature specifications.

Notes: Sufficient forced cooling or an additional heat sinkallows TA to be higher than 71 °C (e.g. 85 °C), if TC max is notexceeded.

For -7 or -9 models at an ambient temperature TA of 85 °Cwith only convection cooling, the maximum permissiblecurrent for each output is approx. 40% of its nominal valueas per the figure below.


Thermal ProtectionA temperature sensor generates an internal inhibit signal,which disables the outputs if the case temperature exceedsTC max. The outputs are automatically re-enabled if thetemperature drops below this limit.It is recommended that continuous operation under simul-taneous extreme worst-case conditions of the followingthree parameters be avoided: Minimum input voltage,maximum output power, and maximum temperature.

Output ProtectionEach output (and the connected equipment) is protectedby a suppressor diode against overvoltage, which couldoccur due to a failure of the control circuit. In such a case,the suppressor diode becomes a short circuit. Thesuppressor diodes may smooth short overvoltagesresulting from dynamic laod changes, but they are notdesigned to withstand externally applied overvoltages.A short circuit at any of the two outputs will cause a shut-down of the other output. A red LED indicates an overloadcondition.

Note: Vo BR is specified in Electrical Output Data. If thisvoltage is exceeded, the suppressor diode generateslosses and may become a short circuit.

Parallel or Series Connection of ConvertersSingle or double-output models with equal output voltagecan be connected in parallel without any precautions usingoption T (current sharing). If the T pins are interconnected,all converters share the output current equally.Single-output models and/or main and second outputs ofdouble-output models can be connected in series with anyother (similar) output.Notes:

– Parallel connection of double-output models should alwaysinclude both, main and second output to maintain goodregulation of both outputs.

– Not more than 5 converters should be connected inparallel.

– Series connection of second outputs without involving theirmain outputs should be avoided as regulation may be poor.

– Models with a rated output voltage above 36 V needadditional measures to comply with the requirements ofSELV (Safe Extra Low Voltage).

– The maximum output current is limited by the output withthe lowest current limitation, if several outputs areconnected in series.0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

50 60 70 80 90 100

Io/Io nom

TA [°C]

1.0Forced cooling

05089a

TC max

Convection cooling




0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Io2/Io2 nom

13.5

14

14.5

15

15.5

16

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 100%Io1 = 50%Io1 = 10%

16.5 05084a

Fig. 14LS5320: ∆Vo2 versus Io2 with various Io1 (typ).

Output Voltage RegulationThe following figures apply to single-output or double-output models with parallel-connected outputs.

0 1 Io2/Io2 nom

10.5

11

11.5

12.0

12.5

13

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 100%Io1 = 50%Io1 = 10%

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

05083a

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Io2/Io2 nom

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

[V] Vo2

Io1 = 100%Io1 = 50%Io1 = 10%

05085a

Fig. 13Typical dynamic load regulation of Vo.

Fig. 15LS5540: Vo2 versus Io2 with various Io1 (typ).

Fig. 16LS5660: Vo2 versus Io2 with various Io1 (typ).

Fig. 12Typ output characteristic Vo1 versus Io1.

VoVo nom

0.98

0.5

00.5 1.0

Io

IoL

IoIo nom

05001a

Output Regulation of Double Output ModelsOutput 1 is under normal conditions regulated to Vo nom,independent of the output currents.Vo2 depends upon the load distribution. If both outputs areloaded with more than 10% of Io nom, the deviation of Vo2remains within ±5% of the value of Vo1. The following 3figures show the regulation with varying load distribution.Two outputs of an LS5000 model connected in parallel willbehave like the output of an LS4000 model.

Note: If output 2 is not used, we recommend connecting it inparallel with output 1. This ensures good regulation andefficiency.

Vod

Vod

td td

Vo ±1% Vo ±1%

t

t

≥ 10 ms ≥ 10 ms

Vo

0

0.5

1

Io/Io nom

05102b




Auxiliary Functions

Inhibit for Remote On and OffThe outputs may be enabled or disabled by means of alogic signal (TTL, CMOS, etc.) applied between the inhibitinput i and pin 18 (S– or Vo1–). In systems with severalconverters, this feature can be used to control theactivation sequence of the converters. If the inhibit functionis not required, connect the inhibit pin 18 to pin 14.

Note: If pin 18 is not connected, the output is disabled.

Vi+

Vi– Vo–

i

Vo+I inh

Vinh

06031




Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min – Vi max – 50 0.8 Vvoltage Vo = off 2.4 50

I inh Inhibit current Vinh = 0 – 400 µA

t r Rise time 30 ms

t f Fall time depending on Io

Fig. 19Output response as a function of inhibit control


1.6

0.8

0

–0.8–50

Vinh [V]

Iinh [mA]

–30 0–10 10 30 50

2.0

1.2

0.4

–0.4

Vinh = 0.8 V

Vo = on Vo = off

Vinh = 2.4 V

06032

0 t

t0

Inhibit

1

0.1

1Vo/Vo nom

tr tf

06001

Sense Lines (Single-Output Models)Important: Sense lines must always be connected! Incorrectlyconnected sense lines may activate the overvoltage protectionresulting in a permanent short-circuit of the output.

This feature allows for compensation of voltage dropsacross the connector contacts and if necessary, across theload lines. We recommend connecting the sense linesdirectly at the female connector.To ensure correct operation, both sense lines (S+, S–)should be connected to their respective power outputs(Vo1+ and Vo1–) and the voltage difference between anysense line and its respective power output (as measuredon the connector) should not exceed the following values:


Output Total voltage difference Voltage difference voltage between sense lines and between


5.1 V <0.5 V <0.25 V

12 V, 15 V, 24 V <1.0 V <0.25 V

Note: If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R-input control, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, theoutput currents must be reduced accordingly, so that Po nom isnot exceeded.




R

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–Vext

N~

L~

Rext

R'ext

14

16

16

14

+

S+

Vo1+

Vo1–

S–

N~

L~

R12

06003a

Fig. 20Output voltage control for single-output models LS 4000

Notes:

– The R-Function excludes option P (output voltage adjustmentby potentiometer).

If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R-inputcontrol, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, theoutput current(s) should be reduced accordingly so that Po nomis not exceeded.

– With double-output models the second output follows thevalue of the controlled main output.

– In case of parallel connection the output voltages should beindividually set within a tolerance of 1 – 2%.

Table 7a: Rext for Vo < Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); R'ext = not fitted

Vo nom = 5.1 V Vo nom = 12 V Vo nom = 15 V Vo nom = 24 VVo [V ] Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V ] 1 Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 Rext [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

0.5 0.43 2 4 0.81 2 4 0.62 4 8 0.811 0.98 3 6 1.33 4 8 1.47 6 12 1.331.5 1.65 4 8 2 6 12 2.67 8 16 22 2.61 5 10 2.87 8 16 4.53 10 20 2.872.5 3.83 6 12 4.02 9 18 6.04 12 24 4.023 5.76 7 14 5.62 10 20 8.06 14 28 5.623.5 8.66 8 16 8.06 11 22 11 16 32 8.064 14.7 9 18 12.1 12 24 16.2 18 36 12.14.5 30.1 10 20 20 13 26 26.1 20 40 205 200 11 22 42.2 14 28 56.2 22 44 44.2

Table 7b: R’ext for Vo > Vo nom; approximate values (Vi nom, Io nom, series E 96 resistors); Rext = not fitted


Vo [V] R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ] Vo [V] 1 R'ext [kΩΩΩΩΩ]

5.15 432 12.1 24.2 1820 15.2 30.4 1500 24.25 48.5 33205.2 215 12.2 24.4 931 15.4 30.8 768 24.5 49 16905.25 147 12.3 24.6 619 15.6 31.2 523 24.75 49.5 11305.3 110 12.4 24.8 475 15.8 31.6 392 25 50 8455.35 88.7 12.5 25 383 16 32 316 25.25 50.5 6985.4 75 12.6 25.2 316 16.2 32.4 267 25.5 51 5905.45 64.9 12.7 25.4 274 16.4 32.8 232 25.75 51.5 5115.5 57.6 12.8 25.6 243 16.5 33 221 26 52 442

13 26 196 26.25 52.5 40213.2 26.4 169 26.4 52.8 383

1 First column: Vo or Vo1; second column: double-output models with outputs in series connection

Programmable Output Voltage (R-Function)As a standard feature, the converters offer an adjustableoutput voltage, identified by letter R in the type designation.The control input R (pin 16) accepts either a control voltageVext or a resistor Rext to adjust the desired output voltage.When R is not connected, the output voltage is set to Vo nom.a) Adjustment by means of an external control voltage Vext

between pin 16 (R) and pin 14:The control voltage range is 0 – 2.75 V and allows anoutput voltage adjustment in the range of approximately0 – 110% Vo nom.

VoVext ≈ –––––– • 2.5 VVo nom

b) Adjustment by means of an external resistor:Depending upon the value of the required output voltagethe resistor shall be connectedeither: Between pin 16 and pin 14 (Vo < Vo nom) toachieve an output voltage adjustment range of approx.0 – 100% Vo nom.or: Between pin 16 and pin 12 (Vo > Vo nom) to achieve anoutput voltage adjustment range of approx. 100 – 110%Vo nom.

Warning:– Vext shall never exceed 2.75 VDC.

– The value of R'ext shall never be less than the lowest valueindicated in table R'ext (for V0 >V0 nom) to avoid damage to theconverter!




R'extRext

14

16

Vo1–

Vo1+

R

Vo2–

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo2+

12

10

8

6

4 +

–

Vo1

24 V30 V48 V

Co

06004a

Fig. 21Double-output models: R-input for output voltage control.Wiring for output voltage 24 V, 30 V ,or 48 V with bothoutputs connected in series. A ceramic capacitor (Co)across the load reduces ripple and spikes.


LEDs "OK ", "i " and "Io L" status versus input voltageConditions: Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 VVi uv = undervoltage lock-out, Vi ov = overvoltage lockout

LEDs "OK" and "Io L" status versus output currentConditions: Vi min – Vi max, TC ≤ TC max, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i " versus case temperatureConditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom, Vinh ≤ 0.8 V

LED "i " versus VinhConditions: Vi min – Vi max , Io ≤ Io nom, TC ≤ TC max

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj


Vi

Vi abs

OKi

Vo1 > 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

Io nom IoL

Io

OKIo L

Vo1 < 0.95 to 0.98Vo1 adj

TC

i


Vi inh

i

+50 V+0.8 V +2.4 V-50 V

Vinh threshold

Io L


06002_011106

Test JacksTest jacks (pin diameter 2 mm) for measuring the mainoutput voltage Vo or Vo1 are located at the front of theconverter. The positive test jack is protected by a seriesresistor (see Functional Description, block diagrams).The voltage measured at the test jacks is slightly lowerthan the value at the output terminals.

Fig. 22LED indicators






Electrostatic IEC / EN 4 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp


Electromagnetic IEC / EN 3 antenna 10 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 – 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

10 V/m 50% duty cycle, n.a. 900 ±5 MHz yes A200 Hz repetition

frequency

Electrical fast IEC / EN 4 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransients/burst 61000-4-4 i/c, +i /–i 4000 Vp



Surges IEC / EN 3 i/c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 4 +i/– i 2000 Vp 2 Ω surges per

coupling mode

Conducted IEC / EN 3 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes Adisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBµV) 1 kHz1 i = input, o = output, c = case


Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A metal oxide VDR together with an input fuse and an inputfilter form an effective protection against high input transient

Battery Charging/Temperature SensorThe LS series converters are suitable for battery chargerapplications. For an optimum battery charging and lifeexpectancy of the battery an external temperature sensorcan be connected to the R-input. The sensor is mounted asclose as possible to the battery pole and adjusts the outputvoltage according to the battery temperature.

2.10

2.15

2.20

2.25

2.30

2.35

2.40


–20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C

06139a


Vo nom

Fig. 24Trickle charge voltage versus temperature for definedtemperature coefficient.

Powersupply

Load

–+

Input Vo–

R

Temperature sensor

ϑ

03099d

Battery

Vo+

+

voltages, which typically occur in most installations. The SSeries has been successfully tested to the followingspecifications:

Immunity

Depending upon cell voltage and the temperaturecoefficient of the battery, different sensor types areavailable, see Accessories.




Fig. 25Conducted emissions (peak) at the neutral input accordingto EN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom (LS4601-6R).The line input performs quite similar.

Fig. 26Typical radiated emissions according to EN 55011/22,antenna 10 m distance, measured at Vi nom and Io nom

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

500

1000

[dBmV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07038

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

dBµV LS4601-7R, Peak N, Conducted 0.15 - 30 MHz, Divina, Jan. 2006

EN 55022 B

Emissions




Temperatures

Table 11: MTBF calculated according to MIL-Hdbk 217F


MTBF LS 4000/5000 514 000 88 000 38 000 35 000 h

Reliability


Test Method Standard Test Conditions StatusCab Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78:2001 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Converter not

steady state MIL-STD-810D sect. 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % operatingDuration: 56 days

Ea Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27:1987 Acceleration amplitude: 100 gn = 981 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Eb Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29:1987 Acceleration amplitude: 40 gn = 392 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6:1995 Acceleration amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 514.3 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating


Fn Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-64 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converterbroad band Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operating(digital control) Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rms

Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52:1996 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter not(sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle operatingNaCl solution) Storage: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity


1 Set of DIN rail mounting brackets, see Accessories


Temperature Standard -7 Option -9Characteristics Conditions min max min max UnitTA Ambient temperature Converter –25 71 –40 71 °CTC Case temperature 1 operating –25 95 –40 95TS Storage temperature Not operational –40 100 –55 100





111

(3U

)

168.5

60

4.5

19.7

9.5

29.9

51.5

30.3

20.3

12.1

10.3

7.0

3.27

7 TE 5 TE

Test jacks

Option P (Vo)

Option D (Vti)

LED OK (green)

LED i (red)

LED IoL (red)

Option D (Vto)

25.9


(171.0 to 171.9)

50

11.8

= Ø 3.5= Ø 4.1

(+/–)

152

100

M4

55

81528

0900

4_11

0705


d

Mechanical DataDimensions in mm. The converters are designed to be inserted intoa 19" rack, 160 mm long, according to IEC 60297-3.

Notes:

– d ≥ 15 mm, recommended minimum distance to nextpart in order to ensure proper air circulation at fulloutput power.

– Free air location: the converter should be mountedwith fins in a vertical position to achieve maximumairflow through the heat sink.

Note: Long case with option B2, elongated by 60mm for 220 mm rack depth, is available on request.(No LEDs, no test jacks.)

Fig. 27Aluminium case S02 with heatsink, black finish and selfcooling, weight ≈1.25 kg

Fig. 28Aluminium case S02 with option B1 (cooling plate), blackfinish and self cooling. Total weight ≈1.15 kg

EuropeanProjection

EuropeanProjection

111

(3U

)

17.3 133.4168

101

547.2

1585

M 4

5


50

(171.0 to 171.9)

3.27

7 TE 4 TE

09003a




Fig. 28View of converter's male connector, type H15


Connector Pin AllocationThe connector pin allocation table defines the electricalpotentials and the physical pin positions on the H15connector. The protective earth is connected trough aleading pin (no. 24), ensuring that it makes contact with thefemale connector first.


Pin Connector type H15

no. LS4000 LS5000

4Vo1+ Positive output Vo2+ Pos. output 2

6

8Vo1– Negative output Vo2– Neg. output 2

10

12 S+ Sense+ Vo1+ Output 1

14 S– Sense– Vo1– Output 1

16 R 1 Control of Vo1 R 1 Control of Vo1

18 i Inhibit i Inhibit

20 D 3 Save data D 3 Save data

V 3 ACFAIL

22 T 4 Current share T 4 Current share

24 2 Protective earth Protective earth

26N∼ Neutral line N∼ Neutral line

28 30

L∼ Phase line L∼ Phase line32

1 Not connected, if option P is fitted2 Leading pin (pre-connecting)3 Option D excludes option V and vice versa. Pin is not

connected, if neither option D or V is fitted.4 Not connected, if option T is not fitted

Installation InstructionsImportant: These products have a power factor correction(PFC) and are intended to replace the LS1000 and LS2000series converters in order to comply with IEC/EN 61000-3-2.

Switch off the system and check for hazardousvoltages before altering any connection!The S series converters are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by anindustrial assembly operation or by professional installers.Installation must strictly follow the national safetyregulations in compliance with the enclosure, mounting,creepage, clearance, casualty, markings and segregationrequirements of the end-use application.Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H15 (see: Accessories). Other installationmethods may not meet the safety requirements.Pin no. 24 () is reliably connected with the case. For safetyreasons it is essential to connect this pin reliably toprotective earth. See Safety of Operator-AccessibleOutput Circuits.The phase input 30/32 (L~) is connected via a built-in fuse(see: Input Fuse), which is designed to protect in the caseof a converter failure. An additional external fuse, suitablefor the application, might be necessary in the wiring to theother line input 26/28 (N~) if:


• Neutral and earth impedance is high or undefined • Phase and neutral of the mains are not defined or

cannot be assigned to the corresponding terminals (L~to phase and N~ to neutral).

Notes:– If the inhibit function is not used, pin no. 18 (i) should be

connected to pin no. 14 (S–/Vo1–) to enable the output(s).

– Do not open the converters, or warranty will be invalidated.

– Due to high current values, the converters provide twointernally parallel contacts for certain paths (pins 4/6, 8/10,26/28 and 30/32). It is recommended to connect load andsupply to both female connector pins of each path in orderto keep the voltage drop low and to not overstress theconnector contacts with high currents.

– If the second output of double-output models is not used,connect it parallel with the main output.

Make sure that there is sufficient airflow available forconvection cooling. This should be verified by measuringthe case temperature, when the converter is installed andoperated in the end-use application. See ThermalConsiderations.Ensure that a converter failure (e.g., by an internal short-circuit) does not result in a hazardous condition. See alsoSafety of Operator-Accessible Output Circuit.

S10002b

32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

30 26 22 18 14 10 6





Standards and ApprovalsThe converters are approved according to UL 60950-1,CSA 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, and EN 60950-1.

The converters correspond to Class I equipment and havebeen evaluated for:

• Building-in • Basic insulation between input and case based on 250

VAC, and double or reinforced insulation between inputand output(s).

• Basic insulation between output(s) and case based on200 VAC.

• Functional insulation between outputs. • Overvoltage category II • Pollution degree 2 environment • Max. altitude: 2000 m. • The converters fulfill the requirements of a fire enclosure.CB-scheme is available: SI-1819 (IEC 60950-1:2001)

All boards and components of the converters are coatedwith a protective lacquer.

The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillancein accordance with the above mentioned UL standards andISO 9001:2000.

Cleaning AgentsIn order to avoid possible damage, any penetration ofcleaning fluids is to be prevented, since the power suppliesare not hermetically sealed.

Protection DegreeCondition: Female connector fitted to the unit. • IP 30: All models except those with option P, and except

those with option D or V including a potentiometer.

• IP 20: All models fitted with option P, or with option D orV with potentiometer.

Leakage CurrentsLeakage currents flow due to internal leakage capacitanceand Y-capacitors. The current values are proportional tothe supply voltage are specified in the table Leakagecurrents.

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory asroutine test in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN60950 and should not be repeated in the field. Power-Onewill not honor any warranty claims resulting from electricstrength field tests.


Characteristic Class I UnitLS4000, LS5000

Maximum earth Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 3.5 mAleakage current Specified value at 255 V, 50 Hz 0.82

Table 14: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output(s) to Output 1 to Unitand output(s) case output 2

Electric Factory test >1 s 2.8 1 1.4 0.15 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 2.0 1.0 0.1 kVACtest to factory testInsulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >100 2 MΩCreapage distances ≥ 3.2 3 -- -- mm

1 According to EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950, subassemblies connecting input to output are pre-tested with 5.6 kVDC or 4 kVAC.2 Tested at 150 VDC3 Input to outputs: 6.4 mm




Safety of operator accessible output circuitIf the output circuit of an converter is operator-accessible, itshall be an SELV circuit according to IEC/EN 60950 .The table below shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit of an S SeriesAC-DC converter to be an SELV circuit according to IEC/EN60950 up to a configured output voltage of 36 V (sum ofnominal output voltages connected in series) . Fig. 30

Schematic safety concept.

AC-DCcon-

verter

Mains SELV

Earth connection

+

–

~

~

10021a

Fuse

Fuse




Mains Double or reinforced Earthed case1 and installation SELV circuit≤ 250 VAC according to the applicable standards 1 The earth connection has to be provided by the installer according to the relevant safety standards, e.g. IEC/EN 60950.

-9 Extended Temperature RangeOption -9 extends the operational ambient temperaturerange from –25 to 71 °C (standard) to – 40 to 71 °C. Thepower supplies provide full nominal output power withconvection cooling. Option -9 excludes inrush currentlimitation by NTC and option E is requested.



-9 Extended operational ambient temperature range TA = – 40 to 71 °C

E Electronic inrush current limitation circuitry Active inrush current limitation

P Potentiometer for fine adjustment of output voltage Adjustment range +10/– 60% of Vo nom, excludes R input

D 1 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry Safe data signal output (D0 – DD)

V 1 2 Input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry ACFAIL signal according to VME specifications (V0, V2, V3)

T Current sharing Interconnect T-pins if paralleling outputs (max 5 converters)

B1, B2 Cooling plate (160 or 220 mm long) Replaces standard heat sink, allowing direct chassis-mounting 1 Option D excludes option V and vice versa 2 Only available for Vo = 5.1 V

E Inrush Current LimitationThe converters may be supplemented by an electroniccircuit replacing the standard built-in NTC to achieve anenhanced inrush current limiting function.

Note: Subsequent switch-on cycles at start-up are limited tomax. 10 cycles during the first 20 seconds (cold converter) andthen to max. 1 cycle every 8 s.


Characteristics LS UnitVi = 230 VAC typ max

Iinr p Peak inrush current – 25.3 A

t inr Inrush current duration 35 50 ms

Inpu

t Filt

er

Control

Con

vert

er

FET

CiRIRSRectifier

PF

C -

cor

rect

.

1100

1a

+





Fig. 34Paralleling of single-output models using option T withthe sense lines connected at the load

1 Lead lines should have equal length and cross section andshould run in the same cable loom.

2 Diodes recommended in redundant operation only

Fig. 35Paralleling of double-output models with the outputsconnected in series, and using option T with power bus.Note that the signal at the T pins is referenced to Vo1–.

Fig. 32Inrush current with option EVi = 230 VAC, f i = 50 Hz, Po = Po nom

T Current SharingThis option ensures that the output currents areapproximately shared between all parallel-connectedconverters, hence increasing system reliability. To use thisfacility, simply interconnect the T pins of all converters andmake sure that the reference for the T signal, pin 14 (S– orthe Vo1–), are also connected together. The load linesshould have equal length and cross section to ensure equalvoltage drops.

Fig. 33An example of poor wiring for connection in parallel

P PotentiometerA potentiometer provides an output voltage adjustmentrange of +10/–60% of Vo nom. It is accessible through a holein the front cover. Option P is not available for batterycharger models and is not recommended for convertersconnected in parallel.Option P excludes the R-function. With double output unitsboth outputs are influenced by the potentiometer setting(doubling the voltage, if the outputs are in series).If the output voltages are increased above Vo nom via R inputcontrol, option P setting, remote sensing or option T, theoutput current(s) should be reduced accordingly, so thatPo nom is not exceeded.

Not more than 5 converters should be connected inparallel. The R pins should be left open-circuit. If not, theoutput voltages must be individually adjusted prior toparalleling within 1 to 2% or the R pins should beconnected together.Parallel connection of converters with option P is notrecommended.

Load

1

1

1

2

2

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

N~

L~

T

N~

L~

S+

Vo+

Vo–

S–

T

1


11036a

Converter

Converter

Load


+ –Power bus

Converter

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

Converter

Vo2–

Vo2+

Vo1–

Vo1+

T

11037a

N~

L~

L~

N~

Vo+

Vo–

Vo+

Vo–

Load

Vo+

Vo–

11003_102005

15

Ii [A]

10

5

0

–5

–10

0 20 40 60 80 ms

t tinr



20

10 50 7030

11002a




D Undervoltage MonitorThe input and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitoperates independently of the built-in input undervoltagelockout circuit. A logic "low" (JFET output) or "high" signal(NPN output) is generated at the D output (pin 20), whenone of the monitored voltages drops below the preselectedthreshold level Vt. This signal is referenced to Vo– /Vo1–.

Table 18: Undervoltage monitoring functions

Output type Monitoring Minimum adjustment range Typical hysteresis Vho [% of Vt]JFET NPN Vb 4 Vo1 of threshold level Vt for Vt min – Vt max

Vtb 4 Vto Vho

D1 D5 no yes - 3.5 – 40 V 1 2.5 – 0.6

D2 D6 yes no 355 VDC - -

D3 D7 yes yes 355 VDC (0.95 – 0.985 Vo1) 2 "0"

D4 D8 no yes - (0.95 – 0.985 Vo1) 2 "0"

D0 D9 no yes - 3.5 – 40 V 3 2.5 – 0.6

yes yes 355 VDC 3.5 – 40 V 3 2.5 – 0.6

DD yes yes 355 VDC 3.5 – 40 V 1 2.5 – 0.61 Threshold level adjustable by potentiometer2 Fixed value. Tracking if Vo1 is adjusted via R-input, option P or sense lines.3 The threshold level permanently adjusted according to customer specification ±2% at 25 °C. Any value within the specified range

is basically possible but causes a special type designation in addition to the standard option designations (D0/D9)!4 Vb is the voltage generated by the boost regulator. When Vb drops below 355 V, the D signal triggers and the output(s) will remain

powered during nearly the full hold-up time t h.

The D output recovers, when the monitored voltagesexceed Vt + Vh. The threshold level Vbi is adjusted in thefactory. The threshold level Vto is either adjusted by apotentiometer, accessible through a hole in the front cover,or adjusted in the factory to a fixed value specified by thecustomer.Option D exists in various versions D0 – DD, as shown inthe following table.

Fig. 36Option D0 – D4: JFET output, I D ≤ 2.5 mA

NPN output (D5 – DD):Pin D is internally connected via the collector-emitter pathof a NPN transistor to the negative potential of output 1. VD< 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitored voltage level(Vi and/or Vo1) > Vt + Vh. The current ID through the opencollector should not exceed 20 mA. The NPN output is notprotected against external overvoltages. VD should notexceed 40 V.


Vb or Vo1 < Vt high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 40 V

Vb and Vo1 > Vt + Vh low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 20 mA

JFET output (D0 – D4):Pin D is internally connected via the drain-source path of aJFET (self-conducting type) to the negative potential ofoutput 1. VD ≤ 0.4 V (logic low) corresponds to a monitoredvoltage level (Vi and/or Vo1) <Vt. The current ID through theJFET should not exceed 2.5 mA. The JFET is protected bya 0.5 W Zener diode of 8.2 V against external overvoltages.


Vb or Vo1 < Vt low, L, VD ≤ 0.4 V at ID = 2.5 mA

Vb and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, ID ≤ 25 µA at VD = 5.25 V

Fig. 37Option D5 – DD: NPN output, Vo1 ≤ 40 V, ID ≤ 20 mA

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11006

Vo1+

Vo1–

D

VD

ID

Rp

Inpu

t

11007




0

10.95

0

Vb [VDC]

0

t

t

t

tlow min

4 tlow min4 thigh min

th1

358

355


VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

t

Vo1Vo1 nom

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4th

1

0

0

VD high

VD low

VD

0

JFET

NPN

Vo1

VD high

VD low

VD

tlow min4

Vto


0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

0

ID high

ID low

ID

t

t

t

t

2

3 3 3 3

Vo1 nomVto +Vho



11044b

1 Hold-up time see: Electrical Input Data.2 With output voltage monitoring, hold-up time t h = 0.3 The signal remains high, if the D output is connected

to an external source.4 t low min = 100 – 170 ms, typically 130 ms.

Fig. 38Relationship between Vb, Vo1, VD, Vo1/Vo1 nom versus time


Version of D Vb <<<<< Vt resp. Vo <<<<< Vt Vb >>>>> Vt + Vh resp. Vo >>>>> Vt Configuration






V output (V2, V3):Connector pin V is internally connected to the opencollector of an NPN transistor. The emitter is connected tothe negative potential of the main output. VV ≤ 0.6 V (logiclow) corresponds to a monitored voltage level (Vi and/or Vo)<Vt. The current IV through the open collector should notexceed 50 mA. The NPN output is not protected againstexternal overvoltages. VV should not exceed 60 V.

Vb, Vo status V output, VV

Vb or Vo < Vt low, L, VV ≤ 0.6 V at IV = 50 mA

Vb and Vo1 > Vt + Vh high, H, IV ≤ 25 µA at VV = 5.1 V


Option V operates independently of the built-in inputundervoltage lockout circuit. A logic "low" signal isgenerated at pin 20 as soon as one of the monitoredvoltages drops below the preselected threshold level Vt.The return for this signal is Vo–. The V output recovers,when the monitored voltage(s) exceed(s) Vt + Vh. Thethreshold level Vtb is adjusted in the factory to 355 VDC.The threshold level Vto either is adjusted in the factory to acustomer-specified value.

V ACFAIL Signal (VME)

Available only for models with Vo = 5.1 V.This option defines an undervoltage monitoring circuit forthe input and main output voltage. It generates the ACFAILsignal (V signal) according to the VME standard.The low state level of the ACFAIL signal is specified at asink current of IV ≤ 48 mA to VV ≤ 0.6 V (open-collectoroutput of an NPN transistor). The pull-up resistor feedingthe open-collector output should be placed on the VMEback plane.After the ACFAIL signal has gone low, the VME standardrequires a hold-up time th of at least 4 ms before the 5.1 Voutput drops at full load to 4.875 V. This hold-up time th isprovided by the capacitance supporting the boost voltageVb. See: Hold-up Time.


V output Monitoring Minimum adjustment (VME compatible) Vb Vo1 range of threshold level

Vt b Vto

V2 yes no 355 VDC 1 –

V3 yes yes 355 VDC 1 0.95 – 0.985 Vo1 2

1 Option V monitors the boost regulator output voltage. Thetrigger level is adjusted in the factory to 355 VDC.

2 Fixed value between 95% and 98.5% of Vo1.

Vo1+

Vo1–

V

VV

IV

Rp

Inpu

t

11009




3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vb [VDC]

0

t

t

358355


VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

t

Vo

0

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V2

Vi

Vti

4


0

VV high

VV low

VV

3

Vti + Vhi

tlow min 2 tlow min

2tlow min 2

3 3

44

VV high

VV low

VV

0

V3

t

3

tlow min 2tlow min

2

3 3

th 1

2.0 V

th 1

4

34

tlow min 2

V3

5.1 V4.875 V

0

Vo

2.0 V



11045a

t

t

t

t

Fig. 40Vcb, Vo, VV, IV, Vo /Vo nom versus time.

1 VME request: minimum 4 ms2 t low min = 40 – 200 ms, typ 80 ms3 VV level not defined at Vo < 2.0 V4 The V signal drops simultaneously with the output

voltage, if the pull-up resistor R P is connected to Vo+;the V signal remains high if R P is connected to anexternal source.

B1 Cooling Plate (see Mechanical Data)Where a cooling surface is available, we recommend theuse of a cooling plate (option B1) instead of the standardheatsink. The mounting system should ensure sufficientcooling capacity to guarantee that the maximum casetemperature TC max is not exceeded. The cooling capacity iscalculated by:

(100% – η)PLoss = –––––––––– • Vo • Io

η

Efficiency η see: Model Selection

Elongated case for 220 mm rack depth: Option B2.




65l


adhesive tape

30

15

09125


TECHNICAL REVISIONS - The appearance of products, including safety agency certifications pictured on labels, may change depend-ing on the date manufactured. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AccessoriesA variety of electrical and mechanical accessoriesare available including:– Front panels for 19" rack: Schroff 12 TE /3U

[HZZ00845] and 12 TE /6U [HZZ00833], orIntermas 12 TE /3U [HZZ00732]

– Mating H15 connectors with screw, solder, fast-on or press-fit terminals.

– Cable connector housing: Screw version[HZZ00141] or retention clip version[HZZ00142]

– Connector retention clips (2x) [HZZ01209]– Connector retention brackets CRB [HZZ01216]– Coding clips for connector coding [HZZ00202]– Chassis mounting plate CMB-S [HZZ00616] for

fastening to a chassis with only frontal access– DIN-rail mounting assembly DMB-K/S [HZZ0615]– Wall-mounting plate K02 [HZZ01213] for models with

option B1– Additional external input and output filters– Battery sensor [S-KSMH...] for using the converter as

battery charger. Different cell characteristics can beselected. See Battery Charging/Temperature Sensor

For additional accessory product information, seethe accessory data sheets listed with each productseries or individually at www.power-one.comthrough the following menus: "Select Products","Select Data Sheets & Application Notes".


Connectorretention clip Different front panelsConnector retention bracket SRB

EuropeanProjection


DIN-rail mountingassembly DMB-K/S

Chassis mountingbrackets CMB-S

Wall-mountingplate

20 to 30 Ncm




Rolf Baldauf Johann MilavecVice President Engineering Director Projects and IP


We


declare under our sole responsibility that all K and S Series AC-DC and DC-DCconverters carrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


• EN 61204: 1995 ( = IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements

• EN 60950-1: 2000 (IEC 60950-1: 2000)Safety of information technology equipment.

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe cor-rect installation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product withthe LVD. All K and S Series AC-DC and DC-DC converters are components,intended exclusively for inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assem-bly operation or by professional installers. They must not be operated as standalone products.





®

T Series Data Sheet500 Watt AC-DC Converters


Features

1686.6"

1415.6"28 TE

1114.4"3 U

• Universal AC input range 70 to 255 VAC with PFC• Class I equipment• DC output for 24 and 48 V loads• Battery charging for 24 and 48 V batteries with remote

temperature control• 4 kVAC I/O electric strength test voltage• Telecom rectifier applications• Immune to transients and disturbances according to

VDE 160 and IEC/EN 61000-4-2,-3,-4,-5,-6• Very high efficiency, typically 93%• Power factor >0.96, harmonics according to IEC/EN

61000-3-2, low RFI• No inrush current, hot swap capability• High power density, rugged mechanical design, all

boards covered with a protective lacquer• Very compact 19" cassette (28 TE, 3 U, 160 mm)

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950 and UL 60950-1

DescriptionThe T Series converters are electrically isolated AC-DCconverters with an output power of up to 550 watts. For higherpower requirements several converters may be connected inparallel.

The input is ideally adapted to the mains: Full power factorcorrection, no inrush current, low RFI level, and high transientand surge immunity are key design features. A T Seriesconverter behaves similar to a resistive load.

The LT models can be operated from a universal AC-inputrange from 85 to 255 VAC. It is the preferred type for 230 VACmains, whereas the UT models are optimized for 110/120 VAC mains. The output delivers an electrically isolatedSafety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and is short-circuit and no-load proof. Depending on the type, two output characteristicsare available, intended either for rectifier applications or forbattery charging purposes.

The latter types can be integrated into systems, where theoutput voltage is backed-up by a battery. The float charge of thebattery can be set by a cell-voltage selector switch according tothe battery type used. These converters are equipped with atemperature sensor input, in order to improve the lifeexpectancy of the battery.

The rectifier models are suited for DC-bus applications atconstant voltage. As the output voltage is SELV, evenelectrically non-isolated switching regulators, such as the PSxmodels, may be connected to the output.

The LT/UT1701 models are especially optimized to builddistributed power systems together with the 48Q or CQ SeriesDC-DC converters, as the signalling capabilities of both familiesare matched. Distributed power systems have as oneadvantage less power losses over load lines and fewerregulation problems.

Power-One also offers backplanes for fast and simple set-upof 19" DIN-rack systems with T Series converters; seeAccessories.

Description .......................................................................... 1Model Selection .................................................................. 2Functional Description ........................................................ 3Electrical Input Data ............................................................ 4Electrical Output Data ......................................................... 6Control Features of the Battery Chargers ..........................11Auxiliary Functions ............................................................ 13Different Configurations and Applications ......................... 18

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................... 21Environmental Conditions ................................................. 22Mechanical Data ............................................................... 24Safety and Installation Instructions ................................... 25Description of Options ...................................................... 28Accessories ....................................................................... 29EC Declaration of Conformity ........................................... 32



®


Part Number DescriptionL T 1 7 40 -7 D F Z B1

Operating input range Vi , fi70 – 140 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz .......................... U85 – 255 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz ........................... L

Series ............................................................................... TNumber of outputs ........................................................... 1Output setting voltage Vo set

24, 27.25 V .................................................. 248, 54.5 V .................................................... 740.9 V .......................................................... 8Recifier version .................................... 01, 02 3

Battery charger version ............................. 40 4

Other voltages .................................. 00 to 99Ambient temperature range TA

–25 to 71 °C ................................................ -7Customer specific ............................. -0 to -6

Auxiliary functions and options 1Undervoltage monitor (option) .................... DInput fuse externally accessible .................. FCell voltage selector switch ......................... Z 2

Baseplate (option) ..................................... B1

1 See Description of Options2 Only for T1240/1740/18403 No input for battery temperature sensor4 With input for battery temperature sensor

Example: LT1740-7Z: AC-DC converter, input voltage range 85 – 255 VAC, single output 50.5 – 56.5 V, 10 A,operational ambient temperature –25 to 71 °C, with cell voltage selector switch.

Model SelectionTable 1: All models. For all models and options, contact Power-One for availibility and lead times !

Output voltage Output current Operating input voltage range and efficiency Options

Vo set at Vi nom, 1/2 Io nom Io nom Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin 1 Vi min – Vi max ηηηηηmin 1

[VDC] [A] 70 – 140 VAC [%] 85 – 255 VAC [%]

24.25 16 UT1201-7 2, 4 91 LT1201-7 2, 6 91 D

25.25 – (27.25) – 28.25 14.5 UT1240-7Z 4, 3 91 LT1240-7Z 6, 3 92 F

37.9 – (40.88) – 42.4 11 – – LT1840-7Z 6, 3 92B1

48 11 – – LT1702-7 2, 6 93

54.5 10 UT1701-7 5 92 LT1701-7 6 93

50.5 – (54.5) – 56.5 10 UT1740-7Z 5, 3 92 LT1740-7Z 6, 3 93

1 Efficiency measured at Vi nom and Io nom.2 Instead of output power limitation, output current limitation.3 Output voltage range controlled by input Vcr, remote temperature sensor, and cell voltage selector switch.4 Reduced output power for Vi = 70 – 95 VAC; see Output Power Limitation.5 Reduced output power for Vi = 70 – 100 VAC; see Output Power Limitation.6 Reduced output power for Vi = 85 – 155 VAC; see Output Power Limitation.

Product MarkingBasic type designation, applicable safety approval andrecognition marks, CE mark, warnings, pin designation,Power-One company logo.

Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal outputvoltage and current, degree of protection, batch no., serial no.,and data code including production site, version, and date ofproduction.



®


Functional DescriptionThe T Series AC-DC converters are primary controlled with aconstant switching frequency of 65.5 kHz. The power factorcorrected single step conversion of the line input voltage to alow output voltage results in extremely high efficiency.

The input voltage is fed via input fuse, filter, and rectifier to themain transformer. The wideband input filter with small inputcapacitance generates virtually no inrush current. Transientsuppressors protect the converter against overvoltage andsurges. An auxiliary converter generates an internal supplyvoltage for the primary control logic. The input voltagewaveform is sensed by the primary control logic to provideactive power factor correction.

The main transformer is connected to a rectifier, large outputcapacitors, and an efficient output filter, which ensures lowoutput ripple and spikes, and provides the necessary hold-uptime. The output voltage is fed back to the primary control logicvia a signal transformer.

The inhibit signal and the T failure signal are transferred by asecond signal transformer (no opto-couplers are used !).

System Good and Output OK are each indicated by a greenLED; inhibit and T System Failure by a red LED.

System Good and Power Down are available as open collectorsignals at the connector. The threshold level of the PowerDown signal can be externally adjusted at the D set input.

Test sockets at the front panel allow for the measurement ofthe output voltage.

The battery charger version provides additional features tocontrol the output voltage. To set it to different battery float-charge voltages, a 16-step selector switch (Z) is standard.

A control input to control the output voltage by an externaltemperature sensor is available at a control pin. A trim-potentiometer allows fine adjustment of the output voltage.

4

6

10

L~

N~ Out

put f

ilter

Isol

atio

n 4

kVA

C

12

16

18

20

24

26

28

30

32

Vo+

Vo+

HC+

HC –

Vo–

Sys In

Sys Out

i/Vcr

D

D set

Vo–

+

Cy

Cy

8

Inpu

t filt

er

Inpu

t filt

er

Inpu

t filt

er

Controllogic

Voltageand

systemmonitor

CyCy

Auxiliaryconverter

NTC

22

14Fuse

Cy

PZ

Cy

03043a

–

Fig. 1Block diagram



®


Electrical Input DataGeneral condition: TA = 20 °CTable 2a: Input data of LT models

Input LT 12xx LT 17xx LT18xx Unit

Characteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage range 47 – 63 Hz 2 155 255 155 255 130 255 VACwith full output power

Vi red Operating input voltage range with 85 155 85 155 85 130reduced output power 1

Vi (Vi nom) Rated (nominal) input voltage 50 – 60 Hz 2 100 (230) 240 100 (230) 240 100 (230) 240

I i nom Nominal input current Vi nom, Po nom 1.9 2.6 2.2 A

I i L Input current limit 3 4 4

Pi 0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max, I o = 0 6 8 8 W

Pi inh Input power when inhibited Vi min – Vi max, inhibit = low 3 3 3

PF Power factor Vi nom, Io nom 96 98 98 %

Ci Input capacitance 3 4 4 4 µF

ton Switch on delay Vi nom, Po nom 400 400 400 ms

vi RFI Input RFI level 4 Io = Io nom B B BEN 55014, EN 55011/022

Vi p Input overvoltage protection 5 264 264 264 VAC

Vi L Input undervoltage lockout 75 75 75

Table 2b: Input data of UT models

Input UT 12xx UT 17xx Unit

Characteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage range 47 – 63 Hz 2 95 140 95 140 VACwith full output power

Vi red Operating input voltage range with 70 95 70 100reduced output power 1

Vi (Vi nom) Rated (nominal) input voltage 50 – 60 Hz 2 100 (110) 125 100 (110) 125

I i nom Nominal input current Vi nom, Po nom 3.8 5.2 A

I i L Input current limit 3 4

Pi 0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max, I o = 0 6 8 W

Pi inh Input power when inhibited Vi min – Vi max, inhibit = low 3 3

PF Power factor Vi nom, Io nom 98 98 %

Ci Input capacitance 3 4 4 µF

ton Switch on delay Vi nom, Po nom 400 400 ms

vi RFI Input RFI level 4 Io = Io nom B BEN 55014, EN 55011/022

Vi p Input overvoltage protection 5 165 165 VAC

Vi L Input undervoltage lockout 65 65

1 See Input current limitation2 Contact Power-One for operation with other input frequencies or different waveforms !3 Inrush current stays factor 10 below ETS 300132-1.4 150 kHz – 30 MHz: CISPR 11/22/EN 55011/22 class B, 30 – 300 MHz: CISPR14/EN 55014



®


0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

0.82

0.84

0.86

0.88

0.90

0.92

0.94

0.96

0.98

1.00PF

Io [A]

UT1740-7Z at Vi = 110 VACLT1740-7Z at Vi = 230 VAC

04023a

Table 3: Fuse Type


LT SPF 6.3 A, 250 V 0001.1012

UT SPT 10 A, 250 V 0001.2514

Input FuseAn input fuse (5 × 20 mm) in series with the input line (L)inside the converter protects against severe defects; see alsoSafety and Installation Instructions. For applications withaccessible fuse, see Option F.

Fig. 3Harmonic distortion at input LT1740-7Z, Vi = Vinom, Io = Io nom

Fig. 4Harmonic distortion at input UT1740-7Z, Vi = Vinom, Io = Io nom

Inrush CurrentThe converters exhibit an input capacitance of only 4 µF,resulting in a low and short peak current, when the converteris connected to the mains. During switch-on, the convertercurrent can rise up to the input current limit I i L.

As a direct result of the low and short inrush current andcontrolled charging procedure of the output capacitors, theconverter can be hot swapped. The LT inrush current is afactor 10 smaller than defined in the ETS 300132-1 standardfor Telecom systems. However the converter should beplugged-in smoothly, giving time to the output capacitors to becharged.

Input Under- /Overvoltage LockoutIf the specified input voltage range Vi is exceeded, theconverter stops operation temporarily resulting in reducedoutput power and increased RFI. The input is protected byvaristors. Continuous overvoltage will destroy the converter.

If the sinusoidal input voltage stays below the input under-voltage lockout threshold Vi, the converter will be inhibited.

Power Factor, HarmonicsPower factor correction PFC is achieved by controlling theinput current waveform synchronously with the input voltage.

Fig. 2Power factor

Fig. 5Efficiency versus load of LT1701

3 5 7 9 11 13 17 Harm.15

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0

mA/W3.5

04026a

Limit class D according to IEC/EN 61000-3-2

3 5 7 9 11 13 17 Harm.15

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0

mA/W3.5

04025a

Limit class D accordingto IEC/EN 61000-3-2

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

0.82

0.84

0.86

0.88

0.90

0.92

0.94

0.96

Io [A]

Vi = 110 VAC Ui = 230 VAC

04024a



®


PFC is active in all operating conditions (voltage regulation,output power limitation, current limitation).

The power factor control also works with different input voltagewaveforms and frequencies. For special applications withdifferent frequencies or non-sinusoidal waveforms, pleasecontact Power-One.

EfficiencyThe extremely high efficiency (see fig. 5) is achieved by usinga single-step power factor corrected topology together with themost advanced technology in power conversion. It allows avery compact design in a fully enclosed case without forcedcooling.

Electrical Output DataGeneral conditions:

• TA = 20 °C, unless specified.• Vi = 230 VAC, f i = 50 Hz

Table 4: Output data of rectifier versions

Output LT/UT 1201 LT/UT 1701 LT 1702 Unit


Vo set Output voltage adjustment Vi nom 24.25 54.5 48.0 V

Vo set tol Vo setting tolerance Io = 0.5 • Io nom 24.0 24.5 54.25 54.75 47.75 48.25

Vo Output voltage over input voltage and load 1 Vi min – Vi max, 23.35 24.95 52.8 55.8 46.3 49.3(0.01 – 1) • Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection by second control loop 32.5 59.3 59.3

αVo Temperature coefficient of output voltage – 5 – 5 – 5 mV/K

Io nom Nominal output current 16 10 11 A

Io L Current limit 2 Vo = 20 V 18 4 14.5 14.5

Po L Output power limit 2 Vi nom 400 550 550 W

vo Output voltage noise Low frequency Io nom 850 1000 1005 mVpp

Switching freq. IEC/EN 61204 40 40 40

TotalBW = 20 MHz

900 1005 1100

∆Vo I Static load regulation (droop) 1 (0.01 – 1) • Io nom – 0.6 – 1.2 – 1.2 V

∆Vo V Static line regulation 1 Vi min – Vi max, 0.3 0.8 0.8Io nom

Vo d Dynamic load regulation 3 Voltage deviation UI nom 1.7 2.2 2.2

t d Recovery time 0.1• Io nom ↔ Io nom 0.25 0.25 0.25 sIEC/EN 61204 5

Co Internal output capacitance 86 41 41 mF

1 Output voltage decreases with rising output current due to the droop characterstic to ease current sharing; see fig. 7.2 Due to the large output capacitance, the maximum transient value can be much higher.3 Deviation limited by output overvoltage protection4 No power limitation, but current limitation5 See fig. Dynamic load regulation.



®


General conditions:• TA = 20 °C, unless specified.• Vi = 230 VAC, f i = 50 Hz

Table 5: Output data of battery charger versions

Output LT/UT1240-7Z LT/UT1740-7Z LT1840-7Z Unit


Vo set Output voltage adjustment 6 Vi nom 27.25 54.5 40.88 V

Vo set tol Vo setting tolerance 4 Io = 0.5 • Io nom 27.2 27.3 54.45 54.55 40.83 40.93

Vo Output voltage range 1 25.25 28.25 50.5 56.5 37.9 42.4

Vo Output voltage over input LT Vi min – Vi max, 26.8 27.6 53.8 55 40.3 41.3voltage and load 1 UT (0.01 – 1) • Io nom 26.9 27.6 53.8 56.6

Vo L Overvoltage protection by second control loop 32.5 59.3 48.4

αVo Temperature coefficient of output voltage – 3 – 3 – 3 mV/K

Io nom Nominal output current 14.5 10 11 A

Io L Current limit 2 20 14.5 16

Po L Output power limit 2 Vi nom 400 550 450 W

vo Output voltage noise Low frequency Io nom 710 1000 850 mVpp

Switching freq. IEC/EN 61204 40 40 40

TotalBW = 20 MHz

750 1005 900

∆Vo I Static load regulation (droop) 1 (0.01 – 1) • Io nom – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.6 V

∆Vo V Static line regulation 1 Vi min – Vi max, 0.2 0.35 0.25Io nom

Vo d Dynamic load regulation 3 Voltage deviation UI nom 1.6 2.0 2.5

t d Recovery time 0.1• Io nom ↔ Io nom 0.2 0.2 0.2 sIEC/EN 61204 5

Co Internal output capacitance 86 41 49 mF

1 Vo decreases with rising output current due to the droop characterstic to ease current sharing; see fig. 8.2 Due to the large output capacitance, the maximum transient value can be much higher.3 Deviation limited by output overvoltage protection4 Defined by temperature sensor, by remote control, and by voltage selector switch5 See fig. Dynamic load regulation.6 Output voltage adjustment with Vcr = 9.5 V (2.27 V/cell)

Output CharacteristicThe models T1701/1702 and the battery chargers T1240/1740/1840 can be operated in 3 different modes:

– Output voltage regulation– Output power limitation– Output current limitation.

In output voltage regulation mode, the converter can beoperated within the full temperature range –25 to 71 °C.

Caution: In output power or current limitation mode, the max.ambient temperature TA should not exceed 65 °C with free airconvection cooling.

The output of all models is fully protected against continuousshort circuit. The maximum constant current is limited to Io L(see table Electrical output data). As the LEDs indicating thesystem status are driven from the output voltage, all LEDsswitch off in the case of a short circuit.

Fig. 6Output characteristics LT1701-7 and LT1740-7Z

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

60

50

40

30

20

10

0 Io [A]

Vo [V]

Vi = 110 VAC Vi = 230 VAC

Outputvoltage

regulation

Outputpower

limitation

Outputcurrentlimitation

05045a



®


Output Overvoltage ProtectionA slight output voltage overshoot may occur at turn-on, inhibitrelease, or during fast load changes. A second, independentcontrol loop interrupts the operation above Vo L and indicate itby the red warning LED. The output voltage remains below60 V (SELV) under all operating conditions.

Note: There is no specific built-in protection against externallyapplied overvoltages or transients.

Output Voltage Regulation (Rectifier Version)The output voltage is adjusted to a fixed value Vo set. It relatesto the output current and the input voltage, which ensurescurrent sharing without further precautions, when severalconverters are connected in parallel. Rising output current andfalling input voltage lead to a decrease of the output voltage,according to the formula:

Vo ≈ Vo set tol + (0.5 – Io/Io nom) • ∆Vo l + (∆Vi – ∆Vi nom)/100 V • ∆Vo V

Output Power Limitation (Rectifier Version)Especially for power systems with an output voltage of 48 V,the rectifier models T1701/1702 exhibit an output powerlimitation mode. The output power is kept constant down to anoutput voltage of approximately 38 V. This provides improvedstart-up capability of power systems including switched-modepower supplies connected to the output (e.g. 48Q Series). Atmaximum load there is no need for a special start-upprocedure.

The maximum input current is limited to I i L. At lower inputvoltage Vi red the maximum output power is limited to:

Po ≈ η • Vi red • I i L (η = efficiency approx. 90%)

T 1201 models have no output power limitation mode.

Pulse Loading (Rectifier Version)To prevent the output and filter capacitors from overload, thesuperimposed AC ripple current at the output should be limitedas shown in the figure below. For high-current pulse loads,external capacitors are recommended.

Vo

td

∆Vo I

10% ∆Vo d

t

t

Io /Io nom

10.9

0.1

∆Vo d

05051a

Vo

Fig. 9Typ. dynamic characteristics (at load step)

Io0

Vo [V]

48

04027a

10 11 14.5 16 A

38

54.4

24

T1201 T1701/1702

Fig. 7Output characteristic of T1201 and T1701/1702 (typ.). Thedroop is shown in fig. 8.

Fig. 8Typical output droop (LT 1701)

2%

1%

–1%

–2%

0.01 0.5 1Io/Io nom

Vo set

∆Vo 05081a

15

10

5

0100 1 k 10 k

Io PL [A]

fPL [Hz]

TC = 50° C

TC = TC max

Vi = Vi nomAverage output current = Io nom

Sin

usoi

dal r

ippl

e cu

rren

t

50

05050a

Fig. 10Maximum AC ripple output current superimposed on theaverage output current Io nom for LT1701.



®


Output Voltage Regulation (Battery Charger)In normal operating mode (neither in power limitation nor incurrent limitation) the output is regulated by a voltage feedbackloop. It is adjusted to Vo set and can be set by the cell voltageselector switch to the appropriate float charge voltage of thebattery.

A control input (pin 28) allows for adjustment of the outputvoltage either by a voltage source, a temperature sensor, or anexternal potential divider (see External Output VoltageControl). For fine tuning, the converter is fitted with a trimpotentiometer accessible from the rear side.

The output voltage relates to the output current and the input

1.1%

0.55%

– 0.9%

0.01 0.5 1Io/Io nom

∆Vo 05046a

Vo set

Fig. 12Typical output droop T1240/1740/1840

voltage, which ensures current sharing without furtherprecautions, when several converters are connected inparallel. An increase in output current and a decrease in inputvoltage decrease the output voltage, according to the formula:

Vo ≈ Vo set tol + (0.5 – Io/Io nom) • ∆Vo l + (∆Vi – ∆Vi nom)/100 V • ∆Vo V

The dynamic characteristic is shown in fig. 9.

Output Power Limitation (Battery Charger)All battery charger versions exhibit an output power limitationmode, where the output power is kept constant from 2.35 V/cell(for lead acid batteries) to 1.6 V/cell.

The maximum input current is limited to Ii L. At lower inputvoltage Vi red, the maximum output power is limited to:

Po ≈ η • Vi red • I i L (η = efficiency approx. 90%).

Inhibit (Rectifier Version)The rectifier version converters are equipped with a simpleinhibit function (with no adjustment of Vo). The converter isenabled by a logic high signal and disabled by a logic lowsignal. This input is TTL/CMOS compatible, a resistor <50 Ωdisables the converter, a resistor >30 kΩ enables it. Theswitch-on time t r, i.e., the time delay between powering untilthe full output power is available, is typically 100 ms.

The hold-up time at the output after inhibiting depends on theload, the internal and external capacitance at the output.

Note: The inhibit input is protected against overvoltage up to 60 V.

Fig. 11aOutput characteristic of T1240 (typ.). The droop is shown infig. 12.

Fig. 11bOutput characteristic of T1740 (typ.). The droop is shown infig. 12.

Io0

Vo

40.88 V

06067a

11 A 16 A

42.4 V

37.9 V

28.5 V

Io0

Vo

54.5 V

06066a

10 A 14.5 A

56.5 V

50.5 V

38 V

Io0

Vo

26.7 V

06065a

15 A 20 A

28.25 V

25.25 V

19 V

Fig. 11cOutput characteristic of LT1840 (typ.). The droop is shown infig. 12.

Table 6: Characteristics of the inhibit signal


Vinh Inhibit Vo = on Vi min – Vi max 2.5 60 Vvoltage TC min – TC max

Rinh Resistance Vo = on 30 kΩto Vo–

Vinh Inhibit Vo = off –0.7 0.4 Vvoltage

R inh Resistance Vo = off 50 Ω

t r Switch-on time Vi nom 100 msuntil full power avail.

Pinh Input power with 3 Winhibited unit



®


L~

N~ Vo–

i/Vcr

Vo+

I inh

Vinh

06116a

4

28

12

226

Converter

Fig. 13Inhibit connection

Table 7: Hold-up time thold for T1701

Vo = 54 V Vo min v UnitPo [W] 46 V 43 V 40 V 38 V

100 164 219 270 302 ms200 82 109 135 151300 55 73 90 101400 41 55 67 75500 33 44 54 60550 30 40 49 55

Hold-Up TimeThe hold-up time depends upon the output voltage at the timeof failure, the minimum acceptable output voltage, and the loadaccording to the formula:

Vo2 – Vo2 min vt hold = –––––––––––– • (Co + Cext)2 • Po

where:Vo = Output voltage at the moment of mains’ failureVo min v = Minimum acceptable output voltagePo = Average output power during hold-up timeCo = Internal output capacitanceCext = External output capacitance

Examples of t hold are given in the table below:

Fig. 14Hold-up and warning time with Power Down output signal.

Note: The table Hold-up time also informs about the warning timeof the Power Down signal. For example, if the threshold level Vt ofthe Power Down signal is set to 43 V and the minimum acceptablevoltage of the load is 38 V, the time between the activation of thepower-down signal and the switch-off of the load (550 W) will be15 ms (= 55 ms – 40 ms).

Series and Parallel ConnectionThe output of the T Series converters may either be connectedin series or in parallel.

Connection in parallel: Current sharing between paralleledconverters is ensured by the output droop (slope)characteristic.

Note: Several Txx40 battery chargers connected in parallel can becontrolled by a single voltage source or a single sensor wired tothe inputs i/Vcr.

Connection in series: A maximum of two T Series convertersmay be connected in series, however the resulting outputvoltage of up to 110 V would no longer be SELV.

Vo

Vo min v

Vt

mains' failure

warning time

thold

t

V

low load

heavy load

05049a



®


Control Features of the Battery ChargersAccording to the recommendations of battery manufacturers,the float-charge voltage of lead-acid batteries should betemperature-compensated. Depending on the battery type andsize, charging with different temperature coefficients may berequired. An excessive float-charge voltage may damage thebattery through overcharging.

Most lead-acid battery manufacturers recommend cellvoltages between 2.23 V and 2.32 V, with the nominal cellvoltage defined at 20 °C and temperature coefficients per cellbetween –3 and –4 mV/K.

The value of the negative temperature coefficient is specifiedby the type of T temperature sensor.

With the cell voltage selector switch Z, the required cell voltagecan be adjusted at the rear of the converter, making the systemflexible to different float-charge voltages. If the selector switchZ is not applicable, a cell voltage adjustment can also beprovided by the temperature sensor; see Temperature SensorT).

Although it is not recommended, the output voltage can be setto a fixed value without temperature compensation by anexternal voltage source or a resistive voltage divider at theremote control input, for instance if the battery temperatureshall be controlled by other systems; see External OutputVoltage Control.

Cell Voltage Selector Switch ZThe battery chargers are equipped with the cell voltageselector switch at the rear side, which provides an easy way ofexternal adjustment to the required float-charge voltage. Eachswitch position allows a step in the output voltage of 10 mV percell, whereby the switch position "0" represents a cell voltageof 2.23 V at 20 °C; position "C" gives 2.35 V per cell.

The cell voltage selector switch fits together with the 2.23 Vtemperature sensor. The float-charge voltage is set by theswitch, and the temperature coefficient is specified by thesensor type.

Caution: Setting the switch to the correct battery cell voltage isvital for the proper operation of a battery system.

Note: Switching to a different cell voltage while the battery chargeris operating may cause a short distortion of the output voltage.

Potentiometer for Fine TuningThe battery chargers are equipped with a one-turnpotentiometer for fine tuning of the output voltage to within±3.70/00 of Vo. The potentiometer is protected by a plasticcover. To adjust the output voltage for improved currentsharing or compensation for voltage drops over the load lines,each battery charger in a system should be unplugged andadjusted individually to the same output voltage at equal load;otherwise current sharing may adversely be affected.

External Output Voltage ControlThe i/Vcr control input (pin 28) provides two functions:

– External adjustment of the output voltage– Inhibiting of the converter.

A voltage <0.4 V inhibits the output, a voltage >2.5 V enables it.

With the i/Vcr input in the range of 5.5 V to 11.5 V, the outputvoltage Vo set can be adjusted within a range of +3.6% to–7.9%. This feature is optimized to control the float-charge of alead acid batteriy.

Outside of the control range, the sensor monitoring circuitgenerates a system error signal (see also System Good).

In the case of a excessively high control voltage, the outputvoltage is reduced.

The remote control input is protected against DC overvoltageup to 60 V.

Note: An open inhibit/Vcr remote control input leads to a sensorerror signal which is indicated by the Error LED at the front andhigh impedance of the "System good" signal. The output voltage isreduced to Vcr fail condition.

2.23 V 2.24 V

2.25 V

2.26 V

2.27 V

2.28 V

2.29 V2.30 V

2.31 V2.32 V

2.35 V

0

4

8

C

06068

Fig. 15Cell voltage selector switch

Table 8: Characteristics of the remote control

Characteristics Conditions LT/UT1240 LT1840 LT/UT1740 Unittyp typ

Vo Output voltage at: Voltage selector switch 25.25 37.85 50.5 VVcr fail 2.5 – 5.5 V Z set at 2.23 V/cell or

Vcr control 5.5 – 11.5 V without selector switch Z 22.5 + Vcr • 0.5 22.5 + Vcr • 0.5 45 + Vcr

Vcr clamp 11.5 – 14 Vselector switch Z

28.25 42.37 56.5

Vcr fail 14 – 60 VVi nom, 0.5 • Io nom

25.25 37.85 50.5

Rcr Input impedance 1 1 1 MΩ

fcr Frequency limit 1 1 1 Hz



®


Table 9: Characteristics of the inhibit signal


Vinh Inhibit voltage Vo = on Vi min – Vi max, 2.5 60 V

Rinh Resistance to Vo- Vo = on TC min–TC max 30 k Ω

Vinh Inhibit voltage Vo = off – 0.7 0.4 V

Rinh Resistance to Vo- VUo = off 50 Ω

tr Switch on time until full power available Vi nom 100 ms

Pinh Input power at inhibited converter Vi nom 3 W

Fig. 16Output voltage Vo versus control voltage Vcr, with thecorresponding signal System Good

50.5

52

53

54

55

56.5

Vo [V]

3 4 5 5.5 11.5 14 16 VVcr

Logic level ofthe signal

System Good

37.85

39

41

42.37

25.25

26

27

28.25

06069aT1240 T1840 T1740

Vcr5.3 V 14 V

If the voltage selector switch Z is not set at 2.23 V per cell, the Vcrfail voltage rises accordingly.

The inhibit input of battery charger models is not TTL/CMOScompatible and should be triggered by a switch, a relay, or anopen-collector transistor.

Control by external resistorsWith a resistive potential divider or a potentiometer connectedto the remote control input, a fixed output voltage can beprogrammed:

Vcr = Vo – 45 V (T1740)Vcr = 4/3 • Vo – 33.7 V (T1840)Vcr = 2 • Vo – 45 V (T1240)

Vo • R2Vcr = ––––––––(R1 + R2)

R2: Value with 1 MW internal resistance in parallel with R.

It is mandatory that:(R1 • R2)––-–-–--–– > 35 kΩ(R1 + R2)

otherwise the converter might not be able to start.

Control by an external voltage source

Fig. 18Voltage setting by an external voltage source

Fig. 17Voltage setting by external resistors

Control by the temperature sensor TThe temperature sensor provides a temperature-compensatedcharging process for lead-acid batteries; see Accessories,Temperature Sensor T.

Ext. voltagesource5.5 – 11.5 V

+

–Vo–

i/Vcr

Vcr

28

22

05062a

Vo+

i/Vcr

Vo–

1 MΩ R

Vo–

Vo+

R1

R2 = 1 MΩ • R/(1 MΩ + R)

28

Vcr

12

22

05063a



®


Fig. 20Standard version; the power down circuitry monitors directlyVo via Rint. Rext is not necessary.

Auxiliary Functions

Available Signals and Status MonitoringThe T Series exhibits an inhibit function as well as severalvoltage monitoring and indicating functions for easy controland surveillance of a complete customer-specific power supplysystem. All the surveillance functions are driven from theoutput. Consequently, it also operates, when the input voltageis off, down to an output voltage of 5 V. The power consumptionof the surveillance circuit is typically 10 to 20 mA.

Available functions:

– Power Down D pin 30D set pin 32

– System Good Sys In pin 24Sys Out pin 26

– Inhibit/Vcr remote control i/Vcr pin 28

The status is indicated by 3 LEDs on the front panel:

– System (OK) green– Vo (OK) green– Error red

Test sockets at the front panel allow easy measurement of Vo.

Power Down FunctionThe power down circuitry monitors Vo and changes the statusof output D (pin 30) from low to high impedance, when Vo fallsbelow the low threshold level, and changes back to lowimpedance, when Vo exceeds the upper threshold level.

The rectifier versions have a relatively small hysteresis of 1 V,the battery charger versions have a large hysteresis. Theupper threshold level is given, but the low threshold level isexternally adjustable at the D set pin 32. The Power Downsignal D (pin 30) can for example be used as a save datasignal, for low voltage warning, as a low-battery signal to avoiddeep discharge of the battery, or to prevent connectedconverters from starting-up at a low bus voltage. Forapplication examples, see figures below using the signal D.

As it is driven from the output, the power pown circuitryoperates independently of the input voltage and the loadconditions, even if the converter is inhibited.

The standard version monitors Vo internally; see fig. below.

Vo+

Vo–

D set

T1000-7D

Rext

External adjustment of thethreshold level Vt

R

43.2 kΩ(21.5 kΩ)

– +F

06051a

12

22

32

Fig. 21Option D (D-set internally not connected); the power downcircuitry monitors the power bus decoupled by the fuse F.

With option D, the output voltage can be sensed externally, forexample, to monitor the system bus decoupled from the powersupplies by diodes or fuses. An external resistor of 43.2 kΩ 1%(21.5 kΩ for T1840) must be fitted into the sense line to thebus; see fig. below.

Adjustment of the threshold levelWith the resistor (Rext) connected to D set (pin 32) and Vo– (orVo+), the low threshold level can be increased (or decreased)respectively; see fig. 20 and 21.

If the D set input is left open-circuit, the low threshold level ofthe power down circuitry is factory-set to:

T12xx: Vt set = 21 V ±0.2 VT17xx: Vt set = 42.5 V ±0.5 VVT18xx: Vt set = 32 V ±0.4 V

The approximate resistor values for given threshold levels canbe calculated from the table below:

The threshold level is adjusted for a DC output voltage. If inoperation a sinusoidal low frequency output ripple issuperimposed to the DC output voltage, it can be estimatedwith Vov = Io/(2 • π • f • Co), where Co is the internal outputcapacitance.

Table 11: Typ. values for Rext for a given Vt value for LT1740

Characteristics Conditions Vt Unit

Vt Power down threshold 69 kΩ to Vo+ 34.4 Vlevel, 106 kΩ to Vo+ 36.4set by Rext 254 kΩ to Vo+ 39.5

left open-circuit 42.5309 kΩ to Vo– 45.5154 kΩ to Vo– 48.5102 kΩ to Vo– 51.6

Vo+

Vo–

D set

Rext

Rint

– +06050a

43.2 kΩ(21.5 kΩ)

External adjustment ofthe threshold level Vt

Table 10: Calculation of Rext

Model Vt >>>>> Vt set Vt <<<<< Vt set(Rext connected to Vo–) (Rext connected to Vo+)

T12xx 463.5 43.2 Vt – 463.5Rext (Vt) = –––––––– [kΩ] Rext (Vt) = ––––––––––––– [kΩ]

Vt –21.0 21.0 – Vt

T17xx 933 43.2 Vt – 933Rext (Vt) = –––––––– [kΩ] Rext (V t) = ––––––––––––– [kΩ]

Vt – 42.5 42.5 – Vt

T18xx 461 21.4Vt – 461Rext (Vt) = –––––––– [kΩ] Rext (V t) = ––––––––––––– [kΩ]

Vt – 32 32 – Vt



®


Table 12: Characteristics of power down functions


ID Output TC min – TC max 50 1 mAsink current

Vsat Saturation voltage ID = 50 mA 0.2 V

Vz Zener voltage 62

Pz Z-diode PLoss TC = 95 °C 500 mW1 To be limited to 50 mA by the external circuitry.

Fig. 23Power down function (D output)– External adjustment of threshold level V t– Signal electrically isolated by an external relay

Fig. 24Remote indication of signal D by LED

Fig. 25Remote indication of the output voltage status (output D) byCMOS/TTL interface (e.g., for data saving)

Upper threshold levelThe upper threshold level of the power down function is given.

The rectifier models have a relatively small hysteresis of 1 V toprevent the signal from oscillation.

The battery chargers have a larger hysteresis. The upper levelis set at 2.05 V/cell.

To avoid deep discharge of the battery, the load should bedisconnected from the battery at the low level of the powerdown signal. The battery voltage will then recover slowly up toits chemical equilibrium, about 2 V/cell. The load may not beconnected again to the battery, until the T converter isoperating and charging it. Then the output voltage will behigher than 2.05 V/cell.

High level of output signal D (pin 30):LT/UT1240: 24.6 V ±0.3 VLT/UT1840: 49.2 V ±0.5 VLT/UT1740: 43.9 V ±0.4 V

Fig. 22Hysteresis of D output signal for battery chargers withcorresponding level of Power Down signal

VBat

VfloatBattery

recovery

Batterylow

Mains failure Return of mains

HysteresisPower Down

Load switch ON

Load switch OFF

t

Vt

Z

thigh

low

Power down signal

2.05 V/cell2.0 V/cell

06052a

Signal output characteristicsOutput D (pin 30) is an open-collector signal, referenced toVo–, protected by a 62 V Zener diode; it is well suited to drivean external relay.

Under normal operating conditions (Vo > Vt), output D has lowimpedance. If the output voltage drops below the power downthreshold level, output D becomes high impedance.

Vo+

D

Vo–

D setRext

06053

red LED

Vo+

D

Vo– LED is "ON"in case ofpower down

R

06054

Vo+

D

Vo–

+5 V

CMOS, TTL

R

06055

Fig. 26Output D signal used as inhibit to enable a system start-up inthe case of subsequently connected step-down convertersPSK/PSS/PSx with low start-up voltage. (For 48Q/CQ units,no pull-up resistor is required.)

Vo+

D

Vo–

LT/UT

Vi+

i

Gi–

PSK/PSS/PSx10 kΩ0.5 W

06056a

12

30

22



®


Table 13: Characteristics of System Good input and output


ITrig Trigger level for logic current-driven Vi min – Vi max 100 µA

VTriglow input (= System OK) voltage-driven TC min – TC max – 0.4 6.2 V

ITrig Trigger level for logic current-driven 0 A

VTrighigh input (= System Failure) voltage-driven >7.5 60 V

Isys Output sink current 1 50 mA

Vsat Saturation voltage ISys Out = 50 mA 0.2 V

VZ Zener voltage protection diode 62

PZ Power disipation Zener diode TC = 95 °C 500 mW

1 To be limited to 50 mA by the external circuitry.

Fig. 28System status signal electrically isolated by an external relay

System Good FunctionThe Sys Out signal (pin 26) provides information about thegeneral function of the converter. It can be used to monitor thestatus of a single T Series converter, or can be linked with othersignals within a power system to drive one single-logic signalfor the status of the whole system by connecting the output SysOut of one converter to the input Sys In (pin 24) of the next one.Low voltage (impedance) of the input and output has themeaning of "system good". The first input of the system has tobe connected to Vo–.

The signal Sys Out is activated (low impedance), if thefollowing conditions are met:

No external fault– the Sys In signal (pin 24) is logic low,

AND:

No faults monitored by the T Series converter, such as:– Input overvoltage– Input undervoltage (mains failure)– Output overvoltage– Output short circuit– Internal overtemperature– Internal circuit fault.– i/Vcr input error such as voltage < 2.5 V (rectifier type);

control voltage out of range 5.3 V > Vcr > 14 V (batterycharger), or sensor not connected, open remote controlinput.

Signal inputThe input Sys In (pin 24) can be voltage- or current- driven. Totrigger the internal comparator, the voltage at the Sys In pinhas to be <6.2 V, if voltage-driven. If current-driven, the sinkcurrent to Vo– has to be >100 µA. An easy way to drive thisinput is achieved by means of an open collector transistor, or a10 V CMOS interface.

Note: If only the internal status of a T Series converter should bemonitored, Sys In has to be connected to Vo–.

Vo+

Sys Out

Vo–

No external free-wheeling diode acrossrelay necessary

06060

Signal outputThe signal Sys Out (pin 26) has the meaning of “system good”.It is built by an open collector transistor referenced to Vo–,protected by a 62 V Zener diode.

Fig. 27Equivalent circuit of Sys In and Sys Out

Sys Out

Sys In

Logic high if no internalerror and no inhibit

ISys In

Logic high ifISys In > 100 mA

+

-

ISys Out

Vo+

Vo-

Ref.Logic AND

06057



®


Series and Parallel Connection of Power Down andSystem GoodTo achieve a logic-OR function of the signals Sys Out and D,connect the D output to Sys In. The desired function is thenobtained from the Sys Out output. The output signal becomeshigh, if the output voltage is lower than the threshold of thepower down circuit, inhibit is applied, or an internal error hasoccurred.

Fig. 29Sys out and D connected in series. The output signal willindicate an error at start-up.

Fig. 30Wired AND of isolated open collector signals (e.g. the OUT OK signal of 48/CQ units) with the Sys Outsignals of T units in series to achieve one signal about the status of the whole system

To achieve a logic AND function of the Sys Out and D, connectthe D output with the Sys Out. This combination generates anoutput signal only in the case of severe system errors. Only a Tsystem fault together with a simultaneous power down of theoutput voltage will cause this output signal to become highimpedance.

Fig. 31Sys out and D connected in parallel.

Vo+

Sys Out

Vo–

Sys In

Vo–

Vo+

Sys Out

Vo–Vo–

OverallSystemGood

Out OKcircuit

1 kΩ

20 V

Out OKcircuit

1 kΩ

20 V

Out OKcircuit

1 kΩ

20 V

06059a

48Q/CQno. 1

48Q/CQno. 2

48Q/CQno. x

Sys In

LT/UT LT/UT

24 24

22 22

26 26

12

22 22

12

Internalsignals

Vo–

Sys In

Sys Out

Vo+

i/Vcr

D

D set

Vo+

R

06061a

LT/UT

Internalsignals

Vo–

Sys In

Sys Out

Vo+

i/Vcr

D

D set

Vo+

R

06062a

LT/UT



®


Table 14: System monitoring.Signal status and LED display status depending on the situation of the various system elements

Possible Situation Open collector output LED

System Good Power Down Sys OK Vo OK Error

All OK low low on on off

No mains and battery OK or no mains and Vo > Vt 2 high low off on on

Unit inhibited and battery OK or unit inhibited and Vo > Vt 2

Internal error 2

Sys In input 3 high low off on off

No mains and battery low or no mains and Vo < Vt 2 high high off off on 1

Short circuit on LT/UT output, Vo < 4 V high high off off off

Current limit LT/UT output, Vo > 4 V, Vo < Vt 2 low high on off on

Battery chargers: sensor not connected or out of range high low off on on

1 LED is on until the output capacitors are discharged.2 Sys In connected to Vo–.3 Sys In not connected to Vo– (single T status monitoring) or system status monitoring.

Display Status of LEDsLED Sys OKA green LED corresponds to the signal System Good. It lights,if no internal or external error is detected.

LED Vo OKAnother green LED indicates the output voltage status,corresponding to the signal Power Down. The LED lights, aslong as Vo exceeds the upper threshold level and has not fallenbelow the low threshold level Vt.

LED ErrorThis red LED lights, if one or more of the following conditionsare detected:

– Input overvoltage– Input undervoltage (mains failure)– Output overvoltage– Output short circuit– Output voltage below threshold Vt– Internal overtemperature– Internal circuit fault– i/Vcr remote control input error, such as:

- Inhibit voltage <2.5 V (rectifier models)- Remote control voltage Vcr out of range 5.3 – 14 V

(battery chargers)- Sensor not connected, open remote control input.



®


Different Configurations and Applications

Power Boosting, Redundant Configuration,Hot SwapFor redundant configurations the outputs should be decoupledby ORing diodes, protecting the DC-bus in case of an internalshort circuit at the output of one converter.

Decoupling can also be done using appropriate fuses in theoutput path of each converter. If the battery voltage has to bemonitored, choose option D.

+

–

Converter Converter

Vo–

Vo+

Vo– Vo+

06077a

+

–

Vo–

Vo+Vo–

Vo+

LT/UTxx40 LT/UTxx40

HC

–

HC

+

HC

+

HC

–

Fuse Fuse

+

–

D set

R 43k2 R 43k2

D set

(21k5) (21k5)

06079a

Fig. 32Redundant configuration without battery back-up

Fig. 33T xx40 with battery back-up. Power Down signal monitoringthe battery voltage.

battery-buffered bus. Should however the converter already beconnected, when the battery is switched to the bus, the resultingcharge current will not be limited. To avoid having the fuse blow ora possible arc across the circuit breaker, the battery charger

ORing diodes provide reverse polarity protection with noreverse current in case of hot plug-in, but have thedisadvantage of some forward voltage drop.

For battery applications, decoupling with fuses is recom-mended, since the voltage drop over the diodes woulddecrease the battery voltage. In case of an internal short circuitof a converter, the battery will deliver a very large currentcausing the respective fuse to blow. The fuse should bemounted in the positive power path of the converter, since themonitoring signals are referenced to the negative path. Thefuse type should be suitable for DC application having acurrent rating of 20 A or more with high breaking capability,e.g., Littlefuse, series 314.

To enable hot plug-in in systems decoupled with fuses, the TSeries converters are fitted with an NTC resistor, limiting thereverse current flowing into the discharged output capacitors(see Functional Description).

For this purpose HC+ (pin 16) and HC– (pin 18) have to beconnected to Vo+ and Vo– respectively; see fig. 33. Since pins16 and 18 are leading pins, the output capacitors areprecharged through the internal NTC resistor, before any otherpin makes contact. This protects the connector and preventsthe DC bus voltage from dropping during hot plug-in. Hot swapshould be done gently. Subsequent hot-swap actions shouldbe avoided. After disconnecting an operating converter, itshould be cooled down prior to reconnecting to the bus toavoid damage of the fuse or the converter.

Note: The internal NTC limits the reverse charge current flowinginto the output capacitors, when the converter is plugged into a

should be powered by the mains prior to connecting the battery.With ORing diodes, no reverse charge current flows from thepower bus into the output capacitors.

Battery Size and Ripple CurrentSome consideration should be given to the battery size.According to VDE 0510 part 2, the low frequency ripple currentof the floating charge current should not exceed 5 A per 100 Ahcapacity (0.05 C). The power factor corrected single stepconversion of the line input voltage to the low DC outputvoltage generates a ripple voltage at the output of twice theinput frequency, causing a ripple current into the connectedbattery.

T1701/1702

Vo: 56 V

T1701/1702

Vo: 56 V

T1740-7D Vo range:

50.5...56 V

Battery+

–

Load

06081a

Fig. 34Configuration for a larger system with only a small battery



®


For systems, where only a small battery back-up time isrequired, battery charging by one T unit may be sufficient; seealso fig. below.

Caution: Lead-acid batteries can generate certain amounts of H2and O2 gas, which can form explosive gas mixtures. Sufficientventilation must be provided in battery cabinets and installationrooms.

Note: Local regulations must be observed. Further informationabout designing battery systems is contained in VDE 0510, part 2.

Combination with DC-DC ConvertersThe T Series converters are designed to be operated with DC-DC converter loads. Particularily suitable are 48Q models, asthey start working at approx. 38 V, thus avoiding high currentsat ramp-up. But also other series may be used, for instance ourCQ or P Series.

In a complete power system consisting of several T convertersconnected in parallel combined with 48Q/CQ units, it may bedesirable to have one common signal indicating the status ofthe whole system.

The DC-DC converters provide a galvanically isolated signalOut OK. To obtain a logic AND, all Out OK signals should beconnected in series; see fig. below:

If in a system with 2 redundant T Series converters PowerDown is desired as one common signal, simply connect the Dpins of the two T converters. Then, Power Down only becomesactive, if both T converters fail, which would result in the busvoltage failing (see fig. below).

+–Out OK–Out OK+

+

–

48Q/CQ


+

–

48Q/CQ


+

–

48Q/CQ

LN

Vo+Vo–

T17

00

LN

Vo+Vo–

LN

Sys Out

Sys Out

Sys In

D

T17

00

Sys In DOverallSystemGood

PowerDown

+

+

–

–

R

R

06082a

Fig. 35Overall System Good and Power Down signal in a redundantsystem

Fig. 36Disconnecting the loads at low battery voltage in case ofmains’ failure

Fig. 37Storing the System Good signal

Low-Battery Discharge ProtectionSince all monitoring functions are powered by the output of theT converter or the battery, in the case of a mains’ failure, PowerDown can be used to monitor the status of the battery and to

disconnect the load or part of it via the inhibit of the connectedDC/DC converters, when the battery voltage drops below thethreshold level of Power Down. This prevents further dischargeof the battery.

+

–

Out OK–

Out OK+

+

–

48Q/CQ

+

–

Out OK–

Out OK+

+

–

48Q/CQ

+

–

Out OK–

Out OK+

+

–

48Q/CQ

L

N

L

N

Sys Out

Sys In

D

LT/U

T17

40-7

DZ

+ –

i

i

i

Vo+

Vo–

D set

Fuse

43.2 kΩ

Rext +

R

HC+

HC–

–

06083a

Temp. sensor T

i/Vcr

Storing the System Good SignalFor battery back-up systems located in inaccessible areas itcould be of interest to know, whether there has been a PowerFail (interruption of the mains). To obtain this information, SysOut should be connected to Sys In with a reset buttonconnected to Vo–. In this way a system failure like aninterruption of the mains will be stored at Sys Out until, thereset button is pressed.

+

–

+

–

48Q/CQ

L

N

L

N

Sys Out

Sys In

LT/U

T17

40-7

DZ

+ –

Vo+

Vo–

Fuse

StoredSys Out

Reset

R

+

–

HC–HC+

06084a

Temp. sensor Ti/Vcr



®


T1740-7DZ

48Q/CQ

48Q/CQ

48Q/CQ

48Q/CQ 48Q/CQ

48Q/CQ 48Q/CQ

48Q/CQT1740-7DZ

Systemcontroller

48 V power bus (SELV)(50.5 to 56.5 V)

Back-upbattery48 V

12 V, 16 A(8 A*)

24 V, 8 A(4 A*)

+5.1 V, 64 A (48 A*)

power downDC bus goodoutput good

N L

+–

* For redundancy,decoupling at the 48Q/CQ-outputs with diodes is required.

Fuse

Fuse

06085a

Temp. sensor

Fig. 38UPS uninteruptablepower supply system

Fig. 39Front end with various loads (example)

48Q/CQ1001

48Q/CQ2320

PSB245

T1701

Systemcontroller

48 V power bus (SELV)(53 to 56 V)

Cooling fan

±12 V, 4 A +24 V, 5 A+5.1 V, 32 A

power downDC bus goodoutput good

L

N

M

PCB heatingLamps

Vo+

Vo–

48Q/CQ1001

06086a



®


80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

0.05 0.1

0.5 1 2 5 10 20 30

[dBµV]

MHz

0.02

07035a

A

B



Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Perf.mode 1 applied imped. procedure oper. crit. 2

Electrostatic IEC/EN 4 contact discharge 8000 Vp 1/50 ns 330 Ω 10 positive and yes Adischarge 61000-4-2 air discharge 15000 Vp


Electromagnetic IEC/EN 3 antenna 10 V/m AM 80% n.a. 26 – 1000 MHz yes Afield 61000-4-3 1 kHz

Electrical fast IEC/EN 4 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransient/burst 61000-4-4 4 direct, 4000 Vp


±i/c, +i /–i 15 ms; burst transient perperiod: 300 ms coupling mode

Surge IEC/EN 3 i/c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes A61000-4-5 4 +i/–i 2 Ω surges per coupling

mode

VDE 0160 II +i/–i 2.3 • Vip 0.1/1.3 ms 1700 J 3 pos. and 3 neg. yes Bmax impulses

6 repetitions

Conducted IEC/EN 3 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes Adisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBµV) 1 kHz

1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal performance, B = Temporary loss of function or degradation of performance, not requiring an operator.

Electromagnetic EmissionThe conducted noise emitted at the input in the frequencyrange of 10 kHz to 30 MHz is below level B according toEN 55011/22 under all operating conditions.

The radiated noise in the frequency range of 30 MHz to300 MHz on the input- and the output-side stays below the limitof EN 55014, measured with an MDS-clamp and below level A,

Fig. 40Conducted emissions (quasi-peak, typ.) at the inputaccording EN 55011/22, measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

Fig. 41Typ. radiated emissions (quasi peak) according to EN55011/22, normalized to 10 m, measured on an open areatest site at Vi nom and Io nom.

according to EN 55011/22, measured with an antenna.

The radiated noise of the T units between 30 MHz and1 GHz is reduced, if the converter is built into a conductivechromatized 19" rack, fitted with a front panel. For convertersmounted otherwise, e.g., wall mounted with option B1 (baseplate), the radiated noise may be above level A.

protection against input transient voltages, which typicallyoccur in most installations, but especially in battery-drivenmobile applications. The T Series has been successfullytested to the following specifications:

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A suppressor diode or a metal oxide VDR (depending on type)together with an input fuse and an input filter form an effective

50

40

30

20

10

0

30 50 100

200

300

[dBµV/m]

[MHz]

A

B

07039a



®


Table 18: MTBF

Values at specified Model Ground benign Ground fixed Ground mobile Unitcase temperature 40°C 40°C 70°C 50°C

MTBF 1 LT1701-7 198 000 56 000 26 000 20 000 h


1 Calculated in accordance with MIL-HDBK-217E (calculation accord. to edition F would show even better results)2 Statistical values, based on an average of 4300 working hours per year and in general field use, over 3 years

Table 17 Temperature specifications

–7 Unit

Characteristic Conditions min typ max

TA Ambient operational Io = 0 – Io nom –25 71 °Ctemperature range Io > Io nom –25 65

TC Case temperature range Io = 0 – Io nom –25 95at measurement point; Io > Io nom –25 90see Mechanical Data

TS Storage temperature –40 100range (not operating)

TCs Case temperature, 100when shut down

R th CA Thermal resistance convection 0.5 K/Wcase to ambient cooling

tC Thermal time constant 1 hof case

Environmental ConditionsTable 16: Mechanical stress


Cab Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Unit notsteady state Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % operating

Duration: 56 days

Ea Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Acceleration amplitude: 100 gn = 981 m/s2 Unit(half-sinusoidal) Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Eb Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 40 gn = 392 m/s2 Unit(half-sinusoidal) Bump duration: 6 ms operating


Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude: 0.21 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Unit(sinusoidal) 3 gn = 29.4 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating


Fda Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-35 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn rms Unitwide band DIN 40046 part 23 Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operatingReproducibility Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rmshigh Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Unit not(sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle operatingNaCl solution) Storage: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity




®


Since the operating temperature is of major importance toreliability, the following conditions should be observed:

1. Do not cover heat sinks.2. Do not obstruct air flow around the heat sinks.3. Maximize free space around the converter !4. If the power supplies and the loads are located in the

same enclosure, forced cooling is recommended. The Tunits should be placed on the bottom of the enclosure.

5. Always check the maximum ambient and casetemperature after system integration.

Fig. 42Output power versus ambient temperature of T17xx

Fig. 43Internal power losses versus nominal output power (T17xx)

Thermal ConsiderationsEven though the T Series converters have a very highefficiency, the operating losses will heat the case. The two heatsinks are designed to dissipate the power losses at maximumoutput power over the specified temperature range withoutforced cooling, if the convection cooling provides sufficient airvolume, without any obstruction for vertical air exchange belowand above the converter.

Due to the slightly higher power losses in output power andcurrent limitation mode, the maximum admissible ambient andcase temperature is then lower than in output voltageregulation mode.

A built-in sensor disables the output in case of over-temperature. The converter automatically recovers, when thetemperature falls below the limit.

Derating is required for applications with higher operationalambient temperature. The fig. below shows the derating of theoutput power versus operational temperature above theambient temperature of 71 °C of an LT17xx unit. Two differentconditions are shown:

a) Converter operating with convection cooling (solid line).For example if the operational ambient temperaturereaches 80 °C, the output power should be limited toapprox. 290 W. In this case steady operation in outputpower or current limitation mode is not possible.

b) Converter operating with forced cooling (dotted line).Under these conditions, the case temperature TC isdecisive. With sufficient cooling provided (air flow!), theconverter still delivers 550 Watts in voltage regulationmode even at TA = 85 °C, provided that TC ≤ 95 °C (TC =measuring point of case temperature; see MechanicalData). At TC ≤ 90°C, steady operation in output power orcurrent limitation mode is still possible. Nevertheless, it isnot recommended to operate the converter continuouslyclose to TC max, since lifetime will be affected.

–25 50 60 70 80 90 100TA [°C]0

550

290

Po [W]

Po max(forced cooling)

Po max (convectioncooling)

Output power/currentlimitation mode

(Io >10 A)

Output voltageregulation mode

(Io <10 A)

95

08002

0 100 200 300 400 500 600Po [W]

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

Ploss [W]


Output current limitation

Output voltage regulation

Output power limitation08003a



®


111

(= 3

U)

94.8

Fixtures for retention clips V

168.

5

171.

0...1

71.9

8 1/2 TE

111

(= 3

U)

94.8

142.2 (= 28 TE)

5 1/2 TE

30

1

1.5

26.8141.5 (= 28 TE)

0.73

0.3

Trim-potentiometer (Txx40)

Cell voltage selector switch Z (Txx40)

Mea

surin

g po

int 1

of T

c

Sys OK (green)Vo OK (green)Test socketsError (red)

09036a

Mea

surin

g po

int 2

of c

ase

tem

pera

ture

Tc

Input fuse (option)

60

Measuring point 1of case temperature Tc

EuropeanProjection


Fig. 44Case T01, weight approx. 3 kg



®


111

101

5

133.417.3

168.5

1585

119 8

5

12.35

12

ø 4.5

M4

Measuring point of case temperature Tc

Fro

nt p

anel

28.3

09037a

171.0...171.9

EuropeanProjection

Fig. 45Case T01 with option B1(cooling plate)


Connector Pin AllocationThe connector pin allocation table defines the electricalpotentials and the physical pin positions at the H15 connector.Pin 8 and 10 (protective earth) are reliably connected to thecase of the converter. They are leading pins, ensuring that theymake contact with the female connector first.

Pin 16 (HC+) and pin 18 (HC–) are also leading pins to enablehot-swapping of the converter.

46

8

1210

1416

1820

2224

2628

3032

10079

Fig. 46H15 male connector



®


Installation InstructionAll T Series converters are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assemblyoperation or by professional installers. Installation must strictlyfollow the national safety regulations in compliance with theenclosure, mounting, creepage, clearance, casualty,markings, and segregation requirements of the end-useapplication.

Connection to the system shall be made via the femaleconnector H15 (see Accessories). Other installation methodsmay not meet the safety requirements.

The converters are provided with pins 8 and 10 ( ), which arereliably connected to the case. For safety reasons it isessential to connect at least one of these pins reliably to theprotective earth (PE) of the supply system.

Input L~ (pin 4) is internally fused. This fuse is designed toprotect the converter in case of overcurrent and may not beable to satisfy all customer requirements. External fuses in thewiring to one or both inputs (pin 4 and/or pin 6) may thereforebe necessary to ensure compliance with local requirements. Asecond fuse in the wiring to the neutral line N~ is needed, if:


• Neutral to earth impedance is high or undefined• Phase and neutral of the mains are not defined or cannot

be assigned to the corresponding terminals (L~ to phaseand N~ to neutral).

Important: Do not open the converter, or warranty will beinvalidated.

Caution: Prior to handling, the converter must be disconnectedfrom mains and from other sources (such as batteries).

Hazardous energy levels may be present at the output terminalsfor 3 minutes, even after the input voltage has been disconnectedor switched off. This is indicated by the red error LED.

To prevent an unwanted short-circuit across the output of adisconnected converter, pins 16 and 18 are leading pins. In caseof a short-circuit across the output of a T unit, all LEDs will be off,even though the mains may be present.

Due to high output current value, the T Series convertersprovide for each the positive and the negative output path twointernally parallel connected contacts (pins 12/14 and pins 20/22). It is recommended to connect the load to both femaleconnector pins of each path, in order to keep the voltage dropand power loss across the connector pins as small as possible.

If a T Series converter is used for battery charging, checkwhether the position of the cell voltage selector switchcorresponds to the required battery cell voltage.

Caution: Lead-acid batteries can generate H2 and O2 gas, whichcan form explosive mixtures. Sufficient ventilation must beprovided in battery cabinets and installation rooms.

Further information about designing battery systems is containedin VDE 0510, part 2.

If a T Series converters are connected in parallel, it isrecommended to connect the two hot plug-in pins of eachfemale connector, HC+ (pin 16) and HC– (pin 18), to theirrespective output pins Vo+ and Vo– .

Make sure that there is sufficient air flow available forconvection cooling. This should be verified by measuring thecase temperature, when the converter is installed andoperated in the end-use application. The maximum specifiedcase temperature TC max must not be exceeded. See alsoThermal Considerations.

If the end-product is to be UL certified, the temperature testmay be repeated as part of the end-product investigation.

Ensure that a converter failure (e.g., by an internal short-circuit) does not result in a hazardous condition. See alsoSafety of Operator-Accessible Output.

Protection Degree and Cleaning AgentsIf the female connector is fitted, the protection degree is IP30.Since the converters are not hermetically sealed, anypenetration of cleaning fluids must be prevented.

Audible NoiseUnder certain operating conditions, a T Series converter maygenerate a slight audible noise due to magneto-striction in thetransformer. This noise does neither affect the function of theconverter, nor is it detrimental to its performance over time.

Standards and ApprovalsAll T Series converters correspond to class I equipment. Theyare approved by UL according to UL/CSA 60950-1, and byTÜV according to IEC/EN 60950, 3rd Ed. They have beenevaluated in accordance with these standards for:

Table 19: Connector pin allocation

Pin Electrical determination Designation

4 Phase line input L~

6 Neutral line input N~

8 1 Protective earth PE

10 1 Protective earth 1



16 1 Hot plug-in contact positive HC+

18 1 Hot plug-in contact negative HC–



24 System Good signal input Sys In

26 System Good signal output Sys Out

28 Inhibit or remote control input i/Vcr

30 Power Down signal D

32 Power Down signal threshold of Vo D set

1 Leading pin (pre-connecting)



®


MI foroutput

leakagecurrent

Vo+

Vo–

L1

10071a

N

L

MI forearth

leakagecurrent

S2

S3

L2

L3N

L1

L2 Converter

MI foroutput

leakagecurrent

Vo+

Vo–NL

10070a

NL

MI forearth

leakagecurrent

S1

S2

S3

Converter

Fig. 48Test set-up for leakage current in single phase configuration.S1 is used to simulate the interchanging of phase andneutral. S2, S3 select either the earth or output leakagecurrent test, S4 selects either the positive or negative output.

• Building in• Basic insulation between input and case, based on

250 VAC• Double or reinforced insulation between input and output,

based on 250 VAC• Operational insulation between output and case• The use in a pollution degree 2 environment• Connecting the input to a primary circuit with a maximum

transient rating of 2500 V (overvoltage class III based on a110 VAC primary circuit, overvoltage class II based on a230 VAC primary circuit).

The converters are subject to manufacturing surveillance inaccordance with the above mentioned UL standards and withISO9001:2000.

For details see the Declaration of Conformity (last page).

IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory as routinetest in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950 andshould not be repeated in the field. Power-One will not honorany warranty claims resulting from electric strength field tests.

Table 20: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output to Temp. Sensor T Unitand output case output to case

Electric Factory test ≥1 s 2.8 1 1.4 1.4 kVDCstrength AC test voltage equivalent 2.0 1.0 1.0 kVACtest to factory test

Insulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 >300 >100 MΩ

1 According to EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950-1, transformers and subassemblies connecting input to output are pretested with 5.6 kVDC or4.0 kVDC.

Fig. 47Measuring instrument (MI) for earth leakage current testaccording to IEC/EN 60950, Annex D.

Leakage CurrentsLeakage currents flow due to internal leakage capacitance andRFI suppression Y-capacitors. The current values areproportional to the input voltage and frequency. They arespecified at maximum operating input voltage, where phase,neutral, and protective earth are correctly connected, asrequired for class I equipment.

Under test conditions, the leakage current flows through ameasuring instrument (MI) as described in the fig. below, whichtakes into account impedance and sensitivity of a persontouching unearthed accessible parts. The current value iscalculated by dividing the measured voltage by 500 Ω. If inputsand/or outputs of converters are connected in parallel, theirindividual leakage currents are added.

V

500 Ω

1500 Ω

10 kΩ 220 nF

22 nF

10061

Fig. 49Test set-up for leakage current in 208 V phase to phaseconfiguration. S2, S3 select either the earth or output leakagecurrent test, S4 selects either the positive or negative output.



®



Characteristic LT/UT Unit

Earth leakage Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 3.5 mAcurrent Specified value at 255 V, 50 Hz (LT) 1.8 1

Specified value at 127 V, 60 Hz (LT or UT) 1.1 1

Output leakage Permissible according to IEC/EN 60950 0.25current Specified value at 255 V, 50 Hz (LT) <0.1

Specified value at 127 V, 60 Hz (LT or UT) <0.1

1 In phase to phase configuration, the leakage current is lower.


AC-DCconverterMains SELV

Earthconnection

+

–

~

~

10021a

Fuse

Fuse OutputSafety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a converter is operator-accessible, itshall be an SELV according to the safety standard IEC/EN60950.

The following table shows a possible installation configuration,compliance with which causes the output circuit to be an SELVcircuit up to a configured output voltage (sum of nominalvoltages if in series or +/– configuration) of 56.5 V.

However, it is the sole responsibility of the installer to assurethe compliance with the relevant and applicable safetyregulations.

Table 22: Safety concept leading to an SELV circuit


Supply voltage Grade of isolation between input and Measures to achieve the resulting Safety status of the AC-DCoutput, provided by the AC-DC safety status of the output circuit converter ouput circuitconverter

Mains ≤250 VAC Double or reinforced Installation according to the applicable SELV circuitstandards


D Undervoltage MonitorThis option is designed for systems using backplanes or isintended for use in applications, where a fuse or a decouplingdiode is fitted into the positive supply line to the system bus.The status of the system bus/battery voltage can be monitoredrather than the output status of a single T unit. Input D set (pin32) is not internally connected to Vo+ (Rint is missing; see fig.20).

To maintain the adjustment capabilities and resistor values forsetting the different threshold values, a 43.2 kΩ (21.5 kΩ)resistor should be fitted into the sense line to the bus. If D set(pin 32) is left open, output D (pin 30) is permanently signalinglow bus voltage.

For details see also Auxiliary functions, Power Down.

F Externally Accessible FuseThe standard T converters have a non-accessible fuse, 5 × 20mm. Some applications require an externally accessible fuse.Option F provides a fuse mounted on the rear side; seeMechanical Data.

B1 Cooling PlateIf a cooling surface is available, the converters can be providedwith a mounting plate (option B1) instead of the standard heatsink on the right-hand side; see Mechanical Data.

Since approximately 50% of the losses have to be dissipatedthrough the remaining heat sink on the left-hand side, sufficientfree air flow must still be provided.



®


AccessoriesA variety of electrical and mechanical accessories areavailable, including:

– Mating H15 connectors with screw, solder, faston, orpressfit terminals

– Connector retention clips V [HZZ01209]– Connector retention brackets CRB [HZZ01216]– Cable hood [HZZ00141] with retention brackets

[HZZ01218]– Code key system for connector coding– Temperature sensor T for battery charging– Front panels for 19" DIN-rack mounting, Schroff system– 19" DIN-racks for system integration– Backplanes for system integration matching to 19” DIN-

rails.

For additional information go to www.power-one.com .

Fig. 54Backplane for system intergration

Fig. 5319" DIN-rack

Fig. 51H15 female connector (withcode system)

Fig. 52Connector retentionclip V

T Series Front Panels in 28 TEThis front panel fits to all T Series converters with case size T01.

Table 23: T case front panel selection

Width Case Series TypeTE mm size item no.28 141.9 T01 T G28-T01 met [HZZ00890]28 141.9 T01 T G28-T01 plas [HZZ00837]

Delivery content:Front panel with two grey plastic handles, three countersunkscrews, set of four plastic or metal retainers with captivescrews, and assembly instructions.

G28-T01 met [HZZ00890] with metal screw retainersG28-T01 plas [HZZ 00837] with plastic screw retainers.

Blind plates: To close a non fully equipped 19" DIN-rack (onlyone or two converters fitted), 28 TE wide blind plates withoutholes are available:

G28-T01-blank met [HZZ 00847] with metal screw retainersG28-T01-blank plas [HZZ 00848] with plastic screw retainers.

Fig. 55Front panels for T Series (case T01)

128.

4

26.2 ±0.1 2.5 ±0.1

9.7

±0.1

103

141.90.2

122.

4

56.7 29

950

81.8 ±0.1

1200

6a

EuropeanProjection



®


Temperature Sensors TThe T Series battery chargers exhibit a cell voltage selectorswitch Z to set the required floating charge voltage at 20 °Cdirectly at the converter. If this Z switch is used, the 2.23 V/cellsensor types should be selected in any case as a basis, andthe selection criteria are only the temperature coefficient andthe nominal voltage of the battery. For example, if a 24 Vbattery is used, which has a cell voltage of 2.23 V and a celltemperature coefficient of –3.5 mV/K, the sensor type is S24-2.23-35-02. The setting on the Z switch should be 2.23.

Table 24: Type survey temperature sensors T

Nominal battery Sensor type Cell voltage Temp. coefficient per cell Cable lengthvoltage [V] [V] [mV/K] [m]

24 S24-2.23-30-02 2.23 –3.0 2

24 S24-2.23-35-02 2.23 –3.5 2

24 S24-2.23-45-02 2.23 –4.5 2

36 S36-2.23-30-02 2.23 –3.0 2

36 S36-2.23-35-02 2.23 –3.5 2

36 S36-2.27-35-02 2.27 –3.5 2

48 S48-2.23-30-02 2.23 –3.0 2

48 S48-2.23-35-02 2.23 –3.5 2

48 S48-2.23-40-02 2.23 –4.0 2

48 S48-2.23-45-02 2.23 –4.5 2

48 S48-2.27-30-02 2.27 –3.0 2

48 S48-2.27-35-02 2.27 –3.5 2

48 S48-2.27-45-02 2.27 –4.5 2

For T Series converters without Z selector switch, a sensoraccording to both criteria should be selected. In our example itshould be S24-2.23-35-02.

The active temperature sensor T is of robust construction,mounted into a sealed aluminium tube of 12 mm outerdiameter and 50 mm length. The sensors are waterproof(IP 66) and high-voltage tested with 1.4 kVDC. Connectionshould be done via the colored 3 wire cable to the output of theconverter (Vo+ and Vo–) and the remote control input i/Vcr (pin28).

Caution: Wrong connection may damage the sensor and theconverter.

Note: Battery specific sensors with cell voltages from 2.23 V up to2.32 V and temperature coefficients from –2 up to –4.5 mV/K percell or different cable lengths are available upon request.

Note: For installation of batteries, see VDE 510 as well as therecommendations of the battery manufacturers.

+ –

Battery

Vo+

i/Vcr

Vo–

Sensorcable

Sensorwires

+

05064b

green

brown

white

Fuse

–

22

12

28

Sensor T

Con

vert

er

Fig. 56Wiring diagram sensor

Table 25: Sensor data

Characteristics Condition min typ max Unit

Tsensor Sensor temperature range Vcr = 5.5 – 11.5 V –10 60 °C

Vcr Control voltage range Absolute ratings 3.9 15 V

Vcr td Control voltage tolerance Tsensor = 20 °C ±0.1

Tsensor = 0 – 53 °C ±0.2



®


Fig. 57Sensors connected in parallel.Sensors in parallel provide redundant voltage adjustment incase of one of the sensors goes into an open-circuit or short-circuit condition (add. external components required)

Vo+

Vo–

i/Vcr

Sensor Sensor200 kΩ 200 kΩ

06078a

Converter

If sensors are connected in parallel (redundant configuration),they should be decoupled by 200 kΩ resistors; see fig. below.An individual sensor for each parallel connected T converter isnot recommended, because current sharing is affected by thesensor tolerance.

Fig. 58Mechanical dimensions (in mm)

EuropeanProjection

Fig. 59Temperature sensor T with mounting fixture.



60

12

l

length l: 2 m (standard)

25 ± 0.2

adhesive tape

15

14.5

09044a



®




We


declare under our sole responsibility that all LT/UT Series power supplies carry-ing the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low Voltage Direc-tive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


· EN 61204: 1995 ( = IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC. output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements

· EN 60950: 2000 (IEC 60950: 1999)Safety of information technology equipment.

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe cor-rect installation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product withthe LVD. All LT/LU Series power supplies are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operation or byprofessional installers. They must not be operated as stand alone products.


Uster, 3rd January 2008 Power-One AG


BCD20020-G REV AA Page 1 of 28 www.power-one.com

®

W Series Data Sheet125, 250 Watt AC-DC and DC-DC DIN-Rail Converters

• RoHS lead-free-solder and lead-solder-exemptedproducts are available

• Rugged 35 mm DIN-rail snap-fit design• Class I equipment• Universal AC-input with single stage conversion AC to

DC, or DC input of 66 to 350 V• Power factor correction, harmonics IEC/EN 61000-3-2• Virtually no inrush current• Immunity to IEC/EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -11• Emissions according to EN 55011/022• Very high efficiency; up to 89%• Short-term output peak power capability, rectangular

current limiting characteristic• Single or two independently regulated outputs with 12,

24, 36, or 48 V• Outputs no-load, overload, and short-circuit proof• PCBs protected by lacquer• Very high reliability

DescriptionThe Convert Select front end series represents a family ofDIN-rail mountable DC-DC and AC-DC converters with powerfactor correction. The converters have been designedaccording to the latest industry requirements and standards.The converters are ideal for use in outdoor and otherdemanding applications to power building control systems,factory automation, industrial controls, instrumentation,electromagnetic drives, fans, and other DC loads. Differentmodels are available with a single output or twoindependently regulated, electrically isolated outputs with 12,24, 36, or 48 V. Special models for battery charging areavailable. The EW models are particularly suitable for 110 Vrailway applications; they have been designed in accordancewith the railway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121.

Key features of the Convert Select line include power factorcorrection with low harmonic distortion, negligibly low inrushcurrent, high immunity to transients and surges, and low

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1, UL/CSA 60950-1,IEC/EN 50178, IEC 61010-1, UL 508

electromagnetic emissions. Internal protection circuits such asinput over- and undervoltage lockout, thermal protection, aswell as output overvoltage protection by a second control loopensure safe operation of the final system.

The outputs deliver an electrically-isolated Safety Extra LowVoltage, SELV, (except models LWR/LWN1740) and low outputnoise. They are no-load, overload, and short-circuit proof. Theelectronically controlled short-term peak power capability of upto 150% of the rated output power enables the front endconverters to deliver additional power to start-up motors or tosafely operate subsequent circuit breakers. Built-in large sizedoutput capacitors absorb possible reverse energy, which maybe caused by quick deceleration of electromagnetic drivesconnected directly to the output. A green LED at the front coverdisplays the status of the output(s).

The Convert Select Series was designed according to allrelevant international safety standards. The converters areapproved by TÜV and UL, and are UL 508 listed. Adequate


Features

1144.49"

1034.05"

1385.43"

Description .......................................................................... 1Model Selection .................................................................. 2Functional Description ........................................................ 4Electrical Input Data ............................................................ 6Electrical Output Data ......................................................... 8Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................... 13

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ................................. 16Mechanical Data ................................................................... 17Safety and Installation Instruction ......................................... 18Description of Options .......................................................... 21Accessories ........................................................................... 24EC Declarations of Conformity ............................................. 26



®


clearances and creepage distances allow operation inpollution degree 3 environment (with AC input). All boardassemblies are coated with a protective lacquer.

The thermal concept allows operation at full load up to anambient temperature of 60 °C (LW models) or 70 °C (EWmodels) in free air without forced cooling. A rugged DIN snap-fit device allows easy and reliable fixing onto the various 35mm DIN rail models. The converters are fitted with cage clamp

Model SelectionTable 1: Standard models

Output 1 Output 2 Output Power Operating Input Type Effic. Options 3, 5

Vo1 nom1 Io1 nom Vo2 nom1 Io2 nom Po nom Voltage Designation6 ηηηηηmin 8[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [W] Vi min - Vi max [%]

12.35 7.5* - - 93* 85 2 – 264 VAC, LWR1301-6E 3 83* R

12.35 14* - - 173* 47 – 63 Hz 4, LWN1301-6E 3 83* D1, D2, D5

24.7 5 - - 12490 2 – 350 VDC 7

LWR1601-6E 87M1, M2

24.7 10 - - 247 LWN1601-6E 87F

37 3.3 - - 122 LWR1701-6E 3 88

K2, G

37 6.6 - - 244 LWN1701-6E 3 88

49.4 2.5 - - 124 LWR1801-6E 88

49.4 5 - - 247 LWN1801-6E 88

12.35 7* 12.35 7* 173* LWN2320-6E 3 83*

24.7 5 24.7 5 247 LWN2660-6E 87

37 3.3 37 3.3 244 LWN2770-6E 3 89

49.4 2.5 49.4 2.5 247 LWN2880-6E 89

24.7 5 - - 120 66 – 150 VDC EWR1601-0 9 88 R, M1, M2

24.7 5 24.7 5 240 EWN2660-0 9 88 Q, K2, G

* Version 106 or higher1 R-input not connected.2 For derating at low input voltage see section Output Power Derating.3 For minimum quantity and lead times contact Power-One.4 The converters have been tested up to 440 Hz; for operating frequencies <47 Hz or >63 Hz contact Power-One.5 On double-output models the options R, M2, D1, D2, D5 are related to the second output only.6 Improved EMC performance for LWN/LWR models. Former models without E are still available on request.7 Vi ≤ 250 VDC for models with option F8 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom, and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approx. 2% better.9 EWN and EWR models are designed for railway applications according to EN 50155 and EN 50121.

terminals easily accessible from the front. System connectorswith screw terminals for use with pre-assembled harnesses,external adjustment of the output voltage as well as variousauxiliary functions are available as options.

The letter E stands for improved EMC performance of LWmodels.



®


Table 2: Battery charger models (M1 included)

Output Voltage Nominal Output Values Operating Input Type Designation6 Effic. Options 3VBat Vo safe1 Vo max Vo nom 5 Io nom 5 Po nom 5 Voltage ηηηηηmin 8

[VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [A] [W] Vi min - Vi max [%]

12 13.81 14.65 13.8 7.5* 104* 85 2 – 264 VAC, LWR1140-6EM1 3 83* F

14* 194* 47 – 63 Hz 4, LWN1140-6EM1 3 85* K2, G

24 25.681 29.3 27.3 4.2 11590 2 – 350 VDC 7

LWR1240-6EM1 86

8.4 230 LWN1240-6EM1 85

36 38.521 43.95 40.88 2.8 115 LWR1840-6EM1 3 86

5.6 230 LWN1840-6EM1 3 86

48 51.361 58.6 54.5 2.1 115 LWR1740-6EM1 86

4.2 230 LWN1740-6EM1 87

* Version 106 or higher1 Setting voltage (typ.) with open R-input2 For derating at low input voltage see section Output Power Derating.3 For minimum quantity and lead times consult Power-One.4 The converters have been tested up to 440 Hz; for operating frequency <47 Hz or >63 Hz contact Power-One.5 Nominal output figures, calculated with a cell voltage of 2.27 V at 20 °C.6 Improved EMC performance. Former models without E are still available on request.7 Vi ≤ 250 VDC for models with option F.8 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Vo nom, Io nom, and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approx. 2% better.

Part Number Description L W N 2 660 -6 E D2 F K2 G

Input voltage range .......................................................... E, L

Series .................................................................................. W

Nominal output power125 W .............................................................. R250 W .............................................................. N

Number of outputs ............................................................ 1, 2

Type specification .................................................. 000 – 999Operational ambient temperature range TA

–40 to 60 °C ................................................... -6EW or customer-specific ........................... -0, -5

Improved EMC performance ................................................ E

Options Output voltage control input 2 .......................................RSave data signal 2 .......................................... D1, D2, D5Multiple functions via D-SUB connector 2 .. M1, M2

Built-in second fuse, input diode ................. F, Q

System connector .......................................... K2

RoHS compliant for all six substances .......... G1

1 G is always placed at the end of the part number. Consult Power-One for availability !2 Only one of these options is possible.

Example: LWN2660-6ED2FK2G: Power factor corrected AC-DC converter, operating input voltage range 85 – 264 VAC,2 electrically isolated and individually regulated outputs, each providing 24.7 V, 5 A, improved EMC performance,options D2, F, K2, and RoHS-compatible for all 6 substances.



®


Inpu

t filt

er

Inpu

t filt

er

Vo/Io control

Out

put f

ilter

2nd control loop (SELV)

Control circuitincludingPFC and

input OVP/UVP

L

N

Vo+

Vo–

Cy

Cy Cy

CY

CY

AUX

Fuse

2nd fuse(option F)

2

1

03103a

Shunt Shunt

3

4

5

8

9

2

3

6

7

1

11

10

Vo–

Vo+

Rec

tifie

r

+

Functional DescriptionThe W Series converters are primary controlled AC-DC or DC-DC flyback converters with a constant switching frequency of130 kHz. The power-factor-corrected single-step conversion ofthe input voltage to a low output voltage results in extremelyhigh efficiency. Depending upon the output power, theconverters are fitted with one (125 W) or two (250 W)powertrains. Models with two powertrains have one or twooutputs. Double-output models exhibit indiviually regulatedpowertrains.

The input voltage is fed via fuse, filter, and rectifier to the maintransformer, designed in planar technique. The input filter withvery small input capacitance generates virtually no inrushcurrent. An input transient suppressor protects the converteragainst high voltage peaks and surges. Input over- andundervoltage lockout as well as input current limitation protectthe converter from operation outside of its specification. Theinput voltage waveform is sensed by the primary control logicto allow active power factor correction, forcing the input currentto follow the input voltage waveform.

The secondary side of the main transformer supplies via therectifier diode a large electrolytic output storage capacitorproviding for the hold-up time. Double-output models exhibitan individual control logic each. The output voltage and theoutput current are measured and fed back to the primarycontrol logic via an optocoupler. A second control loopmonitors the output voltage. It disables the output in the caseof a failure in the control logic and limits the output voltage.

Built-in temperature sensors monitor the internal temperatureof each powertrain. If the temperature exceeds the limit, theconverter reduces the output power continuously to keep thetemperature below its limit. A green LED on the front coverconfirms the presence of the output voltage(s).

The R input (option R, M1, or M2) allows for externaladjustment of the output voltage by means of a resistor or anexternal voltage source. An external sensor can be connectedto the R input and allows for temperature-controlled batterycharging (see Accessories).

Fig. 1LWR 125 W and LWN 250 W single-output converters.EWR and EWN models have a link (standard) or a decoupling diode (option Q)rather than a bridge rectifier in the positive input line.


Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal outputvoltages and currents, degree of protection, batch no., serialno., and data code including production site, version, and dateof production.



®


Inpu

t filt

er Cy

Cy

Fuse

2

1

03104a

3

Inpu

t filt

er

Vo/Io control

Out

put f

ilter

2nd control loop


input OVP/UVP

Vo1+

Vo1–Cy

Cy

Cy

Shunt Shunt4

5

2

3

Inpu

t filt

er

Vo/Io control

Out

put f

ilter

2nd control loop


input OVP/UVP

Vo2+

Vo2–Cy

Cy

Cy

AUX

Shunt Shunt8

9

6

7

11

10

1

L

N

Vo–

Vo+

2nd fuse(option F)

Rec

tifie

r +

+

Fig. 2LWN 250 W double-output converters.EWR and EWN models have a link (standard) or a decoupling diode (option Q)rather than a bridge rectifier in the positive input line.For a pinout of 250 W single-output models see fig. 1.



®


Electrical Input DataGeneral conditions:TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.

Table 4: Input data of LW models

Input LWR LWN Unit

AC-Input DC-Input AC-Input DC-Input

Characteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io nom 85 2 264 90 2 350 4 85 2 264 90 2 350 4 Vrange Tc – Tc max

Vi nom Rated input volt. range 100 (230) 240 220 100 (230) 240 220

f i Rated input frequency1 50 – 60 -- 50 – 60 -- Hz

I i Input current Io nom, Vi = Vi nom 0.63 0.65 1.25 1.3 A

Io nom, Vi = Vi min 1.75 1.67 3.5 3.3

Pi0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max 1.2 0.9 1.3 1 W

I inrush Inrush current Vi max , t > 0.1 ms 3 3 5 5 A


PF Power factor Vi nom = 230 V, Io nom 0.86 5 -- 0.86 5 --

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55011/55022 A, B3 A, B3 A, B3 A, B3

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom B3 B3 B3 B3

fswitch Switching frequency 130 130 130 130 kHz

1 For operating frequencies <47 Hz and >63 Hz contact Power-One. The converters have been tested up to 440 Hz.2 Output power derating at low input voltage and/or high case temperature TC (see Output power derating).3 Only valid for models with Option E (type test with LWN1801-6E)4 Vi ≤ 250 VDC for models with option F.5 Models with 12 V output: ≥0.70 for LWR, ≥0.75 for LWN

Table 4: Input data of EW models

Input EWR E W N Unit

DC-Input DC-Input

Characteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max

Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io nom 66 150 1 66 150 1 Vrange Tc to Tc max

Vi nom Nominal input voltage 110 110

VUVT Undervoltage trigger 54 60 54 60

I i Input current Io nom, Vi = Vi nom 1.25 2.5 A

Io nom, Vi = 66 V 2.2 4.4

Pi0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max 0.8 1.3 W

I inrush Inrush current Vi max , t > 0.1 ms 12 6 A

Ci Input capacitance 2.5 4.5 µF

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55011/55022 A A

Radiated input RFI Vi nom, Io nom -- --fswitch Switching frequency 130 130 kHz

1 Vi ≤ 168 VDC for 3 s. Overvoltage trigger adjusted to 170 – 182 V.



®


Table 5b: Po derating according to UL 60950 at TA = 50 °C, or according to UL 508 at Tout = 40 °C

Model Po nom TC max Derate below derate by

[W] [°C] Vi [VAC] Vi [VDC] [W/V]

LWR1601-6E 124 76 98 no derating –0.67

LWN1601/2660-6E 247 86 115 105 –1.25

LWR1801-6E 124 76 93 no derating –0.67

LWN1801/2880-6E 247 86 105 95 –1.25

Output Power DeratingThe output power of LW models must be decreased at lowinput voltage and/or powertrain temperature above 125 °C.

The powertrain temperature depends on the output power, theinput voltage, and the cooling method. At low input voltage thelosses increase. At the maximum specified environmenttemperature TA free air convection cooling might be insufficientapproaching maximum ambient conditions. As a result, theoutput power has to be reduced according to the tables below.

Input Fuse and ProtectionA slow blow fuse (Schurter T6.3A, 5 × 20 mm), protected by asleeve, is connected in the line input. EW models have asmaller fuse (250 V, 4 × 9 mm, SOC NT3 6.3A V009, UL-recognized E-39265). For DC input voltages above 250 Vobserve the Installation Instructions.

Converters with option F have 2 small fuses, one in each inputline. Converters with option E and F have 2 large fuses(T6.3A, 5 × 20 mm). The DC input voltage for all converterswith option F is limited to 250 V.

A VDR and a symmetrical input filter form an effectiveprotection against input transients.

An under- and overvoltage lockout protects the converter,which is disabled below Vi min and above Vi max by an internallygenerated inhibit signal.

The built-in bridge rectifier provides reverse polarity protectionat the input if operated from DC.

EW models are protected by the (blowing) input fuse inconnection with the body diode of the main transistor. Option Qoffers a serial diode, but this affects efficiency by approx. 1%.

Note: The measurements have been made by the approvalboards with free air convection cooling according to UL 60950specified ambient temperature TA and with the converter built in acardboard box according to UL 508 and a specified temperatureoutside the box Tout. The tables give a correlation between TA orTout and the case temperature TC (measuring point TC seeMechanical Data). For models not specified, please contactPower-One.

EW models have no derating.

Efficiency

Table 5a: Po derating according to UL 60950 at TA = 60 °C, or according to UL 508 at Tout = 50 °C



LWR1601-6E 124 80 108 98 –0.67

LWN1601/2660-6E 247 89 125 115 –1.25

LWR1701-6E 122 80 125 115 –1.25

LWN1701-6E 244 90 125 115 –1.25

LWR1801-6E 124 80 98 93 –0.67

LWN1801/2880-6E 247 89 125 115 –1.25

Fig. 3Efficiency versus load (LWN2660-6)

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 10

30

40

10

20

50

60

70

80

90

IoIo nom


04071



®


0

1

2

3

4

3 5 7 9 11 13

mA/W 04070b


Harm.

LWN1701-6E

Fig. 5Power factor versus load (LWN2660-6)

Fig. 4Harmonic currents at input current, measured at Vi = 230VAC, Io = Io nom (LWN1701-6E).

Power Factor, HarmonicsAll converters feature active power factor correction.

Electrical Output Data

Table 6a: Output data of 125 Watt standard models. General conditions: TA = 25 °C, unless TA is specified; R input open-circuit

Model LWR1301 EWR/LWR1601 LWR1701 LWR1801 Unit


Vo nom Output voltage nominal 1 Vi nom, Io nom 12.0 24.25 24.7 25.2 36.4 37 37.8 48.5 49.36 50.4 V

* 12.2 12.35 12.5 24.4 24.7 25.0 36.6 37 37.5 48.8 49.36 50.0

Vo worst Output voltage range Vi min – Vi max, 11.9 13.0 24.0 25.8 36.0 38.7 48.0 51.6of tolerance Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection 14 * 15 * 28.5 30 42.7 45 57 60

Po nom Nominal output power 105 * 124 122 124 W

Io nom Output current nominal 7.5 * 5.0 3.3 2.5 A

Io L Output current limit 3 Vi min – Vi max 7.6 8.5 5.1 5.7 3.4 3.8 2.53 2.9

Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 11.3 7.5 5.0 3.75

vo Ripple and noise EWR Vi = 110 VDC, Io nom - 500 - - mVpp

LWR Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 100fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 1100 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max, Io nom ±0.08 ±0.1 ±0.15 ±0.15 V

∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

vod Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, ±1 ±1.2 ±1.5 ±1.8Voltage deviation Io = (0.5 ↔ 1) Io nomRecovery time 40 40 80 80 ms

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min – TC max ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/K

tor Start-up time Vi = 0 → Vi nom, Io nom 700 700 700 700 ms

toh min Hold-up time Io nom, 10 6/15 20 25Vo nom → 0.8 Vo nom

* Converters with version 106 or higher1 Setting voltage with open R-input2 Superimposed low frequency ripple at 2 • fi3 Rectangular current limit characteristic (continuous operation)4 Short-term peak power capability 150% of Po nom for approx. 1 s

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 10

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1 PF

Vi = 125 VACVi = 230 VAC

04069

IoIo nom



®


Table 6b: Output data of 250 Watt single-output standard models. General conditions as in table 6a

Model LWN1301 LWN1601 LWN1701 LWN1801 Unit


Vo nom Output voltage nominal 1 Vi nom, Io nom 24.25 24.7 25.2 36.4 37 37.8 48.5 49.36 50.4 V

* 12.2 12.35 12.5 24.4 24.7 25.0 36.6 37 37.5 48.8 49.36 50.0




Io nom Output current nominal 14 * 10 6.6 5.0 A

Io L Output current limit 3 Vi min – Vi max 14.1 * 16* 10.2 11.4 6.7 7.6 5.1 5.6

Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 21 15 10 7.5

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 100 mVppfi = 50 Hz, Io nom 1100 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max, Io nom ±0.08 ±0.1 ±0.15 ±0.15 V∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, (0.1 – 1) Io nom – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8vod Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, ±1 ±1.2 ±1.5 ±1.8

Voltage deviation Io = (0.5 ↔ 1) Io nomRecovery time 40 40 80 80 ms

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min – TC max ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/Ktor Start-up time Vi = 0 → Vi nom, Io nom 700 700 700 700 mstoh min Hold-up time Io nom, 10 15 20 25

Vo nom → 0.8 Vo nom

Table 6c: Output data of 250 Watt double-output standard models. General conditions as in table 6a

Model LWN2320 EWN/LWN2660 LWN2770 LWN2880 Unit


Vo1 nom Output voltage nominal 1 Vi nom, Io nom 24.25 24.7 25.2 37 48.5 49.36 50.4 VVo2 nom * 12.2 12.35 12.5 24.4 24.7 25.0 36.6 37 37.5 48.8 49.36 50.0



Po nom Nominal output power 173* 247 244 247 W

Io nom Output current nominal 2× 7 * 2× 5 2× 3.3 2× 2.5 A

Io L Output current limit 3 Vi min – Vi max 7.1 * 7.8* 5.1 5.7 3.4 3.8 2.53 2.9

Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 2× 11.3* 2× 7.5 2× 5.0 2× 3.75vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 5 100 100 mVpp

fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 1100 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max, Io nom ±0.08 ±0.1 ±0.15 ±0.15 V∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, (0.1 – 1) Io nom – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8vod Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, ±1 ±1.2 ± ±1.8

Voltage deviation Io = (0.5 ↔ 1) Io nomRecovery time 40 40 80 80 ms


tor Start-up time Vi = 0 → Vi nom, Io nom 700 700 700 700 mstoh min Hold-up time Io nom, 10 6/15 20 25

Vo nom → 0.8 Vo nom

* Converters with version 106 or higher1 Setting voltage with open R-input2 Superimposed low frequency ripple at 2 • fi3 Rectangular current limit characteristic (continuous operation)

4 Short-term peak power capability 150% of Po nom for approx. 1 s5 EWN2660: 500 mV @ Vi = 110 VDC



®


Table 7a: Output data of 125 Watt battery charger models. General conditions: TA = 25 °C, unless TA is specified; R input leftopen-circuit, unless otherwise specified

Model LWR1140-6EM1 LWR1240-6EM1 LWR1840-6EM1 LWR1740-6EM1 UnitCharacteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo safe Output setting voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 13.48 13.8 14.15 24.5 25.68 26.3 36.75 38.52 39.5 49 51.36 52.6 V

VBat Output voltage (max.) Vi min – Vi max, 14.65 29.3 43.95 58.6controlled by R input Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection 15.4* 16.3* 30.9 32.5 46 48.8 61.8 65


Io nom Output current nominal 7.5 * 4.2 3.1 2.1 A

Io L Output current limit 3 Vi min – Vi max 7.6* 8.4 * 4.3 4.8 3.2 3.7 2.2 2.5

Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 11.2 * 7 4.7 3.5

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 100 mVpp fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 1100 2 1100 2 12002 1200 2


∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8(droop) Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

vod Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, ±1.2 ±1.2 ±1.6 ±1.9Voltage deviation Io = (0.5 ↔ 1) Io nomRecovery time 40 40 80 80 ms



Table 7b: Output data of 250 Watt battery charger models. General conditions as in table 7a

Model LWN1140-6EM1 LWN1240-6EM1 LWN1840-6EM1 LWN1740-6EM1 Unit


Vo safe Output setting voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 13.48 13.8 14.15 24.5 25.68 26.3 36.75 38.52 39.5 49 51.36 52.16 V

VBat Output voltage (max.) Vi min – Vi max, 14.65 29.3 43.95 58.6controlled by R input Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection 15.4* 16.3* 30.9 32.5 46 48.8 61.8 65

Po nom Nominal output power 194* 230 230 230 W

Io nom Output current nominal 14 * 10 6.2 4.2 A

Io L Output current limit 3 Vi min – Vi max 14.2 * 15.6 * 8.6 9.6 6.4 7.4 4.4 5.0

Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 22.6 * 14 9.4 7.0

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 100 mVpp fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 11002 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2


∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8(droop) Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

vod Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, ±1.2 ±1.2 ±1.6 ±1.9Voltage deviation Io = (0.5 ↔ 1) Io nomRecovery time 40 40 80 80 ms



* Converters with version 106 or higher1 Setting voltage with open R-input = Vo safe2 Superimposed low frequency ripple at 2 • f i3 Rectangular current limit characteristic (continuous operation)4 Short-term peak power capability 150% of Po nom for approx. 1 s



®


Parallel OperationDouble-output models exhibit an independantcontrol logic each. Both outputs can beconnected in parallel, provided that theoptions S (included in M1) and R are not used,since they influence only the 2nd output. Thetwo power trains share the current due to theiroutput voltage droop characteristic.

Up to 3 converters with the same outputvoltage may be operated in parallel. It ispossible to parallel W Series with X Seriesconverters.

Reasonable current sharing is achieved bythe droop characteristic. Correct mode ofoperation is highly dependent upon the wiringof the converters and the impedance of thesewires. Use wires with equal length and equalcross sections of min. 1.5 mm 2. The bestresults for parallel operation can be achievedwith the wiring shown in fig. 6.

Parallel operation of single-output modelsusing option R (output voltage adjust) ispossible, but not recommended. Refer to fig.6; the connections between the pins 8 and 9(both Vo–) should be as short as possible.

Note: Parallel operation is not possible, if thetemperature sensor is connected, as the sensoreliminates the output voltage droop.

Series ConnectionSeries connection of several outputs up to 150V is possible. Exceeding an output voltage of60 V, the output is not SELV.

Output Characteristic and ProtectionThe output characteristic, individual for eachpowertrain, is rectangular with a droop to easeparallel operation; see fig. 7.

However, a 50% higher output current ispossible for a short time, such allowing start-up of loads or charging of capacitors; see fig.8.

Each output is independently protectedagainst internal overvoltage by means of asecond control loop. When the output voltageexceeds Vo L, the respective output isdisabled.

Overtemperature ProtectionA built-in temperature sensor protects each powertrain isindependently protected against overtemperature. When acertain temperature is reached, the concerned powertrainreduces its output power continuously.

Fig. 7Vo versus Io (single-output model, typical values).

Vo+ 2

Vo+ 3

Vo- 4

Vo- 5

Vo- 8

Vo- 9

Vo+ 6

Vo+ 7

AUX 10

Vo+ 2

Vo+ 3

Vo- 4

Vo- 5

Vo- 8

Vo- 9

Vo+ 6

Vo+ 7

AUX 10

Vo+ 2

Vo+ 3

Vo- 4

Vo- 5

Vo- 8

Vo- 9

Vo+ 6

Vo+ 7

AUX 10

Vi

Vi

Vi

Load

11054b

Additional wiring for output currents Io ≥ 10 A

Additional wiring, if using the R-input

VR

+

_

Fig. 6Wiring for single-output converters connected in parallel. Additional wiringfor higher output currents and with the use of option R is shown.

0.8

1.0

0.6

0.4

0.2

00 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2

Io /Io nom

Vo /Vo nom 05181a



®


Fig. 9Trickle charge voltage versus temperature for differenttemperature coefficients (Vo safe with disconnected sensor)

Fig. 10Schematic circuit diagram of a system with battery backupand temperature-controlled charging.

Fig. 8Short term peak power characteristic: overcurrent versustime (typical values).

Thermal ConsiderationsThe thermal conditions are influenced by input voltage, outputcurrent, airflow, and temperature of surrounding components.TA max is therefore, contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.


Note: Sufficient forced cooling allows TA to be higher than TA maxprovided that TC max is not exceeded. It is recommended thatcontinuous operation under worst case conditions of thefollowing 3 parameters be avoided: Minimum input voltage,maximum output power, and maximum temperature.

Battery Charging and Temperature SensorThe battery charger models exhibit the option M1 and havebeen designed to charge lead-acid batteries. The R-inputallows for connecting a battery-specific temperature sensor,

which provides temperature controlled adjust of the tricklecharge voltage. This optimizes charging as well as battery lifetime. Depending upon the cell voltage and the temperaturecoefficient of the battery, different sensor types are available;see Accessories.

Note: Parallel operation is not possible, if the temperature sensoris connected to the paralleled outputs Vo+, as the sensoreliminates the output voltage droop.

However, it is possible to insert bleeding resistors in the Vo+output lines of each converter in order to create a droop of approx.0.6 V @ Io nom for 24 V outputs (1.2 V @ Io nom for 48V outputs), butthis creates considerable power losses.

Powersupply

Load

–+

Input Vo–

R

Temperature sensor

ϑ

03099c

Battery

Vo+

1.4

1.6

1.2

1.0

0.8

0.6-- 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 s

Io / Io nom05194b

0 1 2

2.10

2.15

2.20

2.25

2.30

2.35

2.40


–20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C

06139b


Vo safe



®


Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Electromagnetic ImmunityThe W Series has been successfully tested to the following specifications:





Electromagnetic IEC/EN 3 4 antenna 10 V/m 4 AM 80% n.a. 80 – 1000 MHz yes Afield RF 61000-4-3 1 kHz


frequency

Electrical fast IEC/EN 45 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransients/burst 61000-4-4 ±i/c, +i/– i 4000 Vp



Surges IEC/EN 3 ± i /c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B61000-4-5

2 +i/–i 1000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 2 Ωsurges per

coupling mode

Conducted IEC/EN 3 6 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes Adisturbances 61000-4-6 (140 dBµV) 1 kHz

Voltage dips and IEC/EN 7 --interruptions 61000-4-11

Surges IEC/EN wave +i/c, -i/c 1800 Vp 5/50 µs 5 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B(EW models) 50155:2001 A 8 pulses

1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary loss of function or deviation from specs.3 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.2.4 EW models withstand to 20 V/m corresponding to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.1.5 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.1.6 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.4.7 LW models with feature E (type tests with LWN1801-6E). Result: passed8 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000. Covers EN 50155:1995, RIA12, direct transients, wafeform D (EW models only).



®


Fig. 12aConducted emissions of LW models with feature E:Disturbances (quasi-peak) at the phase input according toEN 55022, measured at Vi nom and Io nom. (LWN1801-6E)

Fig. 11bRadiated emissions for LW models without feature E:Typical electromagnetic field strength (quasi-peak) accordingto EN 55014, measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

Fig. 11aConducted emissions for LW models without feature E: Typicaldisturbances (quasi-peak) at the input according to EN 55022,measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

07118b

EN 55022 B

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

00.03 0.30.1 1 3 10

dBµV

EN 55022 A

30 MHz

Emissions

Table 9: Electromagnetic emissions for LW models with feature E: (type tests with LWN1801-6E)

Phenomenon Standards Conditions Results

Harmonics EN 61000-3-2:2000 Vi = 230 V, Vo nom, Io nom Class A, D

Voltage fluctuation and flicker EN 61000-3-3 + A1:2001 Vi = 230 V, Vo nom, Io nom Complied

80

60

40

20

0

dBpW

50 100 150 200 250 300 MHz

07119a

Fig. 12bRadiated emissions measured according toEN 55022:2001 for LW models with feature E(LWN1801-6E, antenna 3 m distance, horizontal polarized)



®


External EMC Filter for Models with Feature EAn external EMC filter can be wired into the inputs lines of

Fig. 13Conducted emissions of EW models:Disturbances (peak) at the phase input according to EN 55011,measured at Vi nom and Io nom. (EWN2660-6)

Fig. 14aConducted emissions of LW models with external filter:Disturbances (peak) at the phase input according toEN 55011/55022, at Vi = 230 VAC, Io nom (LWN1701-6E).

Fig. 14bConducted emissions of LW models with feature E:Disturbances (average) at the phase input according toEN 55011/55022, at Vi = 230 VAC, Io nom (LWN1701-6E).

the converters. However, a small choke has to be connected inthe phase line to avoid interferences between internal andexternal filter, which would cause dramatically increased lowharmonics.

Fig. 14a and 14b show the conducted emissions smoothed byan external filter. The standards EN 55011 and 55022 definelimits for conducted (quasi)peak and conducted averageemissions. In general the limits for average emissions aremore difficult to meet.

The figure below shows the used external filter configurationconsisting of the inlet filter KMF1.1241.11 (4 A, Schurterwww.schurter.com) and the decopling choke EPCOSB82111B0000C018, 11 µH, 4 A, 6 × 20 mm.

Fig. 15aExternal filter to reduce conducted emissions of LW modelswith feature E (L1 = L2 = 1.6 mH, Cx = 47 nF,Cy = 2.2 nF)

Note: This filter allows for connection of an IEC inlet and isavailable with 1 or 2 incorporated fuses.

A similar filter with AMP terminals (6.3 × 20 mm) is also available(Schurter FMLB 5500.2028).

Fig. 15bExternal inlet filter

PMM 8000 PLUS Limit: 61204bqp Detector: Peak Phase Line Filter3 01.09.06LWN1701-6E Ui=230VAC, Ponom, Schurter-Filter 4A + Drossel 11µH/4A

EN 55022 B

dBµV

60

40

20

0

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

JM005

L'

N' Con

vert

er

PE' PEPE

L

N

Choke

JM007

PMM 8000 PLUS Limit: 61204bqp Detector: Peak, conducted Vi+, 6.6.06EWN2660-0 Ui=110VDC, Io=10A, outputs in parallel configuration

EN 55011 B

dBµV

60

40

20

0

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

JM008

PMM 8000 PLUS

EN 55022 B

Limit: 61204aqp Detector: Average Phase line Filter3 01.09.06LWN1701-6E Ui=230VAC, Ponom, Schurter-Filter 4A + Drossel 11µH/4AdBµV

60

40

20

0

0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 MHz

JM006



®


Immunity to Environmental ConditionsTable 10: Mechanical stress and climatic


Cab Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Convertersteady state MIL-STD-810D sect. 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not


Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter(sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle notNaCl solution) Conditions: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity operating

Storage duration: 3 cycles of 22 h

E b Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 25 gn = 245 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 11 ms not operating ,

6000 bumps: 1000 in each direction wall-mounted1

Acceleration amplitude: 10 gn = 98.1 m/s2 ConverterBump duration: 11 ms not operating ,6000 bumps: 1000 in each direction on DIN-rail 2

Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude and 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 514.3 frequency (1 Octave/min): 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating,

Test duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h each axis) wall-mounted1

Acceleration amplitude and 0.25 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converterfrequency (1 Octave/min): 2 gn = 19 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating,Test duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h each axis) on DIN-rail 2

E a Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Acceleration amplitude: 50 gn = 490 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 11 ms not operating ,

Number of bumps: 18 (3 in each direction) wall-mounted1

-- Shock EN 50155/EN 61373 Acceleration amplitude: 5.1 gn Convertersect. 10, class A and B Bump duration: 30 ms operating,body mounted 3 Number of bumps: 18 (3 in each direction) on DIN-rail 2

Fda Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-35 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converterwide band Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operating,Reproducibility Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rms wall-mounted1

high Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Acceleration spectral density: 0.01 gn2/Hz ConverterFrequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operating,Acceleration magnitude: 2.2 g n rms mounted on aTest duration: 1.5 h (0.5 h each axis) DIN-rail 2

-- Simulated long life EN 50155/EN 61373 Acceleration spectral density: 0.01 gn2/Hz Convertertime testing at sect. 9, class B Frequency band: 5 – 150 Hz operating,increased random body mounted 3 Acceleration magnitude: 0.8 g n rms mounted on avibration levels Test duration: 1.5 h (0.5 h each axis) DIN-rail 2

1 Wall-mounted with brackets UMB-W [HZZ00618]; see Accessories2 Fastened on a DIN-rail with 2 additional DIN-rail fixing brackets DMB-EWG, see Accessories. This covers also wall-mounting with

brackets, because wall mounting performs better in vibration test.3 Body mounted = chassis of a railway coach.

Temperatures

Table 11: Temperature specifications, valid for an air pressure of 800 - 1200 hPa (800 - 1200 mbar)Model LW models -6 EW models -0 UnitCharacteristics Conditions min max min maxTA Ambient temperature Converter –40 60 –40 703 °CTC Case temperature operating1

–40 902 –40 953

TS Storage temperature Not operating –40 100 –40 1001 See Thermal Considerations2 See table 5 Po derating3 Mounted in vertical position



®


138

(5.4

3")

106.6 (4.2")

113.6 (4.47")

15 (0

.59"

) 122.8 (4.84")

103 (4.05")

33 (

1.3"

)

49 (

1.93

")

09107b

108 (4.25")

Wall mountingbrackets(accessories)

Measuring point forcase temperature TC

TC

Option MOption M

13 (

0.51

")

31 (1.22")

29.4 (1.16")

43 (

1.69

")

LED

E uropeanP rojection

z

axis

(v

ertic

al)

x ax

is

40 (1.6")

Mechanical DataDimensions in mm.

Table 12: MTBF

Values at specified Model Ground benign Ground fixedGround mobile Unitcase temperature 40 °C 40 °C 70 °C 50 °C

MTBF 1 LXN1801-6 400 000 110 000 50 000 40 000 h

1 Calculated according to MIL-HDBK-217E, notice 2.

Fig. 16Case W01EWN/LWN: weight approx. 1400 gEWR/LWR: weight approx. 1200 gCase designed by ATP, Munich.

Failure Rates



®


1 3 5 7 9 11

10067

2 4 6 8 10

1 32

10066


Terminal AllocationThe terminal allocation tables define the electrical potentialof the converters.

Fig. 17bView of the output terminals (cage clamp style)

Fig. 17aView of the input terminals (cage clamp style)

Installation InstructionsThe converters of the W Series are components, intendedexclusively for inclusion within other equipment by professionalinstallers. Installation must strictly follow the national safetyregulations in compliance with the enclosure, mounting,creepage, clearance, casualty, markings and segregationrequirements of the end-use application.

DIN-rail mounting is possible with the built-in snap-fit deviceon a DIN-rail. This fulfills the mechanical transport requirementsas per ETSI 300019-1-2, class 2 (vertical).

To fulfill the requirements of IEC 721-3-2, class 2.1 (vertical), 2additional fixing brackets DMB-EWG [formerly HZZ00624] (seeAccessories) must be fitted on the bottom side of the DIN-rail.For heavy duty railway applications, we recommend installingall 4 fixing brackets DMB-EWG.

Wall mounting is possible with the wall-mounting bracketsUMB-W [HZZ00618] (see Accessories). This complies withIEC 721-3-2, class 2.2 (vertical and horizontal).

Caution: Install the converters vertically, and make sure that thereis sufficient airflow available for convection cooling. The minimumspace to the next device should be: top/bottom: 30 mm, left/right:20 mm.

The converters of the W Series are class I equipment: Inputterminal 1 ( ) and the output terminals 1 and 11 ( )are reliably connected to the case. For safety reasons it is

Fig. 18bDismounting from DIN-rail. Use proper tool (min. 3 mmscrewdriver) and adequate force.

Fig. 18aSnap-fit mounting to DIN-Rail.

10073

1007

2

Table 13c: Terminal allocation output side

Pin no. Pin des. Single output Double output

1 Functional Functionalearth to load earth to load

2 + Output positive Output 1 positive


4 – Output negative Output 1 negative






10 AUX Option Option

11 Functional Functionalearth to load earth to load

Table 13b: Input terminals of EW models

Pin no. Pin designation Electrical determination

1 Protective earth PE

2 Vi– Input negative

3 Vi+ Input positive

Table 13a: Input terminals of LW models



2 N Input neutral, DC negative

3 L Input phase, DC positive

essential to connect the input terminal 1 ( ) to the protectiveearth of the supply system. Output terminals 1 and 11 can beused to connect the output voltage(s) or the load to functionalearth.

The phase input (L or Vi+) is internally fused; see Input Fuse.



®


1

2

3

10074

Fig. 19Cage clamp terminals. Use 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 20 to 12)solid or stranded wires depending on local requirements.

This fuse is designed to break an overcurrent in case of amalfunction of the converter and is not customer-accessible.

External fuses in the wiring to one or both input lines (L and/or N ) may be necessary to ensure compliance with localrequirements. A built-in second fuse in the neutral path isavailable as option F.

A second fuse in the wiring to the neutral terminal N or optionF is needed if:


• Neutral and earth impedance is high or undefined

• Phase and neutral of the mains are not defined or cannot beassigned to the corresponding terminals (L to phase andN to neutral).

Models with Option F: Caution! Double-pole/neutral fusing.

If the converters operate at source voltages above 250 VDC,an external fuse or a circuit breaker at system level should beinstalled.

Caution:

• Installation must strictly follow the national safety regulations.

• Do not open this apparatus!

Protection DegreeThe protection degree of the converters is IP 20. Protectivecovers over input and output terminals are available onrequest; see Accessories.

Cleaning AgentsAny penetration of liquid or foreign solid objects is to beprevented, since the converters are not hermetically sealed.

Standards and ApprovalsThe converters of the LW Series with feature E were approvedby TÜV according to IEC/EN 60950-1:2001 (IEC/EN 60950 formodels without E), IEC 61010-1:C11:2002 (models without E:IEC 61010-1), and EN 50178:1997 (with and without E).

The converters were further approved by UL according toUL 60950 (models without E: UL1950), CAN/CSA C22.2 No.950-95 as UL508-listed components.

Safety approvals for EW models are in process.

The converters have been designed in accordance with saidstandards for:


• Power-supply for building-in, vertical mounting on 35 mmDIN-rail or on a wall

• Overvoltage category II (III for 110 VAC supply)

• Basic insulation between input and case, based on250 VAC

• Double or reinforced insulation between input and output,based on 250 VAC and 350 VDC.

• Functional insulation between outputs and case.

• Functional insulation between outputs.

• Pollution degree 3 environment (AC-input) and degree 2(DC input).

CB Scheme is available (SE-34392).


For details see the Declaration of Conformity (last pages).

Railway ApplicationsAll W Series converters have been designed observing therailway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121. All boards arecoated with a protective lacquer.

The EW Series is particularily suitable for connection to 110 Vrailway batteries.



®


IsolationThe electric strength test is performed in the factory as routinetest in accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950 andshould not be repeated in the field. Power-One will not honorany warranty claims resulting from electric strength field tests.

Leakage Currents in AC-DC OperationLeakage currents flow due to internal leakage capacitance andRFI suppression Y-capacitors. The current values areproportional to the mains voltage and nearly proportional to themains frequency. They are specified at maximum operatinginput voltage where phase, neutral, and protective earth arecorrectly connected as required for class I equipment.

Leakage current may exceed 3.5 mA, if fi > 63 Hz.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a converter is operator accessible, it shallbe a SELV circuit according to IEC/EN 60950 related safetystandards.

The converters have SELV output circuits up to an outputvoltage of 57.5 V. However, if the isolated outputs areconnected to another voltage source or connected in serieswith a total of >57.5 V the outputs are hazardous.

It is the sole responsibility of the installer to ensure thecompliance with the relevant and applicable safetyregulations.

LED IndicatorA green LED is activated, when the output voltage Vo is withinthe normal operating tolerance band.

Note: This LED is also activated, when the converter is notpowered by the input, but a loaded battery is connected to theoutput.

Table 14: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output(s) to Output 1 to Unitand output(s) case output 2 and AUX


Insulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 2 >300 2 >100 M Ω

1 In accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950-1, subassemblies are pretested with 4.2 kVDC.2 Tested at 500 VDC.



®


Description of OptionsE designates LW models with improved EMC performance.Refer to the EC Declaration of Conformity (last page). FeatureE is standard for new designs.

Options D1, D2, D5, R are available (as single choice options)on the AUX terminal (10), referenced to Vo–.

Option M1 and M2 designate a combination of several optionsaccessible via a D-SUB connector. Option M1 includes thefunction S.

Note: In double-output models, the options D1, D5, R and Sconcern only output 2.

Single Options Using the AUX PinThe connection is shown in the figure below. For thedescription refer to Adjustment of Vo or Vo2 (next section).

Multiple Options M1 or M2 via D-SUB ConnectorThe option board is suitable for applications, where severaloptions are needed. Option M1 is standard for battery chargermodels, option M2 is suitable for applications without battery orfor simple applications with battery.

D2: Input Voltage Monitor (Power Fail)D2 monitors the input voltage. If the voltage drops below 65VAC or 92 VDC (EW models: 60 VDC), the D2-signal (open-collector) goes to high impedance. ID max < 50 mA. The outputis protected by a Zener diode against transients up to 75 V (formodels with Vo max > 50 V up to 90 V).

Table 16b: Option board M2

Function Description

R Output voltage adjust1

D2 Input voltage monitor Vi low

D5 Output voltage monitor1

(battery deep discharged): Vo low D5

D-adjust Adjustment of trigger values D1 and D5

1 In double-output models, only output 2 is concerned.

Table 16a: Option board M1



D1 Output voltage monitor Vo low D11


D5 Output 2 voltage monitor1


Sys-OK System okay

S Shutdown1

D-adj Adjustment of trigger values D1 and D5


Table 15: Pin allocation of the 9 pin D-SUB connector

Pin Designation Description

1 GND11 System ground / common signal return

2 R R input3

3 VCC2 Positive supply voltage (≈ output 2)

4 D1 Output voltage monitor Vo low D1 3

5 D5 Output 2 voltage monitor Vo low D53

6 S Shutdown3

7 D-adj Adjustment of threshold values of D1 or D5

8 D2 Input voltage monitor Vi low

9 Sys-OK System okay (all outputs are okay)

1 Do not connect GND1 (pin 1) with the neg. output (–)2 Do not connect VCC (pin 3) with the positive output (+)3 In double-output models, R and S influence output 2 only.

Fig. 21Option D2: Examples of relaycontrol to monitor a power failure.

Fig. 20Connection of adjust resistors or an external voltage source toadjust the output voltage Vo or Vo2 (option M1 or M2 not fitted)

AUX

1

111098765432

Adjustment with Vext

06142bAUX

1

111098765432

Adjustment with Rext

Vo2+or Vo+

Vo2–or Vo–

Re

xt1

Re

xt2

Vext

+

Vo2–or Vo–

12345

6789

+

Pow

er-F

ail

D-SUB06

141a

1

111098765432

D2

+

AUX

1

111098765432

Vo2+or Vo+

Vo2+or Vo+

12345

6789

+

Pow

er-F

ail D

2

D-SUB

VC

C

0614

0a



®


D1: Output Voltage MonitorD1 is intended for monitoring the bus voltage of a battery-buffered system. It indicates that the system is powered fromthe battery and can for instance be used as warning signal orto switch off a part of the load. If the output voltage drops belowVo low D1, the D1 signal (open-collector) goes to highimpedance. I D max <50 mA. The D1 output is protected by aZener diode against transients up to 75 V (for models withVo max >50 V up to 90 V). In double-output models D1 monitorsonly output 2.

In applications without battery-buffering the D1 signal may notbe suitable, since smaller dynamic load changes may causeD1 to trigger. For such applications D5 with a trigger level ofapprox. 85% Vo nom should be chosen (e.g., for bus voltage24.7 V, trigger level at 21 V).

D5: System Voltage Monitor (Battery Deep)D5 monitors the output voltage Vo (Vo2 in double-outputmodels) or the lowest admissible voltage of a connectedbattery (battery deep discharge). The definition of D5 is similarto D1, but the trigger level is lower. When Vo drops below thevalue specified in the table below, the D5 signal (open-collector) goes to high impedance. I D max < 50 mA. The D5output is protected by a Zener diode against transients up to 75V (for models with Vo max >50 V up to 90 V).

In systems without battery support, D5 signals that Vo (or Vo2 )is going to drop below a safe value.

In battery-buffered systems, D5 indicates that the battery hasreached its deepest discharge level prior to getting damaged.

The D5 signal can be used for instance to disable loads, savedata, or to start a controlled switch-off of running processes.

Adjustment of Threshold Levels (D1/D5)Pin 7 of the D-SUB connector allows for adjustment of thethreshold levels of D1 and D5. Both levels are influenced bythe voltage divider Rx / Ry. Resistor Rx to pin 3 (VCC) lowersthe levels, whereas Ry to pin 1 (GND1) increases them (seefig. 22).

Table 17: Options D1 and D5 - trigger and switch-on levels

Model Battery Vo low D1 Vo low D5VBat trigger switch on trigger switch on[V] [V] [V] [V] [V]

LWR/LWN1140 12 11.5 12.3 10.5 12.3

LWR/LWN1240 24 23 24.3 21.1 24.3

LWR/LWN1840 36 34.5 36.5 31.5 36.5

LWR/LWN1740 48 46 48.6 42.2 48.6

LWN2880 72 69 72.9 63.3 69

Fig. 22Wiring to adjust both threshold levels of option D1 or D5

12345

6789

D-SUB

0614

8a

Rx

Change threshold

Ry

VCC GND1

D-a

dj

Option S: ShutdownReduces the output power to approx. 1 W, i.e., the converter isnot fully disabled. In a no-load condition Vo drops below 6.2 V;see fig. 23. In double-output models, only output 2 isinfluenced.

Table 18: Shutdown Conditions

Voltage VSD on Resultshutdown pin

<0.7 V Converter disabled (Po approx. 1 W)

≥2.0 V or open Converter enabled

Sys-OK: StatusThis function allows for checking in a battery chargerapplication, whether the output follows the external controlsignal at the R-input (coming for instance from the temperaturesensor). Refer to table 19.

The open-collector output Sys-OK is protected by a Zenerdiode against transients up to 75 V (for models with Vo max >50V up to 90 V). Current <50 mA.

Fig. 23Output voltage versus output current, while shut down (Vi =Vi nom).

05175b

3

1

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.21 A

5

Output current

V

Output voltage



®


Fig. 24System connectors Option K2

R: Adjustment of Vo or Vo2

The R input allows external adjustment of the output voltage inthe range of 50% to 110% Vo nom. Double-output models allowonly adjustment of output 2 (connected to the terminals 6, 7, 8and 9). This enables asymmetric output voltage configuration.

Adjustment can be achieved via a resistor or an externalvoltage source (in the range of 1.25 – 2.75 V).

Note: If the R input is not connected: Vo or Vo2 ≈ Vo nom.

a) Adjustment by an external resistor:

Resistor Rext1, connected between R (pin 2) and GND1 (pin1) of the D-SUB connector or according to fig. 20.

Vo Vo = 50 – 100% Vo nom. Rext1 ≈ 4 kΩ • ––––––––– Vo nom – Vo

Resistor Rext2, connected between R (pin 2) and VCC (pin 3)of the D-SUB connector or according to fig. 20.

Vo – 2.5 V Vo = 100 – 110% Vo nom. Rext2 ≈ 4 kΩ • –––––––––––––––– 2.5 V•(Vo /Vo nom –1)

Note: If the R function is not included in M1 or M2, refer to figure20 how to connect Rext1 or Rext2 .

b) Adjustment by an external control voltage Vext (1.25 – 2.75V), connected between R (pin 2) and GND (pin 1) of the D-SUB connector or according to fig. 20.

Vo Vext Vext ≈ 2.5 V • ––––– Vo ≈ Vo nom • –––– Vo nom 2.5 V


Note: If longer wires are used to connect the R input at the D-SUBconnector, the wiring to pin 1 (GND1) should be done as star pointconnection. If wired differently, the output voltage setting may beadversely affected.

In battery charging systems, an external battery temperaturesensor (see Accessories) can be connected to optimize Vo.However, adjustment using the R input (pin 2 of D-SUB) ispossible as well. The above shown formulas are valid, butVo nom stands for the voltage with open R input (= Vo safe).

Option F: Built-in Second FuseA built-in second fuse in the neutral line provides safe phase-

to-phase connection at low mains voltages (e.g., USA 120 V/208 V /60 Hz systems).

The built-in second fuse also enables safe connection to themains, where phase and neutral are not defined or cannot beidentified, as e.g., in the case of plug and socket connection tothe mains via German Schuko-plugs; see also Safety andInstallation Instructions.

Option F limits the DC input voltage to ≤ 250 V.

Option Q: Reverse Polarity ProtectionEW models have no bridge rectifier at the input. To providereverse polarity protection, an additional diode can be fitted.However this lowers the efficiency by approximately 1%.

Option K2: System ConnectorsFor installation in systems using pre-assembled harnesses theconverters are available with system connectors. They are UL-listed, approved for currents up to 15 A at –40 to 105 °C.

The mating system connectors with screw terminals andretainers are delivered together with every converter withoption K2. Use max. 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) solid or strandedwires, or max. 1.5 mm2 (AWG 14) stranded wires with crimptermination, stripped length 6 mm. Tightening torque of input/output terminals: max. 0.79 Nm (7 lbs.in.).


Table 19: System OK (M1 with external battery sensor)

System Status Input Vcontrol Vbat Vbat D5sensor signal theoretical measured output

System OK O.K. 2.7 V 27 V 27 V Low ohmic

Battery overchared / temp. sensor O.K. 2.7 V 27 V 28 V High ohmicdefect / control voltage to high

Overload, converter cannot follow the O.K. 2.7 V 27 V 24 V High ohmiccontrol signal

Output does not follow control signal, O.K. 3.0 V 30 V 27 V High ohmicsince battery would be overcharged

System OK O.K. 2.5 V 25 V 25V Low ohmic



®


AccessoriesUMB-W: Shock-Resistant Wall MountingSet of wall mounting brackets UMB-W [HZZ00618]

Content: 2 clamps, 4 countersunk screws M4, washers, andspring washers.

Fig. 25Brackets UMB-W

Fig. 26Wall mounting withmounting brackets UMB-W.

DMB-EWG: DIN-Rail Fixing BracketsFor DIN-Rail vibration-proof fastening, use a set of bracketsDMB-EWG (replacement for HZZ00624). For heavy-dutyapplication 2 sets ( = 4 brackets) are preferable.

Protective Covers over TerminalsSet of plastic covers COVER-W [HZZ 01219]

Content: 2 covers to protect the input and output connector.

Fig. 27One of 4 DIN-rail fixing brackets DMB-EWG.

Fig. 28Protective covers COVER-W

49

33 ±0.5

4.2

8

18

3

1205

5

10068



®


+ –

Battery

R

GND

Temperaturesensor

+ –05191a

greenbrown

whiteD-SUB

Fuse

Load

Vo+

Vo–

Con

vert

er

2

3

1

VCC

Table 20: Type survey S-KSMH sensors

Nominal battery Model Cell voltage Temp. coefficient/cell Cable lengthvoltage [V] [V] [mV/K] [m]

12 S-KSMH12-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.27-35-2 2.27 –3.5 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.31-35-0 2.35 –3.1 4.5

24 S-KSMH24-2.31-35-0 2.35 –3.5 2

48 S-KSMH48-2.35-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

48 S-KSMH48-2-27-35-2 2.27 –3.5 2

Other models for different cell voltages, temperature coefficients, or cable lengths are available upon request.


Fig. 29Temperature sensor

Battery Temperature SensorTo charge lead-acid batteries according to their temperaturedifferent types of temperature sensors are available, (seeBattery Charging and Temperature Sensor in this data sheetand the Temperature Sensor data sheet at www.power-one.com).

For additional information go to www.power-one.com.

EuropeanProjection



56 (2.2")L


adhesive tape

26 (1.02")

9.8

(0.4

")09125a



®




We


declare under our sole responsibility that all LW-Series power supplies carryingthe CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive(LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


• EN 61204: 1995 ( = IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC. output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements


The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe cor-rect installation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product withthe LVD. All LW Series power supplies are components, intended exclusively forinclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operation or by pro-fessional installers. They must not be operated as stand alone products.


Uster, 15 July 2005 Power-One AG



®



We


declare under our sole responsibility that all LW-Series power supplies with Feature Ecarrying the CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive(LVD) 73/23/EEC and the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC of the Eu-ropean Communities.

Conformity with the directives is presumed by conformity with the following standards:

• EN 61204: 1995 (= IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Performance characteristics andsafety requirements

• EN 60950-1: 2001 (=IEC 60950-1: 2001)Safety of information technology equipment

• EN 61000-6-2: 1999 (=IEC 61000-6-2: 1999)Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic standards - Immunity for industrialenvironments

• EN 61000-6-3: 2001 (=IEC 61000-6-3: 2001)Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic emission standards - Residential,commercial and light industry

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe correct instal-lation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with the LVD. All LWSeries power supplies are components, intended exclusively for inclusion within otherequipment by an industrial assembly operation or by professional installers. They mustnot be operated as stand alone products.

It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure compliance of the end product with allprovisions of the applicable standards and to declare presumption of conformity with theapplicable European directives.





®



We


declare under our sole responsibility that all EW-Series power supplies carrying theCE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.

Conformity with the directives is presumed by conformity with the following standards:

• EN 61204Low-voltage power supply devices, DC output - Performance characteristics andsafety requirements

• EN 60950-1Safety of information technology equipment

The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe correctinstallation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product with the LVD. AllEW Series power supplies are components, intended exclusively for inclusion within otherequipment by an industrial assembly operation or by professional installers. They mustnot be operated as stand alone products.

It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure compliance of the end product with allprovisions of the applicable standards and to declare presumption of conformity with theapplicable European directives.





®

X Series Data Sheet375, 500 Watt AC-DC and DC-DC DIN-Rail Converters

• RoHS lead-free-solder and lead-solder-exemptedproducts are available

• Rugged 35 mm DIN-rail snap-fit design• Class I equipment• Universal AC-input with single stage conversion AC to

DC or DC input of 90 to 350 V• Power factor correction, harmonics IEC/EN 61000-3-2• Virtually no inrush current• Immunity to IEC/EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -11• Emissions according to EN 55011/022• Very high efficiency; up to 89%• Short-term output peak power capability, rectangular

current limiting characteristic• Single or two independently regulated outputs with 24,

36, or 48 V• Outputs no-load, overload, and short-circuit proof• PCBs protected by lacquer• Very high reliability

DescriptionThe Convert Select front end series represents a family ofDIN-rail mountable AC-DC and DC-DC converters with powerfactor correction. The converters have been designedaccording to the latest industry requirements and standards.They are ideal for use in outdoor and other demandingapplications to power building control systems, factoryautomation, industrial controls, instrumentation, electro-magnetic drives, fans, and other DC loads. Different modelsare available with a single output or two independentlyregulated, electrically isolated outputs with 24, 36, or 48 V.Special models for battery charging are available.

Key features of the Convert Select line include power factorcorrection with low harmonic distortion, negligibly low inrushcurrent, high immunity to transients and surges, and lowelectromagnetic emissions. Internal protection circuits suchas input over- and undervoltage lockout, thermal protection,as well as output overvoltage protection by a second controlloop ensure safe operation of the final system.

Safety according to IEC/EN 60950-1, UL/CSA 60950-1,IEC/EN 50178, IEC 61010-1, UL 508

The outputs deliver an electrically-isolated Safety Extra LowVoltage, SELV, (except models LXR/LXN1740) and low outputnoise. They are no-load, overload, and short-circuit proof. Theelectronically controlled short-term peak power capability of upto 150% of the rated output power enables the front endconverters to deliver additional power to start-up motors or tosafely operate subsequent circuit breakers. Built-in large sizedoutput capacitors absorb possible reverse energy, which maybe caused by quick deceleration of electromagnetic drivesconnected directly to the output. A green LED at the front coverdisplays the status of the output(s).

The Convert Select Series was designed according to allrelevant international safety standards. The converters areapproved by TÜV and UL, and are UL 508 listed. Adequateclearances and creepage distances allow operation in pollutiondegree 3 environment (with AC input). All board assemblies arecoated with a protective lacquer.

Features

1144.49"

1947.64"

1385.43"


Description .......................................................................... 1Model Selection .................................................................. 2Functional Description ........................................................ 4Electrical Input Data ............................................................ 5Electrical Output Data ......................................................... 7Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................... 12

Immunity to Environmental Conditions ............................. 13Mechanical Data ............................................................... 14Safety and Installation Instructions ................................... 15Description of Options ...................................................... 17Accessories ....................................................................... 20EC Declaration of Conformity ........................................... 22



®


The thermal concept allows operation at full load up to anambient temperature of 60 °C in free air without forced cooling.A rugged DIN snap-fit device allows easy and reliable fixingonto the various 35 mm DIN-rail models. The converters arefitted with cage clamp terminals easily accessible from the

Model SelectionTable 1: Standard models

Output 1 Output 2 Output Power Operating Input Type Effic. Options 3, 5

Vo1 nom1 Io1 nom Vo2 nom1 Io2 nom Po nom Voltage Designation ηηηηηmin 7[VDC] [A] [VDC] [A] [W] Vi min - Vi max [%]

24.7 15 - - 371 85 2 – 264 VAC, LXR1601-6 87 R

24.7 20 - - 494 47 – 63 Hz 4, LXN1601-6 87 D1, D2, D5

37 10 - - 37090 2 – 350 VDC 6

LXR1701-6 3 88M1, M2

37 13.4 - - 496 LXN1701-6 3 88

F, K2

49.4 7.5 - - 371 LXR1801-6 88

G

49.4 10 - - 494 LXN1801-6 88

24.7 10 24.7 10 494 LXN2660-6 87

37 6.7 37 6.7 496 LXN2770-6 3 88

49.4 5 49.4 5 494 LXN2880-6 88

1 R-input not connected.2 For derating at low input voltage see section Output Power Derating.3 For minimum quantity and lead times contact Power-One.4 The converters have been tested up to 440 Hz; for operating frequencies <47 Hz or >63 Hz contact Power-One.5 On double-output models the options R, M2, D1, D2, D5 are related to the second output only.6 Vi ≤ 250 VDC for models with option F7 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Io nom, and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approx. 2% better.

front. System connectors with screw terminals for use with pre-assembled harnesses, external adjustment of the outputvoltage, as well as various auxiliary functions are available asoptions.

Table 2: Battery charger models (M1 included)

Output Voltage Nominal Output Values Operating Input Type Designation Effic. Options 3VBat Vo safe1 Vo max Vo nom 5 Io nom 5 Po nom 5 Voltage ηηηηηmin 7

[VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [A] [W] Vi min - Vi max [%]

24 25.681 29.3 27.3 12.6 344 85 2 – 264 VAC, LXR1240-6M1 87 F, K2,

16.8 458 47 – 63 Hz 4, LXN1240-6M1 87 G

36 38.521 43.95 40.88 8.4 34390 2 – 350 VDC 6

LXR1840-6M1 3 87

11.2 458 LXN1840-6M1 3 87

48 51.361 58.6 54.5 6.3 343 LXR1740-6M1 87

8.4 458 LXN1740-6M1 87

1 Setting voltage (typ.) with open R-input2 For derating at low input voltage see section Output Power Derating.3 For minimum quantity and lead times consult Power-One.4 The converters have been tested up to 440 Hz; for operating frequency <47 Hz or >63 Hz contact Power-One.5 Nominal output figures, calculated with a cell voltage of 2.27 V at 20 °C.6 Vi ≤ 250 VDC for models with option F.7 Min. efficiency at Vi nom, Vo nom, Io nom, and TA = 25 °C. Typical values are approx. 2% better.



®


Part Number Description L X N 2 660 -6 D2 F K2 G

Input voltage range ............................................................... L

Series ................................................................................... X

Nominal output power375W ............................................................... R500 W .............................................................. N

Number of outputs ............................................................ 1, 2

Type specification .................................................. 000 – 999

Operational ambient temperature range TA–40 to 60 °C ................................................... -6Customer-specific ...................................... -0, -5

Options Output voltage control input 2 .......................................RSave data signal 2 .......................................... D1, D2, D5Multiple functions via D-SUB connector 2 .. M1, M2

Built-in second fuse, input diode ..................... F

System connector .......................................... K2

RoHS compliant for all six substances .......... G1

1 G is always placed at the end of the part number. Consult Power-One for availability !2 Only one of these options is possible.

Example: LXN2660-6D2FK2G: Power factor corrected AC-DC converter, operating input voltage range 85 – 264 VAC,2 electrically isolated and individually regulated outputs, each providing 24.7 V, 10 A, options D2, F, K2, and RoHS-compatible for all 6 substances.


Specific type designation, input voltage range, nominal outputvoltages and currents, degree of protection, batch and serialnumber, data code including production site, version, date ofproduction.



®


Inpu

t filt

er

Inpu

t filt

er

Vo/Io control

Out

put f

ilter



input OVP/UVP

L

N

Vo+

Vo–

Cy

Cy Cy

CY

CY

Aux1

Fuse

2

1

03105

Shunt Shunt

3

4

5

8

9

2

3

6

7

1

12

10

Aux211

2nd fuse(option F)

Rec

tifie

r

Inpu

t filt

er Cy

Cy

Fuse

2

1

03106

3

Inpu

t filt

er

Vo/Io control

Out

put f

ilter



input OVP/UVP

Vo+

Vo–Cy

Cy

Cy

Shunt Shunt4

5

2

3

Inpu

t filt

er

Vo/Io control

Out

put f

ilter



input OVP/UVP

Vo+

Vo–Cy

Cy

Cy

Aux1

Shunt Shunt8

9

6

7

12

10

Aux211

1

L

N2nd fuse(option F)

Rec

tifie

r

+

+

Functional DescriptionThe X Series converters are primary controlled AC-DC or DC-DC flyback converters with a constant switching frequency of

130 kHz. The power-factor-corrected single-step conversion ofthe input voltage to a low output voltage results in extremelyhigh efficiency. Depending on the output power, the convertersare fitted with three (375 W) or four (500 W) powertrains.

Fig. 1LXR 375 W single-output converter.

Fig. 2LXN 500 W double-output converterFor a pinout of 500 W single-output models see fig. 1.



®


Models with four powertrains have one or two outputs.Double-output models exhibit individual control of eachoutput.

The input voltage is fed via fuse, filter, and rectifier to thepowertrains with main transformers designed in planartechnique. The input filter with very small input capacitancegenerates virtually no inrush current. An input transientsuppressor protects the converter against high voltage peaksand surges. Input over- and undervoltage lockout as well asinput current limitation protect the converter from operationoutside of its specification. The input voltage waveform issensed by the primary control logic to allow active powerfactor correction, forcing the input current to follow the inputvoltage waveform.

The secondary side of each main transformer supplies via therectifier diode a large electrolytic output storage capacitor

providing for the hold-up time. Double-output models exhibit anindividual control logic for each output. The output voltage andthe output current are measured and fed back to the primarycontrol logic via an optocoupler. A second control loop monitorsthe output voltage. It disables the output in the case of a failurein the control logic and limits the output voltage.

Built-in temperature sensors monitor the internal temperature ofeach powertrain. If the temperature exceeds the limit, theconverter reduces the output power continuously to keep thetemperature below its limit. A green LED on the front coverconfirms the presence of the output voltage(s).

The R input (option R, M1, or M2) allows for external adjustmentof the output voltage by means of a resistor or an externalvoltage source. An external sensor can be connected to the Rinput and allows for temperature-controlled battery charging;see Accessories.

Electrical Input DataGeneral conditions:TA = 25 °C, unless TC is specified.

Table 3: Input data LW models

Input LXR LXN Unit

AC-Input DC-Input AC-Input DC-Input


Vi Operating input voltage Io = 0 – Io nom 85 2 264 90 2 350 3 85 2 264 90 2 350 3 Vrange Tc – Tc max

Vi nom Rated input volt. range 100 (230) 240 220 100 (230) 240 220

f i Rated input frequency1 50 – 60 -- 50 – 60 -- Hz

I i Input current Io nom, Vi = Vi nom 1.9 1.95 2.6 2.6 AIo nom, Vi = Vi min 5.2 5.0 7.0 6.6

Pi0 No-load input power Vi min – Vi max 3 3 3 3 W

I inrush Inrush current Vi max , t > 0.1 ms 5 5 5 5 A


PF Power factor Vi nom = 230 V, Io nom 0.90 -- 0.90 --

Vi RFI Conducted input RFI EN 55011/55022 A A A A

Radiated input RFIVi nom, Io nom

fswitch Switching frequency 130 130 130 130 kHz

1 For operating frequencies <47 Hz and >63 Hz contact Power-One. The converters have been tested up to 440 Hz.2 Output power derating at low input voltage and/or high case temperature TC; see Output power derating.3 Vi ≤ 250 VDC for models with option F.



®


0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 150

70

60

80

90

η [%]

IoIo nom

Vi = 125 Vrms Vi = 230 Vrms

04068a

Output Power DeratingThe output power of LX models must be decreased at low inputvoltage and/or powertrain temperature above 125 °C.

The powertrain temperature depends on the output power, theinput voltage, and the cooling method. At low input voltage thelosses increase. At the maximum specified environmenttemperature TA free air convection cooling might beinsufficient. As a result, the output power has to be reducedaccording to the tables 4 and 5.

Note: The measurements have been made at the approval testswith free air convection cooling according to UL 60950, specifiedambient temperature TA, and with the converter built in acardboard box according to UL 508 and a specified temperatureoutside the box Tout. The tables give a correlation between TA orTout and the case temperature TC (measuring point TC seeMechanical Data). For models not specified, please contactPower-One.

Input Fuse and ProtectionA slow blow fuse (Schurter T10A, 5 × 20 mm), protected by asleeve, is connected in the line input. For DC input voltagesabove 250 V an external DC fuse or a circuit breaker must beinstalled; observe the Installation Instructions.

Converters with option F have 2 fuses, one in each input line.The D C input voltage for all converters with option F is limitedto 250 V.

A VDR and a symmetrical input filter form an effectiveprotection against input transients.

An under- and overvoltage lockout protects the converter,

Fig. 3Efficiency versus load

Table 4: Po derating according to UL 60950 at TA = 60 °C, or according to UL 508 at Tout = 50 °C



LXR1601-6 371 84 125 115 – 1.8

LXR1701-6 370 84 125 115 – 1.8

LXR1801-6 371 84 125 115 – 1.8

LXN1601/2660-6 494 84 125 115 –2.5

LXN1701-6 496 84 125 115 –2.5

LXN1801/2880-6 494 84 125 115 –2.5

Table 5: Po derating according to UL 60950 at TA = 50 °C, or according to UL 508 at Tout = 40 °C



LXR1601-6 371 78 100 no derating – 1.5

LXR1701-6 370 78 100 no derating – 1.5

LXR1801-6 371 78 100 no derating – 1.5

LXN1601/2660-6 494 78 100 no derating – 2

LXN1701-6 496 78 100 no derating – 2

LXN1801/2880-6 494 78 100 no derating – 2

which is disabled below Vi min and above Vi max by an internallygenerated inhibit signal.

The built-in bridge rectifier provides reverse polarity protectionat the input if operated from DC.

Efficiency



®


0

1

2

3

4

3 5 7 9 11 13

mA/W 04067a


Harm.

LXN1601-6

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 10

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0PF

Vi = 125 VrmsVi = 230 Vrms

04066a

IoIo nom

Fig. 5Power factor versus load

Fig. 4Harmonic currents at input current, measured at Vi = 230VAC, Io = Io nom (LXN1601-6)

Power Factor, HarmonicsAll converters feature active power factor correction.

Electrical Output Data

Table 6a: Output data of 375 Watt standard models. General conditions: TA = 25 °C, unless TA is specified; R input open-circuit

Model LXR1601 LXR1701 LXR1801 Unit



* 24.4 24.7 25.0 36.6 37 37.5 48.8 49.36 50.0

Vo worst Output voltage range Vi min – Vi max, 24.0 25.8 36.0 38.7 48.0 51.6of tolerance Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection 28.5 30 42.7 45 57 60

Po nom Nominal output power 371 370 371 W

Io nom Output current nominal 15 10 7.5 A

Io L Output current limit 3 Vi min – Vi max 15.1 17.2 10.2 11.4 7.65 8.7

Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 22.5 15 11.3

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 mVppfi = 50 Hz, Io nom 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2

∆Vo u Static line regulation Vi min – Vi max, Io nom ±0.1 ±0.15 ±0.15 V

∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

vod Dynamic load regulation Vi nom, ±1.2 ±1.5 ±1.8Voltage deviation and Io = (0.5 ↔ 1) Io nomrecovery time 40 80 80 ms

αvo Temperature coefficient TC min – TC max ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.02 %/K

tor Start-up time Vi = 0 → Vi nom, Io nom 700 700 700 ms

toh min Hold-up time Io nom, 15 20 25Vo nom → 0.8 Vo nom

* Converters with version V105 or higher1 Setting voltage with open R-input2 Superimposed low frequency ripple at 2 • fi3 Rectangular current limit characteristic (continuous operation)4 Short-term peak power capability 150% of Po nom for approx. 1 s



®


Table 6c: Output data of 500 Watt double-output models. General conditions as per table 6a.

Model LXN2660 LXN2770 LXN2880 Unit



* 24.4 24.7 25.0 36.6 37 37.5 48.8 49.36 50.0




Io nom Output current nominal 2 × 10 2 × 6.7 2 × 5 A


Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 2 × 15 2 × 10 2 × 7.5

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 mVpp

fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2


∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8




toh min Hold-up time Io nom, Vo nom → 0.8 Vo nom 15 20 25

* Converters with version V105 or higher1 Setting voltage with open R-input2 Superimposed low frequency ripple at 2 • fi3 Rectangular current limit characteristic (continuous operation)4 Short-term peak power capability 150% of Po nom for approx. 1 s

Table 6b: Output data of 500 Watt single-output standard models. General conditions as per table 6a.

Model LXN1601 LXN1701 LXN1801 Unit



* 24.4 24.7 25.0 36.6 37 37.5 48.8 49.36 50.0




Io nom Output current nominal 20 13.4 10 A


Iop Output current boost 4 typ. 1 s 30 20 15

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 mVpp

fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2


∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8




toh min Hold-up time Io nom, Vo nom → 0.8 Vo nom 15 20 25



®


Table 7a: Output data of 350 Watt battery charger models. General conditions: TA = 25 °C, unless TA is specified; R input leftopen-circuit, unless otherwise specified

Model LXR1240-6M1 LXR1840-6M1 LXR1740-6M1 UnitCharacteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo safe Output setting voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 24.5 25.68 26.3 36.75 38.52 39.5 49 51.36 52.6 V

VBat Output voltage (max.) Vi min – Vi max, 29.3 43.95 58.6controlled by R input Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection 30.9 32.5 46 48.8 61.8 65


Io nom Output current nominal 12.6 8.4 6.3 A

Io L Output current limit Vi min – Vi max 12.7 15.0 8.5 11.3 6.36 7.5

Iop Output current boost 3 typ. 1 s 18.9 12.6 9.5

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 mVpp fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2


∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8(droop) Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom




Table 7b: Output data of 500 Watt battery charger models. General conditions as per table 7a

Model LXN1240-6M1 LXN1840-6M1 LXN1740-6M1 UnitCharacteristic Conditions min typ max min typ max min typ max

Vo safe Output setting voltage 1 Vi nom, Io nom 24.5 25.68 26.3 36.75 38.52 39.5 49 51.36 52.6 V

VBat Output voltage (max.) Vi min – Vi max, 29.3 43.95 58.6controlled by R input Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom

Vo L Overvoltage protection 30.9 32.5 46 48.8 61.8 65


Io nom Output current nominal 16.8 11.2 8.4 A

Io L Output current limit Vi min – Vi max 16.9 20 11.3 15 8.5 10

Iop Output current boost 3 typ. 1 s 25.2 16.8 12.6

vo Ripple and noise Vi = 230 VAC, 100 100 100 mVpp fi = 50 Hz, Io nom 2 1100 2 1200 2 1200 2


∆Vo l Static load regulation Vi nom, – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8(droop) Io = (0.1 – 1) Io nom




1 Setting voltage with open R-input = Vo safe2 Superimposed low frequency ripple at 2 • f i3 Rectangular current limit characteristic (continuous operation)4 Short-term peak power capability 150% of Po nom for approx. 1 s



®


Parallel OperationDouble-output models exhibit an independentcontrol logic each. Both outputs can beconnected in parallel, provided that the optionsS (included in M1) and R are not used, sincethey influence only the 2nd output. The two pairsof powertrains share the current due to theiroutput voltage droop characteristic.

Up to 3 converters with the same output voltagemay be operated in parallel. It is possible toparallel W Series with X Series converters.

Reasonable current sharing is achieved by thedroop characteristic. Correct mode of operationis highly dependent upon the wiring of theconverters and the impedance of these wires.Use wires with equal length and equal crosssections of min. 1.5 mm 2. The best results forparallel operation can be achieved with thewiring shown in fig. 6.

Parallel operation of single-output modelsusing option R (output voltage adjust) ispossible, but not recommended. Refer to fig. 6;the connections between the pins 8 and 9 (bothVo–) should be as short as possible.

Note: Parallel operation is not possible, if thetemperature sensor is connected, as the sensoreliminates the output voltage droop.

Series ConnectionSeries connection of several outputs up to 150V is possible. The output is not SELV, whenexceeding an output voltage of 60 V.

Output Characteristic and ProtectionThe output characteristic, individual for eachgroup of powertrains, is rectangular with adroop to ease parallel operation; see fig. 7.

However, a 50% higher output current ispossible for a short time, such allowing start-upof loads or charging of capacitors; see fig. 8.

Each output is independently protected againstinternal overvoltage by means of a secondcontrol loop. When the output voltage exceedsVo L, the respective output is disabled.

Overtemperature ProtectionEach powertrain is independently protected against over-temperature by a built-in temperature sensor. When a certaintemperature is reached, the concerned powertrain reduces itsoutput power continuously.

Fig. 7Vo versus Io (single-output model, typical values).

Vo+ 2

Vo+ 3Vo- 4

Vo- 5

Vo- 8

Vo- 9

Vo+ 6

Vo+ 7

AUX1 10

Vo+ 2

Vo+ 3Vo- 4

Vo- 5

Vo- 8

Vo- 9

Vo+ 6

Vo+ 7

AUX1 10

Vo+ 2

Vo+ 3Vo- 4

Vo- 5

Vo- 8

Vo- 9

Vo+ 6

Vo+ 7

AUX1 10

Vi

Vi

Vi

Load

11053a

Additional wiring for output currents Io ≥ 10 A

Additional wiring, if using the R-input

VR

+

_

Fig. 6Wiring for single-output converters connected in parallel. Additional wiringfor higher output currents and with the use of option R is shown.

0.8

1.0

0.6

0.4

0.2

00 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2

Io /Io nom

Vo /Vo nom 05181a



®


Fig. 9Trickle charge voltage versus temperature for differenttemperature coefficients (Vo safe with disconnected sensor)

Fig. 10Schematic circuit diagram of a system with battery backupand temperature-controlled charging.

Fig. 8Short term peak power characteristic: overcurrent versustime (typical values).

Thermal ConsiderationsThe thermal conditions are influenced by input voltage, outputcurrent, airflow, and temperature of surrounding components.TA max is therefore, contrary to TC max, an indicative value only.


Note: Sufficient forced cooling allows TA to be higher than TA max

provided that TC max is not exceeded. It is recommended thatcontinuous operation under worst case conditions of thefollowing 3 parameters be avoided: Minimum input voltage,maximum output power, and maximum temperature.

Battery Charging and Temperature SensorThe battery charger models exhibit the option M1 and havebeen designed to charge lead-acid batteries. The R-inputallows for connecting a battery-specific temperature sensor,

which provides temperature-controlled adjust of the tricklecharge voltage. This optimizes charging as well as battery lifetime. Depending upon the cell voltage and the temperaturecoefficient of the battery, different sensor types are available;see Accessories.

Note: Parallel operation is not possible, if the temperature sensoris connected to the paralleled outputs Vo+, as the sensoreliminates the output voltage droop.

However, it is possible to insert bleeding resistors in the Vo+output lines of each converter in order to create a droop of approx.0.6 V @ Io nom for 24 V outputs (1.2 V @ Io nom for 48 V outputs), butthis creates considerable power losses.

Powersupply

Load

–+

Input Vo–

R

Temperature sensor

ϑ

03099c

Battery

Vo+

1.4

1.6

1.2

1.0

0.8

0.6-- 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 s

Io / Io nom05194b

0 1 2

2.10

2.15

2.20

2.25

2.30

2.35

2.40


–20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C

06139b


Vo safe



®


Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Electromagnetic ImmunityThe X Series has been successfully tested to the following specifications:


Phenomenon Standard Level Coupling Value Waveform Source Test In Perf.mode 1 applied imped. procedure oper. crit.2



Electromagnetic IEC/EN 3 antenna 10 V/m AM 80% n.a. 80 – 1000 MHz yes Afield RF 61000-4-3 1 kHz


frequency

Electrical fast IEC/EN 44 capacitive, o/c 2000 Vp bursts of 5/50 ns 50 Ω 60 s positive yes Atransients/burst 61000-4-4 ±i/c, +i/– i 4000 Vp



Surges IEC/EN 3 ± i /c 2000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 12 Ω 5 pos. and 5 neg. yes B61000-4-5

2 +i/–i 1000 Vp 1.2/50 µs 2 Ωsurges per

coupling mode

Conducted IEC/EN 3 5 i, o, signal wires 10 VAC AM 80% 150 Ω 0.15 – 80 MHz yes A

1 i = input, o = output, c = case.2 A = Normal operation, no deviation from specifications, B = Normal operation, temporary loss of function or deviation from specs.3 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 9.2.4 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.1.5 Corresponds to EN 50121-3-2:2000, table 7.4.

07020a

EN 55022 A

EN 55022 B

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

dBmV

0.03 0.30.1 1 3 10 30 MHz

80

60

40

20

0

dBpW

50 100 150 200 250 300 MHz

07119a

Emissions

Fig. 12Radiated emissions for LX models:Typical electromagnetic field strength (quasi-peak) accordingto EN 55014, measured at Vi nom and Io nom.

Fig. 11Conducted emissions for LX models:Typical disturbances (quasi-peak) at the input according to EN55022, measured at Vi nom and Io nom.



®


Immunity to Environmental ConditionsTable 9: Mechanical stress and climatic


Cab Damp heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Temperature: 40 ±2 °C Convertersteady state MIL-STD-810D sect. 507.2 Relative humidity: 93 +2/-3 % not


Kb Salt mist, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-52 Concentration: 5% (30 °C) Converter(sodium chloride Duration: 2 h per cycle notNaCl solution) Conditions: 40 °C, 93% rel. humidity operating

Storage duration: 3 cycles of 22 h

E b Bump IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Acceleration amplitude: 25 gn = 245 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 11 ms not operating ,

6000 bumps: 1000 in each direction wall-mounted1

Acceleration amplitude: 10 gn = 98.1 m/s2 ConverterBump duration: 11 ms not operating ,6000 bumps: 1000 in each direction on DIN-rail 2

Fc Vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Acceleration amplitude and 0.35 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converter(sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 514.3 frequency (1 Octave/min): 5 gn = 49 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating,

Test duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h each axis) wall-mounted1

Acceleration amplitude and 0.25 mm (10 – 60 Hz) Converterfrequency (1 Octave/min): 2 gn = 19 m/s2 (60 – 2000 Hz) operating,Test duration: 7.5 h (2.5 h each axis) on DIN-rail 2

E a Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Acceleration amplitude: 50 gn = 490 m/s2 Converter(half-sinusoidal) MIL-STD-810D sect. 516.3 Bump duration: 11 ms not operating ,

Number of bumps: 18 (3 in each direction) wall-mounted1

Fda Random vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-35 Acceleration spectral density: 0.05 gn2/Hz Converter

wide band Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operating,Reproducibility Acceleration magnitude: 4.9 gn rms wall-mounted1

high Test duration: 3 h (1 h each axis)

Acceleration spectral density: 0.01 gn2/Hz Converter

Frequency band: 20 – 500 Hz operating,Acceleration magnitude: 2.2 g n rms mounted on aTest duration: 1.5 h (0.5 h each axis) DIN-rail 2

1 Wall-mounted with brackets UMB-W [HZZ00618]; see Accessories2 Fastened on a DIN-rail with 2 additional DIN-rail fixing brackets DMB-EWG; see Accessories. This also covers wall-mounting with

brackets, because wall mounting performs better in vibration test.

TemperaturesTable 10: Temperature specifications, valid for an air pressure of 800 - 1200 hPa (800 - 1200 mbar)

Model Standard models -6 Unit

Characteristics Conditions min maxTA Ambient temperature Converter –40 60 °C

TC Case temperature operating1–40 902

TS Storage temperature Not operating –40 100

1 See Thermal Considerations2 See table 4 and 5 Po derating

Table 12: MTBF


MTBF 1 LXN1801-6 400 000 110 000 50 000 40 000 h

1 Calculated according to MIL-HDBK-217E, notice 2.

Failure Rates



®


138

(5.4

3")

106.6 (4.2")113.6 (4.47")

15 (0

.59"

)

213.8 (8.42")

194 (7.64")

33 (1

.3")

49 (

1.93

")

S09127b

199 (7.83")

Wall mountingbrackets(accessories)

Measuring point forcase temperature TC

TA TA

TC

40 (1.6")

13 (

0.51

")

29.4 (1.16")

43 (

1.69

")

31 (1.22")LED

x ax

is

z

axis

(v

ertic

al)

E uropeanP rojection

Option M

Option M

Mechanical DataDimensions in mm.

Fig. 13Case X01LXR: weight approx. 2600 gLXN: weight approx. 2800 gCase designed by ATP, Munich.



®


1 32

10066

1 3 5 7 9

10086

2 4 6 8 10 1211


Terminal AllocationThe terminal allocation tables define the electrical potentialof the converters.

Fig. 14bView of the output terminals (cage clamp style)

Fig. 14aView of the input terminals (cage clamp style)

Installation InstructionsThe X Series converters are components, intended exclusivelyfor inclusion within other equipment by professional installers.The installation must strictly follow the national safetyregulations in compliance with the enclosure, mounting,creepage, clearance, casualty, markings and segregationrequirements of the end-use application.

DIN-rail mounting is possible with the built-in snap-fit deviceon a DIN-rail. This fulfills the mechanical transport requirementsas per ETSI 300019-1-2, class 2 (vertical).

To fulfill the requirements of IEC 721-3-2, class 2.1 (vertical), 2additional fixing brackets DMB-EWG [formerly HZZ00624] (seeAccessories) must be fitted on the bottom side of the DIN-rail.For heavy duty applications, we recommend installing of all 4fixing brackets DMB-EWG.

Wall mounting is possible with the wall-mounting bracketsUMB-W [HZZ00618] (see Accessories). This complies withIEC 721-3-2, class 2.2 (vertical and horizontal).

Caution: Install the converters vertically, and make sure that thereis sufficient airflow available for convection cooling. The minimumspace to the next device should be: top/bottom: 30 mm, left/right:20 mm.

The converters of the X Series are class I equipment. Inputterminal 1 ( ) and the output terminals 1 and 12 ( )are reliably connected to the case. For safety reasons it is

Fig. 15bDismounting from DIN-rail. Use proper tool (min. 3 mmscrewdriver) and adequate force.

Fig. 15aSnap-fit mounting to DIN-rail.

10073

1007

2

Table 12a: Input terminals of LX models



2 N Input neutral, DC negative

3 L Input phase, DC positive

essential to connect the input terminal 1 ( ) to the protectiveearth of the supply system. Output terminals 1 and 12 can beused to connect the output voltage(s) or the load to functionalearth.

Table 12b: Terminal allocation output side

Pin Pin des. Single output Double output1 Funct. earth to load Funct. earth to load









10 AUX1 Options 1 Options 1

11 AUX2 Options 2 Options 2

12 Funct. earth to load Funct. earth to load

Note: If no options are fitted, terminals 11 and 12 are notconnected.



®


1

2

3

10074

Fig. 16Cage clamp terminals. Use 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 20 to 12)solid or stranded wires depending on local requirements.

The phase input (L) is internally fused; see Input Fuse andProtection. This fuse is designed to break an overcurrent incase of a malfunction of the converter and is not customer-accessible.

External fuses in the wiring to one or both input lines (L and/orN ) may be necessary to ensure compliance with localrequirements. A built-in second fuse in the neutral path isavailable as option F.

A second fuse in the wiring to the neutral terminal N or option Fis needed if:


• Neutral and earth impedance is high or undefined

• Phase and neutral of the mains are not defined or cannot beassigned to the corresponding terminals (L to phase andN to neutral).

Models with option F: Caution! Double-pole/neutral fusing.

If the converter operates at source voltages above 250 VDC,an external DC fuse or a circuit breaker at system level shouldbe installed in the phase input line L .

Caution:• Installation must strictly follow the national safety regulations.

• Do not open this apparatus!

Protection Degree and Cleaning AgentsThe protection degree of the converters is IP 20. Protectivecovers over input and output terminals are available onrequest; see Accessories.

Any penetration of liquid or foreign solid objects has to beprevented, since the converters are not hermetically sealed.

Standards and ApprovalsThe X Series converters were approved by TÜV according toIEC/EN 60950-1:2001, IEC 61010-1:2001/C11, and IEC/EN50178:1997. The converters are UL508-listed components.

The converters have been designed in accordance with saidstandards for:


• Power-supply for building-in, vertical mounting on 35 mmDIN-rail or on a wall

• Overvoltage category II (III for 110 VAC supply)

• Basic insulation between input and case, based on250 VAC

• Double or reinforced insulation between input and output,based on 250 VAC and 350 VDC

• Functional insulation between outputs and case

• Functional insulation between outputs

• Pollution degree 3 environment (AC-input) and degree 2(DC input).

CB Scheme is available (SE-34628).


See also the Declaration of Conformity (last page).

Railway ApplicationsAll X Series converters have been designed by observing therailway standards EN 50155 and EN 50121. All boards arecoated with a protective lacquer.


Table 13: Isolation

Characteristic Input to case Output(s) to Output 1 to Unitand output(s) case output 2 and AUX


Insulation resistance at 500 VDC >300 2 >300 2 >100 M Ω

1 In accordance with EN 50116 and IEC/EN 60950-1, subassemblies are pretested with 4.2 kVDC.2 Tested at 500 VDC.



®


Leakage CurrentsLeakage currents flow due to internal leakage capacitance and(mainly the Y-capacitors). The current values are proportionalto voltage and the frequency fi of the supply voltage (mains).The leakage currents are specified at maximum operatinginput voltage, provided that phase, neutral, and protectiveearth are correctly connected as required for class Iequipment.

Caution: Leakage current may exceed 3.5 mA, if fi > 63 Hz.

Safety of Operator-Accessible Output CircuitsIf the output circuit of a converter is operator-accessible, it shallbe a SELV circuit according to the safety standards IEC/EN60950.

The converters have SELV output circuits up to an outputvoltage of 57.5 V. However, if the isolated outputs areconnected to another voltage source or connected in serieswith a total of >57.5 V, the outputs are hazardous.

LED IndicatorA green LED is activated, when the output voltage Vo is withinthe normal operating tolerance band.

Note: This LED is also activated, when the converter is notpowered by the input, but a loaded battery is connected to theoutput.

Description of OptionsSingle options D1, D2, D5, R are available on the AUX1terminal (10), referenced to Vo– or Vo2–.

Option M1 and M2 designate a combination of several optionsaccessible via a D-SUB connector or in some cases on theAUX1 and AUX2 terminals. Option M1 includes the function S.

Note: In double-output models, the options D1, D5, R, and Sconcern only output 2 connected to terminals 6, 7, 8, and 9.

Single Options Using the AUX1 PinThe connection is shown in the figure below. For thedescription refer to Adjustment of Vo or Vo2 (next section).

Multiple Options M1 or M2The option board is suitable for applications, where severaloptions are needed. Option M1 is standard for battery chargermodels, option M2 is suitable for applications without battery orfor simple applications with battery.

In general, the multiple options M1 or M2 are connected to anadditional D-SUB connector. Some signals (but not option R)can also be connected to AUX1 and AUX2, if the D-SUBconnector is not suitable to the customer.

AUX1

1

111098765432

Adjustment with Vext

AUX1

1

111098765432

Adjustment with Rext

Vo2+or Vo+

Vo2– or Vo–

Re

xt1

Re

xt2

Vext

+

Vo2– or Vo–

1212

06160a

AUX2AUX2

Fig. 17Connection of adjust resistors or an external voltage source toadjust the output voltage Vo or Vo2 (option M1 or M2 not fitted)

Table 15: Option board M2




D5 Output voltage monitor1


D-adjust Adjustment of trigger values D1 and D5


Table 14: Option board M1

Function DescriptionR Output voltage adjust1

D1 Output voltage monitor Vo low D11


D5 Output 2 voltage monitor1


Sys-OK System okay

S Shutdown1

D-adj Adjustment of trigger values D1 and D5




®


12345

6789

+

Pow

er-F

ail

D-SUB

0616

2a

1

111098765432

D2+

AUX1

1

111098765432

Vo2+or Vo+

Vo2+or Vo+

AUX212

12

D2: Input Voltage Monitor (Power Fail)D2 monitors the input voltage V i. If V i drops below 65 VACor 92 VDC, the D2-signal (open-collector) goes to highimpedance. ID max < 50 mA. The output is protected by a Zenerdiode against transients up to 75 V (for models with Vo max > 50V up to 90 V).

D1: Output Voltage MonitorD1 is intended for monitoring the bus voltage of a battery-buffered system. It indicates that the system is powered fromthe battery and can for instance be used as warning signal orto switch off a part of the load. If the output voltage drops belowVo low D1, the D1 signal (open-collector) goes to highimpedance. I D max <50 mA. The D1 output is protected by aZener diode against transients up to 75 V (for models with

Fig. 18Option D2: Examples of relaycontrol to monitor a power failure.

Table 16: Pin allocation of the 9 pin D-SUB connector

Pin Designation Description

1 GND11 System ground / common signal return

2 R R input3

3 VCC2 Positive supply voltage (≈ output 2)

4 D1 Output voltage monitor Vo low D13

5 D5 Output 2 voltage monitor Vo low D53

6 S Shutdown3

7 D-adj Adjustment of threshold values of D1 or D5

8 D2 Input voltage monitor Vi low

9 Sys-OK System okay (all outputs are okay)

1 Do not connect GND1 (pin 1) with the neg. output (–)2 Do not connect VCC (pin 3) with the positive output (+)3 In double-output models, R and S influence output 2 only.

12345

6789

+

Pow

er-F

ail D

2

D-SUB

VC

C

0614

0a

Fig. 19Wiring to adjust both threshold levels of option D1 or D5

12345

6789

D-SUB

0614

8a

Rx

Change threshold

Ry

VCC GND1

D-a

dj

Table 17: Options D1 and D5 - trigger and switch-on levels

Model Battery Vo low D1 Vo low D5VBat trigger switch on trigger switch on[V] [V] [V] [V] [V]

LXR/LXN1140 12 11.5 12.3 10.5 12.3

LXR/LXN1240 24 23 24.3 21.1 24.3

LXR/LXN1840 36 34.5 36.5 31.5 36.5

LXR/LXN1740 48 46 48.6 42.2 48.6

LXN2880 72 69 72.9 63.3 69

Vo max >50 V up to 90 V). In double-output models D1 monitorsonly output 2.

In applications without battery-buffering the D1 signal may notbe suitable, since smaller dynamic load changes may causeD1 to trigger. For such applications D5 with a trigger level ofapprox. 85% Vo nom should be chosen (e.g., for bus voltage24.7 V, trigger level at 21 V).

D5: System Voltage Monitor (Battery Deep)D5 monitors the output voltage Vo (Vo2 in double-outputmodels) or the lowest admissible voltage of a connectedbattery (battery deep discharge). The definition of D5 is similarto D1, but the trigger level is lower. When Vo drops below thevalue specified in the table below, the D5 signal (open-collector) goes to high impedance. I D max < 50 mA. The D5output is protected by a Zener diode against transients up to 75V (for models with Vo max >50 V up to 90 V).

In systems without battery support, D5 signals that Vo (or Vo2 )is going to drop below a safe value.

In battery-buffered systems, D5 indicates that the battery hasreached its deepest discharge level prior to getting damaged.

The D5 signal can be used for instance to disable loads, savedata, or to start a controlled switch-off of running processes.

Adjustment of Threshold Levels (D1 or D5)Pin 7 of the D-SUB connector allows for adjustment of thethreshold levels of D1 and D5. Both levels are influenced bythe voltage divider Rx / Ry. Resistor Rx to pin 3 (VCC) lowersthe levels, whereas Ry to pin 1 (GND1) increases them (seefig. 19).



®


Option S: ShutdownReduces the output power to approx. 1 W, i.e., the converter isnot fully disabled. In a no-load condition Vo drops below 6.2 V;see fig. 23. In double-output models, only output 2 isinfluenced.

Sys-OK: StatusThis function allows for checking in a battery chargerapplication, whether the output follows the external controlsignal at the R-input (coming for instance from the temperaturesensor). Refer to table 19.

The open-collector output Sys-OK is protected by a Zenerdiode against transients up to 75 V (for models with Vo max >50V up to 90 V). Current <50 mA.

R: Adjustment of Vo or Vo2

The R input allows external adjustment of the output voltage inthe range of 50% to 110% Vo nom. Double-output models allowonly adjustment of output 2 (connected to the terminals 6, 7, 8and 9). This enables asymmetric output voltage configuration.

Adjustment can be achieved via a resistor or an externalvoltage source (in the range of 1.25 – 2.75 V).

Note: If the R input is not connected: Vo or Vo2 ≈ Vo nom.

a) Adjustment by an external resistor:

Resistor Rext1, connected between R (pin 2) and GND1 (pin1) of the D-SUB connector or according to fig. 20.

Vo Vo = 50 – 100% Vo nom. Rext1 ≈ 4 kΩ • ––––––––– Vo nom – Vo

Resistor Rext2, connected between R (pin 2) and VCC (pin 3)of the D-SUB connector or according to fig. 17.

Vo – 2.5 V Vo = 100 – 110% Vo nom. Rext2 ≈ 4 kΩ • –––––––––––––––– 2.5 V•(Vo /Vo nom –1)

Note: If the R function is not included in M1 or M2, refer to figure20 how to connect Rext1 or Rext2 .

b) Adjustment by an external control voltage Vext (1.25 – 2.75V), connected between R (pin 2) and GND (pin 1) of the D-SUB connector or according to fig. 20.

Vo Vext Vext ≈ 2.5 V • ––––– Vo ≈ Vo nom • –––– Vo nom 2.5 V


Note: If longer wires are used to connect the R input at the D-SUBconnector, the wiring to pin 1 (GND1) should be done as a starpoint connection. If wired differently, the output voltage settingmay be adversely affected.

In battery charging systems, an external battery temperaturesensor (see Accessories) can be connected to optimize Vo.However, adjustment using the R input (pin 2 of D-SUB) ispossible as well. The above shown formulas are valid, butVo nom stands for the voltage with open R input (= Vo safe).

Option F: Built-in Second FuseA built-in second fuse in the neutral line provides safe phase-to-phase connection at low mains voltages (e.g., USA 120 V/208 V /60 Hz systems).

The built-in second fuse also enables safe connection to themains, where phase and neutral are not defined or cannot beidentified, as e.g., in the case of plug and socket connection to

Table 18: Shutdown Conditions

Voltage VSD on Resultshutdown pin

<0.7 V Converter disabled (Po approx. 1 W)

≥2.0 V or open Converter enabled

Fig. 23Output voltage versus output current, while shut down (Vi =Vi nom).

05175b

3

1

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.21 A

5

Output current

V

Output voltage

Table 19: System OK (M1 with external battery sensor)

System Status Input Vcontrol Vbat Vbat D5sensor signal theoretical measured output

System OK O.K. 2.7 V 27 V 27 V Low ohmic

Battery overchared / temp. sensor O.K. 2.7 V 27 V 28 V High ohmicdefect / control voltage to high

Overload, converter cannot follow the O.K. 2.7 V 27 V 24 V High ohmiccontrol signal

Output does not follow control signal, O.K. 3.0 V 30 V 27 V High ohmicsince battery would be overcharged

System OK O.K. 2.5 V 25 V 25V Low ohmic



®


Fig. 20System connectors Option K2

the mains via German Schuko-plugs; see also Safety andInstallation Instructions.

Option F limits the DC input voltage to ≤ 250 V.

Option K2: System ConnectorsFor installation in systems using pre-assembled harnesses theconverters are available with system connectors. They are UL-listed, approved for currents up to 15 A at –40 to 105 °C.

The mating system connectors with screw terminals andretainers are delivered together with every converter withoption K2. Use max. 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) solid or strandedwires, or max. 1.5 mm2 (AWG 14) stranded wires with crimptermination, stripped length 6 mm. Tightening torque of input/output terminals: max. 0.79 Nm (7 lbs.in.).


AccessoriesUMB-W: Shock-Resistant Wall MountingSet of wall mounting brackets UMB-W [HZZ00618]

Content: 2 clamps, 4 countersunk screws M4, washers, andspring washers.

49

33 ±0.5

4.2

8

18

3

1205

5

Fig. 21Brackets UMB-W

Fig. 22Wall mounting withmounting brackets UMB-W.

10068

DMB-EWG: DIN-Rail Fixing BracketsFor DIN-Rail vibration-proof fastening, use a set of bracketsDMB-EWG (replacement for HZZ00624). For heavy-dutyapplication 2 sets ( = 4 brackets) are preferable.

Fig. 23One of 4 DIN-rail fixing brackets DMB-EWG.

Fig. 24Protective covers COVER-W

Protective Covers over TerminalsSet of plastic covers COVER-W [HZZ 01219]

Content: 2 covers to protect the input and output connector.



®


+ –

Battery

R

GND

Temperaturesensor

+ –05191a

greenbrown

whiteD-SUB

Fuse

Load

Vo+

Vo–

Con

vert

er

2

3

1

VCC

Table 19: Type survey S-KSMH sensors

Nominal battery Model Cell voltage Temp. coefficient/cell Cable lengthvoltage [V] [V] [mV/K] [m]

12 S-KSMH12-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.27-35-2 2.27 –3.5 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.27-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

24 S-KSMH24-2.31-35-0 2.35 –3.1 4.5

24 S-KSMH24-2.31-35-0 2.35 –3.5 2

48 S-KSMH48-2.35-30-2 2.27 –3.0 2

48 S-KSMH48-2-27-35-2 2.27 –3.5 2

Other models for different cell voltages, temperature coefficients, or cable lengths are available upon request.


Fig. 29Temperature sensor

Battery Temperature SensorTo charge lead-acid batteries according to their temperaturedifferent types of temperature sensors are available, (seeBattery Charging and Temperature Sensor in this data sheetand the Temperature Sensor data sheet at www.power-one.com).

For additional information go to www.power-one.com.

EuropeanProjection



56 (2.2")L


adhesive tape

26 (1.02")

9.8

(0.4

")09125a



®




We


declare under our sole responsibility that all LX-Series power supplies carryingthe CE-mark are in conformity with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive(LVD) 73/23/EEC of the European Communities.


• EN 61204: 1995 ( = IEC 61204: 1993, modified)Low-voltage power supply devices, DC. output - Performance characteris-tics and safety requirements


The installation instructions given in the corresponding data sheet describe cor-rect installation leading to the presumption of conformity of the end product withthe LVD. All LW Series power supplies are components, intended exclusively forinclusion within other equipment by an industrial assembly operation or by pro-fessional installers. They must not be operated as stand alone products.




Documents

H Series Data Sheet 70 Watt AC-DC Converters · PDF fileH Series Data Sheet 70 Watt AC-DC Converters BCD20019 Rev AB Page 1 of 21 Description The H Series of AC-DC converters represents